Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Volume I
Electric Networks
Sisteme Electroenergetice
Volumul I
Reele Electrice
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
Mircea Eremia
University Politehnica of Bucharest
313, Spl. Independenei
060032 Bucharest, Romania
Yong-Hua Song
Brunel University
Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB8 3PH
London, United Kingdom
Nikos Hatziargyriou
National Technical University of Athens
9, Heroon Polytechniou
15773 Zografou, Athens, Greece
Adrian Buta
University Politehnica of Timioara
2, Vasile Prvan Blv.
300223 Timioara, Romania
Gheorghe Crin
Technical University Gh. Asachi of Iai
22, Copou Str.
700497 Iai, Romania
Mircea Neme
University Politehnica of Timioara
2, Vasile Prvan Blv.
300223 Timioara, Romania
Virgil Alexandrescu
Technical University Gh. Asachi of Iai
22, Copou Str.
700497 Iai, Romania
Ion Stratan
Technical University of Moldova
168, tefan cel Mare Blv.
MD2004 Chiinu, Republic of Moldova
Bucur Lutrea
University Politehnica of Timioara
2, Vasile Prvan Blv.
300223 Timioara, Romania
Hermina Albert
Institute for Energy Studies and Design
1-3, Lacul Tei Blv.
020371 Bucharest, Romania
George Florea
Power & Lighting Tehnorob S.A.
355-357, Griviei Av.
010717, Bucharest, Romania
Ctlin Dumitriu
University Politehnica of Bucharest
313, Spl. Independenei
060032 Bucharest, Romania
Maria Tudose
University Politehnica of Bucharest
313, Spl. Independenei
060032 Bucharest, Romania
Constantin Bulac
University Politehnica of Bucharest
313, Spl. Independenei
060032 Bucharest, Romania
Sorin Ptrcoiu
TRAPEC S.A.
53, Plevnei Av.
010234 Bucharest, Romania
Ion Tritiu
University Politehnica of Bucharest
313, Spl. Independenei
060032 Bucharest, Romania
Lucian Toma
University Politehnica of Bucharest
313, Spl. Independenei
060032 Bucharest, Romania
CONTENTS
Volume I: ELECTRIC NETWORKS
Foreword ............................................................................................................................ XV
Preface............................................................................................................................. XVII
Acknowledgements ............................................................................................................ XX
Part one: BASIC COMPUTATION
1.
2.
3.
VIII
3.2.2. Apparent characteristic power. Natural power
(SIL surge impedance loading) ...........................................................173
3.3. Coefficients of transmission lines equations .....................................................176
3.3.1. Numerical determination of propagation coefficient .............................176
3.3.2. Numerical determination of characteristic impedance ...........................179
3.3.3. Numerical calculation of A, B, C and D coefficients.............................181
3.3.4. Kennellys correction coefficients .........................................................182
3.4. Transmitted power on the lossless line..............................................................185
3.5. Transmission lines operating regimes ...............................................................187
3.5.1. Transmission lines equations expressed in per unit ...............................187
3.5.2. Loading only with active power ( pB 0 , qB = 0 ) ...............................188
3.5.3. Loading with active and reactive power ( pB 0 , qB 0 )...................195
3.5.4. Operating regime with equal voltages at both ends ...............................199
3.6. Series and shunt compensation of transmission lines........................................201
3.6.1. Influence of power system lumped reactance ........................................202
3.6.2. Series compensation with capacitors......................................................205
3.6.3. Natural power control by capacitors ......................................................209
3.6.4. Shunt compensation with reactors .........................................................213
3.6.5. Mixed compensation of transmission lines ............................................219
3.7. Transmitted power on the line with losses ........................................................221
3.7.1. Power formulae ......................................................................................221
3.7.2. Performance chart (Circle diagram).......................................................224
3.7.3. Power losses...........................................................................................225
3.8. Application on AC long line ...............................................................................226
Chapter references .....................................................................................................238
4.
IX
4.8. Comparison between DC and AC transmission ................................................302
4.9. Application on HVDC link................................................................................309
Appendix 4.1. HVDC systems in the world .............................................................319
Chapter references .....................................................................................................323
5.
6.
X
7.
XI
9.
XII
11.3. Stages of a forecast study ................................................................................673
11.3.1. Initial database selection, correlation and processing ........................673
11.3.2. Mathematical model of the load.........................................................673
11.3.3. Analysis of results and determining the final forecast .......................679
11.4. Error sources and difficulties met at load forecast...........................................680
11.5. Classical methods for load forecast .................................................................681
11.5.1. General aspects ..................................................................................681
11.5.2. Cyclical and seasonal components analysis .......................................682
11.5.3. Trend forecast ....................................................................................685
11.5.4. Load random component analysis......................................................697
11.6. Time series methods for load forecast .............................................................699
11.6.1. General aspects ..................................................................................699
11.6.2. Principles of methodology of the time series modelling ....................700
11.6.3. Time series adopted pattern. Components separation ........................701
11.6.4. Establishing of the time series model using
the Box Jenkins method..................................................................704
11.6.5. Time series model validation .............................................................707
11.6.6. Time series forecast ...........................................................................710
11.7. Short term load forecast using artificial neural networks ................................712
11.7.1. General aspects ..................................................................................712
11.7.2. ANN architecture ...............................................................................714
11.7.3. Case study ..........................................................................................716
Chapter references .....................................................................................................719
Part three: TECHNICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL COMPUTATION
12. ELECTRIC NETWORKS IMPACT ON THE ENVIRONMENT
(George Florea) ........................................................................................................723
12.1. Introduction .....................................................................................................723
12.2. Constructive impact.........................................................................................723
12.2.1. Visual impact ...................................................................................723
12.2.2. Impact on land use ...........................................................................724
12.2.3. Impact during erection and maintenance works...............................725
12.2.4. Direct impact on ecological systems................................................726
12.2.5. Final considerations .........................................................................727
12.3. Electric field impact.........................................................................................727
12.3.1. General considerations.....................................................................727
12.3.2. Induced currents in conductive objects............................................729
12.3.3. Voltages induced in not connected to ground objects......................730
12.3.4. Direct perception in humans ............................................................730
12.3.5. Direct biological effects on humans and animals ............................730
12.3.6. Effects on vegetation .......................................................................732
12.3.7. Audible noise ...................................................................................733
12.3.8. Interference on AM reception..........................................................735
12.3.9. Interference on FM reception...........................................................736
12.3.10. Ions and ozone generating ...............................................................737
12.3.11. Final considerations and recommendations .....................................739
12.3.12. Mitigation techniques ......................................................................742
12.4. Magnetic field impact ......................................................................................742
XIII
12.4.1.
12.4.2.
General considerations.....................................................................742
Induced voltages on long metallic structures parallel
to inducting currents ........................................................................745
12.4.3. Direct biological effects on humans and animals ..............................745
12.4.4. Indirect biological effects ..................................................................748
12.4.5. Direct perception on humans .............................................................748
12.4.6. Effects on vegetation .........................................................................748
12.4.7. Final considerations and recommendations.......................................749
12.4.8. Mitigation techniques ........................................................................752
12.5. Conclusions......................................................................................................763
Chapter references .....................................................................................................764
13. OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES TECHNICAL DESIGN
(Georgel Gheorghi, Laureniu Niculae) .................................................................767
13.1. Introduction .....................................................................................................767
13.1.1. Changes of the operational environment ...........................................767
13.1.2. Environmental changes......................................................................768
13.1.3. Changing business environment ........................................................768
13.1.4. New technological possibilities .........................................................769
13.2. Opportunities and threats.................................................................................769
13.3. Objectives and strategy....................................................................................770
13.3.1. Ambitions and objectives ..................................................................770
13.3.2. Strategic technical directions.............................................................770
13.4. The future of overhead transmission lines (OTL)............................................771
13.4.1. Overhead transmission lines today ....................................................771
13.4.2. Overhead transmission lines medium and long terms forecasting.
New overhead transmission lines ......................................................799
Chapter references .....................................................................................................802
14. DISTRIBUTED GENERATION (Nikos Hatziargyriou) .........................................805
14.1. General issues ..................................................................................................805
14.2. Technical issues of the integration of DG in distribution networks ................808
14.2.1. Introduction........................................................................................808
14.2.2. Network voltage changes ...................................................................809
14.2.3. Increase in network fault levels..........................................................812
14.2.4. Effects on power quality ....................................................................813
14.2.5. Protection issues.................................................................................815
14.2.6. Effects on stability .............................................................................816
14.2.7. Effects of DG connection to isolated systems....................................817
14.3. Commercial issues in distribution systems containing DG .............................818
14.3.1. Introduction........................................................................................818
14.3.2. Present network pricing arrangements ...............................................819
14.4. Conclusions .....................................................................................................827
Chapter references .....................................................................................................827
XIV
FOREWORD
Electric power systems are an integral part of the way of life in modern
society. The electricity supplied by these systems has proved to be a very
convenient, safe, and relatively clean form of energy. It runs our factories, warms
and lights our homes, cooks our food and powers our computers. It is indeed one of
the important factors contributing to the relatively high standard of living enjoyed
by modern society. Electricity is an energy carrier; energy is neither naturally
available in the electrical form nor is it consumed directly in that form. The
advantage of the electrical form of energy is that it can be transported and
controlled with relative ease and high degree of efficiency and reliability.
Modern electric power systems are large complex systems with many
processes whose operations need to be optimized and with millions of devices
requiring harmonious interplay. Efficient and secure operation of such systems
presents many challenges in todays competitive, disaggregated business
environment. This is increasingly evident from the many major power grid
blackouts experienced in recent years, including the 14 August 2003 blackout of
power network in the north-east of the American continent and the 28 September
2003 blackout of the Italian power network.
The technical problems that the power engineers have to address today
appear to be very complex and demanding for the students of the subject. They will
need both the experience of the past generations and a new enlightened approach to
the theory and practice of power generation, transmission, distribution and
utilization taking into account the techniques that have evolved in other fields.
The present book includes a comprehensive account of both theoretical and
practical aspects of the performance of the individual elements as well as the
integrated power system. The contributing authors are all recognized experts in
power system engineering, either working for the electric power industry or for
universities in Romania and abroad. Together they have had a total of many
decades of experience in the technologies related to electric power systems.
Upon invitation from Professor Mircea Eremia, I had the pleasure of visiting
the Electrical Power Engineering Department at University Politehnica of
Bucharest in May 2003. I found there a powerful school of Electric Power Systems
from which about 50 students graduate yearly. During my visit, I also had the
opportunity to review and discuss the proposal for preparing this book. I am very
impressed with the outcome. I am truly honoured to write the foreword of this
book, which I believe will be an invaluable source of reference for students of
power engineering as well as practicing engineers.
Prabha Kundur, Ph.D., FIEEE, FCAE
President & CEO, Powertech Labs Inc.
Surrey, British Columbia, Canada
August 2005
PREFACE
Modern power systems are the result of continuous development and
improvement which, over the years, have led to highly sophisticated and complex
technologies. Their reliable operation is a tribute to the work of dedicated
scientists, innovative engineers and experienced business leaders.
The relatively fast development of the electrical systems and networks has
given rise to ceaseless discussions regarding safe operation and provision of power
quality at the customer. Moreover, the energy policy concerning the promotion of
renewable energy sources as well as the electricity market creation to stimulate the
competition among generation companies have caused new problems in the
transmission and distribution networks. It is clear that the initial destination of
electrical networks to ensure the unidirectional transmission of power from the
power plants towards consumers has changed, since by the installation of dispersed
generation sources into the distribution network the power flow became
bidirectional, with the possibility of injecting power into the transmission network.
In the present work the authors tried to cover in the best way possible the
basic knowledge that the experienced engineer as well as the young graduate
student in electrical power systems should be able to handle. The work Electric
Networks is the first volume of the treatise Electric Power Systems. It consists
of 14 chapters grouped in 3 parts.
The first part entitled Basic Computation introduces the basic topics related
to electrical energy transmission to the reader. In chapter 1, the architecture of
electrical networks and the steady state mathematical modelling of the network
elements are described in detail. The student should be aware that the network
modelling represents the starting point for any application.
The electrical networks are designed for transmission, repartition and
distribution of electrical energy, so that they present various structures. The
transmission and repartition networks operate in complex meshed structure while
distribution networks operate in simple meshed but mostly in radial configuration.
In chapter 2, issues related to radial networks are presented, such as voltage drop or
currents flow calculation. Also this chapter deals with issues related to meshed
networks, such as nodal admittance matrix construction and steady state
formulation and calculation by using the Seidel-Gauss method as well as the
forward/backward sweep adapted for distributed generation.
To use the energetic potential of the Earth, especially the might of water, as
efficiently as possible, but also because of the continuous increase of the inhabited
or industrialized areas, we are forced to transmit the electrical energy for longer
and longer distances. However, the alternating current transmission for long
distances presents special concerns related to voltage. With the exception of the
ideal case when the reactive power consumed in the series inductive component of
the lines is compensated by the reactive power generated by the shunt component,
formed between the line conductors and earth, while the natural power is
transmitted on the line, the voltage can vary in a wide range with respect to the
XVIII
XIX
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors wish to take this opportunity to acknowledge all persons that
contributed directly or indirectly to carrying out this book, either by technical or
editorial support.
For some chapters the authors benefited from the kindness of some
institutions or companies, which permitted the reprinting or adapting of some
figures, equations or text excerpts. In this regard, special thanks are addressed to
IEEE, CIGRE particularly to the General Secretary Jean Kowal, EPRI
particularly to Dr. Aty Edris who facilitated the cooperation with EPRI, as well as
to Copper Development Association. Reprinting permission was allowed by Dr.
Roger Dugan, from EPRI, also with the kind acceptance from McGraw-Hill
Companies, for some excerpts in Chapter 6, and Ing. Daniel Griffel, from EdF, for
some excerpts in Chapter 5, to whom the authors address their deepest gratitude.
The authors are deeply grateful to Acad. Gleb Drgan for the constant
support and encouragements during writing the book and cooperation with the
Publishing House of the Romanian Academy.
Special thanks are addressed to some persons who contributed to the content
of the final manuscript. The authors wish to express warm thanks to Dr. Mohamed
Rashwan (President of TransGrid Solutions Inc.), who provided valuable
contributions in Chapter 4, to Prof. Petru Postolache (from University Politehnica
of Bucharest), for constructive comments in Chapter 1 and Chapter 11, and
Dr. Fnic Vatr (from Institute for Energy Studies and Design ISPE S.A.) for
valuable suggestions to Chapter 5. Special thanks are addressed to Prof. Nicolae
Golovanov (from University Politehnica of Bucharest) who reviewed the
Chapter 6 and provided many valuable contributions.
The printing of this book was made possible by the financial support of some
companies. The authors wish to express their gratitude to Ing. Viorel Gafia
(Manager of Romelectro S.A.) and Dr. Dan Gheorghiu (General Manager of ISPE
S.A.). Special thanks are also addressed to Washington Group International Inc. for
the financial support granted for printing the book, and to RIBE Group (Germany)
as well as its subsidiary in Romania, which provided valuable technical materials
and financial support for printing the book.
For contributions concerning the translation into English or the electronic
editing of some chapters, the authors wish to extend their gratitude to Dr. Andrei
Fgranu, Dr. Monica Fgranu, Dr. Cristina Popescu, Ing. Silviu Vergoti, Ing.
Ioan Giosan, Ing. Mircea Bivol and Ing. Laureniu Lipan.
The authors gratefully acknowledge the good cooperation with the Publishing
House of the Romanian Academy, and address many thanks to Dr. Ioan Ganea,
Ing. Cristina Chiriac, Mihaela Marian and Monica Stanciu, for their patience and
professionalism in carrying out the printed book.
The authors
Chapter
Several Standards [EN50160, IEEE P1564, HD 637 S1] give definitions of the voltage
either as reference quantity or for equipment designing. The term nominal voltage of the
system Un, as a whole, is defined as a suitable value of voltage used to designate or identify
a system and to which certain operating characteristics are referred. The term rated value
represents a quantity value assigned, generally by the manufacturer, for a specified
operating condition of a component, device or equipment. Because the nominal voltage is a
reference value it is further used in definitions and formulae from theories to identify the
voltage level of the network to which equipments or installations are connected.
Basic computation
A
Systematic
transport
A, B
PP
IS
B
Systematic
transport
Compensation
PP
IS
PP
consumption areas
power plants
interference station
Systematic
transport
HV / MV transformer substation
MV / LV transformer substation
The main feature of the complex looped networks is that the loads are
supplied from more than two sides (Fig. 1.5), therefore on several paths and from
several sources. These networks present great supply reliability and economical
operation, but they require more equipment and they are more expensive.
The topology of a network can be modified by the position of the circuit
breakers placed on the lines (Fig. 1.3) or on the substations busbars (Fig. 1.6).
Therefore, the opening of the circuit breaker CB from Figure 1.3 transforms the
looped network into a radial one; the same situation is also possible for the network
from Figure 1.6.
Source 2
Source 1
CB
~
~
Fig. 1.5. Complex looped
network.
~
~
a.
b.
Fig. 1.6. Open ring network topology altering in transformer
substations: a. without open ring; b. with open ring.
Basic computation
220
Transformer
substation
110
Block
transformer
20
~
System ~
power plant
Industrial
networks
Local
power
plant
Rural
area
Urban
area
Urban
networks
(6) 10
Transformer
points
0.4
Low voltage
distribution networks
The analysis of the planes sequence emphasizes the following features of the
power system configuration:
the system elements (generators, transformers, lines, loads etc.) are placed
in different parallel planes, according to their nature and functional role;
the distance between planes is determined by the difference between the
neighbouring voltage levels;
the connection between planes is achieved through the magnetic couplings
of the transformers (in the case of different voltage levels, or in the case of
not successive planes at the same voltage level) or autotransformers (in the
case of successive planes belonging to the same voltage level);
a plane includes the longitudinal elements of the networks; the transversal
elements are connected between these planes and the neutral point;
the networks from the upper planes serve for power transmission, while
those from the lower planes serve for power distribution;
the generators of the central power plants inject the power in the system
through block-transformers and transmission networks at medium voltage
(Fig. 1.8); if the generators power is higher, the injection is carried out at
higher voltage level;
the lower level buses and networks connected to these buses constitute a
load for the higher level networks (excepting the generator buses);
the power consumption takes place at high, medium and low voltage level
through the network coupling transformers;
moving to higher levels, the networks cover larger areas and the powers
transfer rises, while the density of the networks decreases;
the networks at the lower levels are denser, they transfer less power on
shorter distances;
the power system customers are in transversal connection between the
buses of the distribution networks (the medium voltages planes) and the
plane 0 kV; the power absorbed by the customer and the bus voltage are
smaller.
750 kV, 400 kV
220 kV
Generator
110 kV
Power
transmission
Power
repartition
20 kV
10 kV
Local consumption
Power
distribution
0.4 kV
0 kV
Basic computation
10
Basic computation
The high voltage distribution networks have a basic looped design, but they
operate in open (radial) arrangement. The networks technological consumption
determines the separation point, but other restrictions are also considered. The loop
is supplied from two different injection points or from the sectionalized busbars of
the same injection point.
Figures 1.9 to 1.11 illustrate the above-mentioned aspects.
Figure 1.9 presents the architecture of a supply network requiring at the same
time substations with one transformer unit and substations with two transformer
units, connected in derivation to a mains 110 kV line.
The network from Figure 1.10 uses 110 kV overhead lines (OEL) to supply
rural areas through transformer substations with two transformer units. The A and
C substations are source substations and ensure the supply of the medium voltage
network.
A
110 kV
OEL
110 kV
110 kV
20 kV
11
Rural
110 kV/MV
110 kV/MV
400 kV/110 kV
substation
110 kV/MV
110 kV/MV
6 kV/110 kV
substation
110 kV ring
Transformer
substation
Deep joint
substation
400 kV/110 kV
substation 110 kV
System
Fig. 1.12. Architecture of a 110 kV urban network supplying a settlement with more than
150,000 inhabitants.
Regarding the HV/MV substations structure and the installed power, these
depend on the destination of that substation namely: public distribution, supply of
concentrated customers or both (public distribution and concentrated customers).
The public distribution substations supply domestic and residential customers.
They have a simple structure, and their dimensions depend on the requested power,
the safety level they must provide and the configuration of the 110 kV networks.
Big cities are supplied from one or two rings of 110 kV. The structure of the
12
Basic computation
110 kV
110 kV / MV
transformer
substation
a.
b.
If the locality has great surface and load density, the supplying of some
concentrated customers can be carried out through a deep joint substation
(Fig. 1.12).
c2. Medium voltage distribution networks. High voltage substations supply
these networks in direct or indirect connection. In the first case medium voltage
lines connect the transformer points directly to the MV busbars of the supply
substations. In the second case, MV lines departing from a HV/MV substation
supply the busbars of a MV connection substation, which in turn supplies the MV
junctions through other MV lines.
The medium voltage levels, varying in the 3 to 60 kV range, are chosen in
tight relation to the networks load density and to the economical and technical
criteria. Romania adopted the 20 kV voltage as optimal.
There are several configurations of distribution systems in use today,
considering the phase number and the situation of the neutral point:
the north-American system (Fig. 1.14,a) employs a distributed and solidly
earthed neutral; the main line is three-phase: three phases and neutral; the
derivations are single-phase or three-phase according to the transmitted
power; the distribution is single-phased, between phase and neutral;
13
the English system (Fig. 1.14,b), has no distributed neutral, the main line is
three-phase; the derivations have three or two phases;
the Australian system (Fig. 1.14,c), is an economical system; the main line
has only three phases, and no distributed neutral; the derivations have one,
two or three phases; the return path is insured by the ground;
the European system (Fig. 1.14,d) has no distributed neutral; the main line
and the derivations are three-phase.
N
LV
HV/MV
MV/LV
HV/MV
CB
N
3
2
1
CB
DS
DS
LV
3
2
1
MV/LV
LV 1P
MV/LV
N
3
2
LV 3P
N
3
2
N
LV
LV 1P
MV/LV
1 2 3
N
3
1 2 3 N
a.
b.
Fig. 1.14. Medium voltage distribution types: a. with distributed neutral; b. without
distributed neutral, mixed with two or three phases.
14
Basic computation
HV/MV
CB
DS
HV/MV
3
2
1
LV 1P
MV/LV
CB
LV 3P N
DS
3
2
1
N
3
1
MV/LV
LV 1P
LV 3P N
1 2 3
N
IT
LV 1P
1 2 3
c.
d.
15
(Fig. 1.16). Under normal operating conditions the networks operate in radial
connection. The sectioning point is imposed by the networks technological
consumption or by the networks automation. The network presents separation
capability in the middle or at its ends, according to the requirements.
MV
MV
S1
S2
Fig. 1.15. MV direct distribution through cables, with backup from two transformer
substations.
MV
110 kV / MV
substation
Fig. 1.16. MV direct distribution through cables, with backup from the same transformer
substation.
Urban areas with big load densities of 5 to 10 MVA/km2 use cable networks
in grid type direct distribution arrangement (Fig. 1.17) or in double derivation
(Fig. 1.18).
For both arrangements the backup supply can be made from the same
substation or from different substations. This configuration of electrical drawings
can be developed when the load growing on the consumers sides.
16
Basic computation
MV
S2
Future
110 kV / MV
substation
S1
Existing
110 kV / MV
substation
MV
Working
cable
Backup
cable
17
18
Basic computation
Power supply
TP
Head of petal
transformer point
CB2
CB1
Supply
feeder
CB
F
MV/0.4 kV
a.
Working feeder
Working feeder
TP
S
R
S
TP
Backup feeder
S - power supply (source)
R - reflection point
TP - transformer points
Backup feeder
b.
c.
MV
MV
S1
S2
110 kV / MV
substation
110 kV / MV
substation
a.
Fig. 1.20. Direct distribution through medium voltage overhead lines: a. with backup from
two substation and derivation supply of the transformer points.
19
HV/MV source
(circuit breaker bay)
Main line
Secondary line
ACB
DS
ACB
DS
DS
b.
Fig. 1.20. Direct distribution through medium voltage overhead lines: b. radial-tree diagram.
MV
MV
MV cable
MV cable
1x 400 kVA
or
1x 1600 kVA
2 x 400 kVA
or
2 x1600 kVA
ABT
ABT
0.4 kV
0.4 kV
MV
a.
b.
ABT Automatic Bus Transfer
MV cable
0.4 kV
MV cable
ABT
c.
20
Basic computation
c3. Low voltage distribution networks. The low voltage networks structure is
imposed by the loads density, by the medium voltage network configuration, by
the number of MV/LV transformer points and by the consumers requirements
(allowed outages number and duration).
The rural and urban low voltage networks from the suburbs operate in normal
conditions in radial arrangement (Fig. 1.22,a) with overhead and underground
lines. A more recent solution uses aerial mounted insulated twisted wires. The
solution is very economical in rural areas, suburbs or small cities.
Central areas of the cities and some significant loads are supplied from
looped networks (Fig. 1.22,b). The diagram from Figure 1.22,b1 has the main
disadvantage that a line fault causes the outage of the entire LV line. Figure 1.22,b2
avoids this inconvenient with the help of fuse (F). If a fault occurs, the fuse
separates the network in two parts, and by melting at the faulted end, insures the
faults isolation. The diagram in Figure 1.22,b3 insures better safety. The network
operates in radial arrangement and if a fault occurs in the transformer point, the
corresponding fuse is removed and the circuit breaker is closed.
The way the transformers medium voltage side is supplied divides the
looped networks into three types: longitudinal looped (Fig. 1.23,a), transversal
looped (Fig. 1.23,b) and mixed (Fig. 1.23,c). Big cities, with big load densities (1015 MVA/km2) have mesh type looped networks. In mesh networks the low voltage
lines are connected to all possible buses and the network is supplied through
medium voltage distribution cables departing from the busbars of the same
substation. The special technical and economical advantages of the complex looped
networks are:
high degree of supply continuity;
high quality of delivered power, since the consumers voltages are
levelled on the entire area;
proper balancing of the network, due to the loads even repartition;
adaptability to load development, because the looped networks are
designed from beginning to meet future rises in power consumption.
TP1
TP1
TP2
TP1
TP2
TP1
TP2
TP2
a.
b1.
b2.
Fig. 1.22. Low voltage networks: radial (a); looped (b1, b2, b3).
b3.
21
MV
0.4 kV
a.
MV
0.4 kV
0.4 kV
MV
b.
Fig. 1.23. Looped low voltage networks: a. longitudinal; b. transversal.
22
Basic computation
c.
Fig. 1.23. Looped low voltage networks: c. mixed.
ca
ble
s
Substation busbars
CB
Transformer
points
Distribution box
Branch
23
24
Basic computation
25
P = P ( f , U ) , Q = Q( f , U )
(1.1)
The most used expressions of the active and reactive powers have one of the
following forms, called polynomial model (1.2):
(
Q( f ,U ) = Q (d U
P( f ,U ) = P0 a U 2 + b U + c (1 + g f )
0
+ e U + q (1 + h f )
(1.2)
P( f , U ) = A
U nom
Q( f , U ) = B
U nom
f nom
f
f nom
(1.3)
or
U
P = P0
U nom
Q = Q0
U nom
(1 + g f )
(1.4)
(1 + h f )
26
Basic computation
where: a, d
1 ... 2
1 ... 1.4
1.17
1 ... 2
0.6 ... 0
0.7
0.488
(1.5)
27
the model where the power varies direct-proportional with the voltage
magnitude;
P ~U ; Q ~U
(1.6)
P ~ const. ; Q ~ const.
(1.7)
Usually, the loads are modelled through its active and reactive powers, as
shown in Figure 1.25,a. It is possible to consider the same load through series or
parallel combinations of resistance and reactance of constant values (Fig. 1.25,b,c).
U
RS
IS
Xp
IXp IRp
Rp
XS
P+jQ
a.
b.
c.
U
R s + jX s
S s = P + jQ = U I s =
U2
U2
(Rs + jX s )
= 2
R s jX s R s + X s2
U 2 Rs
R s2 + X s2
then:
P2 + Q2 =
; Q=
U 4 Rs2 + X s2
Rs2
2
X s2
U 2Xs
R s2 + X s2
) =U
P
Q
=U 2
Rs
Xs
28
Basic computation
In consequence:
where: Rs
Xs
Zs
U
P
Q
is
Rs =
U 2P
P2 + Q2
(1.8)
Xs =
U 2Q
P2 + Q2
(1.9)
where: Rp is
Xp
I Rp =
U
U2
U2
; P = UI Rp =
; Rp =
Rp
P
Rp
(1.10)
IXp =
U
U2
U2
; Q = UI Xp =
; Xp =
Xp
Q
Xp
(1.11)
29
In Figure 1.26 are illustrated the series and shunt elements of a single-circuit
three-phase overhead line, operating under normal steady state conditions, for
which the following expression can be written:
V a = z aa I a + z ab I b + z ac I c = (Raa + jLaa )I a + jLab I b + jLac I c
V b = z ba I a + z bb I b + z bc I c = jLba I a + (Rbb + jLbb )I b + jLbc I c
(1.12)
Va
Ia
yab
zaa
Lab
Ib
Vc
Lbc Lca
Ib
Vb
yca
zbb
ybc
Ic
zcc
Ic
Va
yag
ycg
Vb
ybg
Vc
I a = y aa V a + y ab (V a V b ) + y ac (V a V c ) = Y aa V a + Y ab V b + Y ac V c
I b = y ba (V b V a ) + y bb V b + y bc (V b V c ) = Y ba V a + Y bb V b + Y bc V c (1.13)
I c = y ca (V c V a ) + y cb (V c V b ) + y cc V c = Y ca V a + Y cb V b + Y cc V c
Due to unbalance of some loads the mutual inductance has different values,
and then asymmetrical voltages appear. By manufacturing and operation (phase
transposition) means, the equality of self-impedances and self-admittances
respectively, and the equality of phase-to-phase mutual impedances and phase-tophase mutual admittances, are achieved:
z aa = z bb = z cc = z = R + jLself
z ab = z bc = z ca = jLm
and
(1.14,a)
30
Basic computation
Y ab = Y bc = Y ca = Y m = y ab = y bc = y ca
Y aa = y aa + y ab + y ac
(1.14,b)
Y bb = y ba + y bb + y bc
Y cc = y ca + y cb + y cc
Note that, also, under normal steady state conditions, electric generators
generate an e.m.f. of a, b, c sequence also called positive or direct sequence. The
voltages, currents, impedances and admittances of this operating regime are
considerate of positive/direct sequence.
The normal steady state is considered as perfect symmetrical and balanced;
therefore, the following equalities can be defined:
V a +V b +V c = 0
(1.15)
Ia + Ib + Ic = 0
Taking into account (1.14) and (1.15), expressions (1.12) and (1.13) become:
(
(
(
)
)
)
+
V a = ( z z m ) I a = z I a = R + j ( Lself Lm ) I a = R + jL+ I a
+
V b = ( z z m ) I b = z I b = R + j ( Lself Lm ) I b = R + jL+ I b (1.16)
+
V c = ( z z m ) I c = z I c = R + j ( Lself Lm ) I c = R + jL+ I c
I a = (Y Y m ) V a = Y V a
+
I b = (Y Y m ) V b = Y V b
+
(1.17,a)
I c = (Y Y m ) V c = Y V c
+
(1.17,b)
I c = j ( Cself + 3Cm ) V c = jC + V c
Equations (1.16) and (1.17) shows that under perfect symmetrical conditions,
by design, the scheme from Figure 1.26 can be replaced by a three-phase network,
where the phases are electrically and magnetically decoupled. Under these
considerations, the series and shunt elements from Figure 1.26 are replaced as
shown in Figure 1.27, where positive/direct sequence impedances and admittances
are considered.
31
Ia
Ia
Ib
Ic
z
z
Ib
Ic
a.
b.
Therefore, under steady state conditions, the three-phase line can be replaced
by three independent single-phase lines, with no electric or magnetic coupling, and
with currents and voltages shifted only by 120 and 240 degrees. In consequence,
steady state analysis can be performed only for a single-phase line, whose
parameters are called service line parameters.
The service inductance of a three-phase electric line represents the ratio of the
total magnetic field flux, generated by the currents on the three phases linking the
conductor of one phase, to the current flowing through it. The service inductance is
the positive/direct sequence inductance and is denoted by L+ or more simple by L.
The service capacitance of a three-phase electric line represents the ratio of
electric charge of one phase conductor (to which contributes the electric charges
from all the others conductors) to the potential of respective conductor, measured
with respect to a reference potential (earth or metallic shell of a cable).
In this way, the three-phase system (or in the general case, a multi-phase
system) can be replaced with a single-phase system, which has only one
capacitance with respect to the reference potential, determined in terms of all
capacitances of the real three-phase (multi-phase) system. The service capacitance
represents the direct/positive sequence capacitance and is noted by C + or more
simple by C.
The service parameters or direct/positive sequence parameters are, in general,
given in per unit length, usually 1 km, called per unit length parameters and are
noted by r0 , l0 , c0 , g 0 .
32
Basic computation
where P is expressed in watts, and I represents the actual value of the current, in
ampere.
The effective resistance is equal to direct-current resistance of the conductor
only if the distribution of current throughout the conductor is uniform.
In direct current, the expression of resistance Rdc is as follows:
l
l
Rdc = =
s s
where:
l
s
is
[]
(1.18,b)
= 20 [1 + 20 ( 20 )]
(1.19)
where: R1 is
R2
1, 2
T0
(1.19')
33
(1.20)
(1.21)
34
Basic computation
frequency, [Hz];
inductance of a single phase, [H].
35
Starting from the magnetic circuit law we express the magneto-motive force:
mmf = H dl = i
(1.23)
(1.24)
where: B
is magnetic flux density, [Wb/m2];
r
relative magnetic permeability, [H/m];
0
magnetic permeability of vacuum, [H/m];
= r 0 absolute magnetic permeability of medium, [H/m].
The total flux through a surface of area A is the surface integral of the
magnetic field B, that is:
= B d a = B cos B, d a da
A
(1.25)
(1.27)
k =1
where k is the sum of all fluxes linking the turn k of the solenoid. As illustrated in
Figure 1.28 this could have the expression k = 1 + 2 + 3 . The inductance of
the overhead lines can be calculated starting from the fundamental relationship
representing the ratio of the total magnetic flux, linking the surface bounded by the
contour of a circuit, to the current passing through the respective circuit, having a
linear dependency:
36
Basic computation
L=
t
i
(1.28)
When there exist more circuits, in the same medium, that influence each
other, under the condition of linearity mentioned earlier, self- and mutual
inductances are defined.
Specific inductance calculation for an infinite straight conductor
In order to obtain an accurate value of the inductance of an electric
transmission line, the flux linkage inside as well as outside of each conductor must
be taken into consideration.
dx
Let the magnetic field lines at a distance x meters from the centre of the
conductor and concentric distributed relative to the axis of the conductor. The
magnetic field intensity Hx is constant along these field lines and tangent to it. In
consequence, the equation (1.23) becomes:
H ds = H
x
x ( 2x )
= ix
(1.29)
ix =
x 2
i
r 2
(1.30)
Hx = i
x
2r 2
(1.31)
37
The value of internal flux is a percent of the linkage flux due to the total
current from conductor and is calculated with formula:
r
int =
x x 2
i
i 2 dx = 0 r
2
8
2r r
(1.32)
int 0 r
=
i
8
(1.33)
1m
i
r
x
dx
(1.34)
ext = B d a = 0
A
0i
2x dx = 2 ln
r
R Wb
r m
(1.35)
where: R is the distance meters from the axis of the conductor to the point
where H = 0 ;
r radius of the conductor.
38
Basic computation
R H
(1.36)
Lext = ext = 0 ln
i
2
r m
Therefore, the generalised self-inductance of a massive conductor is:
L = Lext + Lint =
1
0 R
+ r
ln
2 r
4
(1.37)
r
D
ground
L=
0 D
D
4
ln + ln e r = 0 ln r
2 r
2 r e
(1.39)
L=
0 D
ln
2 re
(1.40)
39
L0 = 0.2 ln
D
D
= 0.46 lg
[mH/km phase]
re
re
x0 = L0 = 314 0.46 lg
D
D
= 0.1445 lg
[/km phase]
re
re
(1.41)
Thus, we can draw the conclusion that the reactance of an electric line does
not depend upon the current passing through the line.
Total flux linkage of a conductor, from an n-conductors system
Consider the general case of n parallel conductors (Fig. 1.32), representing a
multi-phase system under normal steady state conditions.
Conductor 1
H=0
d1
D12
Conductor 2
dk
D1k
Conductor k
40
Basic computation
currents from the other conductors are considered zero. Finally, we apply
superposition, which takes into account the influence of magnetic flux due to the
currents from the others conductors. As it can be seen in Figure 1.32 the magnetic
field lines due to currents ik are concentric circles.
Having the previous assumptions made, we may alike the general case of a
multi-phase system with the case studied earlier of a system with two conductors.
We denote by dk the distance from the centre of conductor k to the imaginary
conductor, where the magnetic flux intensity is zero, and by D1k the distance from
the centre of conductor 1 to the centre of conductor k. By applying equation (1.35),
the self-flux linking the circuit composed by conductor 1 and imaginary conductor,
due to current i1 in conductor 1, is:
11 =
0i1 d1
ln
[Wb/m]
re
2
(1.42,a)
and the flux linking the conductor 1, due to the current flowing through conductor
k, has the following expression:
1k =
0ik
d
ln k
D1k
2
(1.42,b)
Therefore, the total flux linking the conductor 1 due to the contributions of all
currents flowing through the n conductors is:
t1 =
0
d
d
d1
d2
+ ... + ik ln k + ... + in ln n
i1 ln + i2 ln
re
D12
D1k
D1n
2
(1.43)
t1 =
1
1
1
1
0
+ ... + ik ln
+ ... + in ln
i1 ln + i2 ln
2
re
D12
D1k
D1n
(1.44)
(1.45)
Substituting the current in from (1.45) into (1.44) the following expression is
obtained:
t1 =
41
0
1
1
1
1
+ ... + ik ln
+ ... + in ln
i1 ln + i2 ln
re
D12
D1k
D1n
2
0
d
d
d1
d
+ i2 ln 2 + ... + ik ln k + ... + in1 ln n1
i1 ln
dn
dn
dn
dn
2
0
1
1
1
1
+ ... + ik ln
+ ... + in ln
i1 ln + i2 ln
re
D12
D1k
D1n
2
(1.46)
Using self and mutual inductances, we can see that the expression (1.46)
represents the Maxwells law referring to inductances:
t1 = L11i1 + L12i2 + ... + L1k ik + ... + L1nin
(1.47)
Therefore, in the general case of a system with n conductors, where the sum
of all currents is zero, the self-inductance Ljj and the mutual inductance Ljk are
given by expressions:
L jj =
0 1
ln
2 re
L jk =
0 1
ln
2 D jk
[H/m]
[H/m]
(1.48,a)
(1.48,b)
La =
a
Ia
(1.49)
42
Basic computation
D23
2
D13
Applying (1.46) for this case it results the expression of flux linkage of phase
a per unit length:
a =
0
1
1
1
+ I c ln
I a ln + I b ln
2
re
D12
D13
(1.50)
(1.51)
where
1
3
1
3
a = e j 2 / 3 = + j
; a 2 = e j 2 / 3 = j
2
2
2
2
Substituting expressions (1.51) into (1.50) obtain:
a =
=
1
1
0
1
3
1
+ j 3 ln 1 =
ln
I
+
I a ln + I a j
a
2
2
re
2 D12
2 D13
2
D12 D13
0
3 D13
j
ln
I a ln
2
2
D12
re
D12 D13
a 0
3 D13 '
=
j
ln
ln
La jL"a
I a 2
re
2
D12
(1.52)
Observation: For the case when D12 = D13 = D the imaginary part becomes
zero, so that an expression similar with (1.40), corresponding to the case of the
two-conductor system, is obtained.
43
From (1.52) we can draw the conclusion that in the expression of inductance,
an imaginary part appears which leads to a supplementary resistance on phase:
(1.53)
By increasing the real part of the impedance, supplementary active power and
energy losses on the line appear. In order to avoid this, for symmetry of the circuit
and equilateral spacing between phases, the phase transposition method is used for
an electric line of length l (Fig. 1.34).
l/3
a
l/3
c
l/3
b
Ib
Ic
Section 2
Section 3
Ia
Section 1
Transposition cycle
Therefore, if apply equation (1.46), the average linkage flux of phase a is:
a , av
1
1
1
1
+
= 0 ia ln + ib ln
+ ic ln
3 2
re
D12
D13
(1)
1
1
1
0
ia ln + ib ln
+
+ ic ln
2
re
D23
D21
(2 )
1
1
1
=
+ ic ln
+ 0 i a ln + ib ln
2
re
D31
D32
(3 )
0
1
1
1
ia ln + ib ln
=
+ ic ln
re
GMD
GMD
2
=
0
GMD
ia ln
2
re
(1.54)
where GMD = 3 D12 D23 D31 is the geometric mean distance between positions 1, 2
and 3.
44
Basic computation
0 GMD
ln
re
2
(1.55,a)
Knowing 0 = 410 7 H/m and considering the unit length of l = 1000 m, the
inductance per phase and kilometre is obtained:
L0 = 0.2 ln
GMD
GMD
= 0.46 lg
re
re
[mH/km phase]
(1.55,b)
GMD
re
[/km phase]
(a1) =
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ i c ln
+ ia'
+ ib ' ln
+ ic '
i a ln + ib
2
re
D12
D13
D11'
D12'
D13'
(a1') =
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ ic ' ln
+ ia
+ ib ln
+ ic
i a ' ln + ib '
2
re
D1'2'
D1'3'
D1'1
D1'2
D1'3
(a2 ) =
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ i c ln
+ ia'
+ ib ' ln
+ ic '
i a ln + ib
2
re
D23
D21
D22'
D23'
D21'
(a2' ) =
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ ic ' ln
+ ia
+ ib ln
+ ic
i a ' ln + ib '
re
D 2 '3 '
D2'1'
D2 ' 2
D 2 '3
D2'1
2
(a3) =
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ ic ln
+ ia'
+ ib ' ln
+ ic '
i a ln + ib
2
re
D31
D32
D33'
D31'
D32'
(a3') =
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ i c ' ln
+ ia
+ ib ln
+ ic
i a ' ln + ib '
2
re
D3'1'
D3 ' 2 '
D3 ' 3
D3'1
D3'2
(1.56)
l/3
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ic
Ib
Ia
l/3
l/3
b
c
a
c
1
2
45
3
1
a
Section1
b
3
3
b
2
a
Section 2
Transposition cycle
Section 3
Fig. 1.35. Double-circuit line with phase transposition. The position of transposition
sections 1, 2 and 3.
The average linkage flux of any of the two phase conductors a or a' is:
a , av = a ', av
(1)
(1)
(2 )
(2 )
(a3) + (a3') 1 (1)
1 a + a ' a + a '
= a , av + (a2, )av + (a3,)av
=
+
+
3
3
2
2
2
(1.57)
(a1,)av = (a1'), av =
+ ib ln
a + a ' 0 1
1
=
i a ln 2 2 +
2
2 2
re D11'
(a2 ) + (a2' ) 0 1
1
=
i a ln 2 2 +
2
2 2
re D22'
1
1
+ ic ln
D23 D2'3' D23' D2 '3
D21D2'1' D21' D2 '1
(a3,)av = (a3',)av =
+ ib ln
(1)
1
1
+ ic ln
D12 D1'2' D12' D1'2
D13 D1'3' D13' D1'3
(1)
(a3) + (a3') 0 1
1
=
i a ln 2 2 +
2
2 2
re D33'
1
1
+ ic ln
D31D3'1' D31' D3'1
D32 D3'2' D32' D3'2
46
Basic computation
GMRa = re D11'
GMRb = re D22'
GMRc = re D33'
Taking into account that i a + ib + ic = 0 , we obtain:
a , av = a ', av = 2 10 7 ia ln
GMD
[H/m phase]
GMR
(1.58)
(1.59)
GMR = 3 GMRaGMRbGMRc
(1.60)
df
11
15
D
D1
2
13
D1
10
47
12
2/n
13
14
a.
b.
Fig. 1.36. Electric line with bundled conductors: a. Phase spacing for the case of line
with 5 sub-conductors per bundle; b. sub-conductors spacing for the case of line with
f sub-conductors per bundle.
For the calculation of the total linkage flux of sub-conductor 1, from phase a,
by applying expression (1.46) it results:
t 1 =
0 ia 1
1
1
1
1
+
+ ln
+ ln
+ ln
ln + ln
D12
D13
D14
D15
2 5 re
+
ib
1
1
1
1
1
+ ln
+ ln
+ ln
+ ln
+
ln
5 D16
D17
D18
D19
D1,10
1
1
1
1
1
ic
+ ln
+ ln
+ ln
+ ln
ln
=
5 D1,11
D1,12
D1,13
D1,14
D1,15
(1.62)
1
1
0 ia
i
+ b ln
+
ln
2 5 (re D12 D13 D14 D15 ) 5
D16 D17 D18 D19 D1,10
1
ic
ln
5
D1,11D1,12 D1,13 D1,14 D1,15
where D1j is the distance from the sub-conductor 1 to sub-conductor j, j = 2, 3, ..., 15.
t1 =
0
1
1
1
+ ib ln
+ ic ln
ia ln
2
GMR f
GMD1b
GMD1c
(1.63)
GMD1c = 5 D1,11D1,12 D1,13 D1,14 D1,15 geometric mean distance from conductor 1 to
phase c.
48
Basic computation
t 1 =
D
0
ia ln
2
GMR f
(1.64)
t1 5 0
D
=
ln
ia
RMG f
2
5
(1.65)
Next, calculating the total linkage flux t 2 of conductor 2, we find the same
geometric mean radius GMRf. Due to the large distances between phases, we can
consider that the inductances of the five parallel conductors of a phase are
approximately equal L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 , so that:
La =
L1 0
D
D
=
ln
= 2 10 4 ln
[H/km phase]
5 2 GMR f
GMR f
(1.66)
D12 = 2 A sin
f
2
D13 = 2 A sin
f
#
( f 1)
D1 f = 2 A sin
f
respectively
( f 1)
2
= A f 1 f (1.67)
D12 D13 " D1 f = A f 1 2 sin 2 sin 2 sin
f
f
f
2
( f 1)
= f
2 sin 2 sin " 2 sin
f
f
f
(1.68)
49
Therefore, in this case, for the geometric mean radius and geometric mean
distances, the following expressions are obtained:
GMR f = f re A f 1 f
GMD1b = f D1, f +1D1, f + 2 " D1, 2 f
(1.69)
Considering that practical, the distances D1,f+1 . . . D1,2f . . . D1,3f are equal to the
distance between bundles centres, for the inductance La the same expression as in
(1.66) is obtained, where GMRf and GMDs are given by (1.69).
Application
Calculate the reactance of 750 kV single-circuit three-phase overhead electric line.
Each phase consists of Al-Ol conductors of 5300/69 mm2, and the conductors of bundles
are of radius r = 2.515 / 2 cm . The distance between the conductors of bundles, situated in
the corners of a pentagon, is df = 40 cm (Fig. 1.36,a). The mean distance between the
bundle centres of two different phases is D =17500 mm. Thus:
D12 = D15 = 40 cm , D13 = D14 = 2 40 cos 36 = 64.72136 cm
1/ 5
2.515 1 / 4
40 2 64.72136 2
GMR f =
e
2
= 23.09 cm
17500
= 0.86559 mH km
230.9
50
Basic computation
51
D
ds
(1.71)
permittivity of vacuum, 0 =
The value of electric flux density D, called also electric field induction, is
determined by applying the electric flux law along the cylindrical surface of radius
R, surrounding the conductor, as shown in Figure 1.37:
D d s = D 2Rh = q
(1.72)
with
q = ql h
where: D
ds
A
q
ql
h
is
52
Basic computation
than B relative to the conductor. The potential difference between the two points A
and B is the line integral of the electric field E along any curve path joining the two
points (the potential difference is independent on the path followed in irrotational
field):
dB
VBA = VB VA = E d s
(1.74)
dA
VBA = VB VA =
ql
ql
dA
2R dR = 2 ln d
dA
(1.75)
equipotential
lines
qa
V =0
qb
D
Fig. 1.38. Cross section of a two-conductor system.
qa
D q
r
ln + b ln
2 r 2 D
(1.76)
Since the two conductors are charged with electric charges of equal values
but opposite in sign, that is qa = qb , obtain:
Vab =
qa D
r q
D
ln ln = a ln
D r
2 r
(1.77,a)
Vab
q
D
= a ln
2
2 r
(1.77,b)
53
qa
=
Vab ln D
r
We can also express the capacitance to ground:
Cab =
(1.78,a)
qa 2
(1.78,b)
=
Fm
Va ln D
r
The real situations consists of multiphase systems so that let us consider the
case of n parallel conductors that carry the line charges q1 , q2 , , qn , located
above a perfectly conducting earth plane as shown in Figure 1.39.
CaN = CbN =
conductor 2
M
DM1
q1
q2
DM2
DMk
conductor k
DMn
qn
qk
conductor 1
conductor n
V=0
Fig. 1.39. n conductors system.
54
Basic computation
VM =
1 n
1
qk ln
DMk
2 k =1
(1.80)
V1 =
1
1
1
1
1
q1 ln + q2 ln
+ ... + qk ln
+ ... + qn ln
r
D12
D1k
D1n
2
(1.81)
[V ] = [] [q]
(1.82)
where: [V] is column vector of potentials with components V1, V2, ..., Vn;
[q] column vector of electric charges with components q1 , q2 , , qn ;
[] matrix of Maxwells potential coefficients having the terms:
jj =
1
1
1
1
ln
ln ; jk =
2 Dij
2 r
(1.83)
[q ] = [ ]1 [V ] = [C ] [V ]
Notice that the matrix [C ] includes off-diagonal terms, that is, there are also
mutual capacitances. Under symmetrical and balanced steady state conditions, the
capacitance of one conductor in the presence of the others can be expressed as an
equivalent capacitance.
Capacitance of a single-circuit three-phase overhead electric line
For better understanding of calculation of electric lines capacitance consider
now the simple case of a single-circuit three-phase overhead electric line with
transposed conductors (Fig. 1.34).
55
where Va(1) is the potential in a point situated on conductor a from the first
transposition section.
The conductors radii of the three phases are equal each other and equal to r.
Va , av =
+ qa ln
1
1
1
1
qa ln + qb ln
+ qc ln
+
3 2
r
D12
D13
1
1
1
1
1
1
+ qb ln
+ qc ln
+ qa ln + qb ln
+ qc ln
r
D23
D21
r
D31
D32
or
Va , av =
1
1
1
1
qa ln + qb ln
+ qc ln
3 D D D
3 D D D
2
r
12 23 31
13 21 32
(1.85)
Under normal steady state conditions the per unit length electric charges qa ,
qb and qc of phases a, b and c satisfy the equality:
qa + qb + qc = 0 , that is qa = (qb + qc )
(1.86)
so we obtain:
Va , av =
1
GMD
qa ln
2
r
(1.87)
qa
2
=
Va , av ln GMD
r
(1.88)
1
F/m, r = 1 , length l = 1000 m and using lg
4 9 10 9
instead of ln, expression (1.88) becomes:
Knowing that 0 =
Ca , av =
0.02415
10 6
GMD
lg
r
[F/km]
(1.89)
In a similar manner the average capacitance for a single-circuit or doublecircuit electric line with bundle conductors can be determined. In all these cases the
same mean distances and radii are used as for inductance calculation. The only one
56
Basic computation
difference is that the radius r of the conductor is replaced with an equivalent radius
Rf .
Application
For the same example of the 750 kV single-circuit three-phase overhead electric line
with bundled conductors let us calculate now the capacitive susceptance.
The average capacitance of phase a is given by:
Ca , av = Cb, av = Cc , av =
0.02415
10 6
GMD
lg
Rf
(1.90)
2.515
= 242.7398 mm
Hereby obtain:
ba , av = bb, av = bc , av = Ca , av =
314 0.02415 6
10 = 4.0765 10 6 S/km
17500
lg
242.7398
that is a value very closed to the recommended one for an 750 kV overhead electric line, of
4.12 10 6 S/km, evaluated taking into account the inequality of the distances between
bundle centres and using the geometric mean distances.
Va(1) =
=
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
=
qa ln qa ln
+ qb ln
qb ln
+ qc ln
qc ln
2
r
H1
D12
H12'
D13
H13'
1
20
H
H
H
qa ln 1 + qb ln 12' + qc ln 13'
r
D12
D13
(1.91,a)
Va(2 ) =
1
2 0
H
H
H
q a ln 2 + q b ln 23' + q c ln 21'
r
D23
D21
(1.91,b)
Va(3) =
1
2 0
H
H
H
q a ln 3 + q b ln 31' + q c ln 32'
D32
r
D31
qa
Cab
Cac
qb b
Cb0
Ccb
Ca0
qc
qb
qa
qc
qa
3
a
1
Section 1
qc
(1.91,c)
qb
3q
qb
H2 H1 H3
H2 H1 H 3
c
qc
qc
H12 H13
ground
qb b
qa
H2 H1 H3
Cc0
57
3
c
1
Section 2
b
1
Section 3
3 D D D
3 H H H
qa
12 23 31
1 2 3
ln
3
2 0
r H12 ' H13' H 23'
(1.92)
20
GMD 3 H1H 2 H 3
ln
r 3 H12 ' H13' H 23'
(1.93)
it results:
Ca =
or
20
H mean, s
GMD
ln
+ ln
r
H mean, m
(1.94)
58
Basic computation
Ca =
20
H mean, m
GMD
ln
ln
r
H mean, s
(1.95)
1.2.2.4. Conductance
The conductance is the shunt parameter from the equivalent circuit of an
electric line and it corresponds to shunt active power losses, due to imperfect
insulation and corona discharge [1.1]. If note these losses by Pins , respectively by
Pcor , and line nominal voltage by U n , the conductance G L of the line is
determined with formula:
GL =
Pins + Pcor
U n2
[S]
(1.96)
59
220 103
20 W/km.
= 1.25 10
per phase of
3
Expression (1.97) is valid when phases are equilateral spaced in the corners
of a triangle. Whether the conductors are placed in the same plane, the critical
voltage for the conductor from middle is with 4% less than, and for the conductors
from exterior is with 6% greater than the value calculated with expression (1.97).
In designing of overhead electric lines, corona discharge is verified for
operating regimes at voltages above 60 kV. The standards indicate that on dry
60
Basic computation
weather, the condition for which there are no power losses by corona discharge is
formulated as U n < U cr .
The calculation of power losses due to corona discharge, by using
experimental empiric formula is performed. For voltages above 110 kV and large
diameters, Peeks formula is the most used in this evaluation:
Pc =
where: f
is
U, Ucr
241
( f + 25) re (U U cr )2 105 [kW/km]
GMD
(1.98)
Peeks formula provides good results only for overhead lines operating at
voltages up to 110 kV and with not too large diameters of conductor. For voltages
above 110 kV and large diameters, the Petersons formula is used:
Pc = 14,7 10 6 f F
U2
[kW/km]
GMD
ln
re
(1.99)
where F is Petersons function and is dependent on the value of U/Ucr ratio. For
400 kV lines, the power losses due to corona discharge reach 5 7 % from Joules
losses, and for 750 kV lines, these are 4 times bigger compared with 400 kV lines.
Corona phenomenon leads to:
increase in power and energy losses;
decreasing of life time of conductors, fittings, clamps, caused by the
corrosion process, high frequency disturbances and slight hissing noises.
The avoidance of corona discharge appearance needs increasing of critical
voltage Ucr by:
increasing in conductors radii, leading to assembling and operating
difficulties of the line;
using bundle conductors, obtaining on this approach the increasing of
apparent surface of the sub-conductors group and the decreasing of the
critical field intensity at the conductors surface; this is the most used
method being the most widespread.
For cables, the conductance appears due to the power losses by ionization
phenomenon in the dielectric of cables, current leakages due to imperfect insulation
or to power losses due to magnetic hysteresis loop. For power losses assessment in
dielectric material the tangent of the angle of dielectric losses tan is used. For
110 kV and 220 kV cables the power losses in insulation increase up to
5 10 kW/km.
From the above presented issues, results that the conductance GL is a value
that can be determined only through experimental approaches; it varies generally
61
along the line, caused by line state, meteorological conditions and the voltage
variations as well.
In practice, the value of the conductance is considered within the interval:
GL = 0.97 10 8 27 10 8
S/km
1
(r0 + jx0 )l = R + jX
n
(1.100)
The electric lines are classified by voltage level, its length as well as the
environment. In the modelling of electric line the most used is four-terminal
network, where the shunt admittance, which represents corona losses, leakage
current and shunt capacitive currents, is split equal to both input and output ends of
the equivalent circuit.
X
i
B
2
k
B
2
G
2
G
2
ground
zik=Rik+jXik
k
Vk
For medium and long lines, due to high value of shunt capacitive currents or
for the cases when corona losses become significant, the shunt admittance is no
62
Basic computation
longer neglected. Obtain thus the equivalent circuit, which represents, with good
accuracy, the electric line.
zik
i
Vi
yik0
yki0
Vk
V1
N1
N2
a.
V2
V1
N1
N2
V2
b.
Fig. 1.44. Simplified equivalent circuits of transformers (a) and autotransformers (b).
Autotransformers are used when the transformer turns ratio is small. These
have also a third winding of small rated power, delta-connected, constituting
closing path for currents of the 3rd harmonic and multiple of 3, reducing on this
way the flowing of these harmonics in the network. Often, the third winding of
63
Ni
Ii
Nk
k
i
Vi
Ik
Vk
Ei
Ek
64
Basic computation
Applying (1.101) for the two paths corresponding to the two windings and
taking as reference the direction of current I i , for instantaneous quantities the
following system of equations can be written:
d i
vi + Ri ii = d t
v + R i = d k
k k
k
dt
(1.102)
The magnetic fluxes i , k are the sum of the utile and leakage fluxes:
i = N i + Li , ii
k = N k + Lk , i k
Ri, Rk
Li , , Lk ,
(1.103)
(
(
V i + Ri I i = j N i + Li , I i
V k + Rk I = j N k + Lk , I k
(1.102')
V k + z k I k = N k E
(1.102'')
z k = Rk + j Lk ,
(1.104)
zk
zi
Ii
Vi
65
Ni E
Ik
Vk
Nk E
V k 0 = N k E
(1.105)
Based on the equations (1.105) it can be defined the transformer turns ratio
Nik, which is equal to the ratio between the number of turns of the two windings or
to the ratio of the no-load voltages at the two terminals:
N i V i0
=
Nk V k0
N ik =
(1.106)
The transformer turns ratio defined by (1.106) is, in this case, real; normally,
this is complex because there is a phase shift between secondary and primary
voltages.
In practice, the two-winding transformer is represented either as equivalent
circuit with magnetic coupling (Fig. 1.47,a) or as equivalent circuit with
transformer operator (Fig. 1.47,b).
Ii
Vi
zk
zi
V i0
Vk 0
Ik
Vk
Ii
Vi
a.
Nik
zi
zk
Vk 0
V i0
Ik
Vk
b.
Fig. 1.47. Two-winding transformer equivalent circuit: a. circuit with magnetic coupling;
b. circuit with transformer operator.
Further, if the Kirchhoffs theorem for magnetic circuits is applied along the
contour linking the magnetic circuit (Fig. 1.45):
H ds =
66
Basic computation
(1.107)
N ik =
I
Ni
k
Nk
Ii
(1.108)
N ki =
I
Nk
i
Ni
Ik
(1.108')
or
If the first equation from (1.102'') is divided to the second one, and taking
into consideration (1.108) and (1.108'), the mathematical equations of the twowinding transformer becomes:
z ik I i V i = N ik V k
z ki I k V k = N ki V i
(1.109)
z ik = z i + N ik2 z k
z ki = z k + N ki2 z i
(1.110)
where:
Nik
z ik
Vi
V i0
67
i
Vk
Nki
Vi
z ki
Vk0
a.
k
Vk
b.
z i + N ik2 z ki N ki2 z i = z ik
Knowing that N ik N ki = 1 we can obtain the relationship between
impedances and admittances referred to the two windings:
z ik = N ik2 z ki
z ki = N ki2 z ik
(1.111,a)
y = N ki2 y
ik
ki
2
y ki = N ik y ik
(1.111,b)
and
where z ik = 1 y ik and z ki = 1 y ki .
If the admittance y i 0 = I i 0 V i 0 , noted with a supplementary subscript 0,
which represents the no-load power losses, is connected on the primary winding
side of the ideal transformer, then the turns ratio becomes (Fig. 1.49):
N ik =
Ik
Ni
Nk
I i I i0
(1.112)
68
Basic computation
zi
zk
i0
i0
Vi
Vk
y i0
Vi
Nik
zik
i
yi0
Nki
k
Vi
Vk
z ki
y i0
a.
k
Vk
b.
i
Vi
yik 0
2
N ik
yki 0
2
k
Vk
Autotransformers are usually installed into electric network loops where the
direction of power flow can be changed. Three-phase transformers and
69
(1.113)
Vi ,n
(1.114)
Vk ,n
wc
ik
wn
Vregulated
wmin
N ik =
V
(cos ik + j sin ik )
100
Vi ,n
V k , regulated
(1.115,a)
(1.116,a)
70
Basic computation
N ik =
where: Vi, Vk
wa
wn
V
V
(cos ik + j sin ik )
100
V i , regulated
(1.115,b)
(1.116,b)
Vk ,n
m z ik
N ik
(1-m) Nik2 z ik
yik 0
y ki 0
Ik
Vk
71
I i = y ik (1 N ik )V i + y ik N ik (V i V k ) I i 0 + I ik
(1.117)
I k = y ik N ik (N ik 1)V k + y ik N ik (V k V i ) I k 0 + I ki
(1.118)
Ii i
Vi
yik (1-Nik )
k Ik
Vk
admittance
y i 0 = Gi 0 jBi 0
manufacturing parameters.
In general, in catalogues the following specific parameters of the transformer
are given:
Sn
is rated power of transformer, respectively autotransformer;
Ui,n
rated phase-to-phase voltage of winding i;
Uk,n
rated phase-to-phase voltage of winding k;
nom
Psc active power losses under short-circuit test;
usc [%] percentage voltage under short-circuit test;
P0
active power losses under no-load test;
72
Basic computation
i0 [%]
u p
wn
Ii, n =
Sn
Sn
=
3Vi , n
3 U i, n
U i2, n
S n2
[]
(1.119)
usc [%]
Vi , n
100
it results:
2
zik =
u [%] U i , n
usc [%] U i , n 1
= sc
[]
100
100 S n
3 Ii, n
(1.120)
Knowing the two terms Rik and zik we can obtain the equivalent reactance of
transformer with expression:
[ ]
(1.121)
Observation: For transformers of large rated power zik >> Rik , so the
reactance X ik is identified by impedance zik .
In the case of autotransformers with tapped windings, in the calculation of the
short-circuit percentage voltage, the tap position is considered:
73
u sc = A(wn wa ) + B(wn wa ) + C
2
P0 =
3 Gi 0 Vi ,2n
U i, n
= Gi 0 U i2, n
= 3 Gi 0
3
Gi 0 =
P0
U i2, n
[S]
(1.122)
yi 0 =
I0
i [%]
i [%] 3 U i , n I i , n i [%] S n
1
[S]
= 0
Ii, n
= 0
=
U i, n
Vi , n 100
100
100 U i2, n
U i2, n
3
(1.123)
(1.124)
Three-winding transformer
In the catalogues of these transformers the following characteristics are
given: rated powers of the three windings SnI, SnII, SnIII, power losses under no-load
nom
conditions P0, rated power losses under short-circuit test Pscnom
I II , Psc II III ,
Pscnom
I III , percentage short-circuit voltages u sc I II [%] , u sc II III [%] , u sc I III [%] .
In calculating the equivalent resistances of transformer windings, the rated
powers of the three windings must be taken into account. Hereby, three types of
transformers are defined [1.1]:
Type a. Case S n I = S n II = S n III
At this type of transformer, the winding resistances are referred to the same
voltage level and are calculated departing from the expression of power losses
under short-circuit test Pscnom , that are maximum at the rated loading of windings I
and II, winding III being no-loaded:
74
Basic computation
Pscnom = 3 R I I I2 + 3 R II I II 2
Pscnom
= Pscnom
6I2
2
U n2
3Un In
= Pscnom
U n2
2 S n2
(1.125)
2
Sn I
3
At this type of transformer, the rated power losses under short-circuit test
nom
Psc are maximum when the transformer is full loaded on the windings I and II,
while the winding III operates under no-load conditions. The winding resistances
get the expression:
R I = R II = RT = Pscnom
U n2
2 S n2
(1.126)
and
R III =
2
RI
3
2
2
S n I , S n III = S n I
3
3
S n II =
2
1
S n I , S n III = S n I
3
3
or
(1.127)
75
2 R III
=
Pscnom = 3 I I2 R I + 3 I II 2 R II + 3 I III
2
= 3 I I2
=
3 I I2 R I
I 3
2 3
RI + 3 I I RI + 3 I RI =
3 2
3 2
I I2 3
4 23
1 11
R I = I I2 R I 3 + 2 + = I I2 R I
+ 3 I I RI + 3
9
2
9 2
2 2
3Un
3Un In
6
U2
Pscnom n2
11
Sn
(1.128)
and
=
R II = R III
2
RI
3
(1.129)
u sc I II [%] U n2
100
Sn
Sn
(1.130)
u sc II III [%] U n2
100
Sn
76
Basic computation
it results:
X I II + X I III X II III
2
X
+ X I II X I III
X II = II III
(1.131)
2
X
+ X II III X I II
X III = I III
2
The conductance and the susceptance of these types of transformers are
calculated in the same manner as for two-winding transformers.
XI =
where: x[%] is
Un
Sng
x[%] U n2
100 S ng
[ ]
(1.132)
jXS
I
E
a.
b.
77
(1.133)
Based on this equation, the phasor diagram is drawn, where the terminal
voltage of the generator is taken as reference (Fig. 1.56) [1.12].
P
E
N C (I=ct)
I
jXS I
Pn
UnIn
CE (E=ct)
UnEn
XS
Un2
XS
a.
O
Qn
b.
Fig. 1.56. Phasor diagram of the synchronous generator under normal steady state.
(1.134)
EnU n
U2
cos n n
XS
XS
(1.135)
Pn = U n I n cos n =
Qn = U n I n sin n =
78
Basic computation
generator operates under a given regime different from the rated one, the previous
enumerated quantities are large scaled, and comprised in a domain constrained by
the loading limits (Fig. 1.57) referred to as loading capability curve of the
synchronous generator. This is important to the power plant operators who are
responsible for proper loading operation of the generator [1.11, 1.13].
Mechanical limit
of turbine (L3)
P
Field current
(L2)
Pmax
Underexcitation
limit (L4)
Minimum active
power limit
Armature
current (L1)
(L5)
Pmin
O
Q
O
Qmin
Leading
Qmax
Lagging
Taking into consideration the complexity of the processes from inside the
synchronous machine, in order to draw the loading capability curve of synchronous
generator, the following hypothesis are considered [1.19]:
Armature resistance R=0 is neglected;
The magnetising characteristic is assumed linear E0 = f (I ex ) ;
Power losses by Joules effect in the armature windings as well as the
power losses in the armature core are neglected;
Synchronous reactance is constant X S = ct.
Starting from these hypotheses, the following operating limits of the
synchronous generator are defined.
a) Armature current limit (L1), Is,max, imposed by the heating limit of stator
windings. This limit is a circle of centre O and of radius UnIn that represents the
geometric locus of the operating points given by the expression:
S n2 = Pn2 + Qn2 =
3UnIn
(1.136)
Taking into account that the apparent power S must not exceed the rated
value, that is S S n , the operating point must be situated inside or on the limit
circle L1.
79
For a value of armature current greater than the limit value, the generator can
operate under secure conditions for a short period of time depending on the
measure of how much the limit value is exceeded.
b) Field current limit (L2), Ir,max. Providers of electric equipments specify
the maximum value of the excitation current Iex, imposed by the heating limit of
rotor windings. Likewise, there is also a limit value of the excitation voltage equal
to the rated one. Also, by secure operating reasons at motor torque shocks a
minimum value of the excitation current is imposed. The limit curve of field
current is a circle of centre O' and of radius proportional to the rated internal
voltage En.
As it can be seen in Figure 1.57, for an active power less than the rated power
Pn, field current limit is more restrictive than the armature current limit. The rated
operating point of the generator is the intersecting point of the two limits L1 and
L2 when the generator is used at maximum from the generated apparent power
point of view.
c) Mechanical limit of turbine (L3), Pmax, imposed by the maximum shaft
torque of turbine. Taking into consideration that, in general, the mechanical power
of turbine is greater than the electric power of generator, this limit is a horizontal
line drawn at an active power value greater than the rated power output Pn of the
generator.
Under leading regime, the operating domain of the synchronous generator is
constrained by another three limits:
core end heating limit which is a curve determined through experimental
tests;
static stability reserve chosen so that a certain value of the internal angle
is maintained;
minimum excitation current limit that ensure a motor torque reserve to the
generator.
The generator operating point near to the three limits previous defined can be
avoided by using the underexcitation limiter so that the 4th limit can be defined:
d) Underexcitation limit (L4). By means of automatic control systems of the
generator, the operating at leading power factor is constrained by the characteristic
shown in Figure 1.57.
e) Minimum active power limit (L5), Pmin. In thermal power plants a minimal
power, Pmin, is required by combustion reasons.
If the operating point is different from the rated one, under lagging regime,
due to the limits L2 and L3, the maximum reactive power is determined with
formula:
Q = Qmax
E U
= n n
X s
P2
1/ 2
U n2
when P Pn
Xs
(1.137)
80
Basic computation
Q = Qmax = S n Pn
2 12
when P Pn
(1.138)
Appendix
Table A1
Average values of the per kilometre parameters of the overhead electric lines
fn
[Hz]
50
(Romania)
60
(USA)
Un
[kV]
220
400
750
230
345
500
765
1100
r0
[/km]
0.070
0.034
0.017
0.050
0.037
0.028
0.012
0.005
x0
[/km]
0.421
0.328
0.275
0.488
0.367
0.325
0.329
0.292
b0
[S/km]
2.920
3.611
4.082
3.371
4.518
5.200
4.978
5.544
ZC
[]
380
300
260
380
285
250
257
230
PN
[MW]
127
535
2160
140
420
1000
2280
5260
Chapter references
[1.1]
[1.2]
[1.3]
[1.4]
[1.5]
[1.6]
[1.7]
[1.8]
[1.9]
[1.10]
[1.11]
Poeat, A., Arie, A., Crian, O., Eremia, M., Alexandrescu, A., Buta, A.
Transportul i distribuia energiei electrice (Electric energy transmission and
distribution), Editura Didactic i Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1981.
Crian, O. Sisteme electroenergetice (Electric power systems), Editura Didactic
i Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1979.
Ionescu, T.G., Pop, O. Ingineria sistemelor de distribuie a energiei (Energy
distribution systems engineering), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1998.
Meslier, F., Persoz, H. Rseaux de transport et dinterconnexion, D070,
Techniques de lIngnieur, Trait de Gnie lectrique, EdF, Paris, 1992.
Carrive, P. Rseaux de distribution. Structure et planification, D4210,
Techniques de lIngnieur, Trait de Gnie lectrique, EdF, Paris, 1992.
Gros, M., Righezza, P. Rseaux de distribution. Exploitation, D4230,
Techniques de lIngnieur, Trait de Gnie lectrique, EdF, Paris, 1992.
Bergen, A.R. Power Systems Analysis, Prentice Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey, 1986.
Elgerd, O.I. Electric energy systems theory: An introduction, McGraw-Hill, 1971.
Bercovici, M., Arie, A.A., Poeat, A. Reele electrice. Calculul electric (Electric
networks. Electric Calculation), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1974.
Grainger, J.T., Stevenson, W.D. Power Systems Analysis, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
Mackowski, J., Bialek, J.W., Bumby, J.R. Power Systems Dynamics and
Stability, John Wiley and Sons, Chichester, New York, 1997.
81
Chapter
84
Basic computation
Pg = ct. and V g = ct .
For the other hypotheses, closer to reality for large power systems, systems of
non-linear equations (of second degree) result. For short electric networks the
linear hypothesis that leads to results closer to reality are used.
The electric lines can be classified, in terms of their length, into short lines
respectively long lines (generally longer than 250 km). The long electric lines
operate at 220 kV, 400 kV or 750 kV and serve for the transmission of the electric
energy. The short electric lines usually operate at voltages below 110 kV being
used for the repartition and distribution of electric energy.
Consider a three-phase electric line that satisfies the conditions of
homogeneity and symmetry as well as symmetric voltages and balanced currents
on all the three phases. Under these conditions it is sufficient to study the operation
of a single phase, with a double-wire circuit, where the going conductor represents
85
the conductor of the phase, with the service parameters, and the return conductor is
a fictitious neutral conductor, which ensures the closing of the current.
For the short overhead lines, powered at low nominal voltages, the intensities
of the shunt currents the capacitive currents as well as the leakage ones have
low values as compared with those of the conduction current that passes through
the phase conductor. Therefore, in the case of short lines, the shunt currents can be
neglected and the corresponding equivalent circuit is a dipole with lumped
parameters (Fig. 2.1,a), where the shunt admittances have been neglected. For
more accurate results, the equivalent (or T) circuit, with lumped parameters, is
used (Fig. 2.1,b).
Phase conductor
Phase conductor
Z
Y
2
Neutral conductor
a.
Z
Y
2
Neutral conductor
b.
For the underground electric lines, powered at high nominal voltages, even
for small length cases, the leading leakage currents should be taken into account so
a proper circuit, either of lumped or uniformly distributed parameters, is chosen.
86
Basic computation
+j
IA A
Z=R+jX
VA
IB=iB
VB
Ia
B
VA
VB
A R
I
-jIr
iB=IB=I
VAB
jX
I
VA
VAB
DVAB
a.
b.
Its projections on the two axes correspond to the segments AD = VAB and
CD = VAB , and represent the longitudinal and the transversal components of the
voltage drop, having the following expressions:
VAB = RI cos + XI sin = RI a + XI r
(2.2)
V = XI cos RI sin = XI a RI r
(2.3)
where: I a = I cos is active component of the current passing through the line;
I r = I cos reactive component of the current passing through the line;
R
ohm resistance of the line;
X
inductive reactance of the line.
Consider the circle sector of radius equal to the supply voltage VA , which
intersects the horizontal axis in the point E. The algebraic difference between the
voltages magnitudes (or the effective values)
87
DVAB = VA VB
(2.4)
If the phase angle has great values, the voltage drop can be determined
directly, with the expression:
DVAB = VA VB =
Since VAB << VB + VAB , if the expansion of the square root by means of
Newtons binomial theorem is performed, the voltage drop expression become:
DVAB VAB
4
1 VAB
1 ( VAB )
+
+L
2 VB + VAB 8 (VB + VAB )3
(2.5)
For the lines powered at medium voltages, only the first two terms of the
relation (2.5) can be hold, with good accuracy. Taking into account the expressions
(2.2) and (2.3) and the fact that VAB for normal operating conditions of the line
should not exceed a few percentages out of the voltage VB , the term in the
denominator of the expression (2.5) can be neglected, resulting:
DVAB VAB +
1 (VAB )
2 VB
or
DVAB RI cos + XI sin +
( XI cos RI sin )2
2VB
(2.6)
where the voltage at the receiving end of the line ( V B ) is unknown. Therefore, to
simplify, the voltage V B will be approximated with the line-to-neutral nominal
voltage Vn . For the single-phase system, consisting of two conductors, Vn = U n / 2 ,
and for the three-phase system Vn = U n / 3 .
In this case, the expression of the voltage drop becomes:
DV AB RI cos + XI sin +
( XI cos RI sin )2
2 Vn
(2.7)
For electric lines powered at low voltage, the following expression can be
used, with good accuracy:
88
Basic computation
DV AB V AB = RI cos + XI sin
(2.8)
If the loads are replaced with their single-phase active and reactive powers,
then the expressions of the line-to-neutral voltage drops become:
DV AB
V AB
RP0 + XQ0
Vn
(2.9)
VAB
XP0 RQ0
Vn
(2.10)
(2.11)
In terms of the total powers P and Q carried on the line, the powers
P0 = P / 2 and Q0 = Q / 2 for the single-phase system respectively P0 = P / 3 and
Q0 = Q / 3 for the three-phase system are used.
The relationship between the phasor voltage drop V AB and the longitudinal
and transversal components, VAB and VAB , is defined as:
V AB = VAB + jVAB
(2.12)
Therefore, the voltage drop DVAB given by (2.6) can be expressed in terms
of the components of the phasor voltage drop:
DVAB = Re{V AB } +
1
(Im{V AB })2
2Vn
(2.13)
Once the value of the voltage drop DVAB is obtained, it should be compared
with the maximum admissible phase-to-neutral voltage drop Vadm :
DVAB Vadm =
%
Vn
100
(2.14)
In order to determine the phase shift between the phasor V A and phasor V B ,
which for short lines is usually relatively small, the fundamental phasor diagram of
the voltage drops (Fig. 2.2,b) is also used:
tan =
XI a RI r
XI RI r
V AB
CD
=
=
a
OD VB + V AB VB + RI a + XI r
Vn
(2.15)
Note that between the phase-to-neutral voltage drop DVAB and the phase-tophase voltage drop DU AB , in the case of the single-phase system, there is the
following relationship:
DU AB = 2 DVAB
(2.16,a)
89
(2.16,b)
(2.17,a)
U AB = 3 VAB
(2.17,b)
P
QB RPB + XQB RPB + XQB
U AB = 3 R B + X
=
UB
Un
3U B
3U B
U AB = 3 X
PB
3U B
DU AB
(2.18,a)
(2.18,b)
=
UB
Un
3U B
(2.19)
Next, consider the general case where a three-phase radial line supplies n
concentrated loads (Fig. 2.3).
Zn
Z2
A
Z1
I1
z2=r2+jx2
z1=r1+jx1
VA
I2
i1
In
zn=rn+jxn
i2
in V
n
In Figure 2.3 the following notations have been used: i k (k = 1, 2,, n) for
nodal currents, I k (k = 1, 2, , n) for the currents flowing through the line
sections, z k = rk + jxk for the impedances of the line sections, respectively Z k
90
Basic computation
(k = 1,2, , n) for the cumulated impedances of the line sections between the
source node and each other node.
On the basis on the Kirchhoffs first theorem, written for each node, the
currents passed through the line sections can be expressed in terms of the nodal
currents:
I1 =
; I 2 = I 1 i1 and so on.
k =1
zk I k =
k =1
k =1
k =1
(rk I ka + xk I kr ) + j (xk I ka rk I kr )
(2.20,a)
and
V An =
Z k ik =
k =1
k =1
k =1
(2.20,b)
respectively.
Note that the product Z k i k can be identified with the electric moment of a
load related to the supplying end of the line.
Taking into account that the electric network loads are expressed in terms of
the active and reactive powers, the expression of the phase-to-neutral voltage drop
DVAn , for n loads, becomes:
n
( rk Pk 0 + xk Qk 0 ) ( xk Pk 0 rk Qk 0 )
= k =1
+ k =1
Vn
2Vn3
n
DVAn
(2.21)
+
r
P
x
Q
( k k k k ) ( xk Pk rk Qk )
= k =1
+ k =1
3
Un
2U n
n
DU An
(2.22)
r0
DVAn =
l P
k k0
91
+ x0
k =1
l Q
k
k =1
Vn
k0
n
n
x0 lk Pk 0 r0 lk Qk 0
k =1
+ k =1
2Vn3
(2.23)
respectively
n
n
x
l
P
r
lk Qk
r0 lk Pk + x0 lk Qk 0
k k
0
k =1
k =1
= k =1
+ k =1
3
Un
2U n
n
DU An
(2.24)
(2.25)
92
Basic computation
where: I m
I0
Zm
Z0
Ia
Ic
O V0
Ib
Vb
Vc
Vc
Vb
Ic+Ib
Vc
Vb
l I
k k
+ r0L0 I 0
(2.26)
k =1
lk Pk 0
P
+ r0L0 0
Vn
k =1 Vn
93
represent ramifications from a three-phase line with four conductors that supply
single-phase loads.
Assume the case of a two-phase line with two active conductors a, b and
one neutral conductor loaded with equal currents in phase with the voltages. The
phasor diagram of this line with active balanced loads is shown in Figure 2.5.
Va
Ic
V0
Vc
Vc
Vc
Ib
I0
Vb
Vb
Vb
For unity power factor, the voltage drops due to the currents I b and I c are:
V b = Rb I b
V c = Rc I c
The current passing through the neutral conductor corresponds to the
geometrical sum of the currents from the b and c phases, and give rise to a voltage
drop V 0 = R0 I 0 , which also represents the displacement voltage of the neutral
point from O to O'. From the graphical design results that the effective value of the
current passing through the neutral conductor is equal to the value of the currents
from the other phases, that is I 0 = I b = I c . Taking this into account, the total
voltage drop on the phase conductor b (or c) and on the neutral conductor has the
following value:
Vm = Vb + V0 cos 60 = r0
l I
k k
k =1
+ r0L0
I0
2
lk Pk 0
LP
+ r0 0 0
2Vn
V
n
k =1
In the case of the single-phase ramification, the phase conductor and the
neutral conductor have the same cross-sectional area because the current from the
94
Basic computation
ramification is the same through both conductors. The voltage drop on the going
and return conductors is:
Vm = 2 r0
lk I k = 2 r0
k =1
lk Pk 0
k =1 Vn
Z
Z2
Z1
IA
IB
k
A
VA
I2
I1
i1
Ik
Ik
IB
VB
i2 ... ik ... in
Vk
Z1
IA
A
VA
Z2
I2
I1
i1
a.
k
IA A
VA
i1
B IB
VB
...
In In+1
in-1 in in+1=-IB VB
b.
Z
IAB
IA A
VA
i2
B IB
iB
iA
VB
d.
Fig. 2.6. Electric circuit for calculation of current flows and of voltage drops into
short electric lines powered from two sources: a. initial electric circuit;
b. considering of source from node B as a load powered with a negative current;
c. representation of the network powered from both ends as two radial
networks; d. electric circuit with charges thrown to nodes.
95
IB
(2.27)
k =1
n +1
k ik
(2.28)
k =1
Knowing the value of phasor voltage drop V AB , one may want to determine
the current i n +1 = I B . Taking this into consideration, the equation (2.28) can be
written as:
V AB =
k ik
+ Z n +1 i n +1
(2.28')
k =1
where Z n +1 = Z is the total impedance of the line. From the relationship (2.28') the
calculation expression of the current I B = i n +1 can be determined:
n
IB =
k ik
k =1
V A V B
Z
(2.29,a)
In a same manner, the calculation formula for the current intensity IA can be
established:
n
IA =
'
k ik
k =1
Z
'
V A V B
Z
(2.29,b)
Taking into account that Z k + Z k = Z (Fig. 2.6,b) we see that the formulae
(2.29,a) and (2.29,b) verify the relationship (2.27).
Once the currents I A and I B are calculated, the current flows I 1 , I 2 , , I n
into the considered network can be determined and thus we seek for node k of
96
Basic computation
minimum voltage. Analysing the expressions (2.29,a) and (2.29,b) it can be noticed
that each of them has two terms:
'
I A = i A + I AB ;
'
I B = i B I AB
(2.30)
where:
'
iA =
1
Z
'
'
iB =
Z k ik ;
k =1
I AB =
1
Z
(2.31)
k ik
k =1
1
(V V B )
Z A
(2.32)
Observations:
'
'
The terms i A and i B depend only upon the values of the load currents and
'
'
supplying nodes A and B respectively. The currents i A and i B substitute the load
currents i k . It is as if the currents had been moved at the supplying nodes A and B
'
(Fig. 2.6,d). Thus, the current i B represent the sum of electric moments Z k i k , in
relation with node A, divided to the total impedance Z of the line. Likewise, the
'
' '
current i A represents the sum of electric moments Z k i k , in relation with node B,
divided to the total impedance Z of the line.
The additional term I AB determined only by the difference between the
voltages applied at nodes A and B, which does not depend on the load currents,
represents the balancing current or no-load current, through the branch considered
between nodes A and B. If V A V B , the current I AB exists even when the line
operates under no-load conditions. This balancing current cause, apart from
changes in load values, overloading of a power source compared with the other,
thus increasing the energy losses. Therefore, in exploitation it required, as much as
possible, the existence of the same voltage at the supplying nodes.
If the loads are expressed in terms of power and the power losses on the line
sections are not taken into consideration S 0 being the apparent complex power
carried on a phase and S = 3S 0 being the power carried by the three-phase system
then from the expressions (2.29,a) and (2.29,b) the approximate distribution of
the powers can be obtained:
n
S0A =
'
0k
Zk
k =1
V V B
+ A
Vn
Z
(2.33,a)
S 0B =
0k
k =1
Zk
V V B
A
Vn
Z
(2.33,b)
97
98
Basic computation
Source
node
Derivation
node
Sub-network 1
Sub-network 2
End
node
In operation
branch
Out of service
branch
Fig. 2.7. Notations used for distribution networks with meshed topology.
The following assumptions are considered for the modelling of the electric
networks elements [2.3]:
the three phase voltages form a positive-sequence symmetrical system;
the currents form a balanced three-phase system;
the network parameters are homogeneous, constant in time and
independent of the supply voltage or currents;
the network operates under steady state conditions.
Under these conditions, the positive-sequence one-line diagram is used for
the load flow calculation. The electric lines (overhead and underground cables) can
be represented by equivalent circuits with lumped parameters. Taking into
account the unidirectional character of the power flows, the transformers can be
represented by equivalent circuit with transformer operator (see Figure 1.50,
section 1.2.3.2).
In the absence of distributed generation, for the load flow calculation of
radial electric networks, only two of the three types of nodes existing in complex
meshed networks are considered:
load nodes, modelled through complex powers, obtained by combining
three components [2.1]:
S = ( Pc + jQc ) + 3 ( I ac + jI rc )U + ( Gc + jBc )U 2
(2.34)
99
1
S
5
4
6
a.
10
13
11
12
b.
Fig. 2.8. The steps of the load flow calculation by means of the backward/forward sweep:
a. calculation of the currents through branches; b. calculation of the nodal voltages.
[Y nn ][U n ] = S *n
*
U n for the non-linear model, the voltages of the independent
nodes are obtained, and finally the powers (currents) flowing through branches are
calculated. Using the backward/forward sweep, the unknown quantities are
simultaneous obtained after performing the two steps.
100
Basic computation
The load flow solution, by the backward/forward sweep, for the linear
network model (the loads represented through constant currents, the lines and
transformers modelled through series impedances) is obtained processing only
once the two steps. In the case of the non-linear model of the network (the loads
represented in the form given in (2.34), the electric lines modelled by equivalent
circuits, and the power transformers by circuits), the load flow solution is
obtained by iterative calculations. The convergence criterion consists in comparing
the modulus of the complex power at the source node or the voltage magnitude at
the load nodes between two successive iterations.
The load flow calculation algorithm using the backward/forward sweep
consists in the following steps [2.12]:
1. Ordering the network (indexing the ingoing node and ingoing branch
for each load node) and setting the voltages at the load nodes to the
value of the sources node voltage (S):
(0)
U k = U S , k = 1, 2,K, n, k S
(2.35)
Sk
( p)
Ik =
3U (k
(2.36)
p 1)*
1 ( p)
( p)
( p)
I ik =
I kj
(2.37)
Ik +
N ik
jNext ( k )
( p)
( p)
U ik = 3 Z ik I ik
(2.38)
(2.39)
101
5. Calculation of the power injected into the network by the source node:
( p)
S S = 3U S
*( p )
(2.40)
I Sj
jNext ( S )
p
p 1
6. If the network model is linear or if p > 1 and S (S ) S (S ) then go
PA+jQA
...
k-1
z1
UA
3
Pk-1+jQk-1
Pk+jQk
zk
s1
k+1
Pk+1+jQk+1
Pn+jQn
zk+1
sk-1
sk
sk+1
sn
a.
Pgk+jQgk
A
VA=
UA
3
PA+jQA
...
k-1
z1
Pk-1+jQk-1
zk
s1
Pk+jQk
sk-1
k+1
Pk+1+jQk+1
Pn+jQn
zk+1
sk
sk+1
sn
b.
Fig. 2.9. Distribution electric network:
a. simple radial network b. radial network with one distributed generator.
In the forward sweep, the state quantities Pk , Qk and Vk of the node k are
used to calculate the state quantities at the node k + 1 using the set of equations:
Pk2 + Qk2
Pk2 + Qk2
p
Q
Q
x
qk +1
;
Pk +1 = Pk rk +1
k +1
k +1
k
k +1
3Vk2
3Vk2
2
2
3V 2 = 3V 2 2 r P + x Q + r 2 + x 2 Pk + Qk
(
)
+
+
+
+
+
1
1
1
1
1
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
3Vk2
(2.41)
102
Basic computation
Considering that the state quantities PA , QA and VA at the node A are known
or estimated, the state quantities at the other nodes can be calculated by successive
applications of equations (2.41) starting from the first node and going toward to the
node n.
In the backward sweep, the state quantities Pk , Qk and Vk at the node k are
used to calculate the state variables at the node k 1 , using the set of equations:
Pk'2 + Qk'2
Pk'2 + Qk'2
+ pk +1 ; Qk 1 = Qk + xk
+ qk +1
Pk 1 = Pk + rk
3Vk2
3Vk2
'2
'2
3V 2 = 3V 2 + 2 r P ' + x Q ' + r 2 + x 2 Pk + Qk
k
k k
k k
k
k
k 1
3Vk2
) (
(2.42)
103
PU nodes, to which the specified quantities are the generated active power
Pgsp and voltage magnitude U sp , and the unknown quantities are the
generated reactive power Qg and the voltage phase ;
U nodes, to which the specified quantities are the components of the
sp
complex voltage U (magnitude U sp and phase sp ), and the unknown
quantities are the generated active Pg and reactive Qg powers.
In order to consider these types of nodes in the backward/forward sweep for
the radial electric networks which include distributed generators, some
specifications and adaptations are necessary. Therefore, the distributed generators
should be modelled by PQ nodes, where the specified quantities Pgsp and Qgsp are
considered as being components of a constant complex power with negative sign
S = ( Pgsp + jQgsp ) , because the backward/forward sweep, presented above, cannot
be applied for the PU and U nodes. This inconvenience is due to the fact that for
these types of nodes, one or both components of the voltage are specified, which is
not appropriate to the backward/forward sweep algorithm where the voltage
components are specified only at the source node. Starting from the voltage of this
node, chosen as reference, the voltages of the others nodes are calculated in terms
of the voltage drops on the line sections. However, in order to apply the
backward/forward sweep algorithm for the PU and U nodes, some adaptations are
required, which are based on the decoupling of the four state quantities, i.e. the
interdependences P and Q U, respectively. These adaptations are presented
below.
As previously explained, the PU nodes are characterized by the specification of
the generated active power Pgsp and the voltage magnitude U sp . In the load flow
calculation process, by backward/forward sweep, these nodes are assimilated with
PQ type nodes. The active and reactive powers are equal to the specified values
Pgsp and Qg , considered with negative sign. To maintain the nodal voltage at the
specified value U sp , the interdependence relationship between the voltage and the
reactive power is used, i.e. appropriate change of the reactive power Qg , between
the limits Qgmin and Qgmax , is adopted. Depending on the model used for the nodes,
two situations could be encountered:
in the case of modelling by constant currents, the reactive component of
the complex current I gr is determined based on the condition that the
nodal voltage should be equal to the specified value U sp [2.24]; for the
backward/forward sweep algorithm, the nodal current is considered as
sp
sp
I = I ga
+ jI gr , where I ga
represents the specified value of the
104
Basic computation
(0)
min
max
capability limits Qg,k
and Qg,k
:
min
calc
max
Qg( p, k) = Qgcalc
, k if Qg , k Qg , k Qg , k
( p)
min
min
calc
Qg , k = Qg ,k if Qg ,k < Qg , k
max
calc
Qg( p, k) = Qgmax
, k if Qg , k > Qg , k
(2.43)
6. Calculate the new value of the complex power at the node k by formula
There are several possibilities to calculate the value of the generated reactive
sp
power Qgcalc
, k necessary to achieve the specified voltage U k at the node k, i.e.:
105
Qgcalc
,k
sp
k
( p 1)
= Qg , k
U k
Qk
( p)
p2
A
VA
k-1
z2
s1
s2
z1
a.
s1
s2
b.
s2
k-1
sk-1
zn
sk
Ik-1,k
k' k''
sk' sk''
VB
n
zn
sk
zk
B
zn+1
sn
zk
sk-1
z2
s1
k-1
k
zk
sk-1
z2
z1
VA
1
z1
B
zn+1
sn
VB
n
zn
B
zn+1
sn
c.
Fig. 2.10. Calculation steps for a simple meshed electric network.
VB
106
Basic computation
To apply the backward/forward sweep for the load flow calculation of this
network, one of the loops nodes is split (for example node k) obtaining two radial
sub-networks [2.14]. After splitting the node k, we require that the total consumed
power at the two resulted nodes k and k to be constant and equal to the power at
the node k before splitting:
s k ' + s k" = s k
(2.44)
I k 1,k =
V k 1 V k
Z AB
(2.45)
where Z AB is the cumulated impedance between nodes A and B, and the voltages
V k 1 and V k correspond to the operating state when the branch between the nodes
k 1 and k is in out of service state (Fig. 2.10,b). These voltages are calculated
by successively applying of the backward/forward sweep for the sub-networks
supplied from the source nodes A and B, respectively.
The load flow calculation is iteratively performed, by setting at each iteration
the power consumed at each node resulted after splitting and by calculating the
load flow for each radial sub-network. The iterative process goes on until the
difference between the voltages of the two nodes k and k is less than an specified
value .
The steps followed for load flow calculation of a simple meshed network are:
1. One of the loops branches is switched to out of service state (for
instance, the branch between the nodes k 1 and k, Fig. 2.10,b), and for
the new configuration the load flow is calculated by means of the
backward/forward sweep;
2. The node k is split into nodes k and k and a new branch is introduced
between nodes k 1 and k, having the same parameters as the branch
between the nodes k 1 and k (Fig. 2.10,c). The voltages and the
powers consumed at the split nodes are set to:
V k ' = V k 1 ; V k '' = V k
s k ' = 0;
s k '' = s k
(2.46)
I k ', k '' =
V k ' - V k ''
Z AB
n +1
where Z AB =
i=1
(2.47)
107
(2.48)
5. The load flow is calculated for the network configuration in Figure 2.10,c;
6. If V k ' V k '' > then go to step 3, else return to the initial configuration
(Fig. 2.10,a) considering V k = V k '' and I k 1,k = I k 1,k ' .
When the network has a complex meshed configuration, the load flow
calculation by means of the backward/forward sweep is performed by introducing a
number of supplementary nodes (resulted after splitting) equal to the number of
loops. At each step, the equality of voltages at the split nodes for one single loop
has to be achieved. The calculation is repeated until the differences of the voltage
magnitudes at the split nodes in all loops is less than the specified value .
the complex powers at the loads: s 2 = 0 kVA , s 3 = ( 250 + j150 ) kVA and
s 4 = ( 75 + j 50 ) kVA .
The one-line diagram of the electric network and the branch parameters are shown in
Figure 2.11,b.
The voltages at the load nodes, and current flows for this network have to be
determined.
For simplicity, the phase-to-phase voltages are used. The initial values of voltages at
the load nodes are:
(0)
U (0)
2 = U 3 = U 1 = 20 kV
U (0)
4 = N 42 U 1 = 0.02 20 = 0.4 kV
Only the calculation of the first iteration is detailed below, the results of the whole
iterative process being presented in Table 2.1.
108
Basic computation
S1 1
s3
s4
a.
I12 (1.4+j0.1)
S1 1
I120
j30 S
I23 (2.1+j0.15)
2
I210
j30 S
I230
j45 S
j45 S
i3 3
I320 s3=(250+j150) kVA
I240
(0.8-j8.72) S
I24
N42=0.02
I'24
(0.028+j0.058)
4
s4 =(75+j50) kVA
b.
s*3
3U 3(0)*
(1)
I 320
=y
U 3(0)
320
= ( 7.217 j 4.330 ) A
20 103
3
= j 0.520 A
(1)
(1)
I (1)
23 = i 3 + I 320 = ( 7.217 j 3.810 ) A
s*4
3U (0)*
4
( 75 j50 ) 103
3 0.4 103
= (108.253 j 72.169 ) A
(1)
I '(1)
24 = i 4 = (108.253 j 72.169 ) A
'(1)
I (1)
24 = N 42 I 24 = 0.02 (108.253 j 72.169 ) = ( 2.165 j1.443 ) A
109
i (1)
2 =
3U (0)*
2
I (1)
210 = y
I (1)
230 = y
I (1)
240 = y
=0A
U (0)
2
210
3
U (0)
2
230
3
U (0)
2
240
= j 30 106
= j 45 106
20 103
3
20 103
3
= j 0.346 A
= j 0.520 A
20 103
3
= ( 0.009 j 0.101) A
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
= i (1)
I 12
2 + I 23 + I 230 + I 24 + I 240 + I 210 = ( 9.391 j 4.488 ) A
Forward sweep
Calculation of the voltage at the node 2
(1)
(1)
U 12
= 3 z12 I 12
= 3 (1.4 + j 0.1)( 9.391 j 4.488 ) 103 = ( 0.024 j 0.009 ) kV
(1)
U (1)
2 = U 1 U 12 = 20 ( 0.024 j 0.009 ) = (19.976 + j 0.009 ) kV
U1
120
= j 30 106
(1)
(1)
S 1(1) = 3U 1 I 12
+ I 120
20 103
3
= j 0.346 A
Table 2.1
Results of the iterative process
Quantity
0
i3
1
A
Iteration 1
2
7.217 j 4.330
Iteration 2
3
7.240 j 4.334
Iteration 3
4
7.240 j 4.334
I 320
j 0.520
0.001 + j 0.518
0.001 + j 0.518
I 23
7.217 j 3.810
7.241 j 3.816
7.241 j 3.816
110
Basic computation
2
108.253 j 72.169
3
113.498 j 72.728
I 24
2.165 j1.443
2.270 j1.455
2.274 j1.455
i2
I '24 = i 4
I 210
j 0.346
j 0.346
j 0.346
I 230
j 0.520
j 0.519
j 0.519
I 240
0.009 j 0.101
0.009 j 0.101
0.009 j 0.101
I 12
9.391 j 4.488
9.520 j 4.507
9.524 j 4.507
U 12
kV
0.024 j 0.009
0.024 j 0.009
0.024 j 0.009
U2
kV
19.976 + j 0.009
19.976 + j 0.009
19.976 + j 0.009
U 23
kV
0.027 j 0.012
0.027 j 0.012
0.027 j 0.012
U3
kV
19.949 j 0.021
19.949 j 0.021
19.949 j 0.021
U 24
kV
0.013 + j 0.007
0.013 + j 0.008
0.013 + j 0.008
U4
kV
0.386 j 0.007
0.386 j 0.008
0.386 j 0.008
S1
kVA
325.314 + 143.483
329.782 + 144.141
329.921 + 144.141
S1
kVA
355.551
359.907
360.021
Notes: The load flow results were achieved after 3 iterations by applying the
backward/forward sweep. The difference between voltages at the last two iterations is less
than 0.001 kV, and the difference between apparent powers at the source node is 0.1 kVA.
The same results were achieved using Seidel-Gauss (12 iterations) and Newton-Raphson
(3 iterations) methods.
111
s1
s2
l1 = l2
Z2
Z1
Z1
VA
i1
Z
B
VA
VB
i2
iA
iB
a.
VB
b.
Fig. 2.12. Electric network diagram for the throwing of the loads at the nodes:
a. initial circuit; b. transfigured circuit.
For instance, to throw at the ends the two currents i1 and i 2 from Figure
2.12, a, two loads i A and i B applied at the lines ends in the transformed network
(Fig. 2.12,a) will be determined, such that the same voltage drop as in the initial
network is obtained:
V AB = Z 1 i1 + Z 2 i 2 = Z i B
'
'
V BA = Z 1 i1 + Z 2 i 2 = Z i A
from where it results:
n
iA =
'
Z 1 i1
+
Z
'
Z 2 i2
'
k ik
k =1
(2.49)
Z i + Z 2 i2
iB = 1 1
=
Z
'
k ik
k =1
Z
'
'
112
Basic computation
In the particular case of moving only one load, the consumed current
component, moved at one of the ends, is proportional to the impedance of the line
from the point of consumption to the other end, and inversely proportional to the
line impedance.
From the expression (2.49) results that load throwing at the nodes is
performed according to the rule determined for distribution of the currents
(powers) in the case of the networks supplied from two ends, that is considering the
electric moments of the loads referred to the supplying points. For the case of the
homogenous network, in the relationships of transformation, the impedances are
substituted with the corresponding lengths.
c) Composing of several branches of different supplying voltages which
debit into a node, in a single equivalent branch. Consider the branches A, B, C
of an electric network that has different phase-to-neutral voltages V A , V B , V C at
the ends and debits into a node O (Fig. 2.13).
VA
A
VE
IE
IA
YE
YA
O
IE
VB
IB YB
Y
VC I C
C
B
VO
IE = I A + IB + IC
(2.50)
(V E V O )Y E = (V A V O )Y A + (V B V O )Y B + (V C V O )Y C
or
V E Y E V O Y E = V A Y A + V B Y B + V C Y C V O (Y A + Y B + Y C )
Equating the left and right terms, obtain:
Y E =Y A +Y B +YC =
Y
k =1
respectively
113
n
V Y +V BY B +V CY C
=
VE = A A
Y A +YB +YC
kYk
k =1
n
(2.51)
k
k =1
IB = IE
YB
+ (V B V E )Y B
YE
(2.52,b)
IC = I E
YC
+ (V C V E )Y C
YE
(2.52,c)
It is obvious that if the voltages of the branches are equal, the relations are
still correct, with the observation that the voltage of the equivalent branch is equal
to that of the component branches. In this case, in expressions (2.52) the second
term of the right side will disappear.
d) Star delta transformation. Another structure, which comes as a subassembly into a meshed network, is the star structure, in the simplest case powered
from three nodes (Fig. 2.14).
The condition of equivalencing of the two circuits (Fig. 2.14,a,b): the
impedances measured at the pairs of terminals 1 2, 2 3 and 3 1 of the starshape network must be equal to the impedances measured at the same pairs of
terminals of the delta-shape network:
Z1 + Z 2 =
Z 12 (Z 23 + Z 31 )
Z (Z + Z 12 )
Z (Z + Z 23 )
; Z 3 + Z 1 = 31 12
; Z 2 + Z 3 = 23 31
Z 12 + Z 23 + Z 31
Z 12 + Z 23 + Z 31
Z 12 + Z 23 + Z 31
114
Basic computation
I1
I1
1
Z1
Z31
I3
I31
Z2
Z3
3
I12
Z12
I23
I2
I3
3
Z23
a.
I2
b.
Fig. 2.14. Star and delta circuits.
Z3 :
Z1 =
Z 12 Z 13
Z 12 + Z 23 + Z 31
Z2 =
Z 23 Z 12
Z 12 + Z 23 + Z 31
; Z3 =
Z 31 Z 23
Z 12 + Z 23 + Z 31
(2.53)
Z 23 , Z 31 obtain:
Z 12 = Z 1 + Z 2 +
Z1 Z 2
;
Z3
Z 23 = Z 2 + Z 3 +
Z2 Z3
Z1
; Z 31 = Z 1 + Z 3 +
Z1 Z 3
Z2
(2.54)
In terms of admittances, from the equations (2.53) and (2.54) we obtain the
transformation relationships of a delta-shape network into a star-shape network
with three branches:
Y 1 = Y 12 + Y 13 +
Y 12 Y 13
;
Y 23
Y 2 = Y 12 + Y 23 +
Y 12 Y 23
Y Y
; Y 3 = Y 31 + Y 23 + 31 23 (2.53')
Y 31
Y 12
Y 1Y 2
;
Y1 + Y 2 + Y 3
Y 23 =
Y 2Y 3
Y 3Y1
; Y 31 =
Y1 + Y 2 + Y 3
Y1 + Y 2 + Y 3
(2.54')
115
I1star 1
Y1
V1
Instar
Yn
n
Vn
I1p 1
2 I2star
Y2
I1n
Y3
VO
V2
I3star
I12
I1
Y12
2 I2p
Y1n
V3
3 I3p
Inp
a.
b.
Fig. 2.15. The general transformation of a network from star into a polygon:
a. star-shape network; b. polygon-shape network.
For instance, for the current injected at the node 1 into the polygon-shape
network:
I 1 p = I 12 + I 13 + K + I 1n = Y 12 (V 1 V 2 ) + Y 13 (V 1 V 3 ) + K + Y 1n (V 1 V n ) (2.55)
respectively, into the star-shape network:
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
I 1 star = Y 1 (V 1 V O ) = n1 2 (V 1 V 2 ) + n1 3 (V 1 V 3 ) + K + n1 n (V 1 V n )
Yk
Yk
Yk
k =1
k =1
k =1
(2.56)
where
n
VO =
kV k
k =1
n
k =1
k =1
Y ij =
Y iY j
n
(2.57)
k =1
Notice that the polygon has not all its branches independent. Thus,
considering the transformed admittance between nodes i and j, given by (2.57), and
dividing Y ij to Y i , where:
Y i =
Y iY
n
Y
k =1
116
Basic computation
Y ij
Y i
Therefore, it results that:
Y1j
Y 1
Y2j
Y 2
Yj
Y
=K=
Y nj
Y n
Yj
Y
Now, we can draw the conclusion that any complete polygon, having all
branches independent from each other, cannot be transformed into a star. The
triangle (delta) is the only polygon that allows this transformation, having all
branches dependent from each other.
e) Electric networks equivalencing by using Kron elimination. In some
cases, of interest is to hold only certain nodes in calculation (for instance: 1, 2
which are source nodes), whereas the other non-essential nodes (passive nodes,
loads passivized through Z=ct.), since not of interest, are eliminated/reduced
through star-delta transformation, taking benefit of the zero value of the current
injected into the non-essential nodes (for instance: nodes 3 and 4) (Fig. 2.16,b).
1
Y42
Y14
4
Y43
3
a.
Y42
Y14
Y43
Y30
2
b.
3
0
2
4
0
c.
d.
For the electric network from Figure 2.16,b, where node 4 was non-essential,
and node 3 became passive, by replacing the consumption with an impedance
Z=ct., the equation from the nodal voltages method) becomes:
Y 14 U 1
I 1 Y 11
I
Y 22
Y 24 U 2
2 =
I 3 = 0
Y 33 Y 34 U 3
I 4 = 0 Y 41 Y 42 Y 43 Y 44 U 4
)
(2.58)
117
In the first stage the node 3 is eliminated. In this regard, from the equation
corresponding to the current from node 3, where I 3 = 0 , U 3 is obtained and then
substituted in the equation of the current from node 4, resulting:
I 4 = 0 = Y 41U 1 + Y 42 U 2 + Y 43U 3 + Y 44 U 4 =
Y
= Y 41U 1 + Y 42 U 2 + Y 43 34 U 4 + Y 44 U 4
Y 33
or
Y Y
Y 41U 1 + Y 42U 2 + Y 44 34 43 U 4 = 0
Y 33
It can be noticed that by eliminating node 3, the term 44 has been modified:
'
Y 44 = Y 44
Y 34 Y 43
Y 33
resulting the reduction of the number of equations with one unit (Fig. 2.16,c):
Y 14 U 1
I 1 Y 11
I =
Y 22 Y 24 U 2
2
I 4 = 0 Y 41 Y 42 Y '44 U 4
(2.59)
Next, in order to eliminate the node 4, U 4 is obtained from the new equation
corresponding to it and substituted in the first two equations in (2.59):
Y Y
Y Y
I 1 = Y 11 14 ' 41 U 1 14 ' 42 U 2
Y 44
Y 44
Y Y
Y Y
I 2 = 24 ' 41 U 1 + Y 22 24 ' 42 U 2
Y 44
Y 44
or
'
'
I 1 Y 11
Y 12 U 1
I = '
'
2 Y 21 Y 22 U 2
(2.60)
where:
'
Y 11 = Y 11
'
Y 21 =
Y 14 Y 41
'
Y 44
Y 24 Y 41
'
Y 44
'
; Y 12 =
'
Y 14 Y 42
; Y 22 = Y 22
'
Y 44
Y 24 Y 42
'
Y 44
118
Basic computation
[I r ] =
where:
[U r ] =
U1
for the preserved nodes, and
U 2
(2.61)
I3
,
I 4
[I e ] =
[U e ] =
U3
for the nodes that are being eliminated.
U 4
[I r ] = [A][U r ] + [B][U e ]
[I e = 0] = [C ][U r ] + [D][U e ]
If [U e ] is expressed from latter equation and substituted into the previous
equation, it results:
[Y rr ] = [A] [B][D]1[C ]
(2.62)
119
External
System
E
Because the state of the external sub-network is not fully known, its reducing
or equivalencing is performed. The matrix equation from the nodal voltages
method applied in the divided network is:
[Y EE ]
Y
[ FE ]
[ 0]
[Y EF ] [0]
[Y FF ] [Y FI ]
[Y IF ] [Y II ]
U E [ I E ]
U F = [ I F ]
U I [ I I ]
(2.63)
[ S ] = U d I * = U d ([Y nn ]U n )
(2.64)
(U E )
U d =
(U F )d
(U I )d
S F =
S I
(U F )d
(U I )d
Y *
EE
Y *FE
[ 0]
Y *EF
[0]
Y *FF Y *FI
*
*
Y IF Y II
(2.65)
U *
E
U * F (2.66)
*
U I
Note:
If [A] is a square matrix with only diagonal terms, [X] being a vector,
x1
0
[A] =
L
0 L 0
x2 L 0
;
L L L
0 0 xn
x1
x
[X ] = 2 and noting through [Xd] the diagonal matrix
M
xn
120
Basic computation
whose elements are those of the matrix [A], it can be shown that the vector
x1 y1
x y
[W ] = 2 2 can be rewritten as
xn y n
S F = (U F )d [Y FE ] U E + [Y FF ] U F + [Y FI ] U I
S I = (U I ) d [Y IF ] U F + [Y II ] U I
(2.67,a)
*
(2.67,b)
(2.67,c)
(U E )d
S E = Y
*
EE
U *E + Y *EF U *F
(2.68)
or
1
U *E = Y *EE (U E )1 S E Y *EF U *F
d
(2.69)
S Ei
U Ei
S Ei
U E2i
U Ei
S E1
U 2
E1
[wE ] = M
S En
U 2
E n
then the expression from (2.68) takes another form:
(U E )d
( )
*
S E = U E
*
w E = (W E )d U E
( )
U *E = Y *EE
(W ) U * Y * U *
E d E EF F
(2.70)
121
or by conjugating:
( )
1
*
U E = (Y EE ) W E
U E [Y EF ] U F
[Y EE ] U E = (W *E )d U E [Y EF ] U F
or
( ))
U E = [Y EE ] W E
*
[Y EF ] U F
(2.71)
or
( ))
*
*
*
*
S F = (U F )d [Y FF ] [Y FE ] [Y EE ] W E d [Y EF ] U F + Y FI U I
If in the latter equation we let [Y FF ] stand for the term that modifies the
initial matrix, then:
( ))
Y eq = [Y FE ] [Y EE ] W *E
[Y EF ]
(2.72)
yi =
Si
U i2
i (external network)
(2.73)
Observations: for the validity of the resulted equivalent it is necessary that all
the terms Wi remain constant after considering a contingency inside the network.
But this contradicts the classical approach where the load injections into the
external nodes were represented through constant impedances.
122
Basic computation
consideration that the load varies from moment to moment, the values of the
electric variables, characteristic of this state, vary also from scenario to scenario.
The results obtained after the load flow calculation, being the starting point
for any analysis of transmission and distribution networks, represent [2.4]:
Necessity in the planning strategies of electric networks development for
the determination of the optimal configuration as well as in the exploitation
activity for establishing the operating regime (overloading possibilities,
voltage level, weak network areas identification, etc.);
Input data in the following activities:
(i) contingency analyses, for testing the unavailability of an electric line,
transformer or synchronous generator, known as security criteria with
(N 1) or (N 2) availabilities;
(ii) transmission capacity analysis, for testing the limits of transfer powers
(thermal limit Imax adm);
(iii) VAr voltage analysis, for assessment of necessity of VAr voltage
equipment and its regulation manner;
(iv) on-line control, of power system operation, using state estimators and
process computers.
Starting point in the study and the selection of the protection relays and
automations, also for static, transient and voltage stability analysis, the
optimisation of operating regimes, etc.
The mathematical model for steady state analysis is based on nodal voltages
method using either nodal admittance matrix
[Y nn][U n] = [I n] = S n *
(2.74)
[Z nn][I n]=[U n]
(2.75)
U n
For steady state analysis, assume that the electric network is symmetrical,
load balanced, and there are no magnetic couplings between its elements. In
consequence, the electric network can be modelled through a single-line diagram.
In the framework of load flow calculations phase-to-phase voltage is used,
which also represents the rated voltage of the networks elements given in catalogues.
123
I1 1
3 I
3
V1
V2
I2
V3
I1
y130
y120
y12
y310
y23
y210
I3
y320
y230
2
I2
a.
b.
In order to obtain the nodal admittance matrix [Ynn] and the equations from
nodal voltages method, respectively, we apply the Kirchhoffs first theorem at the
independent nodes, conventionally adopting the sign + for injected nodal
currents and the sign for consumed nodal currents:
(
(
(
y (V 1 V 2 ) + y (V 1 V 3 ) + y + y V 1 = I 1
13
120
130
12
y 21 (V 2 V 1 ) + y 23 (V 2 V 3 ) + y 210 + y 230 V 2 = I 2
y (V 3 V 1 ) + y (V 3 V 2 ) + y + y V 3 = I 3
32
310
320
31
)
)
(2.76)
If we group the latter system of equations in terms of the nodal voltages then:
y + y + y + y V 1 y V 2 y V 3 = I1
13
120
130
12
13
12
y 21V 1 + y 21 + y 23 + y 210 + y 230 V 2 y 23V 3 = I 2
(2.76')
Y 11 Y 12 Y 13 V 1 I 1
Y
21 Y 22 Y 23 V 2 = I 2
Y 31 Y 32 Y 33 V 3 I 3
or
[Y nn ][V n ] = [I n ]
(2.77)
124
Basic computation
where:
Y 12 = y12 ;
Y 21 = y ;
Y 22 = y + y + y
Y 31 = y ;
Y 32 = y ;
21
21
31
23
32
+y
210
230
Y 13 = y13 ;
Y 23 = y ;
23
Y 33 = y + y + y
31
32
310
+y
320
Vi
z ik
i
Vi
N ik
k Ik
Sk
Vk
N ki
Ii i
z ki
Ik
Vk
Vi
a.
b.
If apply Kirchhoffs second theorem for the loop in Figure 2.19,a, obtain:
V i + z ik I ik + V i ' = 0
Knowing that V ik = z ik I ik the relationship between voltages results:
V ik = V i N ik V k
(2.78)
S i = 3V i ' I ik = S k = 3V k I k
(2.79)
(2.80)
respectively
I k = N *ik I ik
I i = I ik
(2.80')
125
(2.78')
[ Aik ] = ik [1 N ik ]
Expressing the relationship between currents as matrix form:
Ii 1
*
I = N * I ik = [ Aik ] t I ik
ik
k
and taking into account that I ik = y ik V ik and considering the expression (2.78') of
V ik , obtain:
Vi
V
= [Y ik ] i
V k
V k
where:
[Y ik ] = [Aik ] *t y ik [Aik ] =
1
* y ik [1 N ik ]
N ik
'
[Y ik ] = Y 'ii
Y ki
'
Y ik y ik
=
*
'
Y kk y ik N ik
y ik N ik
y ik N ik2
(2.81)
y N2
[Y ik ] = ki ki
y ki N ki
*
y ki N ki
y ki
(2.81')
126
Basic computation
'
since Y ik = Y ki .
(iii) General rules for writing the nodal admittance matrix [Ynn]
Any diagonal term Y ii is equal to the sum of the series and shunt
admittances of the branches (lines, transformers, others) galvanically connected to i
node. If at the respective node a transformer branch is connected, we have two
cases:
if the ideal transformer is connected to i node, the series admittance of the
transformer is multiplied by the square of transformer turns ratio:
Y ii =
(y
ik
) y
+ y ik 0 +
ki
N ki2
(2.82)
where the first sum stands for lines elements, and the second sum stands for
transformer elements;
if the series admittance of the transformer is galvanically connected to i
node, the diagonal term is:
Y ii =
where
ik
y +y
ik
(2.82')
ik 0
If we do not neglect the shunt components of the transformer, these are added
to the term Yii since by hypothesis these are connected on the primary winding side.
The non-diagonal terms in the case of transformer branch are expressed as
follows:
if the transformer operator N ik is connected to k node:
'
Y ik = y ik N ik
'
Y ki = y ik N ik
(2.82")
Y ik = y ki N ki
'
Y ki = y ki N ki
(2.82"')
The non-diagonal terms, in the case of line branch, are equal to the minus
sign value of admittance of the incident line to the two i and k nodes.
The non-diagonal term can be zero ( Y ik = 0 ) if there is no connection
between i and k nodes.
(iv) What is essential or specific for the [Ynn] matrix?
First, for a network without transformers, this is a square and symmetrical
matrix of size equal to the number of independent (n) nodes.
Second, the module of self-admittance of the nodes diagonal term is
bigger or at least equal to the sum of the modules of the non-diagonal terms:
127
Y ii
ik
ik
ik
The number of null terms on rows and columns is equal to the number of
branches incident to node plus 1 (corresponding to the self-admittance of the node).
Third, in the real networks, the number of non-zero elements from matrix
[Ynn] is low, being about 2%. The matrix [Ynn] is said to have a high degree of
sparsity or to be a sparse matrix.
Considering for instance a power system of 1000 nodes the number of
incident branches to a node does not exceed 1015 (electric lines and
transformers). In consequence from 1000 terms of any row or column only
11...16 terms are non-zero the others 989...984 being equal to zero.
For general case, of electric network, the relationship between nodal voltages
and currents are expressed as:
[Y nn ][V n ] = [I n ]
(2.77)
[Y nn ] 3 [V n ] =
3 [I n ]
S = 3V I = 3 V 3 I = U I
mentioning that the currents I are
(2.83)
The nodal voltages method in the case of the three-phase models of the
electric lines
To calculate the asymmetrical load regimes of the phases it is useful to
consider the equivalent circuit, thus emphasizing the self and mutual parameters
(Fig. 2.20,a,b).
Note that in the equivalent circuit from Figure 2.20,c, the hypothesis from
equation (2.83) with phase-to-phase voltage and currents multiplied by 3 has
been applied.
128
Basic computation
Ii
z acik
Ii
Ii
z aa
ik
y aa
ik
yab
yac
ybc
y bb
ik
y ccik
z bb
ik
z ab
ik
z ccik
z bc
ik
yab
yac
y aa
ik
y bb
ik
ybc
Ik
Ik
Ik
y cc
ik
a.
I
[I i ] = I
I
a
i
b
i
c
i
y aa y ab y ac
= y ba y bb y bc
2
y ca y cb y cc
Vi
[Y ik]
[V i] = V i
V
c
i
z aa z ab z ac
z ba z bb z bc
z ca z cb z cc
[Z ik]
y aa y ab y ac
y ba y bb y bc = [Y ik]
2
y ca y cb y cc
Ik
b
[I k] = I k
c
Ik
V
[V k] = V
V
a
k
b
k
c
k
b.
[I i]
[U i]= 3 [V i]
[Z ik]
k [I k]
[Y ik]
2
[Y ik]
2
[U k]= 3 [V k]
c.
Fig. 2.20. Equivalent circuit of a three-phase electric line.
Using direct writing rules of the nodal admittance matrix, the relationship
between the nodal voltages and currents is (Fig. 2.20,c):
[Y ik ] [Z ]1
1
ik
[U i ]
[I i ] [Z ik ] + 2
(2.84)
[I ] =
[
Y ik ] [U k ]
1
k [Z ik ]1
[Z ik ] +
2
129
yik
i Iik
Vi
yik0
Ski
k
yki0
Vk
For the power flow calculation on a branch, we first consider the phase-toneutral voltages V i and V k and the current passed through the branch I ik ,
respectively.
The apparent power at the sending-end has the expression:
*
S ik = 3V i I ik = 3V i 3 I ik = U i I ik
(2.85)
I ik = V i y ik 0 + (V i V k ) y ik =
1
U i y ik 0 + (U i U k ) y ik
3
(2.86)
resulting:
not
3 I ik = U i y ik 0 + (U i U k ) y ik = I ik
(2.87)
ji
U k = Uke
= U i (cos i + j sin i )
jk
(2.88,a)
= U k (cos k + j sin k )
(2.88,b)
y ik 0 = y ki 0 = g ik 0 + jbik 0
*
S ik = U i I ik = U i U i y ik 0 + (U i U k ) y ik = U i2 y ik 0 + y ik
2
= U i yik ( cos ik j sin ik ) + gik 0 jbik 0
U i U k y ik =
130
Basic computation
or
S ik Pik + jQik
(2.85)
Equating the real and imaginary parts, the active and reactive powers flowing
on the transmission line from node i to node k are obtained:
Pik = U i2 ( g ik 0 + yik cos ik ) U iU k yik cos(i k ik )
(2.89,a)
(2.89,b)
Transformer
Consider the case of equivalent circuit with transformer operator and real
turns ratio (Fig. 2.19,a,b) for which power losses, represented only through shunt
admittance y i 0 located on the primary winding side, are taken into consideration.
S ik = U i I i = U i y i 0 U i + y ik (U i N ik U k ) *=
*
= U i2 ( g i 0 jbi 0 + yik ) U i U k y ik N ik
*
where: y i 0 = gi 0 jbi 0 .
Ii
Sik
i
Vi
Iik
yi0
y ik
Nik k I
k
Ski
Vk
i
Vi
Ii
Sik
i
Vi
a.
Nki
y ki
yi0 V k
b.
k
Vk
Ik
Ski
131
Separating the real and imaginary parts of the latter expression yields the
active Pik and reactive Qik power flow expressions:
Pik = U i2 (g i 0 + yik cos ik ) U iU k yik N ik cos(i k ik )
Qik = U i2 ( bi 0 + yik sin ik ) U iU k yik N ik sin (i k ik )
(2.90,a)
The expressions of active Pki and reactive Qki powers flowing in opposite
direction are:
S ki = U i ' I k = N ik U k y ik (N ik U k U i ) *= U k2 y ik N ik2 U k U i y ik N ik
*
(2.90,b)
(2.91,a)
(2.91,b)
Analysing the expressions of powers flow through both step-up and stepdown transformers observe that these are identical, taking also into consideration
the relationships (1.111,b). Furthermore, if consider the transformer operates on the
median tap, and introducing the quantities in per units, that is N ik N ki 1 , obtain
the expressions of powers flow similar to the ones for transmission line.
(2.92)
132
Basic computation
node i
Sgi=Pgi+jQgi
k (i)
Sci=Pci+jQci
Fig. 2.23. Nodal powers balance.
Si
or
Pi =
k ( i )
ik
ik
=0
Qi =
k ( i )
ik
k ( i )
Taking into account the expressions of powers flow on a branch (2.89), the
exchanged powers between the i node and remaining part of the network through
the nodes directly connected with it, are:
Pi = U i2
Qi =
U i2
k =1
(b
ik 0
+ yik sin ik ) U i
k =1
(2.93)
yik sin (i k ik )
k =1
(y
k ( i )
ik
) [( y
+ y ik 0 =
ik
k =1
(2.94,a)
(2.94,b)
U Y
k ik
cos(i k ik )
k =1
Qi =
U i2
Im{Y ii } + U i
(2.95)
U Y
k ik
k =1
sin (i k ik )
133
If equations (2.88,a) and (2.94) are used, the expression of nodal power
becomes:
*
Si =U i Ii =U i
*
*
ik U k
Pi + jQi
k =1
or
Si =
U U e
i
j ( i k )
(Gik jBik ) =
k =1
U U {G [cos(
i
k =1
ik
k ) + j sin (i k )]
(2.96)
The expressions for active and reactive power injections are obtained by
identifying the real and imaginary parts of equation (2.96), yielding:
Pi (U m , m ) =
U U [G
i
ik
k =1
U U GG
i
ik
GiiU i2
k =1
U U GG
i
(2.97,a)
ik
k =1, k i
respectively
Qi (U m , m ) = BiiU i2
U U BB
i
ik
(2.97,b)
k =1, k i
where:
(2.98)
Q gi Qci = Qi (U m , m )
(2.99)
(2.100)
or, by separating the real and imaginary parts obtain the active and reactive power
losses:
134
Basic computation
(2.101,a)
(2.101,b)
For the transmission line, the reactive power losses can have negative sign,
due to the capacitive shunt currents, that means the line generates reactive power.
Generator node
Passive node
Slack (swing)
node
Specified
P, U
G
pure
G
hybrid
or
P,Q
Load node
Quantities
Symbol
(Q
min
, Q max )
Unknown
, Q
P(Q)
C
or
YC
BC(GC)
P, Q
, U
P = 0, Q = 0
, U
Us, s = 0
P, Q
135
cj
+ S
jc
gi
i g
Therefore, the slack node must be chosen so that it can undertake the
inaccuracies introduced by the power losses in the network. Usually, this role is
performed by the most important power plant of the system.
Ii=
Si
=
*
Ui
ik U k
(2.102)
k =1
k =1, k i
ik U k
, i = 2,..., n ; i s (= 1)
1
Ii
Y ik U k , i = 2,..., n
Y ii
k =1, k i
(2.102')
136
Basic computation
k =1; k i
( p +1 )
1
Y ii
( p)
Si
Ui
(2.102")
where
Ii
( p )*
( p )*
Ui
( p)
Si
= Pi + jQi( p )
U i , calc =
1 Pi jQi( p ) i 1
( p +1)
( p)
Y
U
Y ik U k , i s
ik
k
*
Y ii U ( p )
k = i +1
k =1
i
(2.103)
( p +1)
U i
( p)
real value
p+1
U i, acc
p+1
Ui
Ui
p+1
Ui
Ui
calculation step
p+1
137
( p)
( p +1)
( p)
U i , acc = U i + U i , calc U i
), i s
(2.104)
Usually (12), with moderate values, being preferred for the regimes
calculation, since large values could lead to divergence. The acceleration in the
initial phase can be unfavourable if the tendency towards the solution is oscillating.
It is recommended to use 3-4 iterations without acceleration, that is = 1 , then,
according to the number of nodes and parameters of the electric network,
= 1.2 K 1.75 , and every 10 iterations to use = 2.2.
The non-linear relations (2.103) are applied in a different manner in terms of
node types:
(i) Voltage calculation at the slack node is omitted, the voltage at this node
is specified in magnitude and phase angle, being maintained constant during the
entire iterative process;
(ii) For the load node, the reactive power Qi( p ) = Qi is considered constant,
and the voltage is updated every iteration by using equation (2.103);
(iii) A generator node is treated differently; the voltage to be controlled at the
node is specified and the generator voltage regulator varies the reactive power
output of the generator within its reactive power capability limits to regulate the
terminal voltage.
In order to maintain the voltage at the specified value we must proceed to its
correction:
( p)
( p)
U i , cor = U isp
U i , calc
(2.105)
( p)
U i , calc
For the calculation of reactive power at iteration (p), as support to maintain the
voltage at generator terminals to the specified value, the most updated values of
voltages are used:
( p)
Qi
*
i 1
n
( p )
( p +1)
( p )
( p) 2 *
= Im U i , cor Y ii + U i , cor Y ik U k
+
Y ik U k
k = i +1
k =1
(2.106)
138
Basic computation
(between Qimin and Qimax ), then at iteration (p) the voltage is set to U i
( p)
= U i , cor ,
( p +1)
then at iteration (p+1) the new value of voltage U i , calc is calculated by using the
expression (2.103);
If the calculated reactive power Qi( p ) is outside the specified limits ( Qgmin
,i ,
Qgmax
, i ), then the ig node, of PU type, is transferred to the set of c nodes of PQ
type. The reactive power Qi is fixed at one of the violated limits as follows:
(i) if Qi( p ) < Qimin , then Qi( p ) = Qimin ;
(ii) if Qi( p ) > Qimax , then Qi( p ) = Qimax .
That means the reactive power support is not sufficient to maintain the
voltage at the specified value, and the voltage at iteration (p) is the calculated value
( p)
( p)
U i = U i , calc .
Note that after the convergence test is satisfied, generator nodes must be
again treated accordingly, that is depending on the reactive power calculated, the
final voltages are established as explained earlier.
Also, in the end of the calculation process, after the (p+1) iteration when the
convergence test is satisfied, the apparent complex power at the slack node s is
calculated with the expression:
final
Ss
( p +1)
=Ss
= U s2 Y ss + U s
( p +1)*
Y sk U k
(2.107)
k =1,k s
Observations [2.4]:
a) If the calculated real power generation violates generator limits, the excess
(or deficiency) of slack node generation is distributed among the remaining units,
and more load flow iteration are carried out. This adjustment is repeated until slack
node generation is within acceptable limits;
b) Also, if slack node reactive power generation violates generator limits,
then a number of possibilities may be considered. One possibility is to change the
slack node to a different generator. Another is to change slack node voltage
appropriately without violating its voltage limits. A third possibility is to introduce
reactive generation and/or load by means of the switching of appropriate capacitor
and/or inductor banks.
In practice, for the control of the convergence of iterative process, there are
also other criteria to use, the most common consisting in testing the module of the
difference between the apparent powers at the slack node, calculated at two
successive iterations:
( p +1)
Ss
( p)
Ss
139
Once the state vector is calculated we could determine the injected powers
and the load flow on the network branches.
In chapter 8 Performance methods for power flow studies, methods of
Newton-Raphson type for steady state calculation are presented.
140
Basic computation
example, consider a simple meshed electric network, which supplies n loads (Fig.
2.25). The arborescent configuration allows us to achieve n + 1 possible
arborescent configurations in operation.
Source A
...
...
Source B
Base
network
Network
sectionalization
...
Configuration 1
...
Configuration k
Configuration n+1
Fig. 2.25. Possible arborescent configurations for a simple meshed electric network.
The reconfiguration process can be applied for all the possible operating
conditions of a distribution electric network:
normal conditions, characterized by the availability of all the network
elements, the state quantities being within the admissible operating limits;
critical conditions, characterized by the availability of all the network
elements, with some of the state quantities being at the limit of normal
operation (the thermal limit, the voltage stability limit, etc.);
emergency operation, characterized by the unavailability of one or more
elements of the network, due to operation under critical conditions on
expanded period of time or to some accidental damages emerged from
outside the network.
For the normal and critical conditions, finding the optimal configuration of an
electric network actually implies network reconfiguration, but for the emergency
operation the process becomes one of reconstruction. Usually, under normal
conditions, the purpose is to reach an optimum in operation in order to minimize
the active power losses and energy losses and to improve the security in supplying
the loads. For the critical conditions the goal of the reconfiguration process is to
restore the network normal operating state, by load reducing and balancing the
lines load as well as by reducing the voltage drops and also by obtaining uniformity
of the voltage level at the loads. For the emergency operation the goal is to supply
as many as possible loads after the detection and isolation of the fault. In this case,
the optimisation is of lower interest, more important being the restoration of the
power supply of all loads in a time as short as possible and the reducing of the
financial penalties for the electricity not supplied.
141
(2.108)
142
Basic computation
g ( U, I, C, F ) = 0
h ( U, I, C, F ) > 0
(2.109)
143
Power losses
Manoeuvres cost
Normal
Criterion
Criterion
Criterion
Branch load
Constraint
Voltage drops
Constraint
Arborescent configuration
Configuration connectivity
Executing manoeuvres on certain
electric lines and transformers
Admitted number of manoeuvres
Restriction
Restriction
Operating state
Critical
Criterion/
Constraint
Criterion/
Constraint
Criterion/
Constraint
Restriction
Restriction
Restriction
Restriction
Restriction
Restriction
Restriction
Issue
Emergency
Criterion/
Constraint
Criterion/
Constraint
Criterion/
Constraint
Restriction
Restriction
P =
R I
2
l l cl ;
lA
Zl Il
U = max
kX
lDk
(2.111)
kX
node;
the inverse of the mean time to repair of the node k with respect to
the source node.
144
Basic computation
ik =
I c , k X;
l l
lR = l n + nC ;
lA k
I l I ladm , l A;
I l U adm , k X;
lDk
(2.112)
adm
N man N man
;
adm
N int N int
;
where: i k
Ak
lR
nC
is
Tdint Tdadm
max
adm
N int
configuration;
the maximum admissible number of manoeuvres necessary to
obtain the final configuration;
maximum yearly number of interruptions in the load supply;
Tdadm
max
adm
N man
OPTIM f ( U ( C ) , I ( C ) , F ( C ) )
(2.113)
145
Linear Programming
Decision trees
Convex Programming
Genetic Algorithms
Dynamic Programming
Fuzzy Logic
Expert Systems
Petri Networks
146
Basic computation
Ik
| In+1|
| I1|
| In|
| I2|
| In-1|
| Ik-1|
| Ik+1|
A I1 1 I2 2
VA
i1
Ik-1 k-1
ik-1
k Ik+1 k+1
ik
ik+1
in
VB
147
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(2)
148
Basic computation
of service (Fig. 2.30). While for the previous strategies the number of
intermediary steps necessary for achieving the final configuration is well defined,
for this strategy the number of steps depends on many factors, out of which the
most important are the searching manner of the substituting configuration and its
selection criterion.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Since for the branch exchange reconfiguration strategy, the path between
the initial and the final configuration is not unique, for identifying improved
configurations, several strategies can be applied (Fig. 2.31).
Local
Descending
Ordered
Dynamic
Strategy for search
of improved configurations
Random
Maximal
Irrevocable
(irreversible)
Tentative
(reversible)
General
reversible
Backtracking
Taking into account the convex variation of the curve of the branch currents
for a simple meshed network, for the criteria based on these currents, the searching
process is simplified. Therefore, starting from an out of service branch, branch
exchange is subsequently performed with the two adjacent branches. If an
improved configuration is found for one of these exchanges the search continues in
this direction with the next branch, until no improved configurations can be found.
Depending on the fact that the searches continue or not, the search is called
descending or local.
149
MIN [ P ] = MIN Rl I l2 cl
lA
(2.114)
150
Basic computation
z1
VA
k-1
z2
i1
k
zk
zk-1
zk+1
ik-1
i2
k+1
B IB
zn+1
zn
ik
ik+1
in
k+1
In n
ik
ik+1
VB
a.
I1
z1
VA
I2
Ik-1 k-1
zk-1
ik-1
z2
i1
i2
Ik
zk
zn
In+1 B
zn+1
in
VB
b.
Fig. 2.32. Simple distribution electric network:
a. meshed network; b. meshed electric network with radial operation.
The local load transfer of one load or of a group of loads between two
neighbouring feeders is performed by doing an elementary exchange for an out of
service branch. The selection of this branch exchange is based on using the
equation. (A2.2.8) to estimate the active power losses variation P generated by
the load transfer from one feeder to another. The condition for the load transfer is
P < 0 . For the network shown in Figure 2.32,b, consider the transfer of the load
from the node k located on the feeder supplied from node A to the feeder supplied
from node B (Fig. 2.33).
ik=-ik
A
VA
I1-ik
I2-ik
z2
z1
i1
ik=+ik
Ik-1-ik
k-1
Ik=ik k+1
zk+1
zk-1
i2
ik-1
ik
ik+1
In+ik
zn
n
in
In+1+ik B
zn+1
VB
After the load transfer the currents through the line sections between the
nodes A and k will decrease with the value of i k , and the currents through the line
sections between the nodes B and k will increase with the same value. By applying
equation (A2.2.8) for the mentioned line sections, for the current flows
151
corresponding to the situation previous to the load transfer, and considering that
i k = i k , one obtains:
k
k
k
PB ,k
n +1
n +1
n
(2.115)
n +1
n +1
i = k +1
IA =
R i
k =1
k k
RAB
; Rk =
n +1
i = k +1
IB =
R i
k =1
k k
RAB
(2.117)
; Rk = ri
i =1
To obtain the radial configuration from Figure 2.33, the line section between
nodes k 1 and k from the meshed network is switched out of service state
(Fig. 2.33). The currents through the line sections between nodes A and k decrease
with the value of I k , and the currents through the line sections between nodes B
and k increase with the same value. By applying the relation (A2.2.8) for the
mentioned line sections, corresponding to the current flows in meshed operation
and considering that i k = I k , the active power losses variation, after
transforming the simple meshed networks into two radial sub-networks, is:
152
Basic computation
k
k
n +1
n +1
P = 3 I k2 RAB + 2 I ka ri I ia ri I ia + 2 I kr ri I ir ri I ir (2.118)
i =1
i =1
i = k +1
i = k +1
Taking into account that the current flows for the line sections of the simple
meshed network has been calculated considering only the branch resistances, the
voltage drops of the nodes A and B with respect to the node k can be written as:
k
i =1
i =1
V Ak = ri ( I ia + jI ir ) = ri I ia + j ri I ir
V Bk =
n +1
r (I
i = k +1
ia
+ jI ir ) =
i =1
n +1
rI
i = k +1
i ia
n+1
+ j ri I ir
(2.119)
i = k +1
r
I
i ia ri I ia +
i =1
i = k +1
k
n +1
j ri I ir ri I ir = 0
i =1
i = k +1
(2.120)
rI
i = k +1
i ia
n +1
ri I ia = 0
i =1
k
r I r I
i = k +1
i ir
i =1
i ir
(2.121)
=0
(2.122)
B. Destructive strategy
Employment of the destructive type strategy for active power losses
reduction is based on the notion of optimal currents pattern in a loop. As presented
153
C. Constructive strategy
Employment of this strategy in the reconfiguration process for active power
losses reducing is based on the results obtained in Appendix A2.2. This strategy
consists in subsequently switching in operation some network branches, until the
final arborescent configuration is achieved. The selection of the branch that should
be switched in operation among the candidate branches at each computation step,
is based on the active power losses increase minimization criterion [2.15], [2.17].
Consider the electric network in Figure 2.32, for which, at a certain
computation step, a choice between introducing either the line section between the
nodes k 1 and k or the line section between the nodes q and q + 1 is necessary
(Fig. 2.34).
A
I1
z1
VA
i1
Ik-1 k-1
zk-1
ik-1
ik
iq
zk
q+1
zq+1
Iq+2
zq+2
iq+1
In+1
B
zn+1
in
VB
Fig. 2.34. Selecting the branch that has to be added to the network.
PB ,q
n +1
n +1
n +1
(2.123)
154
Basic computation
1 l I
MIN
l k =1 I adm k
(2.125)
While reducing the branch loads is a local criterion, when applied for a single
branch of the network the load balancing on branches is a global criterion, which is
used for the whole network. In the last case the goal is equivalent to obtaining more
or less the same load for all branches. This can be represented mathematically as
[2.21]:
I I
I 1 l I
L
=
=
=
I adm 1 I adm 2
I adm l l k =1 I adm k
(2.126)
Theoretically, for branch load reduction, elementary branch exchanges for all
branches in out of service state can be performed. To perform only the branch
exchanges that leads to the proposed goal we consider the fact that at an elementary
branch exchange in a certain loop only the current flow through the line sections of
the loop in question will change (Fig. 2.35).
Im
k
n
a.
-Im
k
n
+Im
b.
Fig. 2.35. Variation of currents in a meshed network:
a. before the branch exchange; b. after the branch exchange.
155
Fig. 2.36. Possible branch exchanges performed to reduce the branch load.
156
Basic computation
is that the chosen branch exchange should lead to a voltage drop decrease on the
path considered. The sufficient conditions that ensure this objective are: for a
branch exchange, a non-zero load should be transferred from a feeder to a
neighbouring one, and in the arborescent sub-network for which the transfer was
performed no voltage drops exceeding the admissible value or the existing voltage
drops occurring on the path in question should emerge [2.12].
For a better understanding, the possible branch exchanges performed in the
Figure 2.37 to reduce the voltage drop between the source node and the node in
question, are presented.
Umin
Fig. 2.37. Possible branch exchanges performed to reduce the maximum voltage drop.
Appendix 2.1
EXISTENCE AND UNIQUENESS OF THE FORWARD/BACKWARD
SWEEP SOLUTION
Consider a simple electric network consisting of a source node and a load node,
linked by an electric line (Fig. A2.1.1).
SA
Z=R+jX
1 S1
VA
V1
S 1*
3V 1( p 1)*
V 1( p ) = V A Z I ( p )
S (Ap )
= 3V A I
( p )*
where I represents the line current, and p stands for the iteration index.
(A2.1.1)
157
PA2 + QA2
QA = Q1 + X
3VA2
(A2.1.2)
PA2 + QA2
3VA2
The voltage V 1 at the load node can be calculated in terms of the voltage V A at the
source node, by means of the relationship:
V 1 = V A ( R + jX )
P1 jQ1
(A2.1.3)
3V 1*
P12 + Q12
3V12
(A2.1.4)
R
3VA2
x=
X
3VA2
V
v= 1
VA
(A2.1.5)
obtaining thus the system of equations that describes the network operation, in the form:
P = P + r P2 + Q2
1
A
A
A
2
2
QA = Q1 + x PA + QA
v 2 1 2 ( rP1 + xQ1 ) v + r 2 + x 2
(A2.1.6)
)( P
2
1
+ Q12 = 0
158
Basic computation
The previous system is non-linear, having the unknown variables PA , QA and v. The
first two equations of the set (A2.1.6) define two curves in the system of PA QA co-
ordinates. The crossing points ( PA1 , QA1 ) and ( PA2 , QA2 ) of these curves are in fact the
solutions for the unknown variables PA and QA (Fig. A2.1.2).
To determine the solutions analytically, from the first two equations in (A2.1.6) we
express the power losses on the line as:
P = PA P1 = r PA2 + QA2
Q = QA Q1 = x
PA2
+ QA2
(A2.1.7)
(A2.1.8)
From equations (A2.1.7), the power losses in terms of the load power components
and the power losses components, are:
2
2
P = r ( P1 + P ) + ( Q1 + Q )
2
2
Q = x ( P1 + P ) + ( Q1 + Q )
(A2.1.9)
Using the equation (A2.1.8) and substituting the unknown variable Q from the
second equation in (A2.1.9) into the first one, we obtain a second order equation where the
variable is P :
P 2
r
2
r +x
(1 2rP1 2 xQ1 ) P +
r2
2
r + x2
(P
2
1
+ Q12 = 0
(A2.1.10)
r (1 2rP1 2 xQ1 )
=
2 r 2 + x2
(A2.1.11)
159
Q11,2
x (1 2rP1 2 xQ1 )
=
2 r +x
(A2.1.12)
Solving the third equation in (A2.1.6), the solutions for the voltage v are obtained:
v1,2 =
1
1
rP1 xQ1
2
2
(A2.1.13)
The existence of these solutions is conditioned by the sign of the quantities under to
be square-rooted, i.e:
(A2.1.14)
On the boundary, the above relation describes a parabola. Considering also the
restriction P1 0 (node 1 being of load type), the existence domain of the solutions of the
system of equations (A2.1.1) is given by the hatched area in Figure A2.1.3.
Q1
1
2
1
4
P'1 r + x
P1
1
2
2
Q'1 r + x
figure
P1 = ( rP1 + xQ1 )
A2.1.3,
2
r +x
the
following
notations
2
have
been
made:
r + x , representing components of a
160
Basic computation
demonstrated that for each branch i of the electric network there is a unique relationship
between the active Pi and reactive Qi power entering (injected) into the branch and the
voltage magnitude U i +1 at the other end of the branch.
Appendix 2.2
THE ACTIVE POWER LOSSES VARIATION AS A RESULT OF A LOAD
VARIATION IN A RADIAL NETWORK
Consider a radial electric network that supplies n loads, whose one-line diagram is
illustrated in Figure A2.2.1. The loads are modelled by constant currents and the lines
sections by series impedances.
I1
A
z1
VA
I2
Ik
k-1
zk
z2
i1
i2
In
n-1
zn
ik-1
ik
in-1
in
S = 3 [ I ]t [ Z ][ I ] = 3
z k I k I *k = 3
k =1
z k I k2 = 3
k =1
rk I k2 + j
k =1
x I
2
k k
(A2.2.1)
k =1
where z k is the impedance of the branch k, between the nodes k 1 and k, and I k is the
complex current flowing through the branch k.
In the previous relation the active power losses can be expressed as:
n
P = 3
r (I
rk I k2 =3
k =1
k =1
2
ka
+ I kr2
(A2.2.2)
where I ka and I kr are the active and reactive components of the complex current I k .
The current I k ca be expressed in terms of the load currents as:
n
Ik =
(A2.2.3).
i=k
Expanding the equation (A2.2.2) and considering the equation (A2.2.3), it results:
2
2
P = 3 r1 ( i1a + K + ika + K + ina ) + ( i1r + K + ikr + K + inr ) + K +
2
+ K + rn ina
2
+ inr
)}
(A2.2.4)
In the previous equation the line sections resistances are considered to be constant.
Also, consider that the load currents are constant, except the current at the load connected
161
to the node k. In order to calculate the power losses variation in the whole network for a
variation of the current i k , the expansion of expression of P from equation (A2.2.4)
using Taylor series is performed in the vicinity of the operating point, in terms of the
quantities ika and ikr [2.12]:
Not
( P ) = P =
( P )
ika
ika +
( P )
ikr
ikr +
2
1 ( P ) 2
ika +
2
2 ika
( P )
( P ) 2
+2
ika ikr +
ikr + K
2
ika ikr
ikr
(A2.2.5)
The partial derivatives that emerges in this expansion have the expressions:
( P )
ika
( P )
ikr
2 ( P )
2
ika
2 ( P )
ika ikr
2 ( P )
2
ika
(A2.2.6)
=0
= 32r1 + K + 2rk + K + 2rn
p ( P )
q
ika
ikrp q
= 0 () p 3, q p
Replacing the equations from (A2.2.6) in (A2.2.5) and taking into account (A2.2.3),
it results:
P = 3 2 ( r1 I1a + r2 I 2 a + K + rk I ka ) ika + 2 ( r1 I1r + r2 I 2 r + K + rk I kr ) ikr +
2
2
+ ( r1 + r2 + K + rk ) ika
+ ikr
(A2.2.7)
The latter equation express the active power losses variation in the network due to
the change of current in node k, of the form i k = ika + j ikr :
2
2
P = 3 ika
+ ikr
) r + 2i r I
i
i =1
ka
i ia
i =1
+ 2ikr
r I
i ir
i =1
(A2.2.8)
Likewise, the expression of the reactive power losses variation due to the change of
current in node k is:
162
Basic computation
2
2
Q = 3 ika
+ ikr
xi + 2ika
i =1
xi I ia + 2ikr
i =1
x I
i ir
i =1
(A2.2.9)
Neglecting the reactance of the line sections, the voltage drop V Ak between the
nodes A and k becomes:
k
V Ak = VAk + jVAk =
ri I ia + j
i =1
r I
i ir
(A2.2.10)
i =1
and the expression of the active power losses variation becomes [2.19]:
P = 3 ik2
r + 2 Re {i V }
i
i =1
*
Ak
(A.2.2.11)
where Re stands for the real part, and * indicates the complex conjugate.
Chapter references
[2.1]
[2.2]
[2.3]
[2.4]
[2.5]
[2.6]
[2.7]
[2.8]
[2.9]
[2.10]
[2.11]
[2.12]
Bercovici, M., Arie, A.A., Poeat, A. Reele electrice. Calculul electric (in
Romanian) (Electric networks. Electric calculation), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti,
1974.
Grainger, J.T., Stevenson, W.D. Power systems analysis, Mc Graw-Hill, 1994.
Eremia, M., Trecat, J., Germond, A. Rseaux lectriques. Aspects actuels,
Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 2000.
Debs, A. Modern power systems control and operation: A study of real time
operation of power utility control centers, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1992.
Guill, A.E., Paterson, W. Electrical power systems. Volume one. 2nd Edition,
Pergamon Press, Oxford, New York, 1979.
Weedy, B.M. Electrical power systems. 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
Chichester, New York, 1979.
Poeat, A., Arie, A.A., Crian, O., Eremia, M., Alexandrescu, V., Buta, A.
Transportul i distribuia energiei electrice (Transmission and distribution of
electric energy), Editura Didactic i Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1981.
El-Hawary, M. Electrical power systems. Design and analysis (Revised
printing), IEEE Press, New York, 1995.
Eremia, M., Criciu, H., Ungureanu, B., Bulac, C. Analiza asistat de calculator
a regimurilor sistemelor electroenergetice (Computer aided analysis of the
electric power systems regimes), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1985.
Chiang, H.D., Baran, M. On the Existence and Uniqueness of Load Flow
Solution for Radial Distribution Power Network, IEEE Transactions on Circuits
and Systems, Vol. 37, No. 3, March 1990.
Bart, A. Reconfiguration des rseaux de distribution en rgime critique et
dfaillant, Thse 1176, Ecole Polytechnique Fdrale de Lausanne, 1993.
Tritiu, I. Reconfigurarea reelelor electrice de distribuie de medie tensiune
(Reconfiguration of distribution electric networks of medium voltage), Ph.D. Thesis,
Universitatea Politehnica din Bucureti, 1998.
[2.25]
163
Chapter
AC TRANSMISSION LINES
(3.1)
166
Basic computation
I (x + x ) I (x ) = y 0 xV ( x )
I(x+x)
I(L)
V(L)
I(x)
z0x
y0x
V(x+x)
I(0)
V(x)
x
I(L)
(3.2)
V(0)
I(0)
Source
x=0
Load
V (x + x ) V (x )
= z 0 I (x )
x 0
x
lim
or
dV (x )
= z 0 I (x )
dx
(3.3)
d I (x )
= y 0 V (x )
dx
Differentiating with respect to x it results:
(3.4)
2
d I (x )
d V (x )
= z0
2
dx
dx
2
d I ( x ) y dV ( x )
= 0
dx
dx 2
(3.5)
2
d I (x )
= z 0 y 0 I (x )
dx 2
(3.6)
AC transmission lines
167
Equations (3.5) and (3.6) are known as telegraph equations, which define the
electromagnetic energy transfer along the long lines.
The voltage V (x ) and current I (x ) are unique solutions of a second-order
differential equation with constant coefficients. Knowing the form of a solution for
V (x ) and I (x ) , we can deduce the other solution. The general solution for V (x )
from (3.5) can be written in exponential form as:
V (x ) = A1 e x + A2 e x
(3.7)
(3.8)
= z0 y0
= z 0 y 0 or = z 0 y 0 =
(3.9)
= + j
(3.9')
z0
(A1 ex A2 e x ) =
1
(A1 ex A2 e x )
ZC
(3.10)
168
Basic computation
z0
z0
z
=
= 0 =
y0
z0 y
0
r0 + jx0
g0 + jb0
so the ratio
ZC = +
z0
y0
(3.11)
parameters of the electric line and they can be inferred from the primary
parameters r0, l0, c0, g0.
In order to determine the constants A1 and A2, the conditions in the limit
imposed at the input and output terminals of the circuit are used. Therefore:
At the receiving-end, for x = 0, obtain:
V (0 ) = V B = A1 + A2
I (0 ) = I B =
resulting in:
1
( A1 A2 )
ZC
A1 = 1 2 (V B + Z C I B )
(3.12')
A2 = 1 2 (V B Z C I B )
(3.12'')
V (x ) =
or
x
x
x
x
1
(V B + Z C I B )ex + 1 (V B Z C I B )e x = V B e + e + Z C I B e e
2
2
2
2
(3.13)
(3.14)
V ( x ) = cosh x V B + Z C sinh x I B
Likewise, the equation of current is obtained:
I (x ) = Y C sinh x V B + cosh x I B
The matrix equation that gives the voltage and current in terms of the output
quantities, in a point placed at the distance x, is:
AC transmission lines
169
Z C sinh x V B
V (x ) cosh x
I (x ) = Y sinh x
cosh x I B
C
At the sending-end, for x = L, obtain:
Z C sinh L V B
V A cosh L
I = Y sinh L
cosh L I B
A C
(3.15)
AD BC = cosh 2 L sinh 2 L = 1
it results that any electric long line can be represented through an equivalent fourterminal network (Fig.3.2).
IA
VA
A=coshL
B= ZCsinhL
C =Y CsinhL
D=coshL
IB
VB
In the case when the input quantities V A , I A are given and output quantities
V B , I B are required we obtain:
1
Z C sinh L V A
Z C sinh L V A cosh L
V B cosh L
=
I = Y sinh L
cosh L I A Y C sinh L
cosh L I A
B C
(3.16)
170
Basic computation
V (x ) = A1 e x + A2 e x
I (x ) =
1
(A1 ex A2 e x )
ZC
(3.7)
(3.10)
where the constant A1 will be determined in terms of the input quantities, that is for
x=L:
V A = A1 e L + A2 e L
Z C I A = A1 e L A2 e L
Adding these equations the following expression results:
A1 =
1
(V + Z C I A)e L
2 A
(3.17)
For the constant A2 the value from (3.12''), determined in terms of the output
quantities, will be kept. Substituting (3.17) and (3.12'') in (3.7) obtain:
V (x ) =
1
(V A + Z C I A)e Lex + 1 (V B Z C I B )e x
2
2
'
(3.18)
where
'
VA =
'
VB =
1
(V + Z C I A) = V A' e j a
2 A
1
(V B Z C I B ) = VB' e j b
2
'
(3.19)
or
V (x, t ) = Vd ( x' ,t ) + Vr ( x,t )
Thus, in any point and any instant of time, the voltage is a sum of two waves
of decreasing phase angle:
AC transmission lines
171
direct travelling wave, which propagates from the source toward the
'
consumer, of preponderant magnitude, V A = (V A + Z C I A ) 2 and which is
exponentially damped with the coefficient e x ' (Fig. 3.3,b);
L
x
x=L
x=0
x'=L-x
a.
Vd
t t+t
2 VA e-x
2 VB e
Vr
-x
v
x'
x'=vt
b.
c.
Fig. 3.3. Travelling waves propagation along a transmission line: a. defining of line
section, b. direct travelling wave propagation, c. reflected travelling wave propagation.
172
Basic computation
It results that the direct travelling wave Vd (x' , t ) is moving in the positive
direction along the x-axis, with the same velocity = / ; for this reason Vd (x' , t )
is called direct wave.
Likewise, for the second travelling wave, obtain:
x
= =v
t
that is Vr (x, t ) is moving in the positive direction along the x-axis, thus in the
opposite direction from the direct travelling wave, with the same velocity = / .
Therefore, Vr (x, t ) is a reflected or inverse wave.
For lossless electric lines, that is for r0 0 and g 0 0 , from equation of
propagation coefficient (3.9), it results:
j x0b0 = j l0c0 = j
(3.20)
where = l0c0 .
If substitute in the expression of velocity of propagation of the waves
obtain:
1
(3.21)
v= =
l 0 c0
Returning to the equation (3.9) and taking into account (3.21) obtain:
j
2f
2
2
= j
= j
= j
(3.20')
It should be mentioned that in the case of lossless overhead lines, the velocity
of propagation of the waves is independent on the frequency and it is equal to the
velocity of the light in vacuum, which is 300.000 km/s. In all the other cases, the
velocity of propagation of the waves is lower than the velocity of the light. As a
consequence, the wavelength of the AC powered electric lines (with frequency
of 50 Hz) is equal to:
v 300.000 km/s
=
= 6000 km
f
50 Hz
AC transmission lines
173
I (x ) = I A e x I B e x = I A' e j a e ( + j )x I B' e j b e ( + j )x
'
'
(3.22)
Observations:
The reflected waves of current have opposite sign with respect to the direct
current waves as compared to the voltage waves that bear the same sign;
The damping factor attached to both the direct waves ( e x ' ) and the
reflected waves ( e x ) shows that the propagation phenomenon on real lines, with
resistance and shunt admittance, operates with electric energy losses.
VB =
1
(V B Z C I B ) = 0
2
so that
IB =
VB
V
= B
Z C Z load
The ratio of voltage to current at any point along an infinite line is a constant equal to the
characteristic impedance of the line [3.2].
174
Basic computation
S B 0,C = V B I B =
VB2
*
ZC
VB2
VB2
V2
= B (cos + j sin )
Z C (cos j sin ) Z C
V (x ) = V B cosh x + sinh x = V B e x
I (x ) = I B sinh x + cosh x = I B e x
The characteristic single-phase apparent power in a point x on the line can be
determined from expression:
S 0,C (x ) = V ( x )I ( x ) = V B I B e( + )x = S B 0,C e 2x
*
PB 0,C =
VB2
cos
ZC
respectively:
P0,C ( x ) = PB 0,C e 2 x
Since the attenuation coefficient has a small value, the active power
P0,C ( x ) does not vary much along the line, being almost of the same value as
VB2
ZC
AC transmission lines
175
For a transfer of active power, the voltage is the same along the entire length of
the line and assuming this is equal to the nominal voltage, then P0, N = Vn2 Z C . The
three-phase natural power is:
PN = 3 P0, N = U n2 Z C
where: Un is phase-to-phase nominal voltage;
ZC characteristic impedance of the lossless line.
The three-phase natural power is an index in designing the transmission
capacity of the lines. In Table 3.1, several natural power values corresponding to
different operating nominal voltages are given.
Table 3.1
Un [kV]
Overhead
PN lines
[MW] Underground
lines
20
110
220
400
750
30
120
400500
1800
10
300
12001400
20002500
40005000
2
Qind I 2 x0 I x0
1
= 2 =
= 2 Z C2 = 1
Qcap V b0 V b0
ZC
176
Basic computation
(r
)(
2
0
+ x02 g 02 + b02 = 2 + 2
then
1
2
1
=
2
1
2
1
=
2
(r
2
0
)(
z 0 y 0 + (r0 g 0 x0b0 )
(r
2
0
)(
z 0 y 0 (r0 g 0 x0b0 )
z0 y0 =
(r0 + j x0 )(g0 + j b0 )
= + j
AC transmission lines
177
By expressing:
z 0 = z0 ; y 0 = y0'
where
tan = x0 r0 ; tan ' = b0 g0
it results
=
'
z 0 y 0 + =
2 2
r 2 g 2
2
2
2
1 + 0 1 + 0
4
x
g
+
b
=
x
b
=
+ 0 0 0
0 0
x0 b0
1
= x0b0 4 (1 + cot 2 )(1 + cot 2 ) = x0b0
sin sin
4
(r
2
0
)(
(3.23)
(3.23')
= 0 sin sin
(3.24)
where
is the equivalent wavelength of the line with losses, and 0 the wavelength
corresponding to the electromagnetic waves of T period, propagating on a lossless
line.
In order to simply the calculation, the following assumption can be taken into
consideration:
If neglect the shunt power losses ( g 0 0 that is tan ' , ' = 90 ,
sin ' = 1 ) the expression (3.23') becomes:
2
0 sin
2
'
(3.23'')
where
' = 0 sin
(3.24')
' = 0 sin =
0
4
1+ cot 2
=
4
r
1 + 0
x0
178
Basic computation
2
1 r
1 + 0
0
2 x0
(3.23''')
2 6.28
=
= 1.05 103
0 6000
+ + 90
=
2
2
or 2 = + 90
then
tan 2 = tan ( + 90) = cot =
r0
x0
r0
2 2 x0
Therefore:
r
r
r
= cos cos 0 = sin 0 0 [Nepers/km]
2 x0
2 x0
2 2 x0
(3.25)
AC transmission lines
179
respectively
= x0b0
r0
1
b
1 r0
= r0 0
2 x0 2
x0 2 Z C
(3.25')
OEL =
r0
r
r
= 0 K 0 [nepers/km]
2(280K 420) 560 840
UEL
UEL =
2
= (2.09 K 2 ) 10 3
3000K3150
r0
r0
UEL =
[nepers/km]
2 x0
60 K 130
z0
= Z C = Z C' + j Z C"
y0
180
Basic computation
where
z 0 = z0 ; y 0 = y0 '
tan = x0 r0
; tan ' = b0 g 0
= ( ') 2
Characteristic impedance magnitude
2
ZC =
z0
=4
y0
x0
b0
r
1+ 0
2
2
r0 + x0
x
x0 = x0
= 0 4
2
2
2
b0
b0
g 0 + b0
g0
1+
b0
1 + cot 2
1 + cot 2 '
x
sin '
sin sin '
= 0
sin sin
x0b0
x0
2
; = x0b0 =
0
sin
sin
sin
= z0 0
2
Z C z0
'
6000
= z0
1000 z0
2
2
or
In terms of the value of the per length impedance z0 = (0.28 K 0.4) /km,
we obtain for overhead lines the following values Z C = (280 K 400) .
Characteristic impedance angle
Let
= ( ') 2 ( 90) 2
or
2 = 90 = (90 )
respectively
tan 2 = tan (90 ) = cot = r0 x0
AC transmission lines
181
= 1 2 atan (r0 x0 )
Taking into account that r0 x0 << 1 it results that:
= r0 2x0
In the case of overhead lines when ' = 2 and r0 << x0 it results that is
negative and close to zero, that is in the interval from -15 to 0.
The components Z C' and Z C'' of the characteristic impedance are obtained as
follows:
Z C' = Z C cos Z C = z0 ( ' 2 ) = 280K 400
where have been taken into consideration that is very small, thus cos = 1 ; the
values close to 280 correspond to lossless overhead lines, with twin conductors;
the values close to 400 correspond to the lines with only one conductor per
phase.
1 r
1 r
1
Z C" = Z C sin Z C sin 0 0 Z C =
2 x0
2
2 x0
=
r0
=
x0b0
1
6000
r0 0 =
r0 = 477 r0 []
4
4 3.14
Notice that:
the real part Z C' is dominant, the characteristic impedance behaves like a
resistance;
the imaginary part Z C'' has the minus sign, therefore it is a capacitive
reactance.
Underground electric lines have characteristic impedance much smaller than
the overhead lines. Therefore, the impedance value varies in a wider range in terms
of the cable type and the insulating material. For cables insulated with paper having
the reactance in the interval from 0.06 /km to 0.130 /km and for
0 = 3000K3150 [km] , then Z C = 30 K 65 [] .
182
Basic computation
2!
4!
6!
that is
A = D = cosh z y = 1 +
zy
2
zy
B = Z C sinh L = Z C sinh z y = Z C
+
1!
z
zy +
y
z y
24
z y
720
+K
( zy) + ( zy)
3
3!
5!
( zy) ( )
3
+ K =
z y z 2 y 2 z3 y3
zy
+
+ K = z 1 +
+
+
+ K
120
6
120 5040
(3.26)
2 2
3 3
zy z y
z y
+
+
+ K
C = Y C sinh L = y 1 +
6
120 5040
Comments:
For OEL of L < 650 km or UEL of L < 50 km, generally, the term L is
smaller than 1 (e.g. for OEL L = 1.05 10 3 650 = 0.682 ) and only the first two
terms of the series expansion can be taken into account;
For L > 1000 km the magnitude of L becomes greater than 1 and
therefore the superior order terms cannot be neglected anymore;
For L < 250 km obtain A = 1 , B = z , C = y .
Thus, for transmission lines of usual 300 500 km lengths, the first two
terms of the expansion can be used with a good approximation.
I1
V1
a.
Y
2
I2
Y
2
b.
V2
AC transmission lines
183
Let us consider the equivalent circuit with lumped parameters (Fig. 3.4,b)
for which the matrix equation can be written as:
0 V A
2 =
1 I 2 C
0 1 Z 1
1 0 1
2
V 1 1
I = Y
1 2
B V 2
D I 2
Z Y
;
2
B = Z
Z Y
C = Y 1 + ;
4
(3.27)
Z Y
D = 1 +
2
or
2 2
zy z y
+
+ ...
Z = Z C sinh L z 1 +
6
120
(3.28)
Therefore:
Z = K1 z
where the first Kennellys correction coefficient is:
K1 = 1 +
zy
6
z y
120
+ ...
Y
= cosh L
2
then
Y A 1 cosh L 1
=
=
=
B
2
Z C sin h L
2 sinh 2
2 Z C sinh
L
2
L
2
cosh
L
2
L
1
tanh
2
ZC
(3.29)
184
Basic computation
If the expression
1
1
=
=
ZC
z0
y0
y0
z0 y0
y
zy
zy
tanh
2 y
zy y
y
= K
tanh
=
2
2
2 2
zy
zy
Y
=
2
K2 =
tanh
zy
1 zy 2
+
3
zy 2
2
zy
2
zy
=1
zy
12
zy
... =
15
z y
... for OEL longer than 300 km.
120
It results that the use of equivalent circuit leads to the same results for
voltage and current at the ends, as in the case of using long lines equations, only if
the parameters z and y are corrected with Kennellys coefficients K 1 and K 2 .
For a faster calculation of Kennellys coefficients, the expressions of A and B
coefficients obtained from series expansion of trigonometric functions can be used.
Therefore:
zy
y1 +
12
Y A 1 cosh z y 1
=
=
=
zy
B
2
Z C sinh z y
1+
6
z y z2 y2
y 1
12
72
y1 z y
2
12
zy
1
6
AC transmission lines
185
K1 = 1 +
K 2 =1
zy
6
zy
12
1+
jx jb
xb
=1
6
6
jx jb
xb
=1+
12
12
V (x ) = cosh x V B + Z C sinh x I B
(3.13)
2
= j
0
Taking into account the simplified expression of , the other quantities can
be obtained:
2
2
cosh x = cosh j
x = cos x = cos
0
0
where = 2x 0 is the angle of the line (in degrees), corresponding to the length
x measured from the consumer node:
2
2
sinh x = sinh j
x = j sin
x = j sin
0
0
ZC =
z0
x
l
0 = 0 = ZC
y0
b0
c0
The above equation shows that the characteristic impedance for a lossless line
becomes a simple resistance.
Under these circumstances, equation (3.13) becomes:
V (x ) = V B cos + jZ C I B sin
(3.30)
V A = V B cos L + jZ C I B sin L
where: I B = (PB 0 jQB 0 ) V B .
*
186
Basic computation
P jQB 0
V A = VB cos L + jZ C sin L B 0
VB
V A = V A e j = V A (cos + j sin )
Equating the real and imaginary parts, from the right side of the last two
expressions deduce the expressions of active and reactive powers at the receivingend B:
VA VB
sin
Z C sin L
(3.31)
(3.32)
PB 0 =
QB 0 =
PA0 =
QA0 =
VA VB
sin
Z C sin L
(3.33)
(3.34)
For short electric lines (from electrical point of view) it can be considered
that Z C sin L Z C L = X L , respectively cos L 1 and therefore, the power
expressions (3.31) (3.34) get the known approximate forms:
PA0 = PB 0 =
QA0 =
VA VB
sin = Pe
XL
VA2 VA VB cos
V V cos VB2
; QB 0 = A B
XL
XL
(3.35)
(3.36)
S A = 3S A0 = PA + jQA =
U A2
U2
sin + j A (1 cos )
XL
XL
(3.37)
S B = 3S B 0 = PB + jQB =
U A2
U2
sin j A (1 cos )
XL
XL
(3.38)
AC transmission lines
187
that is PA = PB and QA = QB .
In the particular case when U A = U B = U n , from (3.31) obtain:
PB =
sin
U n2
sin = PN
Z C sin L
sin L
(3.39)
V (x ) cos
I (x ) = jY sin
jZ C sin V B
cos I B
v( x ) =
i (x ) =
V (x )
= cos + j i B sin
VB
I (x )
= j sin + i B cos
Y CV B
or as matrix form:
v(x ) cos
i (x ) = j sin
j sin v B = 1
cos i B
(3.40)
188
Basic computation
S B 0 = PB 0 + jQB 0 = V B I B
from where it results:
*
S P jQ
I B = B 0 = B 0 * B 0
VB
VB
or in per unit:
iB =
IB
P jQB 0 PB 0 jQ B 0
= B0
=
= pB j q B
YC V B
PN 0
YC VB2
YC VB2 =
VB2 U B 1
U2
P
=
= B = N = PN 0
ZC 3 ZC 3 ZC
3
unit:
v(x ) cos
i (x ) = j sin
j sin v B = 1
cos pB jqB
(3.41)
v(x ) cos
i (x ) = jsin
jsin v B = 1
cos pB
(3.42)
In a first step, the voltage v(x ) and current i ( x ) phasors, are represented
graphically in terms of the transmission line angle.
AC transmission lines
189
0 v=
2 x
=
0
=
i(x
)
v(
x)
vB
0i=
2 x
0
=
1
=
1
iB
i(x)=iB
v(x)=vB
Observe that v = i = , therefore the voltage and current are in phase at the
receiving-end since the consumers impedance is a pure resistance Z B = Z C (being
a regime of natural power) and are maintained in phase along the entire line, being
shifted with angle with respect to the consumer quantities.
The fact that there is no voltage drop on the line and no current variation is
due, on one hand, to the hypothesis that line resistance is zero ( r0 0 ) and, on the
other hand, to the line self-compensation phenomenon the shunt capacitive
energy compensates locally the inductive energy stored into the series elements of
the line:
1
Wc = C0V 2
2
Wp =
1
L0 I 2
2
that is C0 V 2 = L0 I 2 therefore
V
L0
=
= ZC
I
C0
b. The case of transmitted active power ( pB ) smaller than the natural
power: pB < 1 , qB = 0
From the basic equations (3.41) it results:
190
Basic computation
v(x)
i(x)
2=pB
2=pB
m1
m2
=
0i
1
1=
0v
2 x
0
iB
1 =
1
vB
2
= x
0
i(x)>iB
v(x)<vB
Fig. 3.6. The geometric locus of voltage and current phasors, for pB < 1 and qB = 0 .
From the centre of the circles a line of angular coefficient is drawn, which
intersects the circles in m1 and m2. By projecting m1 on the real axis and m2 on the
imaginary axis, the parametrical coordinates of v(x ) phasor are obtained:
x = 1 cos ; y = pB sin
or
x 1 = cos ; y pB = sin
In order to eliminate the variable , we can use:
sin 2 + cos 2 = 1
and we obtain:
2
x y
=1
+
1 pB
Therefore, the geometric locus described by the peak of the phasor v(x ) is an
ellipse with the big semiaxis equal to 1 and the small semiaxis equal to pB < 1 .
Instead
v ( x ) = cos + jpB sin = x + jy
that is, by adding the phasors x and jy, we determine the M point of the geometric
locus of the ellipse described by the peak of the phasor v(x ) in the first quadrant.
In the second quadrant, from the source ( = 90 ) toward the consumer ( = 180 )
a similar variation is obtained.
In an analogous manner, the graphic of current intensity variation i (x ) can be
also plotted:
i ( x ) = pB cos + j sin = x' + jy'
where
x' = pB cos and y' = sin
AC transmission lines
191
The peak of the phasor i (x ) also describes an ellipse, but shifted with 90.
The diameters of the ellipse are orthogonal with the ones of the ellipse described by
v(x ) phasor.
Taking into account that v < and i > , it results that i > v, which can
explain why the line voltage increases from the source toward the receiving-end.
For an angle in the interval from 0 to /2 (that is, x 0 ... 1500 km) the voltage
decreases from the receiving-end (M ( = 0)) toward the source (M ( = 90)). This
is due to the fact that a capacitive current passes through the line, that is in every
section of the line (except for the receiving-end) the series conduction current is
shifted before the voltage.
i(x)
1=1
M
0v
2=pB
2 x
=
0
vB
2
= x
0
iB
2=pB
v(x)>vB
0i
i(x)>iB
Fig. 3.7. The geometric locus of voltage and current phasors, in the case of p B > 1 and
qB = 0 .
(3.42)
192
Basic computation
in the limit, the case of the no-load operating regime of the line can be obtained,
when pB = 0 and qB = 0 . It results:
v(x ) = cos
that is the variation of voltage phasor is a cosine function.
The magnitudes of the voltage and current phasors can be obtained from the
equations (3.42):
v(x)
x'
x'=L-x
x'
x'=L-x
Once v(x) and i(x) determined in per unit, it is necessary to return to V(x) and
I(x) values. In this respect, consider the voltage VA at the sending-end of the line
known, that is for
x = L, = L and V(L) = VA
From:
VB =
VA
VA
=
v A cos L + jpB sin L
From:
v( x ) = V ( x ) V B
AC transmission lines
193
it results:
V (x ) = v(x )V B = V A
(3.43)
V ( x ) = VA
2
2
2
cos + pB sin
2
2
2
cos L + pB sin L
i (x ) = I (x ) YC V B
it results:
I (x ) = i(x )YC V B =
V A pB cos + j sin
I ( x) =
VA
ZC
(3.44.a)
I ( x)
=
VAYC
(3.44,b)
and
pB2 cos 2( L ') + sin 2( L ')
2
2
2
cos L + pB sin L
It is obvious that VA and pB being given, the voltage VB and the current IB
varies in terms of the length L of the line and of the angle L respectively (Fig. 3.9).
A particular case of the line operating for pB < 1 and qB = 0 is the no-load
regime ( pB = 0 and qB = 0 ). In this case, for a given voltage VA at the sending-end,
from (3.43) it results that the voltage at the receiving-end ( x = 0 ) is:
194
Basic computation
V (x ) x = 0 = V B =
VA
cos L
V(x)
VA
pB<1
pB=1
1
0
(3.43')
L1
L2
L3
x'=L-x
VA
For the long transmission lines, close to 1500 km, under no-load conditions,
dangerous overvoltages can occur. In Figure 3.10, the variation of the ratio
V (x ) VA in terms of the ratio x' / L for lines with lengths of 400, 800, 1100 and
1400 km are given. This variation is an ideal case, when line parameters are
considered constant. In reality, if high overvoltages on the line occur, corona
discharge appears. This leads to a decreasing of the voltage level with respect to
the ideal case, since corona phenomenon appearance modifies the parameters of the
line, especially line conductance and capacitance.
As an example, for a line of 1400 km operating under no-load conditions,
when corona discharge appears, the overvoltage is modified (Fig. 3.10, dotted line).
It can be noticed that initially, irrespective of the length of the line, corona
discharge leads to losses; as the length of the line increases, the capacitive effect of
the line increases faster than corona discharge losses. Thus, for a line of 1000 km
length, when L = /3, from (3.43') it results that the ratio VB /VA is practically equal
to 2.
It should be mentioned that, for lines of lengths below 1500 km, corona
phenomenon occurrence could produce due to the increasing capacity of the
affected conductor also a supplementary overvoltage, compared with the case
when corona is absent. This is why a very careful analysis of the no-load regime of
lossless long electric lines must be performed.
AC transmission lines
195
V(x)
VA
3
1400 km
with corona
1400 km
1100 km
2
800 km
400 km
0.5
0.15
x'/L
(3.45)
(3.45')
sin = y pB
and substituting in
2
y
y
sin + cos =
+ x qB
=1
pB
pB
2
obtain
x 2 2xy
qB qB2 + 1 2
+
y =1
pB
pB2
Thus, the geometric locus of v(x ) peak of the voltage phasor is an ellipse
rotated with respect to the main coordinate axes x and y.
In a similar manner, an ellipse for the i(x) phasor is also obtained:
q
qB2 + 1 2
x' + 2x'y' B + y'2 = 1
2
pB
pB
196
Basic computation
From the analysis of the two ellipses it results that for transferred power
PB < PN ( pB < 1 ) there can be cases when the voltage at the receiving-end is bigger
than the voltage at the sending-end. Besides, the inductive reactive power transfer
qB > 0 can lead to a maximum voltage value in a certain point of the line, while the
capacitive reactive power transfer qB < 0 leads to a maximum value of the current
in a certain point of the line (Fig. 3.11).
In order to determine the position of the maximum value of the voltage,
express the magnitude of v(x ) from equation (3.45):
v 2 ( x ) = (cos + qB sin ) + pB2 sin 2 =
2
v(x)
value
M(0)
position
x'=L-x
[ (
)]
(3.46)
[ (
)]
(3.47)
(3.48)
w2
w
= 2w
= 2 sin cos 1 pB2 + qB2 + 2qB cos 2 0
then:
cot 2 max =
1 pB2 + qB2
2 qB
AC transmission lines
197
sin
(cos 2 max sin cos sin 2max ) =
sin 2 max
= 1 2 qB
sin
sin ( 2max )
sin 2max
Therefore, for a point x on the real axis, the quantity v 2 (x ) can be expressed in
terms of max as:
sin
v 2 (x ) = 1 + 2 q B
sin (2max )
(3.49)
sin 2max
Likewise, for i 2 (x ) obtain:
2
i (x ) = 1 2 q B
cos
cos(2 max )
sin 2max
(3.49')
sin max
sin (2max max ) = 1 + qB tan max
2 sin max cos max
[ (
)]
w2
=0
198
Basic computation
respectively
i 2
= 2 q B
=0
Figure 3.12 gives the shape of curves v( x) , having on abscissa x ' = L x , and
i ( x) , having on abscissa the variable x, measured from the source. The maximum
value of the voltage corresponds to the minimum value of the current and vice-versa.
Thus, at the receiving-end the derivative has the sign of qB . For qB positive,
the voltage curves have a positive derivative in the origin; they increase up to a
maximum and then begin to decrease (Fig. 3.12,a). The current curves, for qB
positive, have a negative derivative in the origin, decrease up to a minimum and
then begin to increase (Fig. 3.12,b). In consequence, it can be said that the point
corresponding to the angle = max represents a point of separation of the reactive
power; from this point a part of the reactive power generated by the line will flow
toward the receiving-end, and the remaining part will flow toward the source.
V(x)
v(x)= V
A
1.3
pB= 1
1.0
0.7
I(x)
i(x)= I
B
pB= 0.75
pB= 1.25
0
pB= 1.25
q B = 0 .2
pB= 1
a.
pB= 1
1.0
0.7
pB= 1.25
0
c.
0.7
b.
I(x)
i(x)= I
B
pB= 1.25
pB= 0.75
1.3
1.0
pB= 0.75
V(x)
v(x)= V
A
1.3
qB = 0.2
1.3
pB= 1
1.0
pB= 0.75
x [km] 1500 1000
500
0.7
d.
Fig. 3.12. The variation of v(x) and i(x) quantities on long electric lines (1500 km) for
p B < 1 , p B = 1 , p B > 1 and q B = 0.2 , respectively q B = 0.2 .
For q B positive, for the line segment situated between = 0 (at receivingend) and = max , the voltage v(x ) leads the current i ( x ) , and for the line segment
between = max and = L (at source), the current i ( x ) leads the voltage v(x ) .
AC transmission lines
199
sin L
(3.50)
Analysing the relation (3.50), in terms of the transferred active power pB the
character of reactive power qB cr at the receiving-end is determined:
For pB = 1 , it results that qB cr = 0 , as expected since the natural power is
transmitted on the line;
For pB < 1 , it results that qB cr is positive, that is at the receiving-end, in
pB2 sin 2 L 1
sin L
= q 'Bcr + jq ''Bcr
200
Basic computation
V(x)
Fig. 3.13. Voltage variation along
a line with VA = VB , under
several operating regimes.
pB=1
VA=VB
pB>1
L
For the calculation of maximum value let us return to the equation (3.49),
where we can make the substitution = L 2 (Fig. 3.14, a).
v(x)
v(x)
qBtan
L
2
qBtan
1
v (x)
1
v (x)
L/2
L
a.
L
2
x'
b.
Therefore:
v 2 ( max )
L
2 sin 2 L
= 1 + 2q B
max
sin 2 max
2
sin
L
2
sin L
2
2 = 1 + q tan L
= 1 + 2q B
B
L
2
2sin cos L
2
2
sin
(3.52)
AC transmission lines
201
The most unfavourable situation occurs for the operating regime with
pB = 0 , case when the overvoltage on the line will be maximum. From the
expression (3.50) the value of qB cr results:
qB cr
2 sin 2 L
1 cos
2
=
=
= tan L
2
sin L
2 sin L cos L
2
2
v 2 (max ) = 1 + tan 2 L =
2 cos 2 L
2
respectively
1
v(max ) =
cos L
2
(3.53)
(3.54)
cos L
sin L
(3.55)
202
Basic computation
jXS
I1
2 I2
V2
V1
2'
1'
Fig. 3.15. Equivalent electric circuit.
From the physical point of view, the explanation is that the current I1, having
a capacitive character, at its passing through the lumped inductive reactance XS
generates a voltage jump Vb at the reactance terminals (Fig. 3.16,a).
v(x)
Vb
Vb
with XS
without XS
I1
Eg
Eg
Vb =jXSI1
Vb
x'
Fig. 3.16. The influence of power system reactance XS on the voltage level
on a transmission line weakly loaded.
AC transmission lines
203
is, that is the smaller the short-circuit power of the system is, on the other hand, the
higher the voltage jump will be. This phenomenon appears as if the equivalent
generator at the connection node of the transmission line would be overexcited.
Usually, the electromotive force E g (e.m.f. reduced to the sending-end
terminals of the long electric line) is set by automatic voltage regulators, so that the
terminal voltage V b = V 1 is constant. In the case of too high V b variation, voltage
regulation could lead to important decreasing of E g thereby generating the
instability of the considered power system. Also, when sudden load shedding
occurs, transient phenomena appear, and the voltage regulation may not be fast
enough to eliminate in a short time the overvoltage that can appear.
Consider the equivalent circuit of a transmission electric line (having the line
2
angle L =
L ) connected to a power system of finite power (Fig. 3.15). With
0
the assumption of lossless line, the matrix equation can be written:
jX S cos L
1 jYC sin L
E g 1
I =
1 0
jZ C sin L V 2
cos L I 2
(3.56)
where
tan =
XS
X U2 P
sin
= S2 n = N =
ZC
U n Z C Psc cos
Finally, it results:
E1 = E g cos = cos( L + )V 2 + jZ C sin ( L + ) I 2
I 1 = jYC sin L V 2 + cos L I 2
(3.57)
204
Basic computation
value) and high values for weak systems (having small Psc value). For example,
for a power system with Psc = PN , tan = 1 and angle = 45 (/4), an apparent
extension of the line with 750 km is obtained.
Consequently, in designing long transmission lines, the possibility or
impossibility of its connecting to an existent power system should be assessed. An
index of this possibility is the ratio PN Psc and tan respectively. In this regard,
in the relation:
E g = (cos L X SYC sin L )V 2 + jZ C (sin L + X S YC cos L ) I 2
it should be imposed the condition that, for no-load conditions, when the current at
the receiving-end of the line is zero I 2 = 0 , phenomenon of self-excitation of the
generators in the system should not appear, that is E g > 0 . It results:
sin L
cos L = V 2 cos L 1 N tan L > 0
E g = V 2 1 X S YC
cos L
Psc
Taking into account that V 2 and cos L ( L < 2 ) are positive, it results the
condition:
1
PN
tan L > 0
Psc
or
PN
< cot L
Psc
(3.58)
V2
Eg
2
Psc>PN
Psc=
200
400
600
L (km)
AC transmission lines
205
Notice that, for an electric line of 400 km length, if the power system to
which the line is connected is of infinite power, the overvoltage has a limited value,
of only 10%, while for a system with Psc = PN , the overvoltage is with 120%
higher.
In practice, if the condition given by (3.58) is not fulfilled, then the following
measures should be taken:
a compensation reactor should be installed at the source busbars;
for the so-called capacitive regime of generators, thermal limit under noload conditions of the line should be verified.
by increasing Bc (c0 ) ;
Decreases the overvoltages that appear on the electric lines under the
assumption of no-load;
Increases the static stability limit of the transmission line by increasing the
V V
The angle is the phase shift between Ic and voltage V 2 and depends on the place
where the capacitor banks are installed on the line. The higher the angle is, the
higher the compensation effect will be, as well as V c . The compensation effect is
at a minimum for = 0.
206
Basic computation
Ic
V1
jX1
0
V2
Vc
V2
V1
Ic
a.
Ic
-jX1Ic
0
V2
-jX1Ic
V1
b.
c.
The angle is the phase shift between Ic and voltage V 2 and depends on the place
where the capacitor banks are installed on the line. The higher the angle is, the
higher the compensation effect will be, as well as V c . The compensation effect is
at a minimum for = 0.
b) If capacitive currents flow through the line ( p2 < 1 ), generating a voltage
that increases on the line, a voltage drop occurs at the capacitor banks station
output terminals (Fig. 3.18,c).
Choosing of installing point of the capacitor banks station must be done on
the basis of a technical and economical study, where the problem of voltage and
current regulation on the line as well as maximum power transfer possibilities,
under stability conditions, must be taken into consideration.
Let us consider the equivalent circuit of an electric line, having a series
capacitor bank, connected to a power system of finite power (Fig. 3.19).
2+2
Eg
jXS
I1 1
V1
1+1
1
1
X1= C
2 I2
V2
V2
V1
2
1
V(x)
V1
V2
V2
p2<1
p2=1
p2>1
V1
'=L2
Fig. 3.19. The influence of series capacitors on voltage increases and decreases.
AC transmission lines
207
The following problem arises: where to install the capacitor banks station,
that is how big 1 should be, in order to maximize the transmitted power on the
line (3.35):
E gV 2
sin
(3.59)
Pe =
B
in other words, the B coefficient of the equivalent four-terminal to be minimum. In
this respect, the matrix equation is written as:
E g 1
I =
1 0
jX S cos 2
1 jYC sin 2
jZ C sin 2 1
cos 2 0
jX 1 cos 1
1 jYC sin 1
jZ C sin 1 V 2
cos 1 I 2
(3.60)
Two situations can be considered:
a) When the lumped reactance of the power system is ignored ( X S 0 ), the
following coefficients are obtained:
A ' = cos L X 1YC sin 1 cos 2 ; B ' = jZ C ( sin L + X 1YC cos 1 cos 2 )
C ' = jYC ( sin L X 1YC sin 1 sin 2 ) ; D ' = cos L X 1YC sin 2 cos 1
(3.61)
where X 1 = X c = 1/ C .
b) If the lumped reactance of the power system is taken into account, the
operating equations of the whole structure become:
cos(2 + 2 )
E g
=
I cos 2
1
jYC sin 2
jZ C
sin (2 + 2 ) cos(1 + 1 )
cos 2 cos 1
cos 2
jYC sin 1
jZ C
sin (1 + 1 )
V 2
cos 1
I2
cos 1
(3.62)
+ jZ C
cos 1
cos 1
cos 2
cos 2
ZC
[sin (1+1 )cos(2+ 2 ) + sin (2 + 2 )cos 1 cos 1] =
cos 1 cos 2
ZC
{sin (1 + 1)cos(2 + 2 ) + sin (2 + 2 )[cos(1 + 1) + sin 1 sin 1] } =
cos 1 cos 2
=
ZC
[sin (L + 1+ 2 ) + sin (2+ 2 )sin 1sin 1]
cos 1 cos 2
(3.63)
208
Basic computation
(3.64)
To obtain the extreme value we equate the expression (3.64) to zero, so that:
sin (2 + 2 1 ) = 0
or
sin ( L + 2 21 ) = 0
that is:
1 =
P
L + 2 1
= L + atan N
2
2
Psc
(3.65)
AC transmission lines
209
v(x)
450
L [km]
900
450
a.
L [km]
900
b.
v(x)
L [km]
450
900
c.
210
Basic computation
XL
Bc
X L Xc
X
= 1 c = 1 kseries
XL
XL
(3.66)
XL Xc
characteristic impedance of the line having series
Bc
capacitors;
= Xc / XL
series compensation degree.
Z C , series =
k series
( X L X c ) Bc
= 1 k series
X L Bc
(3.66')
PN , series
PN
U n2
=
Bc
XL Xc
U n2
Bc
XL
1
1 k series
Z C , shunt
ZC
XL
Bc + Bc
=
XL
Bc
Bc
Bc + Bc
(3.67)
X L (Bc + Bc )
=
X L Bc
Bc + Bc
Bc
(3.67')
AC transmission lines
211
Bc+Bc
Bc
(3.67")
PN , shunt
Bc
P =1+ B
N
c
Bc PN , shunt
1
=
Bc PN
Notice that the compensation by means of shunt capacitors reduces the
characteristic impedance whereas it increases the angle and natural power
respectively.
Comparison between compensation with series and shunt capacitors
Table 3.2. summarises, in a comparative manner, the influence of compensation
type on the electric line.
Table 3.2
Compensation type
Capacitors installed
Parameter
series
shunt
ZC
L
PN
U n2
U n2
Bc
=
= U n2
ZC
XL
XL
Bc
(3.68)
U n2
Z C , shunt
= U n2
Bc + Bc
XL
(3.69)
212
Basic computation
If consider the ratio between (3.68) and (3.69) and if make it equal to 2, then
a two-fold increase in the transmitted power is obtained ( PN , shunt = 2 PN ):
PN , shunt
PN
B
B c + Bc
= 1+ c = 2
Bc
Bc
Bc
=4
Bc
XL
Bc
(3.70)
4I 2
I
X L X c Bc
XL Xc
=4
= 4 1 K series
Bc
XL
XL
AC transmission lines
213
then, it results:
K series = X c / X L = 0.75
The reactive power produced by means of series compensation is:
2
Qc = X c I series
= 0.75 X L (2 I ) = 3 X L I 2
2
Bc
XL
Q c 3 X L I
=
= 3 X L Bc = 3 L
PN
PN
a result identical to the one obtained in the case of compensation by shunt
capacitors. In other words, the power obtained for both series and shunt
compensation is the same.
a.
b.
Fig. 3.21. Installing of compensation reactors.
214
Basic computation
400kV
10kV
400kV
35kV
400kV
110kV
220kV
a.
b.
c.
1
1
R
X
= Gr + jBr =
= 2 r 2j 2 r 2
Zr
Rr + jX r Rr + X r
Rr + X r
Rr2
Xr
= jBr
+ X r2
(3.71)
AC transmission lines
215
Eg
jXS
2
I1
L
1
I2
V1
Yr= -jBr
V2
v(x)
1
x'
Fig. 3.23. Electrical configuration with one shunt compensation reactor.
The operating matrix equation of the whole electrical structure can be written
as:
jZ C sin 1 V 2
cos 1 I 2
(3.72)
Similarly as for series compensation, two situation are considered:
a) Considering that the lumped reactance of the power system is neglected,
the following coefficients are obtained:
E g 1
I = 0
1
jX S cos 2
1 jYC sin 2
jZ C sin 2 1
cos 2 Y r
0 cos 1
1 jYC sin 1
(3.73)
For line lengths smaller than the quarter wavelength ( L < / 2 ), the absolute
value of the term B' from expression (3.73) results greater than the absolute value
of the term B = Z C sin L from (3.40). Thus, when shunt compensation by means
of reactors is performed, for V1 , V2 and constant, the maximum power
transmissible on the line is smaller than the one in the case without compensation,
reaching the minimum value at 1 = 2 = L 2 .
The shunt compensation reactor leads to a current change along the line due
to the term Vr Br , hereby compensating the capacitive currents generated by the
line. The effect of this compensation leads to a decrease of overvoltages along the
line. Figure 3.24 illustrates the voltage variation, for different placement locations
of a compensation reactor, on a transmission line of 900 km length, assuming that
the line operates under no-load conditions. We see that the placement of the reactor
at the receiving-end (Fig. 3.24, curve d) allows an optimal compensation of the
overvoltage that can appear in this point. Instead, a maximum stationary
overvoltage appears at the middle of the line. The reactor placement only at the
middle of the line leads to a decrease of the maximum overvoltage but will not
216
Basic computation
solve the problem at the receiving-end. The most convenient voltage profile is
obtained when two reactors are symmetrically located, at 300 km and 600 km,
respectively, away from the source.
900 km
v(x)
3
a
pB= 0
450
900 [km]
450 km
450 km
300 km
300 km
300 km
900 km
Fig. 3.24. Voltage variation for different positions of compensation reactors, under the
assumption of no-load conditions of the line.
(3.74)
L
jXS
I1
V1
1
I2
-jBr
-jBr
V2
For the electrical configuration from Figure 3.25, with two compensation
reactors symmetrically installed on the line, the line coefficients become:
AC transmission lines
217
A = D = cos L + Z C Br sin L +
Z C2 Br2
sin 21 sin 22
2
(3.75)
jZ C
cos 1
sin ( 2 + 2 )
cos 2
Y cos 1 + jYC sin 1
r
cos 2
jZ C sin 1
V
sin ( 1 + 1 ) 2
I
sin 1 2
(3.76)
cos ( 2 + 2 )
cos 2
+ jZ C
sin ( 2 + 2 ) sin ( 1 + 1 )
cos 2
sin 1
(3.78)
ZC
cos ( 2 + 2 ) sin 1 sin 1 + sin ( 2 + 2 ) sin ( 1 + 1 ) =
sin 1 cos 2
ZC
cos ( 2 + 2 ) cos 1 cos 1 cos ( 1 + 1 ) + sin ( 2 + 2 ) sin ( 1 + 1 ) =
sin 1 cos 2
ZC
sin ( L + 1 + 2 ) cos ( 2 + 2 ) cos 1 sin 1
sin 1 cos 2
As also showed at case a), the value of the term B increases relative to the
case without compensation, its function having an extreme value. In order to
determine to which value of corresponds this extreme, we will differentiate B
with respect to 1 , obtaining:
218
Basic computation
ZC
B
=
0 + cos ( 2 + 2 ) sin 1 sin 1 + cos 1 sin 1 sin ( 2 + 2 ) 2 1
1 sin 1 cos 2
(3.79)
(3.80)
For strength power systems (large values of Psc ), the critical installing point
of the shunt reactor gets next to the middle of the line, while for weak power
systems (small values of Psc ) the critical installing point of the shunt reactor gets
next to the source.
Taking into consideration that the angle 2 is positive, it results that the sign
of the derivative is negative for values 1 < 1cr ( 1cr being the distance in degrees,
from the receiving-end to the point where B has a maximum value), until the
extreme point is reached, beyond this point the derivative being positive.
Therefore, the function B has a maximum in the critical point 1cr where the
transmitted power is at a minimum:
Pe =
EgV2
Bmax
sin = minimum!
AC transmission lines
219
A1 B1
C1 D1
Z1=-jX1
I1
V1
Y2 =-jb2
I2
V2
Y3 =-jb3
According to Figure 3.26 the elementary matrix corresponding to the fourterminal networks chain results:
V 1 cos 2
I =
1 jYC sin 2
jZ c sin 2 1
cos 2 Y 2
0 1 Z 1 1 0 cos 1
1 0 1 Y 3 1 jYC sin 1
jZ C sin 1 V 2
cos 1 I 2
(3.81)
or
V 1 A2
I = C
1 2
1 + Z 1Y 3
B2
Z 1 A1
D 2 Y 2 + Y 3 + Y 2 Y 3 Z 1 1 + Y 2 Z 1 C1
B1 V 2 A B V 2
=
D1 I 2 C D I 2
V1 V2
sin
B
= A2 B1 + B 2 D1 + B1 B 2 (Y 2 + Y 3 ) + A2 D1 Z 1 + B 2 D1Y 2 Z 1 + A2 B1 Z 1Y 3 + (3.82)
+ B1 B 2 Y 2 Y 3 Z 1
220
Basic computation
B' = A2 B1 + B 2 D1 jb B1 B 2 jX 1 A2 D1 j (b / 2 )(B 2 D1 + A2 B1 ) b 2 / 4 B1 B 2
(3.84)
c) The expressions of the line coefficients are substituted in the expression of
B' :
A1 = cos 1 ; B1 = jZ C sin 1 ; C1 = jYC sin 1 ; D1 = cos 1
(3.85,a)
(3.85,b)
It results:
B ' = jZ C ( cos 2 sin 1 + sin 2 cos 1 ) + jbZ C2 sin 1 sin 2 jX 1 [ cos 2 cos 1 +
+Z C2 b 2 4 sin 1 sin 2 ]
(3.86)
]}
(3.87)
(3.88)
respectively:
= Z C sin L + bZ C2 sin 2 ( L 2 )
X equiv
(3.89)
AC transmission lines
221
where:
k0 = sin L ; k1 = sin 2 ( L 2 ); k2 = cos 2 ( L 2);
k3 = 1 2 sin L ; k4 = 1 4 sin 2 ( L 2)
(3.90)
(3.91)
(k0 + k1b )
increasing of series compensation efficiency:
x1 k2 + k3b + k4b 2
= k1 k3 x1 2k4 x1bmax = 0
k1 k3 x1
2k4 x1
(3.92)
222
Basic computation
corona discharge are high enough not to be neglected and single-phase active and
reactive power expressions, both for sending and receiving ends, will be further
determined on the basis of general operating equation for long lines:
V 1 A B V 2
I =
1 C D I 2
(3.93)
Let us consider the simple case of a long line where node 1 is the sending-end
and node 2 is the receiving-end. Let the receiving-end voltage be the reference
V20 , and let the sending-end voltage be V1 .
V1
I1
P1+jQ1
A
C
V2
B
D
I2
P2+jQ2
Starting from the matrix equation (3.93) and taking into account the condition
of reciprocity AD BC = 1 , the expressions of sending-end and receiving-end
currents are determined:
I2 =
A
1
V1 V 2
B
B
(3.94)
D
1
I1 = V 1 V 2
B
B
Further, by using the equations (3.93) and (3.94), the expressions of singlephase complex apparent powers, draws out the sending-end and into the receivingend, are determined:
S 20 =
S 10
S2
*
= P20 + jQ20 = V 2 I 2
3
(3.95)
S
*
= 1 = P10 + jQ10 = V 1 I 1
3
1
A V V
A
S 20 = V 2 V 1 V 2 = 2 * 1 * V22
B
B
B
B
*
*
D 2 V 2V 1
V
1
*
*
1
D
S 10 = V 1 V 1 V 2 =
B
B
B
(3.96)
AC transmission lines
223
(3.97,a)
D 2
V1 [cos( b d ) + j sin ( b d )]
B
VV
2 1 [cos( b + ) + j sin ( b + )]
B
(3.97,b)
S 20 =
S 10 =
V2V1
A
cos( b ) V22 cos( b a )
B
B
(3.98,a)
Q20 =
V2V1
A
sin ( b ) V22 sin ( b a )
B
B
(3.98,b)
P10 =
D 2
VV
V1 cos( b d ) 2 1 cos( b + )
B
B
(3.98,c)
Q10 =
D 2
VV
V1 sin ( b d ) 2 1 sin ( b + )
B
B
(3.98,d)
Taking into account that the arguments a , b and c are fixed, the active
power that can be delivered to receiving-end is maximum at = b :
P20, max =
V2V1 A 2
V2 cos( b a )
B
B
(3.99,a)
(3.99,b)
As b > a and a , b > 90 it results that Q20, max has a negative value so
that, in order to increase the transmission capacity of a long electric line, leading
reactive power must be supplied.
For a lossless electric line, the network constants arguments get the values
a = b = 0 and b = 90 respectively, and equations (3.98) become:
224
Basic computation
P20 =
V2V1
VV
A
sin ; Q20 = 2 1 cos V22
B
B
B
(3.100,a,b)
P10 =
V2V1
D
VV
sin ; Q10 = V12 2 1 cos
B
B
B
(3.100,c,d)
If the latter equations of active and reactive powers at sending and receiving
ends are analysed, maximum transmitted power is obtained for = b = 90 that
is:
P20 = P10 =
V2V1
B
(3.101)
From equations (3.100) we see that the transmitted active power on a lossless
electric line depends on the rms voltages at both ends V1 and V2 , on phase angle
and on the coefficient B.
Analysing the expression (3.101) it can be said that by series compensation
with capacitors, the transmissible power increases in comparison with the case
without compensation since the coefficient B decreases, the reactance X 1 = 1 C
being negative, while for shunt compensation with reactor, the maximum
transmissible power will decrease in comparison with the case without
compensation.
(3.102,a)
V 2 = DV 1 B I 1
(3.102,b)
In Figure 3.28,a,b the phasor diagram is drawn to a voltage scale for both the
above equations.
D V1
V1
-a
2
B I2
D V2
I2
V2
d
1
V1
-B I1
I1
a.
V2
b.
AC transmission lines
225
power limit
P0
V1V2
B
S10
V1V2
B
S20
+ d
b -d
- a
O1
b +
A V 2 b -a
B 2
Q0
DV 2
B 1
ce
referen
O2
line
Q0
226
Basic computation
Besides the geometric loci method, the establishing of the power losses can
be also evaluated directly, through analytical calculation starting from the
expressions:
P = 3P0 = 3(P10 P20 )
(3.103)
Q = 3Q0 = 3(Q10 Q20 )
or
S = 3 S 0 = 3(S 10 S 20 )
(3.104)
1
AV22( b a ) + DV12( b d ) 2V1V2 cos b (3.105)
B
1
1
P0 = P = AV22 cos( b a ) +
B
3
+ DV12 cos ( b d ) 2V1V2 cos cos b
1
1
Q0 = Q = AV22 sin( b a ) +
B
3
+ DV12
(3.106,a)
(3.106,b)
Knowing the active and reactive power losses on an electric line, the
expression of transmission efficiency can be determined:
=
P2
P20
=
P2 + P P20 + P0
(3.107)
AC transmission lines
227
the minimum short-circuit power of the system to which the line is connected
so that the self-excitation phenomenon of the equivalent generator of the
source will not appear?
(ii) Analyse the influence of the placement position of the shunt compensation
reactor on its rated power so that, for no-load conditions, to obtain equal
voltages at both ends.
(iii) Elaborate the shunt compensation solution so that the overvoltages along the
line be less than = 5% .
IV. Series compensation of the lossless transmission line under no-load conditions
(i) Assuming that a capacitor bank is installed in series with the line, determine
the reactance of the capacitor bank in terms of its placement location so that,
under no-load conditions, to obtain equal voltages at both ends;
(ii) Given the short-circuit power of the system Psc = 10000 MW , determine the
placement location of the capacitor bank so that the maximum power transfer
on the line be possible.
V. Operation of the transmission line under different loads
(i) Calculate the transmission efficiency for different values of the power
transferred on the line (i.e. 400 MW, 500 MW, 600 MW and 700 MW, and
power factor cos = 0.98 ), and draw the voltage profile along the line for
each case. Assume that the voltage at the receiving-end is fixed and equal to
U 2 = U n = 400 kV .
(ii) Elaborate the series compensation solution for the four cases from the point
(i), so that the voltage along the line be within admissible range.
Solution
I. Calculation of the transmission line parameters
(i) Propagation coefficient and characteristic impedance Z C
First we express the per kilometre parameters of the line:
z 0 = r0 + j x0 = 0.035 + j 0.334 = 0.3358 e j 84.02 /km
y = g0 + j b0 = 0.207 106 + j 3.449 106 = 3.4552 106 e j 86.57 S/km
0
1
j (84.02+86.57)
2
or
= (0.0884 + j1.0736) 103 rad/km
ZC =
j (84.0286.57)
z0
0.3358
=
103 e 2
= 311.76 e j ( 1.27)
3.4552
y
0
or
Z C = (311.68 j 6.93)
228
Basic computation
(ii) Line coefficients A , B , C and D
The line coefficients calculated with the exact formulae gives:
A = D = cosh L = 0.6549 + j 0.0536 = 0.6571 e j 4.679
B = Z C sinh L = 19.676 + j 236.244 = 237.062 e j 85.239
C=
1
sinh L = (0.0942 + j 2.4372) 103 = 2.439 103 e j 87.786
ZC
zy
2
z2 y2
24
z y z2 y2
= 268.66 e j 84.02 (1 + 0.1238 e j170.59 + 0.0046 e j 341.18 ) =
+
B = z 1 +
6
120
z y z2 y2
= 2.764 103 e j 86.57 (1 + 0.1238 e j170.59 + 0.0046 e j 341.18 ) =
+
C = y 1 +
6
120
Analysing the results obtained for the line coefficients we find very small errors
which shows that the approximate formulae can also be used with good accuracy.
(iii) Parameters of the equivalent circuit: Z and Y
A long transmission line can be represented by an equivalent circuit (Fig. 3.30),
whose parameters are either lumped or uniformly distributed.
The impedance and admittance to ground calculated with the exact formulae, specific
to the long lines, gives:
AC transmission lines
229
L
Y
1
=
= ( 0.1045 + j1.4693) 103 = 1.473 103 e j 85.93 S
tanh
2
2
ZC
I1
y
2
V1
2
y
2
I2
V2
The parameters of the equivalent circuit can also be calculated using the approximate
formulae. Therefore, the impedance has the expression:
Z = K1 z
zy
6
z2 y2
120
resulting:
Z = 0.8825 e j1.22 268.66 e j 84.02 = 237.081 e j 85.24 = (19.688 + j 236.262)
1
K y
2 2
zy
12
z2 y2
120
resulting:
Y 1
= 1.0655 e j ( 0.62) 2.764 103 e j 86.57 = 1.473 103 e j 85.94 =
2
2
= (0.104 + j1.469) 103 S
Comparing the results obtained for the line parameters with the exact and the
approximate formulae we find very small errors.
230
Basic computation
II. Operation of the lossless transmission line under no-load conditions
x0
0.334
=
= 311.19 ;
b0
3.449 106
U n2
4002
=
= 514.15 MW ;
Z C 311.19
When the line is energized from the sending-end and the receiving-end operates
under no-load, the phase-to-phase voltage at the receiving-end has the expression (3.43'):
U2 =
U1
cos L
Un
400
=
= 612.12 kV
cos L cos(49.196)
L
49.196
= tan
= 0.4578 p.u.
2
2
meaning:
Qr = qr PN = 0.4578 514.15 = 235.38 MVAr
AC transmission lines
231
U n2
4002
=
= 679.76
Qr 235.38
In this case, the maximum value of the voltage appears at the middle of the line,
being calculated with the expression (3.54):
umax = u ( L / 2) =
1
1
=
= 1.0998 p.u.
L
49.196
cos
cos
2
2
Considering that the voltage at the receiving-end, chosen as base voltage and phase
origin, is U 2 = U n = 400 kV , then the maximum voltage on the line will be:
U max = 1.0998 400 = 439.92 kV
representing 9.98%.
In order to avoid the self-excitation phenomenon of the equivalent generator it is
necessary that (3.74):
PN
< cot L
Psc + Qr
PN
514.15
Qr =
235.38 = 360.20 MW
cot L
cot(49.196)
(ii) Analyze the influence of the placement location of the compensation reactor on
its rated power so that, under no-load conditions, to obtain equal voltages at both ends.
We denote by L1 the distance from the receiving-end to the point where the reactor is
installed, and by Br 1 X r the susceptance of the compensation reactor. First we write the
matrix equation, which defines the relationship between the quantities at the sending- and
receiving-end.
V 1 A ' B ' V 2
I =
1 C ' D ' I 2
Neglecting the influence of the lumped reactance of the power system, and taking
into account that the line is considered without losses, the coefficient A ' is a real value
having the expression (3.73):
A ' = cos L + Br Z C cos 1 sin 2
232
Basic computation
Br =
1 cos L
ZC cos 1 sin 2
cos 1 sin 2
1
= ZC
Br
1 cos L
U n2 U n2 1 cos L
1 cos L
=
= PN
X r Z C cos 1 sin 2
cos 1 sin 2
For example, when the reactor is installed at 200 km away from the receiving-end we
have:
1 = L1 = 1.0733 103 200 = 0.2147 rad = 12.3
1 = ( L L1 ) = 1.0733 103 600 = 0.644 rad = 36.897
cos(12.3) sin(36.897)
= 526.78
1 cos(49.196)
4002
= 303.73 MVAr
526.78
The values of the reactance X r and reactive power Qr of the compensation reactor,
in terms of the its placement location with respect to the receiving-end, are presented in
Table 3.3.
Table 3.3
L1 [km]
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Xr []
679.76 609.46 526.78 435.52 339.88 244.23 152.98 70.3
0
Qr [MVAr] 235.38 262.53 303.73 367.37 470.76 655.11 1045.9 2275.9
We see that the value of the reactance of the compensation reactor decrease and tends
toward zero, and its reactive power increase and tends toward when the placement point
gets next to the source (L1 L).
Therefore, in order to obtain equal voltages at both ends, for no-load conditions, the
compensation reactor has to be installed at the receiving-end (the point where, under noload conditions, the voltage is maximum).
(iii) Elaborate the shunt compensation solution so that the overvoltages along the
line be less than = 5% .
As proven earlier, it results that the installing of a single compensation reactor at the
receiving-end is not sufficient to keep the maximum voltage on the line at values less than
AC transmission lines
233
49.196
qM = tan L = tan
= 0.218 p.u.
4
4
and the maximum value of the voltage on the line appear in the points situated at L 4 and
3 4 L , being:
umax =
1
1
=
= 1.0235 u.r.
49.196
cos L cos
4
4
or
U max = umaxU n = 1.0235 400 = 409.4 kV
We see that by installing the second reactor at the middle of the line, the overvoltage
is 2.35%, which is less than = 5% .
The voltage variation along the lossless line, with and without compensation, is
illustrated in Figure 3.31.
U(x) 1.6
Un
[p.u.] 1.4
a.
1.2
b.
c.c.
0.8
0.6
400
600
800 [km]
L-x
Fig. 3.31. Voltage variation along the considered line, operating under no-load conditions:
a. without compensation; b. shunt compensation at the receiving-end;
c. shunt compensation at the middle of the line and at the receiving-end.
0
200
IV. Series compensation of the lossless transmission line under no-load conditions
(i) Assuming that a capacitor bank is installed in series with the line, determine the
reactance of the capacitor bank in terms of its placement location so that, under no-load
conditions, to obtain equal voltages at both ends.
In the case of series compensation by means of a capacitor bank, of reactance X c
and located at the distance L1 from the receiving-end, we start from the matrix equation:
V 1 A ' B ' V 2
I =
1 C ' D ' I 2
234
Basic computation
The coefficient A ' is the same as in expressions (3.61), where the lumped reactance
of the power system has been neglected, with the mention that it is a real value, having the
form:
A ' = cos L
X1
sin 1 cos 2
ZC
cos L 1
sin 1 cos 2
For example, when the capacitor bank installed at 200 km away from the receivingend, the angles are (Fig. 3.19):
1 = L1 = 1.0733 103 200 = 0.21466 rad = 12.299
2 = ( L L1 ) = 1.0733 103 600 = 0.64398 rad = 36.8973
cos(49.196) 1
= 633.03
sin(12.299) cos(36.8973)
Table 3.4 gives the values of the reactance X c in terms of the placement location of
the compensation reactor with respect to the receiving-end.
Table 3.4
L1 [km]
Xc []
0
-
100
-1377.5
200
-633.03
300
-396.5
400
-284.92
500
-222.35
600
-183.83
700
-158.9
800
-142.46
We see that the value of the reactance X c necessary to obtain equal voltages at both
ends, under no-load conditions, is - when the capacitor bank is located at the receivingend of the line ( 1 = 0 and 2 = L ), increasing toward the value given by:
X c = ZC
cos L 1
49.196
= Z C tan L = 311.19 tan
= 142.46
sin L
2
2
P
1
1
1
=
L + atan N =
Psc 2 1.0733 103
2
514.15
0.8586 + atan
= 423.93 km
10000
AC transmission lines
235
Therefore:
1 = L1 = 1.0733 103 423.93 = 0.455 rad = 26.07
2 = L 1 = 0.8586 0.455 = 0.4036 rad = 23.13
In this case, in order to obtain equal voltages at both ends under no-load conditions,
the reactance of the capacitor bank should be:
X c = ZC
cos L 1
cos(49.196) 1
= 311.19
= 266.83
sin 1 cos 2
sin(26.07) cos(23.127)
(S )
= 2
I2
3 U2
P2 jQ2
3U2
400 j 81.224
3 400
400
3
by
The phase-to-phase voltage is then easily calculated by multiplying the above value
3 , giving:
U 1 = 3 V 1 = 329.62 + j 253.69 = 415.945 37.58 kV
400
3
or
236
Basic computation
S 1 = P1 + jQ1 = (459.12 j116.47) MVA
P2
400
=
= 0.8712
P1 459.12
Table 3.5 gives values for the electrical quantities at the sending- and receiving-end
as well as the transmission efficiency for the four cases considered. We find that the
sending-end receives reactive power from the line for power transfer smaller than the
natural power, and it injects reactive power into the line for power transfer greater than the
natural power. We see also that the power transferred on the line increases, the transmission
efficiency decreases, and the necessary voltage at the sending-end increases as well.
Case
a.
b.
c.
d.
P2
MW
400
500
600
700
Q2
MVAr
81.224
101.529
121.835
142.141
U1
kV
415.945
466.129
518.513
572.495
u1
p.u.
1.04
1.165
1.296
1.431
P1
MW
459.12
574.51
693.21
815.23
Q1
MVAr
-116.47
-31.901
+72.687
+197.29
S1
MVA
473.66
575.39
697.01
838.76
Table 3.5
0.8712
0.8703
0.8655
0.8587
we can draw the absolute value of U ( x) , where x represents the distance metered from the
sending-end to a certain point on the line. The base voltage is 400 kV.
In Figure 3.32, the variation curves of the voltage along the line are presented for the
four cases. For a power transfer of 400 MW the voltage is within admissible range. Instead,
for the other three cases, voltage values outside the admissible range would be necessary to
obtain 400 kV at the receiving-end, which is not acceptable.
U(L-x) 1.5
Un
1.4
[p.u.]
d.
1.3
c.
1.2
b.
1.1
a.
1
0.9
0.8
0
200
400
L-x
600
800 [km]
AC transmission lines
237
(ii) Elaborate the series compensation solution for the four cases from the point (i),
so that the voltage along the line be within admissible range.
To increase the transmission capacity, while keeping the voltage in appropriate
range, the compensation of the inductive reactance of the line can be adopted by installing a
capacitor bank in series with the line.
The matrix equation used to calculate the voltage and current, when series
compensation by means of capacitor banks is performed, is:
for x [ 0, L1 ]
cosh x
V ( x)
=
I ( x) 1 sinh x
Z
C
Z C sinh x
V 2
cosh x I 2
for x L1
cosh ( x L1 )
V ( x)
=
1
I ( x) Z sinh ( x L1 )
C
Z C sinh ( x L1 )
1
cosh ( x L1 ) 0
cosh L1
jX 1
1
sinh L1
1
Z C
Z C sinh L1
V 2
cosh L1 I 2
Figure 3.33 illustrates the voltage variation along the line considering a capacitor
bank installed at 200 km away from the receiving-end, which compensates by 40% the
inductive reactance. In this case, when 400 MW are transmitted on the line, the voltage at
the sending-end should be under the nominal voltage, and the capacitor bank should be
disconnected. When 500 MW or even 600 MW are transmitted on the line, an acceptable
voltage level results.
U(L-x) 1.2
Un
[p.u.] 1.1
d.
c.
b.
a.
L1
0.9
0.8
0
200
400
600
800 [km]
L-x
Fig. 3.33. Voltage profile for a compensation factor kseries = 0.4
and a power factor cos = 0.98 : a. 400 MW; b. 500 MW; c. 600 MW; d. 700 MW.
Instead, the transfer of an active power of 700 MW cannot be achieved because a
voltage level exceeding the maximum admissible limit would be necessary at the sendingend. A possible solution to increase further the transmission capacity is to fully compensate
the reactive power at the receiving-end so that cos = 1 ).
238
Basic computation
Figures 3.34,a and 3.34,b illustrates the voltage variation along the line when only
active power is demanded at the receiving-end ( cos = 1 ), considering that a compensation
of 20% and 40%, respectively, of the inductive reactance of the line is performed.
Analysing the voltage variation curves we may say that it is convenient to install a switched
capacitor bank in series with the line, together with an installation for reactive power and
voltage control at the receiving-end, which contributes to the increasing of the transmission
capacity up to 700 MW (Fig. 3.34,b).
1.2
1.2
U(L-x)
Un
d.
[p.u.] 1.1
d.
1.1
c.
c.
b.
a.
0.9
0.8
0
0.9
L1
200
400
L-x
600
a.
800
0.8
0
[km]
b.
a.
L1
200
400
L-x
600
800
[km]
b.
Fig. 3.34. Voltage profile for a power factor cos = 1 and compensation factor:
a. kseries = 0.2 ; b. kseries = 0.4 .
Chapter references
[3.1]
[3.2]
[3.3]
[3.4]
[3.5]
[3.6]
[3.7]
[3.8]
[3.9]
Bercovici, M., Arie, A.A., Poeat, A. Reele electrice. Calculul electric (Electric
networks. Electric calculation), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1971.
Guill, A.E., Paterson, W. Electrical power systems. Volume one (2nd Edition),
Pergamon Press, Oxford, New York, 1979.
Weedy, B.M. Electrical power systems. (3rd Edition), John Wiley & Sons,
Chichester, New York, 1979.
Poeat, A., Arie, A.A., Crian, O., Eremia, M., Alexandrescu, V., Buta, A.
Transportul i distribuia energiei electrice (Transmission and distribution of
electric energy), Editura Didactic i Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1981.
Kimbark, E.W. A new look at shunt compensation, IEEE Trans. on Power
Systems, Vol. 102, No. 1, January 1983.
Gnen, T. Electric power transmission system engineering. Analysis and design,
John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, New York, 1988.
Das, J.C. Power system analysis. Short-circuit load flow and harmonics, Marcel
Dekker, Inc., New York, Basel, 2002.
Anderson, P.M., Farmer, R.G. Series compensation of power systems, PBLSH!
Inc., California, USA, 1996.
Fallou, J. Les rseaux de transmission dnergie, Gauthier-Villars Editeur, Paris,
1935.
Chapter
HVDC TRANSMISSION
4.1. Introduction
HVDC power transmission is relatively a new technology, which had a
modest beginning in 1954. The advent of thyristor valves and related technological
improvements over last 30 years has been responsible for the acceleration of the
growth of HVDC systems.
The HVDC technology is still undergoing many changes due to continuing
innovations directed at improving reliability and reducing costs of converter
stations. Nowadays, the thyristor blocking voltage has reached 8500 Volts, while
the conduction current of the device is up to 3500 Amperes. Converter ratings are
up to 500 kV and 1500 MW for a single 12 pulse valve group. The converters can
be connected in series or in parallel to achieve higher ratings.
Actually, 70000 MW of HVDC transmission capacity is installed all over the
world. For DC, there are two options: conventional high voltage direct current
(HVDC) and voltage source converter (VSC).
Three types of semiconductor devices have established themselves in the
high power segment: thyristors, GTOs (gate turn off thyristors) and IGBTs
(insulated gate bipolar transistors).
The thyristor is the oldest of switching devices in use nowadays. It can be
turned on through gate control. The thyristor returns to its off state only when the
load current goes to zero. In practice, this is accomplished through the
commutation process. On the other hand GTOs and IGBTs can be turned off via
gate signals.
High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) transmission link is advantageous in
the following areas of application [4.1]:
(i) For cables crossing bodies of water wider than 30 km;
(ii) For interconnecting AC systems having different frequencies or where
asynchronous operation is desired;
(iii) For long distance, bulk power transmission by overhead lines, when the
saving in cost of a DC line would more than compensate for the cost of
converter station;
(iv) The DC systems have an inherent short-time overload capacity that can
be used for damping system oscillations;
240
Basic computation
HVDC transmission
241
would have been very difficult to ensure adequate stability margins. HVDC allow
controlled transmission of power between the networks, which also retain their
independence. DC is also more economic in term of construction costs and losses
as well as the right of way.
Left bank
14x700 MW
Three Gorges
Central
China
12x700 MW
Right bank
East
China
Guangdong
The other DC option, the VSC HVDC technology, is capturing more and
more attention [4.14]. It is marketed by ABB under the name HVDC Light and by
Siemens under the name HVDC Plus. This new technology has only become
possible due to important advances in power electronics, namely the insulated gate
bipolar transistors (IGBT) and the ability to connect individual IGBTs in series in a
similar mechanical valve arrangement similar to thyristors. Pulse width modulation
(PWM) is the common control method of VSC converters.
In VSC, the current can be turned off, which means that there is no need for
an active commutation voltage. Furthermore, the active and reactive power supply
can be controlled independently. This is one of the main reasons why onshore
network companies are usually in favour of VSC HVDC technology. In addition,
it is important to mention that VSC HVDC is by nature bipolar. The DC circuit is
not connected to ground. Therefore, two conductors (cables) are always needed.
The first commercial VSC based HVDC link was installed on the Swedish
island of Gotland in 1999. It is 70 km long with 50 MW at 80 kV. The link was
mainly built in order to provide voltage support for the large amount of wind power
installed in the South of Gotland. In 2000, a link 59 km long with three times
60 MW at 80 kV, was built in Australia between the power grids of Queensland
and New South Wales. A second link is currently being installed in Australia; with
its 180 km, the connection will be the longest VSC based HVDC link in the
world. It will have a capacity of 200 MW at a DC voltage of 150 kV. In the
United States, a 45 km submarine HVDC link is currently being installed between
Connecticut and Long Island. The link will be operated at a DC voltage of
150 kV and will have a capacity of 330 MW.
242
Basic computation
AC system
AC system
a.
b.
c.
Two six pulse bridges can be connected in series on the DC side and in
parallel on the AC side through their respective converter transformers. If one
HVDC transmission
243
244
Basic computation
the desired voltage level. Parallel connection of thyristor levels is not required. The
thyristors in a valve are sub-divided into modules. The modular concept allows
ready access for maintenance and rapid replacement of failed components. Each
module typically contains a firing system for each thyristor and a monitoring
system to indicate failures. In addition to the thyristors the module contains series
saturable reactors to limit current rate-of-change as well as parallel capacitances to
limit voltage rate-of-change. The restrictions on these two quantities are required to
avoid excessive current densities in semiconductor junction areas as conduction
begins.
Valves require a cooling system. Valves may be cooled by circulating air,
water, and oil. Thermal time constants are on the order of second, so sustained
overcurrents cannot be tolerated by valves.
Filters
Converters generate harmonic voltages and currents on both AC and DC
sides. These harmonics can cause overheating of capacitors and nearby generators,
and interferences with telecommunication systems.
There are three types of filters used:
(i) AC filters. These are passive circuits used to provide low impedance,
shunt paths for AC harmonic currents. Both tuned and damped filter arrangements
are used;
(ii) DC filters. These are similar to AC filters and are used for the filtering of
harmonics on DC side;
(iii)High frequency filters. These are connected between the converter
transformer and the station AC bus to suppress any high frequency currents.
Sometimes such filters are provided on high-voltage DC bus converted between the
DC filter and DC line and also on the neutral side.
Reactive power
Converters require reactive power supply that is dependent on the active
power loading. Under steady-state conditions the reactive power consumed is about
50-60% of active power transferred. Reactive power sources are therefore provided
near the converters. For strong AC systems, these are usually in the form of shunt
capacitors. Depending on the demands placed on the DC link and on the AC
system, part of the reactive power source may be in the form of synchronous
condensers or static VAr compensators. Fortunately, part of this reactive power
requirement is provided by AC filters.
Smoothing reactor
A sufficient large series reactor is used on DC side to smooth direct current
and also serves as a buffer between the converters and the DC line. The sizing of
the reactor depends on various requirements: to reduce the incidence of
commutation failure in inverters caused by dips in the AC voltage at the converter
bus; to prevent the consequent commutation failures in inverters by reducing the
rate of rise of direct current in the bridge; smooth the ripple in the direct current in
order to prevent the current becoming discontinuous at light loads; decrease
HVDC transmission
245
harmonic voltages and currents in the DC lines [4.7]. The location of the
smoothing reactor can be either at the high voltage terminal or at the ground
terminal. In the latter case, it is also necessary to have a small reactor (510 mH)
on the line side, to protect the converter station from the consequences of lightning
strokes to the line.
DC lines/cables
Selection of DC line/cable voltage is made only in conjunction with converter
rating selection. Going to higher voltages will increase converter costs and
decrease line losses for a given power level. Optimisation of system voltage level is
highly dependent upon both converter costs and line/cable costs. Thus DC lines,
unlike AC lines, may not be designed at an optimum voltage level for a given
power transfer. Converter cost as a function of voltage and current must be
considered before DC voltage is selected. The evaluation should consider different
voltage levels.
Electrode systems
Biplolar DC projects are designed to use the earth as a neutral conductor for
at least brief periods of time unless they are designed as two independent
monopoles. The connection to the earth requires a large surface area conductor to
minimize current densities and surface voltage gradients.
The conductor is termed an electrode. The electrode is usually located several
kilometres from the converter station so that direct currents will not stray into the
stations ground mat or be diverted into AC transmission lines leaving the
converter station. The line connecting station to the electrode is termed an
electrode line. In some designs if ground currents are not allowed at all, a metallic
return conductor is provided. In bipolar systems during monopolar operation one of
the pole conductors is used for metallic return. This requires a metallic transfer
breaker (MRTB) at the low voltage end. This breaker has to commutate the DC
current from the electrode line to the metallic return.
These three elements: electrode, electrode line and metallic return transfer
breaker, constitute the electrode system. Each has unique characteristics which are
discussed in turn.
246
Basic computation
just a buried array of metallic conductors, since they are not affected by corrosion, if
at least low currents flow most of time.
In practice it is usually not possible to predict which electrode will be the anode
and which will be the cathode, because the earth return usually carries the
unbalanced current of bipolar system. Electrode construction varies with the
resistivity and moisture content of the earth. Large voltage gradients must be avoided
for safety reasons and because they represent power loss and heating of the earth.
That in turn can evaporate moisture from the electrode area and increase its
resistivity in a thermal run-away.
The most compact electrodes are constructed in ocean locations where
saltwater provides a good conductor and unlimited cooling and moisture. The largest
electrodes are required on land where thousand of meters of buried conductors may
be required. The electrode at the northern end of the Pacific Intertie is constructed as
a large conducting circle with a diameter of 1036 meters [4.5].
An alternative to the surface electrode is the deep electrode. If low resistivity rock or
mineral formations are located below the surface, it is sometimes advantageous to
construct several vertical shafts to connect with those formations. A layer of coal or
iron ore, for example might be used to reduce surface voltage gradients and electrode
costs. Most electrodes are able to reduce earth contact resistance to a fraction of an
ohm using one of these methods.
A major problem with electrodes is that DC earth currents follow paths of least
resistance. Remote from the electrode this will probably be deep within the
conducting mantle of the earth. In the vicinity of the electrode it may include
following low resistance man-made facilities, such as gas or water pipelines or even
transmission lines. Currents in these facilities may create problems, such as
saturation of transformer cores. More likely they will produce corrosion problems
where the currents leave these metal objects and reenter the earth. The corrosion
problems, which affect the anode electrode, are present on a smaller scale anytime
current leaves a metal object by ionic conduction.
Electrodes may be located many kilometres away from the converter station or
other facilities to avoid these kinds of problems. Also cathodic protection can be
applied to force current to leave the buried metals only through sacrifical anodes.
(ii) Electrode line [4.5]. The electrode line requires insulation levels adequate
to withstand the voltage drop along its length. That is usually only a small fraction of
the line-to-ground voltage of the DC system. The electrode line may be carried as an
insulated shield wire on one of the transmission lines leaving the converter station, as
long as it has adequate capacity.
The electrode line has some unique protection problems. Faults are hard to
detect since there will be no change in current, and voltages are very low all of the
time. The effects of grounding the electrode line to a tower or the earth may be very
adverse, however. In either case sever corrosion can occur if high currents are
present. Corrosion of the tower footing can destroy the tower; corrosion of the
electrode line can cause loss of conducting capacity and failure of the electrode line.
Any break in the electrode line can cause DC arcing and severe damage. DC
arcs can be much longer and stable than AC arcs. Any tendency to extinguish is
HVDC transmission
247
248
Basic computation
Pole I
Pole I
Ground
electrodes
Ground
electrodes
Pole II
Pole II
a.
b.
c.
d.
Fig. 4.4. Types of HVDC transmission systems: a. bipolar line; b. two monopolar
transmission lines forming a bipolar system; c. monopolar transmission line with
ground or sea return; d. back-to-back.
Id
F
Id
Ground
electrode
Id
F
Neutral
conductor
Id
Cathode
Surge
arrester
Anode
a.
b.
Fig. 4.5. Monopolar transmission systems: a. monopolar with ground return; b. monopolar
with metallic return. Reprinted with permission from IEEE P1030.1-2000 IEEE Guide for
specification of HVDC systems 2000 IEEE.
HVDC transmission
249
250
Basic computation
are provided along with bypass switching of sub-pole valve groups, substantially
higher fractions of normal power capabilities can continue during contingencies.
The fact that both poles of a bipolar system are carried on the same overhead tower
offers savings in construction costs similar to those enjoyed by double circuit AC
lines over those of two individual circuits of the same total capacity.
Id
Id
F
Neutral
conductor
a.
b.
Id
B
B
MRTB - metallic return breaker
B - bypass switch to allow
metallic return mode
MRTB
Id
c.
Fig. 4.6. Bipolar HVDC systems: a. bipolar system; b. bipolar metallic neutral; c. bipolar,
grounded midpoint configuration (common tower). Reprinted with permission from IEEE
P1030.1-2000 IEEE Guide for specification of HVDC systems 2000 IEEE.
A homopolar link has two or more conductors, all of the same polarity
(normally negative). The return path is represented by ground. If a conductor is
faulty, the entire converter is available for connection to the remaining
conductor(s).
Point-to-point HVDC systems
Point-to-point HVDC overland transmission is a very common application
and a well justified choice in case of power transmission over long distances or
HVDC transmission
251
252
Basic computation
Id
a.
b.
Fig. 4.7. Back-to-back systems: a. one DC smoothing reactor and one DC system ground;
b. two DC smoothing reactors and one DC system ground.
Pole I
Pole I
Return
Pole II
conductor
Pole I
Pole II
Pole II
Pole I
Fig. 4.8. Solutions for transformation of single or double-circuit lines into DC line
configuration.
HVDC transmission
253
a.
b.
c.
Fig. 4.9. Multi-terminal HVDC systems: a. radial connections; b. mesh or ring connection;
c. series connection.
254
Basic computation
For the first two configurations and for losses lines the DC voltage is equal
throughout the system, whereas for the third one the DC current remains equal in
every part of the system.
HVDC unit connected generators
Several technical and economical reasons strongly suggest that in certain
HVDC applications it may be advantageous to simplify the rectifier station, via a
direct connection of each machine set to a separate converter group with seriesparallel combinations made on the DC side. This arrangement is usually referred to
in HVDC literature as unit connection [4.8]. Unit connection schemes could be
very attractive solutions for applications as electrical generation from remote
sources of power such as hydro and low grade coal fields, pump storage schemes,
wind power station, new large generating stations near their load centre, etc.
The arrangement traditionally used is shown in Figure 4.10,a and termed
conventional scheme [4.24]. The basic feature is that the generating units feed a
common AC busbar at the secondary side of the unit transformers. This busbar also
takes the AC harmonic filters. The modified arrangement is indicated in Figure
4.10,b and termed unit connection scheme. Here the generator transformer and the
AC busbar have been removed. The generators are directly connected to the
converter transformers and, if needed, series-parallel combinations of units are
done at the DC side.
Auxiliar
a.
Fig. 4.10. Schemes for generators connected to HVDC converters:
a. conventional scheme. Reprinted with permission from DC and AC Configurations
(Chapter 3), CIGRE, Johannesburg 1997 CIGRE.
HVDC transmission
255
Auxiliar
b.
Fig. 4.10. Schemes for generators connected to HVDC converters:
b. unit connection. Reprinted with permission from DC and AC Configurations
(Chapter 3), CIGRE, Johannesburg 1997 CIGRE.
Basic computation
Pole II
Pole I
Neutral
256
DC line
DC bus
DC switches
b.
Pole II
DC line
Neutral
Pole I
a.
DC bus
HVDC transmission
257
positive anode voltage. The common potential of the anodes of valves T2, T4, T6 is
equal to the most negative cathode voltage.
Id
+
va
V1
ia
vb
ib
vc
ic
T1 T3
i3
i1
T5
i5
udr
Udr
i2
i4 i6
T4 T6 T2
-
The same transformer secondary windings feed two groups of three thyristor
valves each. The thyristors are in conduction two by two, depending on the voltage
variation in the secondary. With no grid control, conduction will take place
between the cathode and the anode of highest potential. For example, during t0-t1
(Fig. 4.13,a), amongst the thyristors belonging to the upper group (T1, T3, T5) will
be in conduction T1, which has the most positive anode; amongst the thyristors
belonging to the lower group (T2, T4, T6) will be in conduction T6, which has the
most negative cathode. As a consequence, T1 will also remain in conduction during
t1-t2 interval (i.e. as long as va > vb ). At the beginning of t2 t3 period, T3 will enter
the conducting state. Similarly, at the beginning of t1 t2, the thyristor T2, having
the most negative cathode amongst the inferior group of thyristors, will conduce,
while T6 is blocked (T2 remains in conduction during the entire interval t1 t3). The
transformer secondary line-to-neutral voltages are shown in Figure 4.13,a. These
are also the voltages of the anodes of the lower group of valves and the cathodes of
the upper group, all with respect to neutral point N. The difference in ordinates
between the upper and lower envelopes is the instantaneous direct voltage on the
valve side of the smoothing reactor. This is shown in Figure 4.13,b as the envelope
of the line-to-line voltages. It is immediately to be noted that the ripple of the direct
voltage is of frequency 6f and the magnitude of ripple is smaller. Each thyristor is
in conduction a T/3 period, the shape of current wave being rectangular
(Fig. 4.13,c,d,e).
The inverse voltage V1 across valve 1, appearing at the ends of T1 while T3 is
in conducting state, is uab ; during the conduction period of T5 the inverse voltage
is uac (Fig. 4.13,f).
258
Basic computation
t=0
T1
T1
T3
T3
T5
T5
T1
T1
Upper group
T6
T2
T2
T4
v
T4
T6
T6
T2
Lower group
vb
va
Line-to-neutral
voltage
-120
-180
t1
60
t3
u
t2
240
120
-60
t0
va
vc
180
300
t5
t4
t7
t6
Secondary line-to-line voltage
Line-to-line
voltage
uba
uca
ucb
ia
uab
uac
ubc
uba
-Id
T/6
T/6
T/3
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
uca
Id
T/3
a.
T/3
ib
Id
-Id
T/6
T/6
T/3
T/6
T/6
T/3
ic
Id
-Id
T/6
T/3
T/6
T/3
T/6
T/6
V1
Inverse voltage
across valve T1
uab
uac
V1
Fig. 4.13. Voltage and current waveforms for uncontrolled rectifier.
HVDC transmission
259
(4.1)
A 0=
u d( t )
ba
If one divides this value by the pulse width, obtains a value that approximates
good enough the value of the ideal average direct voltage:
Ud0 =
3
3
A0 =
60
3 Vs sin ( t + 60) d( t ) =
60
3 3
Vs [ cos( t + 60)]
One obtains:
Ud0 =
3 3
Vs = 1.653Vs
(4.2)
The case of controlled rectifier (with ignition delay). The grid or gate control
can be used to delay the ignition of the valves. The delay angle is denoted by
(Fig. 4.14,b,c); it corresponds to time delay of seconds. The delay angle is
limited to 180 . If exceeds 180 , the valve fails to ignite. In Figure 4.14,b is
detailed the transfer of current from a phase to another.
260
Basic computation
i3
i3
t
va
vc
vb
A0
0o
i6
60
120
va
180
va
vb
vb
A
i6
vc
va
va=vb
va>vb va<vb
Us
va
va
ia1
ia1
t=0
a.
b.
c.
Fig. 4.14. Voltage and current waveforms for the uncontrolled rectifier (a) and controlled
rectifier (b, c).
60+
3 3
3 Vs sin ( t + 60) d( t ) =
Vs [ cos( t + 60)]
60+
(4.3)
A first effect of angle is that the direct voltage is decreased by the factor
cos . Since can range from 0 to 180, cos can range from 1 to 1. As a
consequence, the voltage U d varies between + U d 0 and U d 0 . A firing with an
angle between 0 and / 2 determines the operation as rectifier. For angles
between / 2 and , the polarity of U d is negative, and because the current I d
does not change the direction, one obtains a power transfer in the opposite
direction, form DC towards AC side; the converter acts like an inverter.
For = 90 the voltage waveforms is symmetrical and consequently its value
is zero. For = 0 , the fundamental component of the alternating current from the
secondary winding of the transformer is in phase with the voltage waveform on
that phase. If the firing is delayed by , the current pulses of fundamental
component will be dephased with = as regards the voltage waveform (they are
not centred anymore on the voltage peak value).
The second effect is that the more increases, the more increases angle
between current and voltage waveforms. If the power losses inside the converter
HVDC transmission
261
are neglected, than the power entering in the converter on the AC side should be
equal to the power getting out on the DC side, meaning:
3 U s I s1 cos U d I d = U d 0 I d cos
(4.4)
where: I s1
60
2
2
2
= I d [sin 60 sin ( 60)] =
I d cos d = I d sin
3 Id
60
As a consequence:
I s1 =
2 3
6
Id =
I d = 0.78 I d
(4.5)
262
Basic computation
Ld
+
va
vb
vc
T1
i1
Id
Lk
ud
Lk
Lk
T3
i3
Ud
vc
vb
va
T1
ud
T3
va
T5
t
T2
i2
T4
T2
a.
T6
b.
Fig. 4.15. Electric circuit for the commutation interval of T1 with T3.
d ib
dt
(4.6')
ud va = Lk
d ia
dt
(4.6")
HVDC transmission
263
Using this result according to the relations (4.6') and (4.6"), we obtain:
di di
2ud (va + vb ) = Lk b + a = 0
dt
dt
or
ud =
va + vb
2
(4.7)
d ia
di
d ib
= 2 Lk b = 2 X k
dt
dt
d( t )
I sc 2 =
then:
3
Vs
2X k
d ib = I sc 2 sin t d( t )
By integrating the last equation, one obtains:
di = I
b
sc 2
sin t d( t )
meaning:
ib (t ) = I sc 2 ( cos t ) + C = i3 (t )
The integration constant C, is obtained from the boundary condition at the
beginning of commutation interval: t = and i3 = 0 . The result is:
C = I sc 2 cos =
3
Vs cos
2X k
264
Basic computation
(4.8)
(4.9)
(4.10)
The current i1 of the outgoing valve has a sine term of the same amplitude as
that of i3 but of opposite phase and its constant term makes i1 = I d at the
beginning.
For nearly equal to 0 (or 180 ), the commutation period or the overlap is
the greatest. The overlap is the shortest when = 90 , since i 3 is associated with
the segment of the sine wave, which is nearly linear. Also, if the source voltage V
s
A =
v +v
3
vb a b d( t )=
2
2
V sin t d( t )
s
By integrating, we obtain:
3
A =
Vs ( cos t )
2
3
Vs [cos cos( + )]
2
HVDC transmission
265
U d =
3 A U d 0
[cos cos( + )]
=
(4.11)
va
ud=
vb
va+vb
2
A0
/3
-
2 3
Fig. 4.16. Figure explaining the voltage drop caused by overlap during commutation
from valve 1 to valve 3.
In the case when the commutation process and ignition delay is considered,
the reduction in direct voltage is represented by areas A and A ; the direct
voltage is given by:
U d = U d 0 cos U d =
Ud0
[cos + cos(+ )]
2
(4.12)
1
[cos + cos( + )]
2k
(4.13)
where:
k=
(4.13')
266
Basic computation
For most practical power flow cases, k is close to 1 and can be assumed to be
constant. When is varied between 5 20 and between 8 22, k varies
between 0.994 and 0.999.
d) As the phase shift is positive (AC current is lagging), the reactive power
Qc absorbed by the converter is positive, i.e. it is absorbed both on the rectifier
side and on the inverter side. For converter bridges operating in normal mode (i.e.
= 15 ) and for a commutation reactance X k = 15% , the consumed reactive
power is about 50% from the transmitted active power.
Equivalent circuit of the rectifier
If in the equation (4.12) we replaces the expressions of bi-phase short-circuit
current I sc 2 and we takes into account (4.2), results a new form of the direct
current:
Id =
U d 0 [cos cos( + )]
(4.14)
6Xk
Id
Ud0,r
Ud0cos
Udr
HVDC transmission
267
alternating voltage system must exist on the primary side of the transformer, and
grid control of the converters is essential.
If the bridge rectifier is given progressively great delay the output voltage
decreases becoming zero when is 90. With further delay the average direct
voltage becomes negative and the applied direct voltage, from the rectifier, forces
current through the valves against this negative or back voltage. The converter thus
receives power and inverts.
In the hypothesis that the commutation process is neglected, the polarity of
direct voltage U d could change when = 90 . The direct voltage becomes
negative for 90 < < 180 and the converter operates in inversion mode. The
valve current cannot be reversed since conduction occurs in only one direction.
Thus reversal of the direct voltage U d implies a reversal of power.
In reality, due to the commutation process, the angle tr , for which the
switch to inverter operation mode takes place, is smaller. In order to demonstrate
this affirmation, in the equation (4.12) the sum expression will be transformed:
Ud =
Ud0
[cos + cos( + )] = U d 0 cos cos +
2
2
2
(4.16)
va
Id
T4
Udi
vb
T6
vc
T2
T6
T4
T2 v
a
vb
By-pass
vc
T1
T3
T5
T3
T1
T5
T3
a.
b.
Fig. 4.18. Bridge connexion inverter operation (a); Bridge connexion inverter voltage
and current waveforms (b).
268
Basic computation
Although angles and could have been used in inverters theory, in order
to make a difference, other symbols will be employed. These angles are defined by
their advance with respect to the instant (t = 180 for ignition of valve 3 and
extinction of valve 1) when the commutating voltage is zero and decreasing, as
shown in Figure 4.19. From the figure, we see that: = 180 for the ignition
advance angle, and = = 180 for the extinction advance angle.
Back to rectifiers equation (4.12) we use opposite polarity for direct voltage
and replaces = 180 and = :
U d 0, i
U
[cos + cos( + )] = d 0,i [cos(180 ) + cos(180 )]
2
2
If we consider:
cos = cos(180 ) = cos
U di =
(4.17)
I d = I sc 2 (cos cos )
(4.18)
uba
Isc2
3 Vs
Isc2(cos-cost)
Rectifier
i1
Inverter
i1
i3
i3
Fig. 4.19. Relationships between the angles used in converter theory and why the
curvature of the front of a current pulse of inverter differs from that of a rectifier.
Reprinted with permission from IEEE 5191992, Guide for harmonic control and
reactive compensation of static power converters 1992 IEEE.
HVDC transmission
269
(4.19)
(4.19')
Rci
Id
Id
Udi
Ud0,icos
Ud0,i
Udi
Ud0,icos
a.
Ud0,i
b.
In Table 4.1 there are grouped together the equations necessary to calculate
the parameters of an HVDC link.
Table 4.1
HVDC link equations
0
Ideal no-load direct voltage
Direct voltage with
commutation overlap and
ignition delay
Rectifier
1
U d 0, r =
Inverter
2
3 2
Nik ,rU kr
U dr = U d 0,r cos
U d 0,i =
3 2
Nik ,iU ki
3
3
X kr I d U di = U d 0,i cos X ki I d
6
Id
I pr = N ik , r I sr
6
Id
I pi = N ik , i I si
Pdr = U dr I d
Pdi = U di I d
S kr = 3U kr I pr
S ki = 3U ki I pi
I sr
I si
270
Basic computation
0
Active power at AC system
terminal bus
Reactive power at AC system
terminal bus
1
Pkr Pdr
Pki Pdi
U dr = U di + RL I d
DC line equation
Rcr
RL
Pi-jQi
-Rci
Id
UAC,r
Ud0,r
Ud0,rcos
Rectifier
AC
Udi
Udr
DC line
Ud0,icos
Ud0,i
UAC,i
Inverter
DC
Fig. 4.21. Equivalent circuit of the HVDC link.
AC
HVDC transmission
271
U d 0, r cos U d 0, i cos
Rcr + RL Rci
(4.20)
where:
Rcr =
3 X kr
;
Rci =
3 X ki
(4.21)
DC power is simply the product of the current and the voltage at the particular
location. Power transfer on the DC link can be increased by either increasing the
rectifier voltage or decreasing the inverter voltage. Either of these increases the
current and power in the DC link.
The power at the rectifier terminals is:
Pdr = U dr I d
(4.22')
(4.22'')
272
Basic computation
The rectifier direct voltage will usually be between 0% (no load) and 10% higher
than the inverter DC voltage, depending upon line losses and loading level.
The value of the direct current, I d , could be controlled by the change of
U d 0, r and U d 0, i values or by the change of or angles:
the values of U d 0, r and U d 0, i could be regulated by changing the converter
transformer turn ratio N ik with a slow acting control;
the firing angle could be rapidly controlled by gate-control. Usually, both
the rectifier and the inverter are operating with = 12 15 , respectively
min = 18 .
As a consequence, through firing angles control, a converter could operate as
rectifier or as inverter; the power flow direction could be changed. This change
could be obtained by reversal of polarity of the direct voltages at the both ends.
The responsibilities for voltage regulation and current regulation are kept
distinct and are assigned to separate terminals. Generally, in a DC transmission
link, the inverter substations controls the direct voltage U d , keeping it at a constant
value and rigorously dependent on the voltage on AC side. At the other terminal,
the rectifier substation regulates the direct voltage so that I d current corresponds to
the necessary active power Pd .
The ideal voltage-current characteristics are presented in Figure 4.22. The
voltage U d and the current I d forming the coordinates may be measured at the
same common point on the DC line. The rectifier and inverter characteristics are
both measured at the rectifier. The inverter characteristic thus includes the voltage
drop across the line. With the rectifier maintaining constant current, its U d I d
characteristic is a vertical line.
Ud
Operating
point
Inverter
(CEA)
Rectifier
(CC)
Id
Fig. 4.22. Ideal steady-state U d I d characteristic seen
from the rectifier terminal.
(4.23)
HVDC transmission
273
Rectifier (CIA)
Normal vo
lt
E
Reduced
volt
Inverter
B (CEA)
D
G
B
G
Inverter
(CC)
O
I0i
I0r
Im
Rectifier
(CC)
Id
274
Basic computation
The variables I 0 r and I 0i are called rectifier current order and inverter
current order, respectively, while their difference
I m = I 0 r I 0i
is called current margin and its usual value is I m = 0.1 ... 0.15 p.u. from the rated
current.
Under normal operating conditions, the operating point is G, the rectifier
controls the direct current and the inverter the direct voltage; this is CCR (Current
control performed by the rectifier) operating mode. With a reduced rectifier
voltage, the operating condition is represented by the intersection point G'. The
inverter takes current control and the rectifier established the voltage; this is CCI
(Current control performed by the inverter) operating mode. The change from a
mode to another is referred to as a mode shift.
In most HVDC systems, each converter is required to function as a rectifier
as well as an inverter. Consequently, each converter is provided with a combined
characteristic as shown in Figure 4.24.
Ud
Converter A
(CIA)
Converter B
(CEA)
G1
Id
0
(CC)
(CC)
G2
Converter A
(CEA)
Converter B
(CIA)
HVDC transmission
275
the Figure 4.24; the current I d is the same as before, but the voltage polarity has
changed [4.9].
Nik
~
k
Ik
Ui
Xk
i'
Ii 0
Id
()
+
Ud
[X ] = [U dr , r , N ik , r , cos,U di , i , N ik ,i , cos, I d ] t
(4.24)
276
Basic computation
[X ] = [U dr , N ik , r , cos,U di , N ik ,i , cos, I d ] t
(4.24')
U di ; Pdi
Control
mode
IR 1
PR 2
N ik , r ; U di ; Pdi
IR 2
N ik , r ; U di ; I d
PR 3
Nik ,i ; Pdi
IR 3
Nik ,i ; I d
PR 4
N ik , r ; Nik ,i ; Pdi
IR 4
N ik , r ; Nik ,i ; I d
PI 1
U dr ; Pdi
II 1
U dr ; I d
PI 2
N ik , r ; Pdi
II 2
N ik , r ; I d
PI 3
Nik ,i ; U dr ; Pdi
II 3
Nik ,i ; U dr ; I d
PI 4
Nik ,i ; N ik , r ; Pdi
II 4
Nik ,i ; N ik , r ; I d
Specified variables
Specified variables
U di ; I d
HVDC transmission
277
sp
Udi>Udi
PR1
, , Udi, Pdi
<sp
min
Nik,r
sp
>sp
Udi<Udi
max
Nik,i
min
Nik,i
PR3
, , Nik,i, Pdi
<sp
max
Nik,r
min
sp
Udi>Udi
PR2
Nik,r, , Udi, Pdi
sp
Udi<Udi
max
Nik,i
min
Nik,i
Nik,r
>sp
max
Nik,r
PR4
Nik,r, , Nik,i, Pdi
<sp
min
PI4
, Nik,i, Nik,r, Pdi
The modes PR2, PR3 and PR4 correspond to the situation in which at least
one value of the transformation ratios N ik exceed the limits. In such situation,
commutation from one operation mode to another is performed (solid line in
Figure 4.26).
To exemplify, if in the operating mode PR1, the value N ik , r , which ensure a
max
constant value of , exceeds the minimum ( N ikmin
,r ) or maximum ( N ik ,r ) limit, then
the variable is replaced by N ik , r taking the value equal to the exceeded limit. The
commutation to the mode PR2 is thus performed (solid line). The returning to the
mode PR1 is performed in function of the specified value of N ik , r and the actual
and < sp or
value of the firing angle (dashed line) if: N ik , r = N ikmin
,r
sp
N ik , r = N ikmax
, r and > .
It can be seen that the modelling of the control strategy in the calculation of
operating regimes of the DC links is similar with the treatment of the generator
nods in load flow algorithms for AC systems.
278
Basic computation
control takes places, the second is still in the previsious steady-state conditions.
Conversely, when the second control occurs, the first has already reached the new
steady-state conditions.
Converter A
Converter B
Line
AC
system
AC
system
Id
0 +
reference
Current
order
Power
:
order
desired
Id
Reg.
Current
error
+
Limits
measure
desired
Iord
+
+
Auxiliary
signal
Reg.
Current
error
measure
reference
Im
Current
margin
Fig. 4.27. Schematic diagram of control of an HVDC system (Adapted from [4.9]).
(4.25)
The fast control changes and , whereas the slow control changes U d 0, r and
U d 0,i . Based on the above description the following regulations take place [4.10]:
Rectifier side
fast current regulator, having I ord as reference, in the CCR operating
mode;
slow firing angle regulator, having desired as reference, in the CCR
operating mode;
fast minimum firing angle regulator, having min as reference, in CCI
operating mode;
slow voltage regulator, having U desired as reference, in CCI operating
mode;
Inverter side
fast extinction angle regulator, having 0 as reference, in the CCR
operating mode;
slow voltage regulator, having U desired as reference, in the CCR
operating mode;
HVDC transmission
279
Overall
system control
Master
control
VGC
Ides
Ides
f1
f2
Telecommunication
to remote HVDC terminal
Bridge
Id1
VGC
Pole 1
VGC
VGC
VGC
VGC
Pole 2
VGC
Pole
Bridge
controls controls
Id2
VGC
Bridge
Pole
controls controls
Fig. 4.28. Hierarchy of different levels of HVDC system control (Adapted from [4.4] and [4.5]).
The control is divided into four levels: bridge or converter unit control, pole
control, master control and overall control [4.9]:
a) The bridge or converter unit control determines the firing instants of the
valves within a bridge and defines min and min limits. This has the fastest
response within the control hierarchy;
b) The pole control coordinates the control of bridges in a pole. The
conversion of current order to a firing angle order, tap changer control, and certain
protection sequences are handled by the pole control. This includes coordination of
starting up, deblocking, and balancing of bridge controls;
c) The master control unit is usually provided by a power order (P) and other
information relating to the direct line current ( I d ), the direct line voltage ( U d ) and
the filter bus voltage. The master control determines the desired current order
280
Basic computation
( I des ) and provides coordinated current order signals to the individual valve group
control unit (VGC). It interprets the broader demands for controlling the HVDC
system by providing an interface between pole controls;
d) The overall system control. This includes power-flow scheduling
determined by the control centre, system frequency control and AC system
stabilization.
The control of HVDC system clearly requires communication between
terminals for proper operation. In the case of rapid changes in power level, highspeed communication is required to maintain consistent current setting at the two
terminals. Change of power direction requires communication to transfer the current
margin setting from one terminal to the other. The starting and stopping of the
terminals require coordination of the operations at the two terminals. Protection may
also require communication between the terminals for detection of some faults.
There are several alternative transmission media available for the
telecommunications: direct wires via private lines or telephone networks, powerline carrier, microwave systems and fibre optics.
HVDC transmission
281
The active and reactive fundamental components of the current are defined as:
I1a = I s1 cos
(4.26,a)
I1r = I s1 sin
(4.26,b)
Ud Id
3Vs
(4.27)
By substituting I d from (4.5) and U d from (4.12) into (4.27), and taking into
cos + cos( + )
2
or
I1a = (, ) I s1
(4.28)
cos + cos( + )
2
(4.28')
(4.14')
6Vs
2 +
6
Id =
sin sin
X k
2
2
(4.29)
Id =
obtaining:
I s1 =
I1a =
=
6 6Vs
(cos cos ) cos + cos =
2Xk
2
3Vs
3Vs
[cos 2 cos 2( + )]
cos 2 cos 2 =
2X k
4X k
282
Basic computation
or
I1a =
3Vs
sin sin (2 + )
2X k
(4.30)
3Vs
;
2X k
2 +
;
2
(4.31)
it results:
I s1 = 4 A' sin sin
(4.29')
(4.30')
(4.32)
1
cos 2 cos 1 cos 2 sin cos
2
cos
(4.32')
I1r I s1 sin cos = 4 A' sin 2 sin cos = 4 A' 1 cos 2 sin cos
= A' sin 2(1 cos 2 )
3Vs
[ sin cos(2 + )] = 3Vs 2 + sin 2 sin 2( + ) (4.33)
2X k
2
2X k
Expressing Vs from (4.14') and taking into account (4.2) and (4.5), it results:
Vs =
X k
I s1
3[cos cos( + )]
1 2 + sin 2 sin 2( + )
I s1
4
cos cos( + )
or
I 1r = (, )I s1
(4.34)
HVDC transmission
283
where
(, ) =
1 2 + sin 2 sin 2( + )
4
cos cos( + )
(4.34')
1 1
+ cos 2 x , obtain:
2 2
2 + sin 2 sin 2( + )
cos 2 cos 2( + )
(4.35)
(4.36)
50
40
30
20 15
0.5
Constant firing angle
Increasing firing angle
0.5
1.0
Pd
Pdn
284
Basic computation
condensers; static VAr system (SVS). From voltage regulation, losses and stability
considerations, it is not desirable to draw reactive power from the system except at
low loads [4.7].
SVS
SC
AC
system
The voltage regulation at the converter bus is desirable not only from the
voltage control viewpoint but also from the minimization of loss and stability
considerations. This requires adjustable reactive power source, which can provide
variable reactive power as demanded.
The least expensive sources of reactive power for converters are static
capacitor banks by themselves or as components of filters. Filters typically supply
half or more of the reactive power requirements of a converter (see 4.5.3). If the
AC system is inherently strong enough to stand use of additional switched
capacitors they may be the preferred solution. The preferred location for a DC
terminal is at a point in the system with a high short circuit level. Generating
stations generally provide good locations. If it is not convenient to locate a terminal
at a generating station, addition of synchronous condensers (SC) can be used to
raise short circuit levels and to provide dynamic voltage control. Synchronous
condensers have been widely used on DC links to obtain adequate short circuit
ratio. For very weak systems, such as islands, only rotating machines can supply an
adequate short circuit level. The drawback to use of synchronous condensers is that
they have high operating losses and maintenance requirements.
The static VAr systems (SVS) provide the fastest response following a
disturbance. The configurations normally used are: fixed capacitor, thyristor
controlled, reactor or thyristor switched capacitors.
Thyristor controlled reactors (TCR) perform as variable impedance
reactors by controlling of the amount of time they are switched on during each
half cycle of power frequency. If they are switched on continuously they act as
ordinary shunt reactors. For shorter on times they draw lower amount of reactive
power. They like static compensators, usually operate in parallel with capacitors in
order to provide a system, which can raise or lower voltage levels. For large
installation the capacitors are converted to filters to absorb harmonic components
of the non sinusoidal reactor currents [4.5].
Thyristor switches can provide precisely timed switching of shunt capacitor
banks (TSC). In practice the thyristor switches turn off at a current zero, leaving
the capacitors fully charged. They may then be switched on at another voltage
HVDC transmission
285
maximum with negligible transients. Their main disadvantage is that they can only
by switched in discrete blocks of reactive power. Unless many small block are
provided, additional voltage control device are required to provide smooth voltage
control. They have been successfully used in parallel with thyristor controlled
reactors (TSC TCR combination) to provide that smooth control.
TCR, TCC and the static VAr systems (SVC) will be described in the second
volume of the work.
2 3
1
1
1
1
13
286
Basic computation
180o
0o
120 o
a.
+120+
+180
300o
+120
Rectifier mode
b.
+120+
+180
+
+120
Inverter mode
c.
2 3
1
1
1
1
13
The second harmonic and all even harmonics are absent in the above because
there are two current pulses of equal size and opposite polarity per cycle. Since the
current pulse width is one-third of a cycle, third and all triple-q harmonics are also
absent. The remaining harmonics are on the order of n = 6q 1 , where q is any
positive integer, and p = 6 is the pulse number.
In a 12-pulse bridge, there are two 6-pulse bridges with two transformers, one
with connection and the other with connection (Fig. 4.32). The
harmonics of odd values of q cancel out. It results hence
i=
4 3
1
1
1
23
(4.38)
The remaining harmonics that have the order 12q 1 (i.e. 11th, 13th, 23rd, 25th,
etc.) flow into the AC system.
When the commutating reactance is considered, the overlap angle during
commutation rounds off the square edges of the current waves, and this reduces the
magnitude of harmonic components.
Figure 4.31,b shows a typical current wave shape in the AC system before
filtering. It consists essentially of series of alternating polarity rectangular current
pulses, with significant transition times caused by commutation reactance.
HVDC transmission
287
I1
n
where I n is the magnitude of the nth harmonic current and I1 is the magnitude of
the fundamental current, which is also proportional to the DC power. For example,
the fifth harmonic is 20% of the value of the fundamental, but the eleventh would
be only 9% of the fundamental.
The effect of / transformation on AC harmonic current
A / transformer, when no voltage level change is involved, yields line
currents on the side, which are the difference of two line currents on the Y side,
and vice-versa. A series of ideal plus and minus current pulses is one phase of the
value side of converter transformer are subtracted from those of another phase by
/ transformer to produce the current pattern shown in Figure 4.32,b,c. Analysis
of harmonic content of this current wave shape reveals the same harmonic
frequencies and magnitudes on both side of the transformer. However, the
phase relationships of some of the harmonics have been shifted 180. Specifically
the harmonics of order 5, 7, 17, 19, 29, 31, etc. have been shifted totally out of
phase with their relationship on the other side of the transformer [4.5].
t
b.
ia1
t
ia
ia2
c.
t
a.
d.
Fig 4.32. The scheme of a 12-pulse bridge (a) and AC converter currents before (b) and
after passage through / transformation (c), twelve-pulse converter current (d).
The fact that some harmonics are phase shifted differently in passing through
a / transformer than in a / transformer provides a means of cancelling on
those harmonics as far as the AC system is concerned. Figure 4.32,d shows the
effect of adding equal amount of two current wave-shapes shown in
Figures 4.32,b,c.
288
Basic computation
HVDC transmission
289
XL1
XL
R1
400
300
200
R
f/fr
XC2
XL2
R2
R3
100
f [Hz]
250
150
a.
XC1
2R
XL
R
0
c.
450
b.
XC
XL
350
XC2
Zmin
f
d.
290
Basic computation
(iii)The second order high-pass filters are designed to filter out the higher
harmonics (Fig. 4.33,c). The tuning of the filters is not critical. The losses at the
fundamental frequency can be reduced by using a C type filter where the capacitor
C2 in series with L, provides a low impedance path to the fundamental component
of current.
A typical filter system for a 12-pulse converter terminal is shown in Figure 4.34.
The filter impedance is minimum at the 11th and 13th harmonics resulting from the
two series-resonant tuned branches. The high-pass filter maintains a low
impedance for higher harmonic frequencies [4.9].
AC bus
11
th
13th
High pass
filter
All the filter branches appear capacitive at fundamental frequency and supply
reactive power.
DC filters
The harmonics in the DC voltage across the converter contain both
characteristic and non-characteristic orders. These harmonics result in current
harmonics in the DC lines and cause noise in the telephone circuits. The harmonic
current generated in the line can be computed if the harmonic voltage source at the
converters, smoothing reactor, DC filter and line parameters is known. The
harmonic current varies with the distance, from the converter station along the line.
The DC filters are also of single or double tuned type to filter out 6th and
th
12 harmonics and a high-pass filter for higher order harmonics.
In literature [4.18], a modern system with active filter for harmonics
attenuation generated by the converter is presented (Fig. 4.35). The basic idea of
series active filters (Fig. 4.35,a) is to generate a harmonic voltage, equal to, but in
phase opposition with the harmonic voltage generated by the converter. The
selection of passive or active filters is performed by switching the circuit breakers
1 or 2.
A prototype active filter was installed, in 1991, on the Konti-Skan 2 link
(Sweden Denmark). Figure 4.35,b, illustrates the simplified scheme for hybrid
solution passive and active filters on the DC side of the converter station from
Lindome (Sweden).
HVDC transmission
291
DC line
Smoothing reactor
AC
System
1
2
Active
Filter
Passive
Filters
a.
Smoothing
reactor
Passive DC
filter
Harmonic current
transducer
ih
if il
DC line
Optic fiber
insulator
and cable
Active DC filter
Control
unit
HVDC
converter
Trafo
By-pass
switch
Power
amplifier
Surge arrester
Electrode line
Neutral
bus filter
b.
Fig. 4.35. Active filters for harmonics attenuation. Reprinted with permission from Zhang,
W., Asplund, G. Active DC filter for HVDC systems, IEEE Computer Applications in
Power, January 1994 1994 IEEE.
292
Basic computation
power amplifier. The power amplifier controlled by means of the control system
acts as harmonic voltage source. This generates harmonic currents in phase
opposition with the harmonics generated by the conversion valve bridge,
compensating on this way the harmonic currents in the AC line.
In Table 4.3 the rated powers for harmonic filters installed on the AC side are
given for some HVDC systems. As common features, the equipments operating
with 6 pulses require filters for harmonics 5, 7, 11, 13 and a high-pass filter for the
17th harmonic and above. The HVDC equipments operating with 12 pulses require
only filters for the 11th and 13th harmonics respectively a high-pass filter for the
23rd harmonic and above.
Table 4.3
Systems of AC filters
HVDC systems
Skagerrak (500 MW):
Denmark
Norway
Inga-Shaba (560 MW):
Inga
Kolwezi
Pacific Intertie (1350 MW):
Oregon
California
Konti-Skan (250 MW):
Denmark
Sweden
high-pass
220
220
220
220
180
245
210.1
228.1
27.2
220.4
219.9
217
155.8
230
127.8
214.6
228.2
228.2
221
220.1
280
292
119
113
119
17
117
112
112
19
113
140
Some systems like Cross-Channel link are designed to operate only with
high-pass filters. Although HVDC systems, given in Table 4.3, do not operate with
6 pulses, reduced size filters are yet used for the 5th and 7th harmonics during the
unavailability of one conversion bridge of the two series connected.
The number and size of the reactive power compensation equipments in the
HVDC systems are high rated in comparison with the transferred active power.
Two examples are considered:
For the ACDC Itaipu (Brazil) system, 6300 MW rated, the following
equipments was designed:
harmonic filters provide 1451 MVAr at 500 kV on the rectifiers AC side
and 2483 MVAr at 345 kV on the inverters AC side;
capacitor banks, with 588 MVAr installed capacity, on the 345 kV AC
side;
synchronous condensers, with 1200 MVA installed capacity, in the
inversion station.
For the Cross-Channel link between France and England, having a
maximum rated power of 2000 MW:
HVDC transmission
293
8 harmonic filters (11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 22, 23, 24) of 150 MVAr apiece in
the 400 kV Mandarins (France) station;
8 harmonic filters of 120 MVAr apiece and two static compensators in
the 400 kV Sellindge (England) station.
(4.39)
where Pi sp and Qisp are the specified active and reactive powers.
The load flow problem is solved by applying the iterative Newton-Raphson
method, which consists of linearization of the system of equations (4.39) obtaining:
P
Q = [J ] U U
where: Pi = Pi sp Pi
Qi =
Qisp
(4.40)
[J ] =
H N
the Jacobian matrix.
M L
When the AC system includes a HVDC link, the equations of power balance
at the terminal buses k of the AC system are modified by including the powers at
the converter stations. Taking into account that Pkrdc , Qkrdc , Qkidc are consumed
powers and Pkidc is injected power, the equations of the power mismatches at the
terminal buses, given also in (4.39), get the following form:
Pkr = Pkrsp Pkrac ( [], [U ] ) Pkrdc ( U kr ,U ki , [X ] )
Pki = Pkisp Pkiac ( [], [U ] ) + Pkidc ( U kr ,U ki , [X ] )
Qkr = Qkrsp Qkrac ( [], [U ] ) Qkrdc ( U kr ,U ki , [X ] )
(4.41)
294
Basic computation
Pkrac , Qkrac , Pkiac , Qkiac the powers transferred from/to the AC system
through the terminal buses (rectifier or inverter) given by
expressions:
Pi ac =
U U [G
i
ik cos
(i k ) + Bik sin (i k )]
k =1
Qiac =
U U [G sin( ) B cos( )]
i
ik
ik
k =1
(4.42)
where nx denotes the number of independent variables chosen for the HVDC
system, either 9 or 7. The system of equations (4.42) consists of rectifier, inverter
and line equations as well as the equations corresponding to control strategy.
The methods for load flow calculation of a mixed AC-DC system can be
grouped on the following categories [4.27]:
the simultaneous solving method of the nonlinear system of equations that
defines the operation of the AC system and the DC link, known as the
extended variable method;
the sequential solving method based on the diakoptics principle where the
DC systems is treated separated by the AC one;
the eliminated variables method of the DC system.
The extended variables method
In the frame of this method are used the classical Newton-Raphson
algorithm, for simultaneous solving of the two systems of equations (4.39) and
(4.41) of the mathematical model, and the vector of independent variables [X]
having nine components. Vector [X] is added to the vector of independent variables
associated to the AC system (magnitudes and angles of nodal voltages) resulting a
set of extended variables [4.4].
In order to have a complete system of equations, to relations (4.43) that
describes the operation of rectifier, inverter and DC line:
R1 = U dr
3 2
3
N ik ,iU ki cos + X ki I d = 0
U di RL I d = 0
R2 = U di
R3 = U dr
3 2
3
N ik ,rU kr cos + X kr I d = 0
(4.43)
HVDC transmission
295
3 2
N ik , rU kr cos r = 0
(4.43')
3 2
R5 = U di k
N ik , iU ki cosi = 0
3 2
3 2
N ik , r I d U kr cos r ; Qki = k
N ik ,i I d U ki cosi
i n \ t ,i e
Pi sp Pi ( [U ], [], [X ] ) = 0
i t
Qisp Qi ( [U ], [] ) = 0
i nc \ t
Qisp Qi ( [U ], [], [X ] ) = 0
i t
Ri ( [U t ], [X ] ) = 0
i = 1, 2, K, 9
(4.44)
[Qt ] M
[R ] 0
N
L
0
0 []
A [t ]
0 [U U ]
C [U t U t ]
D E [X ]
(4.45)
296
Basic computation
Ri ( [U t ], [X ] ) = 0 i = 1, 2, K, 7
(4.46)
[X ] = f ( [U t ] ) = f (U kr ,U ki )
(4.46')
By physical considerations, one solution of (4.46) type exists for each from
the control strategies defined in Table 4.2. Taking into account this aspect and that
the nodal voltage angles of the AC system do not appear in the expression of the
active and reactive powers consumed respectively injected through the converter
station at the terminal buses it results:
Pkr = Pkr (U kr ,U ki )
Qkr = Qkr (U kr ,U ki )
Pki = Pki (U kr ,U ki )
Qki = Qki (U kr ,U ki )
HVDC transmission
297
and the equations (4.41) expressing the nodal power mismatches at the terminal
stations becomes:
Pkr = Pkrsp Pkrac ( [], [U ] ) Pkrdc (U kr ,U ki )
Pki = Pkisp Pkiac ( [], [U ] ) + Pkidc (U kr ,U ki )
Qkr = Qkrsp Qkrac ( [], [U ] ) Qkrdc (U kr ,U ki )
Qki = Qkisp Qkiac ( [], [U ] ) Qkidc (U kr ,U ki )
Concluding, under steady state conditions, the conversion stations are seen as
loads for the AC system, having the static characteristics dependent on the voltage
of the terminal buses.
Then, the application of the classical Newton-Raphson algorithm for the
steady state calculation is simply reduced to solving, at each iteration, the system
of linear equations:
P H
Q = M
L U U
In this matrix equation, the Jacobian is the matrix from relationship (4.40) but
with a modification of the terms that contains the partial derivatives of the powers
with respect to voltage magnitudes corresponding to the terminal station (rectifier
or inverter).
Concluding, by the analytical elimination of the DC variables from [ X ] , the
implementation of a DC link into an existent power flow program based on
Newton-Raphson method, require a minimal computation effort, given by the
modification of more 8 elements of the Jacobian matrix. Moreover, if the
modification is performed only on the sub-matrices [N] and [L] of the Jacobian
matrix, the method can be easily adapted to fast decoupled based power flow
programs. In this case, the matrix [B'] remain unchanged, like in the case of pure
AC systems; only the matrix [B''] is changed.
After each iteration, the values of the DC variables form [ X ] are calculated
to verify the appearance of possible commutation between the possible operating
modes of the DC link.
298
Basic computation
for the sending terminal and as a power source for the other terminal of the link.
The transferred power on the DC link can be modified and even changed as sign,
very fast, as the AC systems requires. The DC link can be used, for example, to
transfer active power toward any of the two AC systems with lack of generation,
after a generator outage or changing of the transferred power between the AC
systems so that to damp power oscillations into the AC systems.
The capability of the DC links to transfer power independent of the frequency
and voltage of the interconnected AC systems makes it very useful in their
interconnecting. Outages occurrences into joint AC systems do not influence the
powers exchange. The DC link operating into AC meshed systems can also control
the power flow on the AC lines operating in parallel with this one. The propagation
of the disturbances effects occurring in different parts of the AC interconnected
systems can be limited by the DC link connecting them. By using a suitable
controlling system, the power flow on the DC link can be controlled during the
disturbances occurrence, so that to improve the stability of the AC system and to
diminish the risk of overloading the AC interconnection lines. In such ACDC
mixed links, in order the interconnection to remain stable, it is very important the
difference = 1 2 between the equivalent internal angles of the two AC
systems not to exceed a critical limit value. This critical value can be reached, for
instance, at the sudden load variation in one of the AC systems or at the
unavailability of an interconnection AC line (Fig. 4.36).
Furthermore, the stability is improved by means of automatic control of the
power flow on the DC link, counteracting and damping the low-frequency electromechanic oscillations from the AC system.
PAC [MW]
2740
2740
40
2720
2720
20
PAC
2700
2700
2680
2680
-20
PDC
3 4
a.
t [s]
5 6
t [s]
b.
Fig. 4.36. Example of oscillations damping into the mixed AC-DC system Pacific-Intertie.
HVDC transmission
299
The DC links have, generally, the advantage of no influencing the shortcircuit currents for some faults into the AC system. Exception from this rule are the
transformers from the converter station, having the windings delta connected, in
case of short-circuits into the AC systems.
S sc
Pd
Ksc
Zth = 1
Y
Pd
AC system
impedance
Yc
harmonic filters
and
capacitor banks
2
U AC
Z th
300
Basic computation
(injecting reactive power). The capacity of the harmonic filters and capacitor banks
will increase the equivalent impedance at fundamental frequency of especially
inductive AC systems. Consequently, the effective short-circuit ratio is calculated
as:
S sc Q f + Qbc
K sc , ef =
Pd
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
Ksc
Fig. 4.38. Pd I d characteristics
of an inverter in terms of shortcircuit ratio.
0.2
0
Id
HVDC transmission
301
Z th ); this is also called damping angle and its value has significant influence on the
DC system control stability.
302
Basic computation
HVDC transmission
where Vs = Vmax, s
303
AC
AC
AC
a.
AC
AC
+
+
DC
b.
Fig. 4.39. One line diagrams of a single-circuit three-phase line (a)
and of a bipolar DC line (b).
(3 2 ) V
max, s I AC
(4.47)
= 2U max, d I d
Assume also the insulators withstand the same peak voltage to neutral in both
cases, Vmax, s = U max, d , it results:
I d = 3 2 2 I AC
Power losses for the two cases are given by:
2
PAC = 3 I AC
R ; Pd = 2 I d2 R
(4.48)
304
Basic computation
Taking into account (4.48) it results the ratio of power losses as:
2
PAC 3 1
=
= 1.33
Pd
2 1.06
b) For the same transmitted power and considering the same power losses
and the same conductor cross-sectional area, the insulation level at direct current
is only 87% with respect to the one at alternating current.
The power losses for the two cases are:
2
PAC = 3 I AC
R ; Pd = 2 I d2 R
2 I AC = 1.225 I AC
(4.49)
(4.50)
(4.51)
HVDC transmission
305
3Vs I AC = U d I d
By compounding the last two equations it results:
Ud
3 2
=
Vs
y
The ratio of the two voltages given by relationship (4.51) becomes:
DC insulation level U d 2
3
0.87
=
=
=
AC insulation level
y
2 Vs 2 y
AC insulation level
DC insulation level
Pd
PAC
I AC = I d
306
Basic computation
Ud
= 2 Vs
2
it results
2
3 2 R I d2 2 3 R I AC
=
3U d I d
2 3Vs I AC
or
2I d U d
=
I AC Vs
that is
I d = 2 I AC .
In this case the ratio of the transmitted powers will be:
Pd
3 Ud Id
=
=2
PAC 2 3 Vs I AC
that is:
Pd = 2 PAC
40.1 m
40.5 m
From the above it results that for the same rated voltage the DC lines leads to
lower investments, respectively softer constructions than AC ones: with less
conductors and insulators and softer electric towers (Fig. 4.41) [4.25].
HVDC transmission
307
1440 MVA
Unchanged tower
body and
foundations
220 kV AC
380 kV DC
The DC transmission lines have a bigger transmission capacity for the same
right of way (Fig. 4.43).
10000
HVAC
HVDC
1000
30
30
40
50
60
70
80
308
Basic computation
st
co
l
cost
ta
to DC total
C
DC line
DC terminal AC line
cost
AC terminal cost
Break even distance
Distance
OEL 800 km
UEL 50 km
Equivalent DC line
The same insulation level
The same right of way
[kV]
[MW]
[kV]
[MW]
200
400
300
900
300
900
500
2500
400
1600
700
4500
600
3600
1000
8000
HVDC transmission
309
Table 4.5
Historical HVDC turnkey cost division [4.8]
Back-Back
200-500
MW
Valve
groups
Converter
transformers
DC
switchyard
& filtering
AC
switchyard
& filtering
Control /
Prot /
Comm.
Civil /
Mech.
works
Auxiliary
power
Project eng.
& admin.
Total per
kW
250 kV
500 MW
350 kV
1000 MW
500 kV
2000 MW
600 kV
3000 MW
$/kW
$/kW
$/kW
$/kW
$/kW
38
19
50
21
42
21
35
22
33
22
45
22.5
50
21
44
22
35
22
33
22
14
12
10
22
11
25
10
19
9.5
14
13
17
8.5
19
16
13
12
26
13
33
14
28
14
21
13.5
20
13.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
42
21
43
17.5
34
17
27
17
26
17
$200
100
$240
100
$200
100
$160
100
$150
100
310
Basic computation
min
max
max
interval from Nikmin
, r = N ik ,i = 0.256 to N ik , r = N ik ,i = 0.384 , corresponding to
the interval (0.8...1.2), in per unit, with increasing step of 0.01 p.u., in order to
maintain the ignition angle in appropriate range in normal operating state and
the inverter voltage in the range 2.5% of the rated voltage ( U di [585, 615] kV ).
RL/2
400 kV
400 kV
+300 kV
-300 kV
RL/2
Rectifier (r)
Inverter (i)
Ukr r
Nik,r
Ikr 0
kr
Xk,r
ir
Uir
Id
Iir 0
ir
Ud,r
Uii
Ud,i
ii
Xki
Iii 0
Nik,i
ii
Uki i
Iki 0
ki
HVDC transmission
311
(iv) active, reactive and apparent powers as well as the power factor at high
voltage terminals of the conversion stations ( S kr , Pkr , Qkr and cos r ,
respectively Ski , Pki , Qki and cos i ).
II. Considering that the AC voltage at rectifier decrease by U = 10% with respect
to the voltage in normal operating state and the AC voltage at inverter remains unchanged,
and the voltage control by means of tap changing is inactive, determine:
(i) control strategy and the new value of the direct current I d ;
(ii) rectifier and inverter voltages U dr and U di ;
(iii) extinction angle and the overlap angles r and i after the grid control
system acts;
(iv) active, reactive and apparent powers as well as the power factor at high
voltage terminals of the conversion stations ( S kr , Pkr , Qkr and cos r ,
respectively Ski , Pki , Qki and cos i ) before the control system of the tapchange position at transformer is activated;
(v) transformation ratio value Nik ,r necessary to restore the normal operating
conditions.
III. Supposing that, with respect to the normal operating state, the AC voltage at
inverter, increase by 2.5%, and the AC voltage at rectifier remain unchanged, under the
hypothesis that the voltage control by means of tap changing is activated, determine:
(i) rectifier and inverter voltages U dr and U di and the direct current I d before
the grid control system acts;
(ii) ignition delay after the grid control system acts;
(iii) transformation ratio values Nik ,r and Nik ,i after the action of the control
system of tap-changer position;
(iv) active, reactive and apparent powers as well as the power factor at high
voltage terminals of the conversion stations ( S kr , Pkr , Qkr and cos r ,
respectively Ski , Pki , Qki and cos i ) under the new operating conditions.
Generally, for the operating state analysis of a bipolar DC link the equivalent
monopolar circuit is used (Fig. 4.46). Let us denote by nBr the number of rectifier bridges,
and by nBi the number of inverter bridges and knowing that these are series connected on
the DC side and parallel connected on the AC side, then the calculation relationships of the
monopolar link, given in Table 4.1, get the form given in Table 4.6.
Table 4.6.
Operating equations of a bipolar line equivalated through a monopolar line
Rectifier
0
3 2
nBr Nik ,rU kr
3
= U d 0,r cos nBr X kB , r I d
Inverter
1
U d 0, r =
U dr
3 2
nBi N ik ,iU ki
3
= U d 0,i cos nBi X kB ,i I d
U d 0,i =
U di
2
(A1)
(A2)
312
Basic computation
0
U dr =
U d 0, r
2
I kr
cos + cos ( + r )
U di =
6
nBr N ik , r I d
U d 0,i
2
cos + cos ( + i )
I ki
6
nBi N ik ,i I d
(A3)
(A4)
Skr = 3U kr I kr
Ski = 3U ki I ki
(A5)
Pkr Pdr = U dr I d
Pki Pdi = U di I d
(A6)
(A7)
cos r =
Pkr
Skr
cos i =
Pki
Ski
U dr = U di + RL I d
(A8)
(A9)
Solution
I. Normal operating state
(i) Calculation of rectifier voltage U dr and direct current I d .
From relation (A6) we express the direct current as:
Id =
Pdr
U dr
(A10)
U di U di2 + 4 RL Pdr
2
Of the two solutions of equation (A10), the one with positive + sign is kept
because for the no-load conditions ( I d = 0 and Pdr = 0 , respectively) this provides the
value U dr = U di which is physically correct.
Thus
U dr =
and
Id =
Pdr 1260
=
= 2 kA
630
U dr
HVDC transmission
313
U d 0, r =
3
3
nBr X kB ,r I d 630 + 4 6 2
=
= 710.62 kV
cos
cos18
U dr +
and
U d 0,i =
U di +
3
3
nBi X kB ,i I d 600 + 4 6 2
=
= 683.05 kV
cos
cos19
respectively.
Taking into account relation (A3) it results:
cos( + r ) =
2U dr
2 630
cos =
cos18 = 0.822
710.62
U d 0,r
cos( + i ) =
2U di
2 600
cos =
cos19 = 0.811
683.05
U d 0,i
and
r = arccos 0.822 18 = 16.71
i = arccos 0.811 19 = 16.81
U ki =
U d 0, r
3 2 nBr N ik , r
U d 0,i
3 2 nBi Nik ,i
710.62
3 2 4 0.32
683.05
3 2 4 0.32
= 411.09 kV
= 395.14 kV
(iv) The active, reactive and apparent powers as well as the power factor on the AC
sides are determined in the following.
From relation (A4) it results:
I kr =
6
6
nBr Nik , r I d =
4 0.32 2 = 1.996 kA
I ki =
6
6
nBi Nik ,i I d =
4 0.32 2 = 1.996 kA
Next, using the relations (A6), (A7), (A8) and (A9) we proceed to the calculation of:
Apparent powers:
Skr = 3 U kr I kr = 3 411.09 1.996 = 1421.21 MVA
Ski = 3 U ki I ki = 3 395.14 1.996 = 1366.07 MVA
314
Basic computation
Active powers:
Pkr Pdr = U dr I d = 630 2 = 1260 MW
Pki Pdi = U di I d = 600 2 = 1200 MW
Power factors:
cos r =
Pkr
= 0.887
Skr
cos i =
Pki
= 0.878
Ski
II. Analysis of the disturbed state caused by the decrease in voltage by U = 10%
on the AC side of the rectifier terminal.
(i) The control strategy and direct current I d .
Due to the decrease in voltage at the terminal bus, the rectifier voltage decreases. In
order to maintain the current at the specified value, the control system of the link will
trigger, in a first stage, the decrease of the ignition angle in order to increase the voltage
U dr . Subsequent, the angle will be brought in the normal operating range by changing
the transformation ratio (shifting the tap-changer position).
In this section, the operation of the HVDC link will be analysed for the time interval
before to activation of the control system of the tap-changer position.
Assume that the HVDC link will keep on operation in normal conditions with:
rectifier on CC control with I d = 2 kA and inverter on CEA control with U di = 600 kV .
Therefore, the ignition angle should be changed so that:
U dr = U di + RL I d = 600 + 15 2 = 630 kV
From relation (A2) written under the form
U dr =
3 2
3
U
nBr Nik , r 1 +
U kr cos nBr X kB , r I d
100
where U stands for the percent voltage variation at the terminal bus with respect to the
value corresponding to the normal operating state, we determine:
3
nBr X kB ,r I d
cos =
3 2
U
nBr N ik , r 1 +
U kr
100
U dr +
HVDC transmission
315
630 +
3
462
3 2
4 0.32 (1 0.1) 411.09
= 1.057 > 1
Therefore, the normal operating conditions cannot be fulfilled, and the shift in the
control mode is chosen: rectifier on CIA control mode with = min = 6o and inverter on
CC control mode with:
I d = I dsp I m = (1 0.15) I dsp = 0.85 2 = 1.7 kA
where I dsp = 2 kA is the direct current value under normal operating conditions.
(ii) The rectifier and inverter direct voltages now are:
U dr =
=
3 2
3
U
nBr N ik , r 1 +
U k ,r cos min nBr X kB ,r I d =
100
3 2
3
4 0.32 0.9 411.09 cos 6 4 6 1.7 = 597.09 kV
(iii)
Taking into account that the new AC rectifier voltage value is U kr = 0.9 411.09 kV
(reduced by 10%) and that the AC inverter voltage remained unchanged
( U ki = 395.14 kV ), from relation (A1) it results:
U d 0, r =
3 2
3 2
nBr Nik ,rU kr =
4 0.32 0.9 411.09 = 639.55 kV
which is 0.9 of the normal operating state value, while the inverter voltage remained
unchanged, U d 0,i = 683.05 kV .
Next, from relations (A2) and (A3) we determine:
cos =
U di +
3
3
nBi X kB ,i I d 571.59 + 4 6 1.7
=
= 0.894
683.05
U d 0,i
2 U dr
2 597.09
cos min =
cos 6 = 0.873
639.55
U d 0,r
2 U di
2 571.59
cos =
cos 26.64 = 0.780
683.05
U d 0,i
316
Basic computation
and
r = arccos 0.873 6 = 23.191
i = arccos 0.780 26.64 = 12.10
respectively.
(iv) The active, reactive and apparent powers as well as the power factors at the
terminal buses are determined in a similar manner like at the point (iv) from the
case I.
It results:
Currents at the terminal buses:
I kr =
6
6
nBr Nik ,r I d =
4 0.32 1.7 = 1.697 kA
I ki =
6
nBi Nik ,i I d = 1.697 kA
Apparent powers:
Skr = 3 U kr I kr = 3 0.9 411.09 1.697 = 1087.48 MVA
Ski = 3 U ki I ki = 3 395.14 1.697 = 1161.43 MVA
Active powers:
Pkr Pdr = U dr I d = 597.09 1.7 = 1015.05 MW
Pki Pdi = U di I d = 571.59 1.7 = 971.70 MW
Reactive powers:
Qkr = Skr2 Pkr2 = 390.24 MVAr
Qki = Ski2 Pki2 = 636.18 MVAr
Power factors:
cos r =
Pkr
= 0.933
Skr
cos i =
Pki
= 0.837
Ski
Observations:
a) The transmitted power (the power at the inverter terminal) decreases by:
P =
1200 971.70
100 19%
1200
HVDC transmission
317
c) the reduction of the power factor at the inverter terminal bus is due to the increase
of the extinction angle .
(v) In order to restore the normal operating conditions, the change of the
transformation ratio Nik ,r is required, so that for = 18 the voltage U dr to
(n)
restore to the value U dr
= 630 kV .
From relations (A1) and (A2) it results that the normal operating state is restored if:
U d( n0,) r =
3 2
(n)
nBr Nik ,r 0.9 U kr
where the superscript (n) designate the values corresponding to the normal operating state.
The new value of the transformation ratio is:
Nik ,r =
U d( n0,) r
3 2
(n)
nBr 0.9 U kr
710.62
3 2 4 0.9 411.09
= 0.356
respectively
Nik ,r =
0.356
= 1.1125 p.u.
0.320
III. Analysis of the disturbed state caused by the increase in voltage by U = 2.5%
on the AC side of the inverter terminal.
(i) Because the inverter operates in mode CEA ( = ct. ) and the control system of
the tap-changer is not activated (this will act after a certain period of time which
is of the seconds order), the increase in AC voltage at inverter terminal bus will
determine an increase in inverter voltage U di .
Therefore:
U d 0,i =
3 2
U ( n ) 3 2
nBi Nik ,i 1 +
U ki = 4 0.32 1.025 395.14 kV = 700.12 kV
100
and thus:
U di = U d 0,i cos
3
3
nBi X kB ,i I d = 700.12 cos19 4 6 2 = 616.14 kV
This change in voltage U di will results in change of the direct current I d because
(n)
the operating conditions at rectifier remained unchanged ( U dr = U dr
= 630 kV ).
(n)
U dr
U di 630 616.14
=
= 0.924 kA
RL
15
(ii) Detecting this decrease in current, the grid control system will trigger the
decrease of the ignition angle so that the current will restore to the normal
operating state value I d( n ) = 2 kA .
The new value of the angle is determined as it follows:
318
Basic computation
The voltage necessary at rectifier is calculated as:
U dr = U di + RL I d( n ) = 616.14 + 15 2 = 646.14 kV
U dr +
3
3
nBr X kB , r I d 646.14 + 4 6 2
=
= 0.974
710.62
U d( n0,) r
3 2
3
(n)
nBr Nik , rU kr
cos nBr X kB , r I d =
(A11)
3 2
3
=
4 Nik , r 411.09 cos 4 6 2 = 2220.67 Nik , r cos 45.84
U di =
3 2
3
nBi Nik ,i 1.025 U ki( n ) cos nBi X kB ,i I d =
3 2
3
=
4 1.025 395.14 Nik ,i cos19 4 6 2 = 2068.67 N ik ,i 45.84
U dr U di = RL I d = 30 kV
(A12)
(A13)
Analysing the expressions (A11), (A12) and (A13) we see that in order to restore the
normal operating conditions, the increasing of the ratio Nik ,r and angle , and the
decrease of ratio Nik ,i , respectively, are necessary.
In Table 4.7 the ignition angle values and the voltages U dr and U di for the
analysed case, are presented, where the transformation ratio Nik ,r increase from Nikrated
, r to
rated
Nikmax
to Nikmin
, r , and the transformation ratio N ik ,i decrease from N ik ,i
,i .
Table 4.7
Voltages U dr and U di angle variations in terms of the and transformation ratio
Nik ,r
Nik ,i
U dr
U di
0
0.320
0.323
1
0.320
0.317
kV
2
646.13
639.51
kV
3
616.13
609.51
[]
4
13.15
17.27
HVDC transmission
319
0
0.326
0.330
0.374
0.378
0.381
1
0.314
0.310
0.266
0.262
0.259
2
632.89
626.28
533.60
526.98
520.36
503.60
45.82
496.98
46.91
490.36
47.97
We see that the shift in tap-changers with one position in increasing direction of
Nik ,r and decreasing direction of Nik ,i , respectively, will restore the operation of the link
with values of and U di in admissible range, that is = 17.17 [15, 21] and
U di = 609,51 kV [585, 615] kV.
Appendix 4.1
HVDC SYSTEMS IN THE WORLD
Line
Year
Power Voltage
Length [km]
Main reason for choosing
Over- Under[MW] [kV]
HVDC system
head ground
a. Mercury-arc valve systems
Kashira - Moscow 1950
30
200 115
1954Long sea crossing; frequency
Gotland - Sweden I
20-30 100-150 96
1970
control
7+ Sea crossing; asynchronous link
France - Great
1961 160
100
50+
50/60Hz, out of service since
Britain I
1984
8
Volgograd 1964 750
400 475
Long distance
Donbass
Asynchronous link, rapid
Sakuma (Japan) 1965 300 2125
control, low losses (ASEA)
Konti - Skan
Sea crossing; asynchronous link
1965 250
250
86
87
(ASEA)
(Denmark-Sweden)
New-Zeeland
1965 600
250 575
42 Long line including sea crossing
Sardinia - Corsica The first multi-terminal link
1967 200
200
290
116
Italy (SACOI-1)
(English Electric, ASEA)
The first line operating in
Vancouver,
1968/
312
+260
41
28
parallel with an AC circuit;
Pole I (Canada) 1969
undersea cable (ASEA)
Pacific - Intertie I, 1970 1600+
Long line in parallel with two
AC lines; fast control (General
(Columbia River- 1985 400+ 500 1360
Electric, ASEA)
1989 1100
Los Angeles)
Long distance; stability
Nelson - River 19731620 450 890
(GEC ALSTOM)
Bipole I (Canada) 1977
320
Basic computation
Appendix (continued)
b. Thyristor valve systems
Eel River
(Canada)
Skagerrak I...III
(Norway Denmark)
Square - Butte
(USA)
Cabora Bassa Apollo
(Mozambique
South Africa)
Skin - Shinano
(Japan)
Vancouver
Pole II (Canada)
Nelson - River
Bipole II
Bipole III(Canada)
Hokkaido-Honshu
(Japan)
Acaray
(Paraguay-Brazil)
Vyborg (Russia Finland)
Inga Shaba (Rep.
Congo)
Durnrohr
(Austria)
Gotland - Sweden
II/III
Itaipu, Bipole I
and II (Brazil)
1973
320
280
1974/
1977/
1993
500
...
1500
250 85+28
1977
500
250
749
19771979
1930
533
1420
1977
300
2125
1978
792
260
41
32
+250
500
500
940
-
Long distance
(ABB/Siemens/AEG)
1979
300
250
1981
50
26
1982
1070
385
1982
560
500
1700
1983
550
145
19831987
130
150
96
930
27
+97
1986
Intermountain
1986
(USA)
Ekibastuz - Centre
1987
(Russia)
2000 2270
Back-to-back link
127
Sea crossing
(ASEA, ABB)
DC active filter
44
Long distance
Sea crossing;
finally 600MW (Hitachi)
Asynchronous link
50/60 Hz
Back-to-back link
Long distance,
finally, 1120 MW
Back-to-back link,
out of service since 1996
Undersea cable, asynchronous
link
The highest transmitted AC
power at long distance (18432
thyristors), (ASEA)
Back-to-back link (ABB /
Siemens)
Back-to-back link (ABB)
Back-to-back link (ABB)
18
+46
+6
785+
1985- 3150+
2600
805
1987 3150
Chateauguay
1984 2500 2140.6
(Canada)
Blackwater(USA) 1985 200
56.8
Highgate (USA) 1985 200
57
Great Britain France II
1920
500
785
6000
750
2400
HVDC transmission
321
Appendix (continued)
McNeil (Canada)
1989
150
42
Fenno - Skan
1989
(Finland - Sweden)
500
400
33
200
270
1200
500
1000
1990
1500
500
814
1991/
1992
560
-350
575
42
1480
Vindhyachal
(India)
1989/
2250
1990
Gezhouba 1991
Shanghai (China)
Rihand - Delhi
(India)
New Zeeland
DC Hybrid link
Qubec New England
(Canada)
South Vienna
(Austria)
Etzenricht
(Germany
-Tchquie)
Baltic Cable
(Sweden Germany)
Kontek
(DenmarkGermany)
Chandrapur-Padge
(India)
Haenam - Cheju
Island (Korea)
Chandrapur
Ramgundam
(India)
19901992
22000
+
450
2690
1992
550
145
Back-to-back link,
out of service since 1996.
1993
600
Back-to-back link,
out of service since 1996.
1994
600
450
12
250
1995
600
400
170
1998
1500
500
753
1998
300
180
101
1998
1000
205
Vijayawada 1999
Gajuwaka (India)
500
205
Leyte - Luzon
(Philippine)
1999
880
350
22
440
Shin - Shinano
(Japan)
1999
53/
53/
53
10.6
Minami 1999
Fukumitsu (Japan)
300
125
322
Basic computation
Appendix (continued)
Ecosse-North
Ireland
Malaysia Thailand
Rihant - Sasaram
(India)
Kii Channell
(Japan)
Tian - Guang
(China)
Higashi-Shimizu
(Japan)
Greece-Italy
Three Gorges Guangdong
(China)
NorNedkabel Link
(Norway-Holland)
Bangalore-Talcher
(India)
Argentina-Brazil
Sarawak Malaysia
SWEPOL
(Sweden - Poland)
Eurokabel
Vikingcable
(NorwayGermany)
Three Gorges Changzhou
(China)
2000
250
250
2000
300/
600
300
110
2000
500
2000
2800 2500
51
51
2000
1800
500
986
2000
300/
600
125
2001
500
400
105
163
2001
3000
500
890
Long distance
2002
600/
800
570
2003
2000
500
1450
2003
1000
70
2500
1500
660
4+400
2003
2003
600
450
2002 2600
600
2003 2800
600
2003
500
670
230
540
3000
Undersea cable
Thyristor 8 kV, 1 kA
(Siemens)
Back-to-back link between East
and North systems
Thyristor 8 kV, 3500 A
DC link in parallel with an AC
line (Siemens)
Asynchronous link between
50Hz and 60Hz systems
Undersea cable; asynchronous
line (ABB)
Undersea cable;
asynchronous line
Long distance
HVDC transmission
323
Appendix (continued)
Pancheswar
(Nepal)Vadodra (India)
Karnali - Vadodra
(India)
Vadodra - Pune
(India)
Pune - Madras
(India)
East - West High
2010
Power Link
(Russia-Germany)
5000
600
1100
5000
600
1000
3000
600
900
3000
600
1050
4000
500
2000
Multi-terminal system
Chapter references
[4.1]
[4.2]
[4.3]
[4.4]
[4.5]
[4.6]
[4.7]
[4.8]
[4.9]
[4.10]
[4.11]
[4.12]
[4.13]
[4.14]
[4.15]
Kimbark, E.W. Direct current transmission, Vol. I, John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
New York, 1971.
Uhlmann, E. Power transmission by direct current, Springer-Verlag, Berlin,
1975.
Weedy, B.M. Electric power systems, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
Chichester, New York, 1979.
Arrillaga, J. High Voltage direct current transmission, Peter Peregrinus, London,
1983.
EPRI Methodology for integration of HVDC links in large AC systems, Phase I:
Reference manual. Final Report El-3004, RP 1964-1, Prepared by Ebasco Services
Incorporated, New York, March 1983.
El-Hawary, M.E. Electrical power systems. Design and analysis, Reston
Publishing Company, 1983.
Padiyar, K.R. HVDC Power transmission systems. Technology and systems
interactions, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991.
CIGRE Working Group 14.20 Economic assessment of HVDC links, Electra
revue, No. 196, June 2001.
Kundur, P. Power systems stability and control, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York,
1994.
Marconato, R. Electric power systems. Vol.1. Background and basic
components, CEI Italian Electrotechnical Committee, Milano, 2002.
Eremia, M. Tehnici noi n transportul energiei electrice. Aplicaii ale
electronicii de putere (New techniques in electric power transmission. Power
electronic applications), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1997.
Eremia, M., Trecat, J., Germond, A. Rseaux lectriques. Aspects actuels,
Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 2000.
IEEE Std. P1030.1-2000 IEEE Guide for specification of HVDC systems.
Linder, S. Power semiconductors. At the centre of a silent revolution, ABB
Review, No. 4, 2003.
England, L., Lagerkvist, M., Dass, R. HVDC superhighways for China, ABB
Review, Special report, 2003.
324
[4.16]
[4.17]
[4.18]
[4.19]
[4.20]
[4.21]
[4.22]
[4.23]
[4.24]
[4.25]
[4.26]
[4.27]
Basic computation
*** Comparison between AC and DC transmission systems, Report CIGRE no.
37-94, WG 12-06, June 1994.
*** AC/DC Transmission-Interactions and comparisons, CIGRE Symposium,
Boston, September 1987.
Zhang, W., Asplund, G. Active DC filter for HVDC systems, IEEE Computer
Applications in Power, January 1994.
Adamson, C., Hingorani, N.G. High voltage direct current power transmission,
Garraway Limited, London, 1960.
Cory, B.J. High voltage direct current converters and system, Mac Donald,
London, 1965.
Miller, T.J.E. Reactive power control in electric systems, John Wiley and Sons,
1982.
Gnen, T. Electric power systems engineering. Analysis and design, A Wiley
Interscience Publication, 1986.
Asplund, G. et al. HVDC Light DC transmission based on voltage sourced
converters. ABB revue, No. 1, 1998.
*** DC and AC Configurations (Chapter 3), CIGRE WG 14.20, Johanesburg,
1997.
*** High voltage direct current transmission, Technical Reports, AEGTelefunken.
IEEE Std. 519-1992 IEEE Guide for harmonic control and reactive
compensation of static power converters.
Smed, T. Interaction between high voltage AC and DC systems, PhD thesis,
Royal Institute of Technology, Sweden, 1991.
Chapter
NEUTRAL GROUNDING
OF ELECTRIC NETWORKS
5.1. General considerations
The neutral grounding of electric networks is one of the earliest concerns of
power engineers; this is due to the effects of an accidental touch between a phase
and the ground. Neutral grounding is intended to quickly and safely eliminate the
electric arc that occurs during phase-to-ground faults, in order to avoid the network
disconnection and to prevent the incident from turning into a breakdown of
insulation (short-circuit between two or three phases and ground). The neutral
grounding of electric networks is consequently one of the factors that condition the
supplied power quality.
The electric neutral point of a balanced positive- or negative-sequence threephase system corresponds to the gravity centre of the equilateral triangle formed by
the phase-to-phase voltages of the network (Uab, Ubc, Uca) (Fig. 5.1).
The connection point between the windings of a generator with star
connection or secondary windings of a transformer with star or zigzag connection
represents the physical neutral point. It is possible to provide the neutral to the
terminals or to distribute it or neither of these. When distributed, a neutral
conductor is wired to it.
a
U ca
Vc
c
Va
U ab
N
U bc
Vb
b
In terms of the situation of the neutral point with respect to the ground, the
Standards give the classification of the following types of networks (Fig. 5.2):
isolated neutral networks;
solidly grounded neutral networks and impedance (resistor or reactance)
grounded neutral networks;
resonant grounding neutral networks (arc suppression or Petersen coil).
326
Basic computation
XN
ZN
ZN=
Ground
Ground
a.
b.
Ground
c.
Fig. 5.2. Neutral grounding of electrical networks: a. isolated neutral network; b. solidly
and impedance grounded neutral network; c. resonant grounded network.
327
U ca
c
ZN
C 0c
a.
G0c
C0b
G0b
C0a
Vc
G0a
U ab
Vb
ZN
c
Ground
Va
N
U bc
b.
Fig. 5.3. Symmetric network with grounded neutral point operating in steady state:
a. the emphasizing of line admittances-to-ground; b. the phasor diagram of the phase
voltages relative to the neutral.
If the network is symmetrical and operates under steady state conditions, the
three admittances-to-ground are equal, i.e. Y 0 a = Y 0b = Y 0c or G0 a = G0b = G0 c and
328
Basic computation
C0 a = C0b = C0c . Notice that, in the neutral grounding of electric networks theory
and ground fault current calculation, the phase-to-phase capacitances are neglected.
Consequently, the neutral potential relative to ground is:
VN =
V a Y 0 a + V b Y 0b + V c Y 0c Y 0 (V a + V b + V c )
=0
=
1
1
3Y 0 +
Y 0 a + Y 0b + Y 0c +
ZN
ZN
(5.1)
u=
C0 a + a 2C0b + aC0c
C0 a + C0b + C0c
(5.2)
ZN
c
C0c
G0c
C0b
G0b
C0a
G0a
Ground
Fig. 5.4. Three-phase network with single-phase-to-ground fault
If this impedance has high rating or does not exist ( Z N = ), then the neutral
potential takes the value of the phase voltage supplied by the power source, and if
the impedance ZN is low or zero, the neutral potential value is also low or zero. In
the first case, the potential of the sound phases increases to the phase-to-phase
voltage value overstressing the network insulation; in the second case, a high shortcircuit current occurs overloading the network current paths.
329
ZF
IF
IF 0
V =0
Z
ZF
V
V =0
Z
ZF
V
V
Z + Z F
where: V is the open circuit voltage at terminals and , when the network
operates under normal consitions; the current through the fault
impedance is zero for the active network because an ideal voltage
source of electromotive voltage -V has been introduced on the path
of arc from phase to ground;
330
Basic computation
Z
a
b
c
Ia=0
ZF
Ib=0
ZF
Ic
V
Z0
V c = 0 ; Ia = 0 ; Ib = 0
I0
V0
3 ZN
a.
ZF
b.
Ic
Ib+
Ia+
Ic+
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ia
Ib0
Ic0
c.
Fig. 5.6. The main circuit used for the calculation of the ground fault current by means
of the method of symmetrical components: a. fault representation; b. sequence networks
connection; c. decomposition of capacitive currents system into sequence
components.
331
3Z N must be also inserted in the zero-sequence network, in series with the zerosequence impedance. The zero-sequence voltage, which has as reference the
ground potential at the point of interest in the system, is applied at the zerosequence network terminals.
In order to balance the sequence networks, the negative-sequence network
has to be defined, which is, in fact, the passivized positive-sequence network.
The equations between phase and sequence voltages are given below:
V a = aV + a 2 V + V
V b = a 2 V + aV + V
+
V c =V +V +V
therefore:
+
(
= ( aV
V = a 2 V a + aV b + V c
V
+ a2V b + V c
)
)
3
3
V = (V a + V b + V c ) 3
0
where the equations are referred to the reference phase c. A similar set of equations
can be written for phase and sequence currents.
+
0
Knowing that the three sequence currents are equal, I = I = I , the fault
current (on the phase c) can be inferred from:
3V
+
0
+
(5.3)
IF = I + I + I = 3I = +
0
Z + Z + Z + 3Z N
+
or, if the fault impedance Z F is taken into account and knowing that Z = Z , the
expression (5.3) becomes:
IF =
where: V
3V
+
2 Z + Z + 3Z N + 3 Z F
(5.4)
332
Basic computation
0 0
V = Z I
V =V Z I
V = Z I
(5.5)
Z Z
+
0
V a = aV + a 2 V + V = V a
+
0
2 Z + Z + 3Z N + 3Z F
0
+
Z Z
+
0
V b = a 2 V + aV + V = V a 2
+
0
2 Z + Z + 3Z N + 3Z F
3V Z F
Vc = ZF IF =
+
0
2 Z + Z + 3Z N + 3Z F
(5.6)
Transformer
HV
MV
YH0
ZN
ZF
0
ZTL
Faulty feeder
IF
YF0
ZTL0
3ZN
I0
1/Y
3ZF
b.
a.
Fig. 5.7. The calculation circuit of the single-phase-to-ground fault current, in a MV
network: a. three-phase circuit; b. zero-sequence equivalent single-phase circuit.
Therefore, for the network in Figure 5.7,a, the three-phase and single-phase
equivalent circuits can be drawn. The zero-sequence impedance can be calculated,
from Figure 5.7,b, using the expression:
Z =
(3 Z
Z
1
3 Z N + TL
0
3
3
Y
=
=
0
1
1
0
+ 0 3Y 0 Z + Z TL + 1 3Y +
0
N
Y
Z
3
Z N + TL
3
0
Z TL
3 Z N + Z TL
333
IF =
Z+
Y NT
3V
V
=
3
Z
1
+ 3Z F
+
+ ZF
0
0
3
+ 3Y
Y NT + 3Y
To the above expression, the equivalent circuit from Figure 5.8 can be attached.
This circuit shows us that the fault current has two components: one due to the
0
admittance to ground Y of the network, and another one due to the neutral
admittance Y NT .
IF
Z 3
YNT
3Y 0
ZF
334
Basic computation
Il, a
b
N
Il, b
Il, c
V=-Vc ZF
Ground
Ic,c=0
C0
Ic,b
IF
Fig. 5.9. Isolated neutral network.
C0
Ic,a
C0
335
V
a
Va
Va
V
Vb
N G
Vc
V
Vb
b
Va '
V
3V
100 = b ' 100 =
100 = 100%
Un
Un
Un
The currents flowing through the passive network, due to the voltage V = Vc,
are closing through the capacitances to ground of the line phases, through the
transformer windings and through the ground fault path (the path of these currents
was drawn with dashed line in Fig. 5.9). These are sine currents and charge the
transformer with a zero-sequence charge therefore resulting in non-symmetry
between voltages and currents. Overlapping on these zero-sequence currents the
capacitive and load currents from the normal operating conditions determines the
currents flowing through the ground-fault network. If the load currents are
neglected, the phasor diagram of the network currents can be drawn (Fig. 5.11,a).
336
Basic computation
IC
Va
Vc
c
N
Ic, c
-Ic, c
G
Vb
Ic, b
30
Ic, a
N
-Ic, c
Va
Ic, b
-Ic, c
Ic, b
Ic, a
Ic, b
Ic, a
IC
Ic, a
N
Ic, c
Vb
a.
b.
c.
Fig. 5.11. Capacitive currents position before and after ground fault on the phase c;
phasor diagram: a. normal operating conditions; b. ground fault conditions; c. capacitive
currents
composition during ground fault conditions.
'
the state of ground fault on phase c, I c ,a and I c ,b . The ground fault current I F is
obtained by composing the last two currents. The magnitude of this current is
determined as follows:
3
= 3I c
2
where Ic is the capacitive current of one phase under normal operating conditions.
Its value is rendered below:
I c = V C 0
where C 0 = C0 is the zero-sequence capacitance (relative to ground) of all lines
connected to the transformers secondary of the substation.
The same result can be obtained in two ways:
by composing the capacitive currents corresponding to the sound phases
(Fig. 5.9,c);
by sticking to Thvenins theorem and neglecting the impedances of the
line and transformer windings for the passive network where voltage V
exists. Having the three capacitances C0 in parallel connection, the
equivalent capacitance is 3C0 and the additional capacitive ground fault
current is I F = V 3C 0 .
The last method is the most handy because it allows selection of three
components within the ground fault current, as follows: one component due to the
337
voltage existing at the fault location (V), another one due to capacitance to ground
of each phase and the last one due to the load currents.
Approximate relations can be used for informative purposes [5.9]:
I FOEL =
UnL
U L
[A], I FUEL = n
[A]
300K 500
2K10
where Un is the nominal voltage of the line, in kV, and L is the length of the
network lines, in km. The per kilometre ground fault current values for various
categories of lines are given in tables and charts. For underground electric lines the
higher values of the ground fault current correspond to the polychloride vinyl
insulation and the smaller ones correspond to the polyethylene insulation.
The analysis of the above expressions reveals that the ground fault current
'
values are relatively low. The currents I c are in the same situation, remaining
much smaller than the load currents of the network.
The change in phase-to-neutral voltage will therefore be insignificant and the
network will continue to operate, supplying the consumers in satisfactory
conditions, even with one faulty phase.
Although the phase-to-neutral voltages remain appreciatively the same as in
the case of the network without fault, the potential of the sound phases with respect
to the ground changes. Therefore, the phase-to-ground voltage of the faulty phase
is zero, while the phase-to-ground voltage of the healthy phases increase by 3
becoming equal to the phase-to-phase voltage.
Upon ground fault occurrence, an electric phase-to-ground arc forms, through
which the resulting capacitive current flows. The electric arc extinguishes at each
zero crossing of the current. Depending on the intensity of the current, the arc can
re-strike after the current has passed through zero and when the current reappears,
the arc may extinguish and re-strike successively, thus creating an intermittent arc
(arcing fault). This can result in dangerous overvoltages on the sound phases that
can be 3 4 times higher than the phase-to-neutral voltage.
If the intermittent electric arc and the associated overvoltages persist for a
high number of periods, the insulation can breakdown causing the phase-to-ground
fault to turn into a double-phase- or three-phase-to-ground fault. For this reason,
protective measures must be taken to avoid the intermittent arc. The researches
performed in Romania showed that the intermittent arc emerges when the current
intensity from the fault location is higher than 5 10 A. For values smaller than 5
A, the arc is extinguished at the first zero crossing and the network resumes to
normal operation [5.19]. Based on these remarks it can be said that the overhead
lines with nominal voltages up to 35 kV are able to operate with isolated neutral.
The 6 10 kV underground cables can operate with isolated neutral if the
current does not exceed 10 A at the fault location.
To limit the ground fault current in MV networks with isolated neutral, the lines
are galvanically separated by sectionalising the busbars from the supplying
338
Basic computation
substation, a certain number of lines, respectively a certain line length, being assigned
to each busbar. This assures an admissible level for the capacitive current.
From the above-mentioned, it results that the isolated neutral networks have
the great advantage that the immediate disconnection of the line is not necessary in
case of a single-phase-to-ground fault, assuring thus the continuity in supplying of
the symmetrical consumers. Moreover, during failure (phase-to-ground fault) these
lines have low influence on the telecommunication lines located in the
neighbourhood.
The disadvantage of these networks is that the increase by 3 of the voltages
of the sound phases during a ground fault can cause the breakdown of the
insulation on the sound phases. Also, if the capacitive current exceeds the
admissible limit, the electric arc space is no longer deionised during the zero
crossing of the current and can persist for a longer time, thus causing dangerous
overvoltages.
Application
Determine the maximum length of the 10 kV overhead lines that can be supplied
from a distribution substation, so that to have the network neutral isolated from the ground,
given that c0 = 5 109 F/km.
The ground fault current is: I F < 5 A ; I F = 3 I c = 3Vn b0 l = 3 U n c0l ;
It results:
l<
5
3 U n c0
5
3 10 314 5 109
4
= 183 km
339
I sc ,3 P =
V
+
Z + ZF
(5.7)
340
Basic computation
T1
Va
electric line
T2
c b a
Vb
N1
N2
Vc
Isc
V=-Vc
The following formula can be written for the total short-circuit current Isc
passing through ground:
I sc =
V
V
V
2
+ 2
=
1 +
X T1
X T 1 + 3 X T 2 X T 1 1 + 3 ( X T 2 / X T 1 )
(5.8)
where, for the sake of simplification, the circuit resistances through ground and the
line resistances have been neglected and their reactances have been included in
those of the transformers.
If the transformer T2 has a rated power smaller than the power of T1, or if the
line is disconnected at this end, then X T 2 >> X T 1 and Isc tends toward V / X T 1 .
Otherwise, if the transformer T2 has a relatively high rated power, then X T 2 < X T 1
and I sc = 3V X T 1 = 3 I sc3 P , I sc3 P being the value of the three-phase-to-ground shortcircuit current. This situation is not appropriate and therefore, in order to reduce the
value of the single-phase-to-ground short-circuit current the star-points of some
transformers are not grounded.
The single-phase-to-ground short-circuit current charge the network
asymmetrically causing a significant voltage decrease. If the thermal and dynamic
stresses of the current paths are added to these, a relay protection is obviously
necessary to disconnect the faulty outgoing line.
An advantage of the solidly grounded neutral is that, during the fault period,
the parts of the transformers windings located in the vicinity of the neutral will
have a potential of value almost equal to that of the ground. For this reason, the
insulation level of these windings is possibly lower than that of the windings from
the vicinity of the higher voltage terminals of transformer.
The main disadvantage of the solidly grounded neutral is the generation of
disturbances on the telecommunication lines and radio transmissions during phaseto-ground faults. Furthermore, due to erroneous operation, protection will trigger
the tripping of the line so that the consumer will be disconnected.
341
3V
2
3 ( RN + RF ) + 2 R + + R 0 + 2 X + + X 0
and
2
1 3V
+
0
RN =
2X + X
3 I sc
) ( 2R
2
+ R 0 RF
In order to emphasize some qualitative issues of the calculation of singlephase-to-ground fault currents, the capacitance to ground and the resistance of the
line, as well as the resistance of the supply transformer can be neglected with
respect to the limiting resistor. Taking into account that 3RN 3RF + 2 R + + R 0
342
Basic computation
(5.10')
or
2
VN = I sc
V
2
X
I
sc
(5.10")
V
X
(5.11)
and VN from the formulae (5.10') and (5.10") is divided to the phase-to-neutral
voltage, the following relation can be obtained:
I
VN
= 1 sc
I sc , max
V
or
2
2
VN I sc
=1
+
V I sc , max
(5.12)
The expression (5.12), represented in the quarter circle diagram from Figure
5.15, allows us to determine the neutral potential versus the decrease of shortcircuit current. When reduced to half of its maximum value, the neutral potential
becomes:
VN = 1 ( 0.5 ) V = 0.867 V
2
343
VN / V
1
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
1
2
2
I sc I sc , max
(5.13)
10
15
20
3.4
5.8
11.6
5.8
9.7
19.3
8.7
14.4
28.8
11.6
19.3
38.5
344
Basic computation
Application
Calculate the resistance value of the resistor used to ground the star-point of a
transformer that supply a 20 kV underground cable so that the single-phase-to-ground shortcircuit current to be reduced to 400 A.
Using the expression (5.13) knowing the Isc, max = 600 A and V = 20000
obtain:
RN =
20000
3
1
400
1
600 2
3 V, we
= 21.517
ANC
TZC
RN
RN
a.
b.
345
The limiting resistor used for neutral grounding via resistor is one of the
solutions implemented in the last period (20 25 years) in Romania, and it seems
to be useful enough especially in underground MV networks, since it turns the
ground fault occurring in isolated or grounded neutral networks via a relatively
high impedance into a controlled short-circuit, limiting the transient phenomenon
and the accompanying overvoltages, preventing such that the evolution of the fault
into double or extended faults.
The neutral grounding via resistor has been improved by employment of a
special measuring and protection transformer SMPT [5.10] or a shunt circuit
breaker SCB. The first solution (Fig 5.17) is used for shorter underground cables
where there is no star-point available. Usually, in Europe, the SMPT has two
secondary windings, one of 100 3 volts and other one of 500 3 volts or
greater voltage, which are series connected forming an open triangle where the
resistor R is connected.
Consequently, during a single-phase-to-ground fault occurring on an
outgoing feeder, the circuit forces an additional active current, determined by the
value of R, which triggers the opening of the circuit breaker CB, and therefore the
disconnection of the faulty feeder. After the fault clearance, the circuit breaker CB
will be re-closed, and the network resumes the normal operation.
The second solution, the one with the shunt circuit breaker, repeats the phaseto-ground fault that occurred on an outgoing feeder, by connecting a single pole of
the circuit breaker SCB after a short delay, which connects the respective phase to
the ground electrode of the supply substation (Fig. 5.18) [5.14].
346
Basic computation
Fig. 5.17. Usage of a
special measuring and
protection transformer
for
neutral
grounding
via resistor.
SMPT
Measurement
CB
breaker coil
This method has been used in France since 1975, by EdF, with very good
results. The current at the fault location is practically cancelled, the fault
disappearing without disconnecting the faulty feeder, and the network returns to
normal operation after the opening of the shunt circuit breaker. The shunt circuit
breaker should meet certain requirements:
upon the occurrence of a phase-to-ground fault it connects only the
corresponding pole of the circuit breaker;
it provides phase selection logic and shunt locking system for multiple
faults;
it does not allow repeated operation (shunting) if the fault did not
extinguish after the first opening of the circuit breaker.
RN
SCB
347
ZN
Ground
IL
Ic,c=0
C
Ic,b
Ic,a
C0
IC
348
Basic computation
The two currents, one of them leading the voltage and the other lagging
behind the voltage V by almost 90, overlap each other at the ground fault
location, resulting thus the fault of residual current Ir (Fig. 5.20):
I F = Ir = IC + I L
(5.14)
(5.15)
j L
The expression (5.15) is written taking into consideration only the reactances
of the two circuits.
V
Fig. 5.20. The phasor diagram of the
currents from the circuits of the passive
network from Figure 5.19.
Ir
IL
IC
+ jV 3C 0 = 0
resulting
L = X N =
1
= Xc
3C 0
(5.16)
The expression (5.16) indicates the resonance condition for the equivalent
parallel circuit formed by the two branches: the reactance of the arc-suppression
coil and the capacitances to ground, at the frequency f = 2 .
It should be observed that due to the various elements (resistances and
reactances) of the circuit, a total compensation of the capacitive current cannot be
achieved and therefore I r 0 . This can also be seen from the analysis of Table 5.2
349
[5.9] where the ratio between the active (real) and capacitive (imaginary)
components of the ground fault current is shown.
Table 5.2
The ratio between the active and capacitive components of the ground fault current
Insulation state
Normal
Line type
15 35 kV
60 110 kV
Underground cables: aged insulation
5%
3%
2 4%
IC
Ir
LN
RN
Va
Va
3C
Vb
Vc
Ic,b
3G
Vb
I L=V YN
IC=j3C V
Ic,c
a.
V
IL= jL
b.
In reality, because the arc suppression coil is not 100% inductive, the current
flowing through it I 'L , is shifted with respect to the voltage V c by an angle smaller
than 90.
In the case of resonance tuning of the coil, the residual current consists only
of the active (real) components of the two currents:
I r = Re{I C } + Re{I L } , where Re{I C } = 3G 0V and Re{I L } = V R
(5.17)
The expressions (5.16) and (5.17), corresponding to the resonance tuning, are
valid only for the fundamental harmonic. In practice, the ground fault current can
have higher harmonic components, mainly odd series (the order of 3, 5, 7, etc.) that
inhibit the extinguishing of the electric arc even when the resonance ideal tuning is
achieved. In this case, the residual current had the expression:
I r2 = (Re{I r }) + I 32 + I 52 + I 72 + ...
2
(5.18)
350
Basic computation
where, Re{I r } denotes the active component of the residual current on the
fundamental harmonic.
By the same token, it is worth mentioning that in many practical situations,
significant values of the residual current were due not only to the active component
but also to the higher harmonics.
Cb0 = Cc0 = C 0 , and taking also into account the line conductance G 0 , the
expression of the voltage applied at the coil terminals is [5.20]:
V N =V
351
j C 0 + C + a 2C 0 + aC 0
(5.19)
j 3C + C + 3G + 1/ jL
C
C0
d = G0
where: n =
(5.20)
v =1 k =1
IL
IC
n2
n3
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1
5 V [%]
One can notice that the voltage on the coil is practically at its peak during
resonance. Accordingly, the value of the current flowing through the coil (and thus
the total capacitive current) can be established in practice for the resonance
situation.
Some errors appear in reality due to both the measuring system and the
maximums shifting relative to the tuning situation, and also due to the very low
value of the voltage at the coil terminals, especially for underground cables. One of
the solutions is to artificially increase the non-symmetry between phase
capacitance by introducing an additional coil during the measurement.
Recently, automatic adjustments assured the increase of the arc-suppression
coil efficiency. The following automation systems can be mentioned:
a system using the resonance curve of the zero-sequence circuit: coil
zero-sequence capacitances;
a system that monitors the magnitude and the phase angle of the zerosequence voltage;
the GENEPI system.
352
Basic computation
Application of the GENEPI system. The GENEPI system aims to identify the
impedance value of the zero-sequence circuit, without handling the coil [5.1, 5.2, 5.4,
5.21]. In this respect, a current is injected into the neutral grounding circuit for few seconds
(Fig. 5.23). By measuring the injected current and the zero-sequence voltage, before and
during the injection, the system is able to determine the parameters of the zero-sequence
circuit and thus the total capacitive current. Accordingly, the coil is switched on the tuned
position. GENEPI has the advantage of a fast tuning, its action being also compatible with
a fault occurrence during the measurements.
0
VN (V ) L
Ii
353
20000
15000
Voltages [V]
10000
5000
0
-5000
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
-10000
-15000
-20000
Fig. 5.24. Voltages during a re-striking ground fault. Reprinted with permission from Griffel,
D., Leitoff, V., Harmand, Y., Bergeal, J. A new deal for the safety and the quality on MV
networks, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 12, October 1997 IEEE 1997.
Energy in the last 20 ms [J]
20000
Healthy feeder
Faulty feeder
10000
0
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
-10000
-20000
Fig. 5.25. Energy transfer during a restriking ground fault. Reprinted with permission from
Griffel, D., Leitoff, V., Harmand, Y., Bergeal, J. A new deal for the safety and the quality
on MV networks, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 12, October 1997 IEEE 1997.
354
Basic computation
In the fault absence the zero-sequence circuit formed by the capacitances to ground
of the electric line, the coil inductance and resistance is unloaded. When the fault occurs,
the energy is transferred from the fault to the zero-sequence circuit, which is charged with
electric and magnetic energy through the fault resistance. The energy transfer direction on
the healthy feeders is positive, and on the faulty feeder it is negative (Fig. 5.26,a). At the
fault extinction, this energy charged in the line capacitances and coil inductance is released
over the resistance of the grounding coil. Therefore, the energy transfer on the healthy
feeders changes the direction (Fig. 5.26,b). The reactive power exchanged between the
neutral point coil and the zero-sequence circuit capacitance adds some oscillations.
E>0
HV/MV
E>0
E<0
E<0
a.
E<0
Healthy
feeders
Faulty
feeder
HV/MV
E<0
E<0
E<0
Healthy
feeders
Faulty
feeder
b.
Fig. 5.26. Energy transfer direction: a. during the fault; b. after the fault.
The WHAT system measures the zero-sequence energy on a 20 ms timeframe, then
compares it with a threshold. The direction indicates the fault location, either upstream or
downstream the detector. It can be seen that sound feeders restore an active energy at the
time of fault clearance. This phenomenon must be taken into account to avoid untimely
tripping of sound feeders at that time. This can be obtained by an inhibition of the outputs
by the zero-sequence voltage.
This principle has been combined with classical wattmetric detection, based on
fundamental system frequency signals, in a protective relay capable to detect both
restriking and arcing faults.
Application of the DESIR system. Besides the usage as indicator for overloading or
direction of power flow on the interconnection lines, the wattmetric relays are used to
indicate the direction in which a fault occurs [5.18]. The wattmetric protection systems use
the product of zero-sequence voltage multiplied by residual current as input. When a phaseto-ground fault or a low resistive fault occurs, the induced zero-sequence voltage and
current values being high, and these protection systems give good results. However, when
high resistive faults occur this is no longer the case. Zero-sequence voltage V 0 ( = V N ) is
low and the residual current Ir is also low. The devices limits in terms of sensitivity are
quickly reached. These resistive faults are caused by the contact between line and ground:
downed lines, internal faults in MV/LV transformers, or contact with a pole with no or high
resistance ground connection. The voltage profile is not significantly modified nor large
amounts of current are produced yet such faults are nonetheless dangerous, often causing
high voltage to be present on equipment accessible to the public. As these faults are not
easily to detect by protection systems they can persist for several hours. In networks
355
grounded via compensation coils, overcurrent protective devices cannot be used since they
do not provide adequate sensitivity.
The DESIR system (Selective detection using residual current), was designed to
solve the inconveniences of the WHAT system [5.2, 5.7]. A simple network with one
healthy and one faulty outgoing is given in Figure 5.27,a to demonstrate the detection
principle, which consists in using as input signals, only the active component of all residual
currents flowing in the outgoing feeders supplied by the HV/MV transformer. It does not
need any zero-sequence voltage measurement or special sensor. The detection principle is
based on the well-known fact that only residual current flowing in the faulty feeder
contains an active component. Notice that the residual current is measured as a zerosequence current.
Faulty feeder
Ic,a1
Ic,b1
(Ic,a +Ic,b)
IL
XN
0
1
reference
axis
Ir
Ic,a2
Ir1
Ic,b2
Ir2
Healthy
feeder
a.
Re{Ir1}
Re{Ir2}
C2
b.
Fig. 5.27. The DESIR system: a. currents flow in medium voltage network;
b. phasor diagram of the residual currents.
The following notations has been used in Figure 5.27: I c ,a capacitive current of
phase a; I c ,b capacitive current of phase b; IL arc suppression coil current; XN arc
suppression coil reactance; Ci0 zero-sequence capacitance of the feeder i; i is the feeder
number (for our case, i = 1 for the faulty outgoing, and i = 2 for the healthy outgoing);
V 0 zero-sequence voltage of the network; T HV/MV transformer.
All the zero-sequence currents, purely capacitive, flowing through the sound
outgoing feeders lead the zero-sequence voltage by /2. The zero-sequence current flowing
through the faulty feeder has an active component in phase with the zero-sequence voltage.
If all zero-sequence current values are projected to an axis, perpendicularly to their sum
(Ir), it is found that the faulty feeder current projection is equal and opposite to the sum of
the sound feeder current projections.
356
Basic computation
In every outgoing feeder, unbalances cause phase variations that may result, for
sound feeders, in components presenting the same sign as those of the faulty feeder. In
addition, the faulty feeder unbalance can induce a component that will be subtracted from
the component generated by the fault resistance. For these reasons, the principle is applied
for zero-sequence current variations [5.4]. Thus, a very high sensitivity level (up to 100
k) can be obtained. This system is very fast; it is capable of detecting a fault in
approximately 1 second.
Application of the EPSY system (admittance method). In the last years in Europe,
the digital system for ground fault detection (EPSY Ground fault Protection System
Electronic Components) has been also promoted, which detects the faulty outgoing feeders
using the admittance method [5.15].
The method is based on the permanent knowledge of zero-sequence admittances of
every feeder under normal operating conditions, for which it can be built the maximum
admittance Ymax circle (Fig. 5.28,a) [5.20].
If a fault appears on one of the feeders, a fault admittance YF is added to the
'
Y1
Ymax
Ymax
Y1
0
a.
b.
Y1
357
CB
XN
CB
XN
R
a.
b.
Fig. 5.29. The resistor coil mixed neutral grounding: a. resistor connected directly to
the ground; b. the resistor is connected to a special winding of the coil.
358
Basic computation
When a simple ground fault occurs and the coil does not eliminate it, the
resistor is introduced in parallel with the coil after a few tenths of a second, leading
to an increased fault current and the fault is quickly cleared (Fig. 5.29,a). The
classical alternative of this solution includes the resistor within a special winding of
the coil manufactured especially for this purpose (Fig. 5.29,b). The problem is thus
simplified, only one medium voltage cell for the artificial neutral creation and
grounding resistor are sufficient.
Application
Let us consider the network from Figure 5.30 operating at 20 kV, which supplies the
transformer stations of an urban district (L1, L2, L3) and a few neighbouring rural areas
(L4, L5, L6), given that the neutral point is grounded via arc-suppression coil (ASC).
Determine:
a) the capacitive currents flow and of those produced by the arc-suppression coil
(ASC) when a ground fault occurs on phase c;
b) the value of the ground fault capacitive current;
c) the arc-suppression coil reactance and the residual current values for a 15 % overcompensation.
L1
5 km
220 kV
Y0/d
10 km
L3
12 km
L4
10 km
L5
15 km
L6
18 km
Underground cables
20 kV
Auxiliary
transformer
ASC
L2
ZN
359
If we consider c0OEL = 5 109 F/km, and c0UEL = 150 109 F/km we obtain the
following value for the ground fault current:
220 kV/20 kV
H
I c, b+I c, b + IL 3
IC + 2IL 3
Ic, a +Ic, a + IL 3
H
a
b
c
Ic ,a
Faulted
outgoing
Healthy
outgoing
IcH,a
Ca0,H
IL 3
IL 3
IL 3
IcH, b
IL 3 IL 3
IL 3
I c, a
IcH, b
I c, b
C0b
Cb0,H
IL
F
I C=I C+I C=
H
=I c, a+I cH, b+
+I Fc, a+IcF, b
C0b
Cc0,H
TZC
IL
ZN
Un
3
IC =
20
3
(1 0.85) U n
3 IC
0.85 20
3 0.0485
= 201.44
that is a current low enough for the extinguishing of the electric arc at the first zero crossing.
360
Basic computation
The neutral grounding is one of the most complex problems of design (strategy)
for the electric networks, particularly for distribution networks. This is due to the
large number of parameters taken into account. The consideration of one grounding
solution or another has great influence on the power supply safety for consumer.
Some remarks concerning the situation abroad and in Romania will be
emphasized in the following section.
361
The analysis of the data from Table 5.3 shows that the highest overvoltage
level is obtained for underground cables while the lowest one is obtained for
networks grounded via resistor.
Good
Small
Investments and
exploitation costs
Middle
Good
Good
Good
High
Bad
Very bad
Very high
Bad
Good
Good
High
Good
Bad
USA,
Canada,
Australia
Distributed
Middle
Bad
Middle
Very
good
Very
good
High
Good
Bad
Good
Small
High
Good
3 V
Small
Very
good
Very
good
Very
good
Very
good
Small
3 V
Very
good
Very
good
Good
V
Good
France,
Romania
Resistor
with shunt
breaker
Middle
France,
Spain,
Romania
Resistor
Bad
Great
Britain
In a single
point
Grounded
Very good
Middle
Bad
Very good
Good
Very
good
Very
good
Very high
Small
Middle
Faults detecting
Voltage quality
Supply quality
3 V
Bad
Very good
3 V
Middle
Protections quality
Good
Germany,
Sweden,
Norway
Resonant
grounding
Good
France,
Spain
Limiting
impedance
3 V
Very
good
Single-phase-to-ground
fault current
Insulation level
required
Overvoltages level in
the network
Installations and human
protection
Italy,
Japan,
Ireland
Isolated
Widely spread
Comparison
criterion
Treatment
method
Grounding analysis in MV networks in some countries in the world [5.13, 5.23, 5.24]
Very good
Bad-middle
Good
Middle
Bad
Very high
3 V
Good
Middlegood
France,
Switzerland
Switchable
resistor
Middle
Very good
Very good
Good
Very good
Small
3 V
Very good
Good
Romania
Permanent
resistor
Table 5.4
362
Basic computation
363
Underground
cables
3.8
3.6
2.9
2.4
364
Basic computation
results as a compromise between two aspects: one that takes into consideration the
network neutral and line insulation stress, requesting a connection as solidly as
possible, and the other one considering the magnitude of the single-phase fault
current I sc1P and the possibility of becoming greater than the three-phase fault
current I sc 3 P , requesting the following condition:
I sc1P < I sc 3 P
(5.21)
The best solution is to design an operational scheme that will not allow an
exaggerated displacement of the network neutral and simultaneously will maintain
the single-phase-to-ground fault current at the level of the three-phase one.
In order to assure the inequality (5.21) the ratio of the sequence reactances
must be higher than 1, that is:
X0
1
X+
(5.22)
In order the sound phase voltages not to exceed 0.8 of V during a singlephase-to-ground fault, the ratio of sequence reactances must be smaller than 3, that
is:
X0
3
X+
(5.23)
R0
X0
and
3
<1
X+
X+
(5.24)
Since the introduction and development of 220 kV and 400 kV networks, the
percentage of networks with grounded neutral has considerably increased. A
stiffening of this connection was noticed, and the single-phase fault currents
became greater than the three-phase ones. This tendency was amplified by using
autotransformers in the network, whose neutrals are compulsory grounded (the
autotransformers operation with isolated neutral leads to unacceptable voltage
increases on the medium voltage side when a fault occurs in the high voltage
network). As consequence, in practice, the neutral-to-ground connection of some
transformers is disconnected in order to assure a ratio X 0 / X + < 3 and K G 0.8 in
every point. The practical measures are:
the neutrals of all transformers and autotransformers where the
manufacturer requests ground connection or gives no indication, are solidly
grounded;
in high voltage substations where a number of transformers operate in
parallel, only one of them is grounded, namely on the high voltage side;
in substations with many busbars, every busbar system is provided with
grounded neutral transformer;
365
366
Basic computation
The resistor grounded neutral solution is mainly used for underground cables,
but also for overhead electrical lines or mixed configurations, when the ground
fault capacitive current exceeds 10 A. The resistors should assure a fault current to
a value that allows quickly and selectively disconnection of the lines affected by
single-phase-to-ground faults.
In order to increase the quality of power supply service for consumers in
resistor grounded neutral networks, with overhead lines or mixed configurations
(with preponderance of overhead lines), the solution with shunt circuit breaker can
be used. This solution will eliminate the transitory single-phase-to-ground fault,
without disconnecting the consumers.
START
YES
Mixed
Line type
YES
Resistor
The consumers
accept
interruptions?
NO
Cables
NO
Resistor
Insulation
state is
good ?
Any
generator
connected?
NO
Is there
any coil in
circuit?
NO
Resistor + shunt
circuit-braker
YES
Isolated
neutral
NO
NO
YES
IC >10 A ?
NO
Coil+permanent
resistor
YES
Grounding
electrode
state is good ?
IC >5 A ?
Isolated
neutral
YES
YES
Coil+switchable
resistor
367
Chapter references
[5.1]
[5.2]
[5.3]
[5.4]
[5.5]
[5.6]
[5.7]
[5.8]
Griffel, D., Leitoff, V., Harmand, Y., Bergeal, J. A new deal for the safety and
the quality on MV networks, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 12, pp.
14281433, October 1997.
Leitloff, V., Pierrat, L., Feuillet, R. Study of the neutral-to-ground voltage in a
compensated power system, ETEP4, No.2, pp. 145153, 1994.
Lindahl, S., Messing, L., Olsson, B., Petterson, A., stlund, E. Dispositif de
protection contre les dfauts rsistants dans les rseaux de distribution moyenne
tension, 11me CIRED, Vol.1, pp. 2.9.12.9.8, 1991.
Leitloff, V. Etude, conception et ralisation dun automate de gestion de
reseaux MT compens, Ph.D. Thesis, Institute National Polytechnique de
Grenoble, France, 1994.
Berthe, L., Clement, M., Leitloff, V. MV neutral control: New products for a
wider choice, 13th CIRED, Vol. 1, pp. 4.27.14.27.6, 1995.
Leitloff, V., Bergeal, G., Feuillet, R., Pierrat, L. Messung der parameter eines
kompensierten netzes durch injection eines stromes in den sternpunkt,
Elektriziettswirtschaft, Vol. 93, No. 22, pp. 13711376, 1994.
Igel, M., Koglin, H., Schegner, P. New algorithms for ground fault distance
protection in insulated and compensated networks, ETEP, Vol. 1, No. 5, pp. 253
259, 1991.
Leitloff, V., Feuillet, R., Grifel, D. Detection of resistive single-phase ground faults
in a compensated power-distribution system, ETEP, Vol.7, No.1, pp. 6973, 1997.
368
[5.9]
[5.10]
[5.11]
[5.12]
[5.13]
[5.14]
[5.15]
[5.16]
[5.17]
[5.18]
[5.19]
[5.20]
[5.21]
[5.22]
[5.23]
[5.24]
[5.25]
Basic computation
Goia, L., Isfanu, T., Blan, G., Tnsescu, A. Tratarea neutrului n reelele de
medie tensiune (The neutral treatment in medium voltage networks), Editura
Tehnic, Bucureti, 1989.
Goia, L. Aspecte noi privind tratarea neutrului n reelele de medie tensiune
(New aspects regarding the neutral treatment in medium voltage networks),
Energetica Revue, Vol. 45, No. 12, pp. 544549, Bucureti, 1997.
Bisiach, L., Cappelieri, D., Gualandi, M. Messo a terra del neutro nellireti di
distribuzzione a mediante impendanza acordata, L`Energia Ellectrica, Vol. 73,
No. 6, pp. 463475, 1996.
Biscoglia, V., Bogonoro, G., Capuano, A., Cerreti, A., Pannin, F. Messo a terra
del neutro dellereti MT mediante impendanza di acordo, Analisi tecniche,
L`Energia Ellectrica, Vol. 74, No. 1, pp. 1120, 1997.
Griffel, D., Harmond, Y., Bergeal, J. Nouvelles techniques de mise a la terre des
neutres sur les reseaux MT, RGE No. 11/94, pp. 3545, December 1994.
Stein, M. et al. Contribuii privind experimentarea ntreruptoarelor unt ntr-o
reea aerian de 20 kV cu neutrul tratat prin rezisten (Contributions concerning
the experiment of shunt circuit breakers in an 20 kV overhead network with
neutral grounded via resistor), Bull. ISPE, Bucharest, No. 4, September/December, 1997.
Druml, G., Kugi, A., Parr, B. Control of Petersen-coils, Proceedings of
International Symposium on Theoretical Electrical Engineering ISTET01, Linz,
Vol.2, pp. 464470, August 2001.
Crian, O. Sisteme electroenergetice (Power systems), Editura Didactic i
Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1979.
Glover, M. Grounding method key to system protection. Electric Power
International, pp. 5860, Hightstown, New Jersey, June 1994.
Fallou, J. Les rseaux de transmission dnergie. Gauthier-Villars Editeur, Paris,
1935.
NTE001/00/03 Normativ privind alegerea izolaiei, coordonarea izolaiei i
protecia instalaiilor electroenergetice mpotriva supratensiunilor (Standard
concerning the insulation choice, insulation coordination and the electrical power
devices protection against overvoltages), ANRE, 2003.
Winter, K.M. La compensation des courants residuels - un procede nouveau
pour la protection des reseaux de cables souterrains or aeriens contre les defauts
a la terre, NMT 95, Mulhouse, pp. 115119, November 7-8, 1995.
Juston, Ph., Griffel, D. Mise a la terre du neutre MT des reseaux ruraux: la
solution francaise, NMT 95, Mulhouse, pp. 1721, November 7-8, 1995.
Druml, G. Detection des defauts a la terre tres resistance sur les reseaux
compenses, NMT 95, Mulhouse, pp. 109114, November 7-8, 1995.
Fickert, L., Schweer, A. Le regime du neutre sur reseaux MT et son influence
sur la qualite de distribution denergie et sur lexploitation du reseau, NMT 95,
Mulhouse, pp. 2635, November 7-8, 1995.
Vatr, F. et al. Aspecte privind strategia de tratare a neutrului reelelor electrice de
medie tensiune ale CONEL (Issues concerning the neutral grounding strategy of MV
electrical networks from CONEL), Bull. ISPE, No. 1, pp. 4345, Bucharest, 1997.
*** Islanded operation of MV Networks, EUROSTAG Newsletter No. 11, pp.
811, June 2000.
Chapter 6
ELECTRICAL POWER QUALITY
6.1. Introduction
Electric power quality has emerged as a major area of the electric power
engineering. At present, both electric utilities and users of the electric networks are
concerned about the quality of the electric power. The term power quality has
become very frequently used in the last two decades. It represents a wide concept
for a multitude of disturbances occurring into the system.
In technical literature, the concepts of electric power quality or power
quality are usual. Each of the two idioms is made-up of two concepts: electric
power or electric energy and quality [6.2]. These seem relevant to us in a
certain context: the quality as a set of properties and characteristics of an object or
process. The object is the electrical energy and the process is the electrical power
supply.
In power systems operation, situations that fall under these concepts are not
necessarily new. What is new is that the engineers are now attempting to deal with
these issues with a systems approach rather than as individual problems.
There are major reasons for the growing concern [6.1 *]:
The load equipment of nowadays includes more electronic based
components such as computers and microprocessor-based controllers,
which are sensitive to power quality related disturbances than most other
electric equipment.
The improvement of the power system performances is accomplished by a
continued growth of manufacturing power electronic based devices. These
devices, such as adjustable-speed motor drives and shunt capacitors for
power factor correction and losses reduction, can affect the power quality
increasing the harmonic level into the system, and the consumer should
take appropriate measures to mitigate it.
Utility customers are becoming better informed about disturbance effects
on electrical equipments and manufacturing processes that are challenging
the utilities to improve the quality of power delivered.
*)
Reprinted with permission from Dugan, R.C., McGranaghan, M.F., Santoso, S., Beaty,
H.W. Electrical Power Systems Quality, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill 2003 McGraw-Hill
Companies, All rights reserved.
368
Basic computation
The power quality can have completely different definitions for power
systems, depending on ones frame of reference. The utilities may define power
quality as reliability and show statistics demonstrating that the system is 99.98%
reliable [6.1]. The manufacturers of electrical equipment may define the power
quality as those characteristics of the power supply that enable the equipment to
work in a satisfactory manner. However, the power quality can be defined as being
the main parameter to which both the utilization and delivery of the electric power
affects the performance of electric equipment. In this chapter, the power quality
problem refers to any phenomenon manifesting in voltage, current or frequency
deviations that results in failure or misoperation of customer equipment.
Following the increasing complexity of systems and customers, power
quality problems may be related to hardware, software or control system
malfunctions. Electronic components can degrade over time due to repeated
transient voltages and may eventually fail due to a relatively low-magnitude event.
Thus, it is sometimes difficult to associate a failure with a specific cause. Control
software may not have anticipated a particular occurrence.
In fact, the power quality is difficult to quantify, like the quality in other
goods and services, because it is not a single concept of power supply service [6.1].
There are many idioms used in standards such as voltage quality, current
quality, quality of supply or quality of consumption [6.3].
Voltage quality concerns the deviation of the voltage waveform from the
ideal shape, which is defined as a sinusoidal waveform of constant magnitude and
frequency. Voltage quality involves the performance of the power system with
respect to the load.
Current quality is a complementary term of voltage quality. It concerns (like
the voltage) the deviation of the current waveform from the ideal shape (sinusoidal
waveform). Current quality involves also the performance of the load with respect
to the power system.
Under these conditions, power quality is the combination of current quality
and voltage quality, involving the interaction between the system and the load.
Quality of supply covers the technical issues involved in voltage quality, plus
all non-technical issues related to the performance of utility with respect to the
customer, while the quality of consumption is a complementary term to quality of
supply, covering the current quality plus the performance of customer with respect
to the utility.
While not having a strict basis of measurement, terms like poor power
quality generally mean there is sufficient deviation from norms in the power
supply to cause equipment misoperation or premature failure. Good power
quality, conversely, means there is a low level of such deviations or
misoperations. Because the sensitivity to such deviations varies from one piece of
equipment to another, what may be considered poor power quality to one device
may be perfectly acceptable power quality to another.
Alternating current power systems are designed to operate with a sinusoidal
voltage of a given rated frequency and magnitude. Any significant deviation in the
369
3
2 t
0
2
-1
3
2
2 t
-2
-3
a.
b.
Fig. 6.1. Example of current waveform: a. sinusoidal shape; b. distorted shape [6.4].
370
Basic computation
production and raw material losses, because of the need to clean the machines,
restart the process in the proper sequence and recalibrate the production line to
meet the required product specifications. At present, there are concerns for a great
emphasis on revitalizing industry with more automation and more modern
equipment, which are usual electronically controlled.
Table 6.1 gives classification of the main aspects related to the electric power
quality [6.5].
Table 6.1
Main aspects of electric power quality
Modelling
Modelling and
analysis
Analysis
Instrumentation
Electric
Power
Quality
Sources
Solutions
Fundamental
concepts
Effects
Harmonics
Unbalances
Stochastic methods
Voltage support
Software
Time domain
Frequency domain
Network methods
Metering
Measurement
Waveform analysis
Converters
Pulse modulated methods
Flexible AC transmission
Grounding
Passive filters
Static wave compensators
Static VAr compensators
Active filters
Adaptive compensators
Standards
Definitions
User issues
Protection
371
Before approaching these aspects, it is necessary to show that the term power
quality is applied to a wide variety of electromagnetic phenomena on the power
system. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) classified the
electromagnetic phenomena into the groups shown in Table 6.2.
Table 6.2
Principal phenomena causing electromagnetic disturbances
as classified by the IEC [6.7] and fields of interest of this work
Conducted low-frequency phenomena
Harmonics, interharmonics
Voltage unbalance
Voltage fluctuations (flicker)
Signal systems (power line carrier)
Voltage dips and interruptions
Power frequency variations
Induced low-frequency voltages
DC in AC networks
Conducted high-frequency phenomena
Inducted continuous-wave voltages or currents
Unidirectional transients
Oscillatory transients
Radiated low-frequency phenomena
Magnetic fields
Electric fields
Radiated high-frequency phenomena
Magnetic fields
Electric fields
Electromagnetic fields
Transients
Continuous waves
Electrostatic discharge phenomena (ESD)
Nuclear electromagnetic pulse (NEMP)
The main aspect of power quality is related to voltage quality, and this is the
reason why the voltage events are of great interest. But, the phenomena, which
contain voltage problems, are of two principally different types [6.3]. The so-called
variations are deviations always present into the system, such as the small
differences between the nominal voltage and the actual ones. The other type, the
so-called events are the occasional larger deviations, such as voltage dips and
interruptions. A voltage magnitude event is defined as a significant deviation from
the normal voltage magnitude for a limited duration.
Some standards [6.8] gives classification of voltage disturbances that
influence the supply reliability of consumer (Table 6.3), as well as the main voltage
characteristics and admissible deviation ranges of voltage magnitude in the point of
common coupling (PCC) of the public low (LV) and medium (MV) voltage
electric distribution systems under normal operating conditions. The main causes
of these disturbances are also presented.
372
Basic computation
Table 6.3
Classification of the voltage disturbances.
Characteristics
Rise time
Disturbance
Duration Magnitude
frequency
waveform
0
1
2
3
4
Transient overvoltages caused by lightning strike or switching events
Category
impulse
ns to ms
oscillatory
1kHz to
10MHz
(1s, 50ms)
0 6 p.u.
Short duration variation short circuit, start-up of large motors, electric arc furnace
interruption
collapse
(10ms, 3s)
100%
dip (sag)
fundamental
frequency
(0.5cy,
50cy)
0.1 0.9
p.u.
swell
fundamental
frequency
(0.5cy,
50cy)
1.1 1.8
p.u.
fundamental
frequency
>30 ms
0.3 1.1
p.u.
flicker or
fluctuations
collapse
(3s 1min)
100%
undervoltage fundamental
(dip)
frequency
> 1min
0.8 0.9
p.u.
overvoltage
(swell)
> 1 min
1.1 1.2
p.u.
fundamental
frequency
Waveform distortion non-linear load, resonance, transformer saturation, single phase load
harmonics
0 40th
harmonic
continuous
0 25%
373
Table 6.3 (continued)
notching
broadband
continuous
0 10%
voltage
unbalance
fundamental
frequency
continuous
< 3%
200
180
160
140
120
affected by disturbance
withstand to
80 disturbance
60
40
affected by disturbance
20
0
0.001 0.01
100
0.1
10
1
Duration of disturbance [s]
250
200
affected by disturbance
150
100 withstand to disturbance
50
0
0.001
affected by disturbance
0.01
100
0.1
10
1
Duration of disturbance [s]
a.
Percentage of nominal voltage
The common Standards that manufacturers use for computer equipment are
the ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council) curve (Fig. 6.2,b), which is an
updated version of CBEMA (Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers
Association) (Fig. 6.2,a) and SEMI (Semiconductor Equipment and Materials
International Group 1998) (Fig. 6.2,c) [6.9]. The ITIC curve indicates the withstand
capabilities of computer equipments in terms of the magnitude and duration of the
voltage disturbance. Disturbances occurring in the outer of withstand area might
cause a malfunction of equipment. It may be necessary to check carefully which
Standards are applicable when considering equipment susceptibility to voltage
disturbances. Notice that, the ITIC curve is applicable to 60 Hz frequency and 120 V,
120 V / 208 V and 120 V / 240 V nominal voltages only.
b.
140
120
100
disturbance area
in which equipment
should operate
80
60
40
20
0
0.001
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
Duration of disturbance [s]
c.
Fig. 6.2. Equipment susceptibility curves: a. CBEMA; b. ITIC; c. SEMI.
374
Basic computation
375
while a short-circuit occurring into the medium voltage network will be less
experienced by the high voltage network because of the series impedances of the
transformers and lines.
Let us consider the distribution network from Figure 6.3, where the numbers
1, 2 and 3 indicate the fault positions and the letters C1, C2, C3, C4 indicate the
loads. A fault in the transmission line (position 1) will cause dip for both
substations bordering the faulted line. This dip is propagated toward all customers
fed from these two substations (i.e. C1, C2, C3, C4). The consumer C1 will
experience the largest voltage dip because the faulted line feeds it.
1
C1
transmission line
distribution network
C2
transformers
3
C3
C4
A fault at position 2 will not cause much voltage drop for customer C1. The
impedance of the transformer between the transmission and the sub-transmission
system are large enough to considerably limit the voltage drop on the high-voltage
side of the transformer. The fault at position 2 will cause a deep dip in all
distribution network supplied by the distribution transformer and thus for all
consumers fed from there (C2, C3, C4).
A fault at position 3 will cause a short or/and long interruption for the
consumer C3 when the protection clears the fault. Consumers C1, C2 and C4 will not
experience any significant drop in voltage due to faults 3.
376
Basic computation
standard dip characterization uses two parameters: magnitude and duration. The
dip magnitude is the difference between the supply voltage before disturbance
occurrence and the retained voltage. The retained voltage is the lowest rms voltage
value below a threshold, measured on a 10 ms period during the dip, and the dip
duration is the time-difference between the beginning and the end of the
disturbance. Figure 6.4,a shows the voltage profile of a voltage dip, together with
the associated definitions.
A factory, where a large number of motors operate, can experience multiple
dips (Fig. 6.4,b) due to simultaneous large load variations.
Vrms
Vrms
Vmax
Vmax
Vmin
Vmin
Dip magnitude
Dip magnitude
Dip duration
Dip duration
Retained voltage
Retained voltage
Interruption
Interruption
Time
Time
a.
b.
Fig. 6.4. Voltage dip profile [6.11].
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1
Voltage, in p.u.
A typical example of voltage dip can be seen in Figure 6.5 [6.3], where the
instantaneous voltage versus time, as obtained from a power quality monitor, is
illustrated. The voltage amplitude drops to a value of about 0.2 p.u. of its pre-event
value for about two cycles, after which the voltage recovers. The magnitude of
voltage dip is determined from the rms voltage. The rms voltage for the dip in
Figure 6.5 is shown in Figure 6.6.
Time in cycles
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Time in cycles
377
1 i=k
v(i ) 2
N i = k N +1
(6.1)
378
Basic computation
Vc
Vc
Va
Va
V 3
F 3
Vb
V
Vb
Va =V
Va =V
1
3
Vb = V j
V
2
2
1
3
Vc = V + j
V
2
2
1
3
Vb = F j
F
2
2
1
3
Vc = F + j
F
2
2
a.
b.
Vc
Vc
Va
Va
V
F
Vb
Vb
Va = F
Va =V
1
3
Vb = F j
V
2
2
1
3
Vc = F + j
V
2
2
1
3
Vb = V j
F
2
2
1
3
Vc = V + j
F
2
2
c.
d.
Fig. 6.7. The basic type of three-phase balanced and unbalanced dips:
a. type A; b. type B; c. type C; d. type D.
Voltage dips due to faults can be shown in a plot, as well as dips due to motor
starting and even long and short interruptions. Different load types cause dips of
different origin in the magnitude-duration plane (Fig. 6.8) [6.2].
transmission
network
45-100%
fuses
45-60 %
0
local MV
network
40-70%
0.1
10
100
Duration, sec
Fig. 6.8. Dips of different origin in a magnitude [%] vs. duration plot [sec].
379
ZLF
Fault
ZS
Load 1
PCC Load 2
Z LF
Z S + Z LF
(6.2)
The reasoning behind the approximation varies, but the basic assumption is
always that the current through the faulted feeder is the main cause of the voltage
drop and thus, of the voltage dip.
The dip is usually seen as a voltage drop on one phase, but for a better
interpretation is useful to consider it as a three-phase phenomenon.
From equation (6.2) we see that the dip becomes deeper for faults electrically
closer to the PCC (when Z LF becomes smaller), and for weaker systems (when
Z S becomes larger).
In order to explain how the distance to fault influences the voltage dip, the
simple case (Fig. 6.9) of a medium voltage substation that feeds one radial line is
considered. There are considered three levels of system strength, which reflects in
system impedance value, together with distances between the PCC and the fault up
to 20 p.u.. Figure 6.10,a illustrates the variation of the retained voltage, measured
at the PCC, in terms of the distance to fault, while Figure 6.10,b illustrates the
magnitude of the dip. It can be seen that the nearer the fault is to the busbar, the
higher the voltage dip will be experienced.
Basic computation
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
ZS 2ZS 3ZS
380
10
5
15
20
Distance to fault ZLF (p.u.)
a.
0.8
0.6
ZS 2ZS 3ZS
0.4
0.2
0
10
5
15
20
Distance to fault ZLF (p.u.)
b.
381
supply
Load
Battery
Fig. 6.11. Block diagram of the UPS system.
Restored voltage
Voltage with
dip
Converter
DC storage
Fig. 6.12. Block diagram of the DVR system.
382
Basic computation
voltage
The transient overvoltages are increases in the supply voltage with duration
less than one cycle, sometimes much less. Usually, the term of transient has been
used in the analysis of power system variations to denote an event that is
undesirable and momentary in nature [6.1, 6.2].
The transient phenomena can be classified into categories as impulsive and
oscillatory. These terms reflect the wave shape of a current or voltage transient.
A typical example of impulsive signal is shown in Figure 6.13.
amplitude
time
duration
Fig. 6.13. Impulsive transient.
383
6.3.1. Sources
There are two main sources of transient overvoltage in utility systems:
capacitor switching and lightning. Some power electronic devices generate
significant transients when they switch.
~
Fig. 6.14. One-line diagram of a
capacitor-switching operation.
*)
Monitor
Reprinted with permission from Dugan, R.C., McGranaghan, M.F., Santoso, S., Beaty,
H.W. Electrical Power Systems Quality, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill 2003 McGraw-Hill
Companies, All rights reserved.
384
Basic computation
v [p.u.]
.
2003
McGraw-Hill Companies,
All rights reserved.
Magnifications of the transient overvoltage at the end user bus it possible for
certain low-voltage capacitor and step-down transformer sizes.
Controlling the transient overvoltage at the utility capacitor is sometimes
possible using synchronous closing breakers or switches with preinsertion resistors.
To limit the transient voltage magnitude, high-energy surge arresters can be applied
at the customer bus. It is important to note that the arresters can only limit the
transient to the arrester protective level. This level is typically 1.8 times the normal
peak voltage, but may not be sufficient to protect sensitive electronic equipment
that might only have a withstand capability of 1.75 p.u.
Other measures of limiting the voltage magnification transients are to convert
the end-user power factor correction banks to harmonic filters. A reactor in series
with a capacitor bank will decrease the transient voltage at the customer bus to
acceptable levels. This solution benefits of providing correction for displacement
power factor, controlling harmonic distortion levels within the facility and limiting
the concern for magnified capacitor-switching transients.
6.3.1.2. Lightning
Lightning is a potential source of impulsive transients. Overvoltages will be
caused by direct or indirect lightning strokes. This paragraph will focus on direct
lightning strokes, and how lightning causes transient overvoltage to appear on
power systems [6.2].
A direct stroke is defined as lightning stroke when it hits either a shield wire,
a tower or a phase conductor. Direct and indirect strokes are shown in Figure 6.16.
The voltage induced on a line by indirect lightning stroke has four components:
the charged cloud above induces bound charge on the line while the line
itself is held electrostatically at ground potential by the neutrals of
connected transformers and by leakage over the insulators;
the charges lowered by the stepped leader further induce charges on the
line. When the stepped leader is neutralized by the return stroke, the bound
385
charges on the line are released and thus produce travelling waver similar
to that caused by the cloud discharge;
the residual charge in the return stroke induce an electrostatic field in the
vicinity of the line and hence an induced voltage on it;
the note of change of current in the return stroke produces a magnetically
induced voltage on the line.
Shield wire
Phase
conductor
Indirect
stroke
Fig. 6.16. Example of direct and indirect lightning strokes. Adapted from Grigsby, L.L.
The electric power engineering handbook CRC Press 2000.
The magnitudes of the voltage induced by the release of the charge bound
either by the cloud or by the stepped leader are small compared with the voltage
induced by the return stroke. Therefore, only the electrostatic and the magnetic
components induced by the return stroke are frequently considered in analysis. The
initial computations are performed with the assumption that the charge distribution
along the leader stroke is uniform, and return stroke current is rectangular.
The inducing voltage is the voltage at a field point in space with the same
coordinates as a corresponding point on the line conductor, but without the
presence of the line conductor. The inducing voltage at different points along the
length of the line conductor will be different. The overhead line being a good
conductor of electricity, these differences will tend to be equalized by flow of
current. Therefore, the actual voltage between a point on the line and the ground
below will be different from the inducing voltage at that point. This voltage, which
can actually be measured on the line conductor, is defined as the induced voltage.
Notice that, the inducing voltages are more important in MV overhead lines.
386
Basic computation
(6.3)
or:
V B V A
PB R + QB X
VA
387
b) the modification of the network parameters values (R, X); this is due
either to the transformer/line connection/disconnection to ensure an
economical operation of the power system, or to revisions, repairs or
breakdowns;
c) the modification of the voltage VA ; the transformer taps or generator
terminal voltage modifications, according to the operating conditions, are
included in this category.
It should be mentioned that the term QB X VA has the main influence on the
voltage drop and consequently on the voltage variation because the network
elements (especially the transmission network) are generally characterized by
X >> R . Therefore, it can be said that the voltage level into the power system
nodes is mainly due to the reactive power flow.
From the time variation point of view, the voltage variations can be
predictable or not predictable (disturbance). The following issues can be included
in the first category:
the periodic variations determined by the periodic modification of the
power consumption from one day to another, between the morning and the
night peak or the night off-peak hours;
the slow variations determined by the slow modification of the
consumption according to the daily schedule.
Practically, these variations are difficult to separate but they are predictable
and therefore can be prevented by some appropriate actions. In fact, the
unpredictable variations represent voltage disturbances manifesting themselves
through:
sudden variations for short time caused by some receivers connection or
disconnection or by same network elements connection or disconnection
following a breakdown. They are generated all the time so that these
variations are practically permanent and are superposed on the slow
variations in the form of a random component. As duration they can be
instantaneous, 10 600 ms with 0.1 1.8 p.u. magnitude, or momentary,
0.6 2 s with 0.1 1.4 p.u. magnitude;
voltage dips, which are sudden voltage decreases with a duration less than
one second and the magnitude up to 90%. They can be caused by the
connection of very high loads or by transient disturbances into the system.
The voltage variation has unfavourable effects both on the network elements
and receivers. The exaggerated increases of voltage into a network lead to the
overstressing of equipments insulation and its early ageing. The voltage decrease
causes the current increase and the thermally overloading of equipments; the losses
increase and the power transmission and distribution efficiency decrease; the static
and transient stability limits decrease, the operation safety also decreases.
The asynchronous motors can be countered among the sensitive receivers
with the voltage variation. For instance, a voltage modification of 10% results in a
388
Basic computation
modification of almost 20% (in the same direction) of the active torque. The sliding
currents and productivity are modified accordingly.
The troubles caused by the voltage variation with respect to the rated value
have imposed that its admissible derivations to be set to relative reduced values.
But the rms values of derivations depend on the operation particularities of the
considered system element. Thus, at the transmission network level, the upper limit
is imposed by the insulation level, resignation risk on the breakers and some
crosscut element overloading (capacitor bank, reactance coils, etc). The lower limit
is imposed by the breaking capacity value of the circuit breakers, and by some
devices and equipments sensitivity (relaying, capacitor banks, etc.).
At the distribution network level, the insulation level of the devices and the
afferent equipments impose the upper limit. The lower limit is imposed by the
allowable decreasing of the asynchronous active torque, by the efficiency of the
energy transformations taking place in the receivers connected to the network.
Thus, the allowed voltage deviations from the transmission network will be
higher (up to 10%) while they are lower into the distribution network (up to 5%).
But, there is an energy transfer between the low and the high voltage level
networks and therefore the voltage deviations should be correlated during
operation. Thus, if the high level has an increased voltage and the low one a
decreased voltage, an exaggerated power transfer toward the low level will exist.
By contrary, if the high level has a decreased voltage and the low one has an
increased voltage, the necessary power transfer toward the low level cannot be
done. Depending on these considerations the normal acceptable ranges for the
voltage variations results.
V (t ) Vn
100 [%]
Vn
(6.4)
Vmax =
Vmax Vmin
100 [%]
Vn
(6.5)
389
The relation (6.4) gives the voltage deviation in a node with respect to the
nominal voltage. But, is the nominal voltage the optimum one for all nodes? To
answer this question, an analysis of the optimum voltage meaning for the
consumption nodes should be performed.
The experimental determinations proved that the voltage deviation in a node,
with respect to the optimum voltage (almost equal to the nominal voltage), is a
random variable that obey to a normal distribution law defined by the density of
probability:
f =
V V
1
exp
2 2
2
)
2
(6.6)
V =
1
Vdt
T 0
(6.7)
(V V ) dt
2
(6.8)
IRR = V 2 =
1
V 2 dt
T 0
(6.9)
IRRP =
V (t )
P (t )dt
P(t )dt
0
The quantities IRR, V and , called also statistic indices, are used to
estimate the voltage quality into the electrical networks. It was demonstrated that
they verify the relationship:
390
Basic computation
( )
IRR = 2 + V
(6.10)
391
The shunt capacitors maintain the voltage by reducing the inductive current.
In order to maintain the voltage constant, the capacitors can be switched according
to the load variation, sometimes in small incremental steps to follow the load
variation more closely.
The series capacitors are relatively rare, and they are used for long
transmission lines, ensuring a better voltage repartition along the line. They are
also very useful in certain system conditions, mainly with rapidly changing loads
that cause excessive flicker phenomenon. The series capacitors compensate the
network inductance. If the load is highly inductive this method prove to be very
useful. But, if the load presents a dominant resistive component, the series
compensation is not needed anymore. The series compensation with capacitor
banks is an efficient way of increasing the power transfer capability and reducing
the power losses into the electrical network.
Concerning the series capacitive compensation of the lines, three problems to
be solved are posted:
establish the place where the capacitor bank should be installed;
determine the reactance of the capacitor bank;
establish the way in which the bank will be connected to the network.
The criterion used to solve the first and the second problem, depends on the
line destination (transmission or distribution) and also on the load location (at the
sending or at the receiving end of the line). For medium voltage lines, the main
purpose of the series compensation is to improve the voltage level along the lines,
but at the same time, the power transfer capability. The criterion of optimal voltage
adjustment into the radial distribution networks uses successfully the integral
indices for voltage quality, establishing the value of the optimal voltage in the
feeding buses, for the case when the power absorbed by consumers can be
expressed by stochastic variables.
Based on this idea, some series compensation approaches employ an
optimisation algorithm. The objective function is the irregularity of the voltage in
the consumption buses. Two situations will be analysed: (i) radial line supplying a
single load; (ii) radial line supplying multiple loads;
(i) In the case of a radial line supplying a single load, the objective is only to
determine the value of the capacitive reactance. In this regard, one impose that the
irregularity of the voltage in the consumption bus to be minimum, under the
condition of providing some restrictions as:
in any line section the voltage is within the admissible range both in the
normal operation and during short-circuit event (a three-phase fault occurring
behind a capacitor bank);
the overloading of the capacitor bank during the short-circuit conditions is
less than or equal to the admissible value;
the sub-synchronous resonance or ferromagnetic resonance are avoided.
Therefore, under sinusoidal and symmetrical conditions, the expression (6.9)
becomes:
392
Basic computation
2
T
1 V1 p20 R + q20 ( X X C )
V =
1 dt = min
T 0 Vn
Vn2
(6.11)
p20 q20
2
q20
Vn (V1 Vn )
2
q20
(6.12)
q20
where q20 is the average value of the reactive power absorbed at the load bus;
2
q20
the mean square deviation of the reactive power:
( )
2
q20
= q20
+ q220 ;
q20 the dispersion with respect to the average value of the absorbed
p20 q20
reactive power;
the mean value of the product between the active and reactive
power calculated by:
p20 q20 = p20 q20 + p20 q20 rp20 q20
rp20 q20 the correlation ratio between the random quantities p20 and q20
reactance X, respectively, can be calculated knowing the value of the voltage in the
fictive bus Vf, and the ratio R/X.
V
V1
V2
Vj
Vm-1
Vm
p1, q1
p2, q2
pj, qj
pm-1, qm-1
pm, qm
393
m
Vf V
pjR +
j =1
q X
j
j =1
Vn
In order to determine the fictive voltage Vf, we must enforce the condition
that the mean square derivation of the voltage Vj (j = 1m), afferent to the real
network, has to be equal to the mean square derivation of the fictive voltage,
meaning that:
2
T
T
1 V j (t ) Vn
1 V f Vn
d
t
=
dt
Vn
T 0 Vn
j =1 T 0
From the above equations, it results the line reactance of the fictive line, and
knowing that X = x0l , x0 being the per kilometre reactance, we can easily obtain
the length l.
1
m
Application
Let us consider a rural distribution overhead line, of 20 kV and 38 km long, that
feeds 6 transformer stations (mention that the phase-to-phase voltages are used). The line
sections lengths and the maximum active and reactive three-phase powers absorbed by the
transformer stations are given in Figure 6.18. The conductors are of ACSR type and have a
cross sectional area of 70 mm2.
8 km
5 km
6 km
8 km
7 km
4 km
p1=0.45 MW
p2=0.5 MW
p3=0.62 MW
p4=0.55 MW
p5=0.57 MW
p6=0.6 MW
q1=0.16 MVAr q2=0.178 MVAr q3=0.22 MVAr q4=0.191 MVAr q5=0.202 MVAr q6=0.213 MVAr
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 t [h]
394
Basic computation
Using the relations written above, we obtain the length of the fictive line as
L = 20.388 km . This corresponds to the installation place of the capacitor bank. Taking
into account that the capacitor bank should be placed in a transformer station, it results that
the closer transformer station is the third one. Rewriting the expression (6.12) for phase-tophase voltages and three-phase powers, it results:
XC = X +
PQ
Q2
U n (U1 U n )
Q2
where R and X correspond to a line length of 19 km, allows us to determine the optimal
value of the capacitor bank reactance to X C = 6.98 .
In Figures 6.20 and 6.21 the voltage variations in case of maximum and minimum
load, respectively, for the electrical distribution network, are represented, where the
capacitor bank is placed in different transformer stations.
U[kV]21.5
No compensation
transformer station 1
21
transformer station 2
transformer station 3
transformer station 4
20.5
transformer station 5
transformer station 6
20
19.5
19
18.5
0
6
Station
No compensation
21
Transformer station 1
20.8
Transformer station 3
Transformer station 2
Transformer station 4
20.6
Transformer station 5
Transformer station 6
20.4
20.2
20
19.8
0
6
Station
395
If we consider the admissible voltage range from 19 to 21 kV, we find that, for the
limit operating states taken into consideration (maximum and minimum load), the voltage
remains within the limits in every bus of the network only for certain values of the
capacitive reactance XC and for certain installing places of the capacitor bank.
The following observations it results:
The profile of the voltage changes along the line is dependent on the installing
place of the capacitor bank. The most advantageous variants correspond to the
cases when the bank is placed into the transformer stations 3 and 4, but mostly into
the substation 3;
The limit voltages Umin and Umax, corresponding to the minimum and maximum
load, depend on the installing place of the capacitor bank, and for a certain place,
the value of the capacitive reactance has a small influence on them;
The sum of the mean square deviations of the voltage is minimum in the
neighbourhood of the third substation. The irregularity value is around 1%.
Therefore, it is not possible to obtain simultaneously the minimum of both voltage
drop and active power losses, which is natural if we take into account the linear dependence
of the voltage and the square dependence of the power losses on the load. However, it can
be mentioned that the difference between the active power losses in these two cases is not
too significant, being around 4.45%.
6.5.1. Sources
For non-linear devices the current is not proportional to the voltage applied at
the terminals, but it follows a characteristic according to the load structure. Figure
6.22 shows such case in which the voltage could be perfectly sinusoidal, instead,
due to the non-linear dependence between voltage and current at the resistor, the
current will be distorted. Mention that a pure sinusoidal voltage curve can be
provided only by an infinite power source. Increasing the voltage by a few
percents, the peak value of the current may increase significantly and take a
different wave shape [6.1].
High-voltage direct current stations have been a major focus area for the
study of power system harmonics due to their rectifier and inverter stations.
Today, electric devices that can handle several kW up to several MW became
commercially viable and reliable products. This technological advance in
electronics has led to the widespread use of numerous converter topologies, all
which represent non-linear devices (elements) in power systems.
396
Basic computation
i
i(t)
v
v(t)
v
i
397
f (t ) =
F () exp( jt )dt
sin ( h1t + h )
(6.13)
h =1
(6.14,a)
h = arctan ( ah bh ) if bh 0
(6.14,b)
398
Basic computation
h = + arctan ( ah bh ) if bh < 0
(6.14,c)
while
2
ah =
T
2
bh =
T
1
c0 =
T
f ( t ) cos ( ht ) dt
(6.15,a)
f (t )sin ( ht ) dt
(6.15,b)
f ( t ) dt
(6.15,c)
c02
hmax
c
+ h
h =1 2
(6.16)
The deviation of voltage or current waveform at some load types requires the
definition of indices that will allow the estimation of distortion and their
comparison with the admissible limits, which are imposed by some sensitive
receivers. The following indices are defined:
(i) Harmonic frequency, which is the integer multiple of the fundamental
frequency, representing the individual decomposed wave:
f h = h f1
(ii) Harmonic order, which is the ratio of the harmonic frequency to the
fundamental frequency:
f
h= h
f1
(iii) rms value of individual harmonic component, having a certain harmonic
frequency, given by:
c
Ch = h
(6.17)
2
(6.18)
399
hmax
hmax
Ch
1
THD =
=
C1
h = 2 C1
2
h
(6.19)
h=2
which represents the ratio of the rms value of the sum of all the harmonic
components Ch up to a specified order hmax (according to the CEI Standards, the
maximum harmonic taken into account is hmax = 40 ) to the rms value of the
fundamental component C1.
The rms value of a distorted waveform is the square root of the sum of the
squares. The THD is related to the rms value of the waveform as follows:
rms =
hmax
c1
ch
1 + THD 2
=
2
2
h =1
(6.20)
1
C1
hmax
2
h
(6.21)
h=2
C=
1
C1
hmax
h C
2
2
h
100
(6.22)
h =14
Notice that this factor is used to emphasize the superior order harmonics.
(viii) Weighted sum of individual harmonic components:
C=
hmax
k h Ch
100
h =2 C1
(6.23)
400
Basic computation
and can be used to reproduce the original waveform by direct substitution into
equation (6.13) with satisfactory accuracy.
The European Standard IEC 61000-3-6 [6.17] suggests, under normal
operating condition, during each period of one week, 95 % of the 10 min, the mean
rms values of each individual harmonic voltage shall be less than or equal to the
value given in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4
Indicative values of planning levels for harmonic voltages (in percent of the fundamental
voltage) in MV, HV and EHV power systems [6.17]
Odd harmonics
non-multiple of 3
Harmonic
order
h
Odd harmonics
multiple of 3
Harmonic
voltage
%
HVMV
EHV
Even harmonics
Harmonic
voltage
%
HVMV
EHV
Harmonic
order
h
Harmonic
order
h
Harmonic
voltage
%
HVMV
EHV
1.8
1.4
1.2
0.8
11
1.5
15
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.4
13
2.5
1.5
21
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.4
17
h
49
17
1.9
h
0.2
0.2
10
h
50
10
0.25
h
+0.22
1.2
17
h
21
<h
45
0.2
10
h
+0.16
0.19
Because the time domain analysis of signals can lead to large errors, the
frequency domain analysis, based on DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) and FFT
(Fast Fourier Transform) techniques, is preferred. Therefore, the analysed wave is
modelled through a number of samples.
Consider a window Tw, with Tw = NT1 the width of the time window, where N
is the number of fundamental periods within the window width. If the fundamental
harmonic of frequency f1 corresponds to the spectral component of order N, then
harmonics of order n correspond to the spectral components of order m = N n ,
where m is the ordinal number (order of the spectral line) related to the frequency
basis ( f w = 1/ Tw ). Therefore, relation (6.13) becomes [6.18]:
f ( t ) = c0 +
m =1
sin 1t + m
N
(6.24)
where:
(6.25,a)
m = arctan ( am bm ) if bm 0
(6.25,b)
m = + arctan ( am bm ) if bm < 0
(6.25,c)
401
while
2
am =
T
2
bm =
T
1
c0 =
T
f ( t ) cos N t dt
(6.26,a)
f (t )sin N t dt
(6.26,b)
f ( t ) dt
(6.26,c)
where the time window Tw is that time span of a time function over which the
Fourier transform is performed.
The analysis performed for a reduced number of periods requires a suitable
choice of the time window and the number of samples within the window. Standard
[6.18] suggest a method of interharmonics measurement based on the concept of
the so-called grouping. Its basis is the Fourier analysis performed in a time
window equal to 10 cycles of the fundamental frequency (50 Hz), i.e.
approximately 200 ms. Sampling is synchronized with the power supply frequency
by means of a phase-locked loop. The result is a spectrum with 5 Hz resolution
[6.19]. The standards define the method of processing individual 5 Hz lines in
order to determine the so-called harmonic or interharmonic group, to which
recommendations of standards and technical reports are referred (Fig. 6.23).
harmonics
Cm
interharmonics
DFT
output
n+1
n+2
n+3
Cm
harmonic
subgroup
n
harmonic
group
n+2
interharmonic interharmonic
group
subgroup
n+4
n+3
DFT
output
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
Fig. 6.24. Illustration of harmonics and interharmonics groups and subgroups [6.18].
402
Basic computation
The rms value of the harmonic group is the square root of the sum of the
squares of the amplitudes of a harmonic and the spectral components adjacent to it
within the observation window, that is:
Gg2,n =
4
Cm2 5
C2
+
Cm2 + i + m + 5
2
2
i =4
(6.27,a)
Gsg2 ,n =
2
k +i
(6.27,b)
i =1
Cig2 ,n =
2
k +i
(6.27,c)
i =1
The rms value of an interharmonic centred subgroup is the rms value of all
interharmonic components in the interval between two consecutive harmonic
frequencies, excluding frequency components directly adjacent to the harmonic
frequencies, that is:
2
Cisg
,n =
2
k +i
(6.27,d)
i=2
Gn
THD =
n = 2 G1
(6.28)
403
Gg , n
THDG =
n = 2 Gg1
hmax
(6.29)
Gsg ,n
THDS =
n = 2 Gg 1
hmax
(6.30)
G
PWHD =
n n
n = hmin G1
(6.31)
v(t ) = 2 V1 sin 1t
(6.32,a)
i (t ) = 2 I1 sin ( 1t 1 )
(6.32,b)
404
Basic computation
(6.33)
(6.34,b)
2 V h sin ( h1t + vh )
h =1
i (t ) =
(6.35)
2 I h sin ( h1t + ih )
h =1
405
P=
1
T1
T1
p (t )dt =
hmax
V I
cos ( vh ih )
h h
(6.36)
h =1
hmax
V I
h h
sin ( vh ih )
(6.37)
h =1
hmax
hmax
I
h =1
V h2
2
h
(6.38)
h =1
(6.39)
where P and Q are the active and reactive components of the apparent power S,
while D represents the additional contribution due to harmonics, being calculated
with the relation [6.23, 6.24]:
D2 =
hmax
k ,l =1
k l
V k2 I l2 + Vl 2 I k2 2V kVl I k I l cos( l k )
where k and l are harmonic orders, with h = k and h = l , while l and k are the
phase angles between harmonic voltages and currents, with l = vl il and
k = vk ik .
z
D
Fig. 6.25. The components of the
apparent power.
S
Q
P
x
The term reactive power has been introduced by academician Constantin Budeanu,
professor at the University Politehnica of Bucharest, in 1927, by the work Puissance
reactives et fictives. Editura IRE, Bucureti [6.22].
406
Basic computation
PF =
P
=
S
(6.40)
P + Q2 + D2
NL
LL
Fig. 6.26. Power systems supplying a linear and a non-linear load.
h =1
h 1
h =1
h 1
(6.41)
The generator, being assumed ideal, can generate active and reactive powers
only on the fundamental harmonic. The linear passive elements of this system, the
network and the linear load, can only receive active and reactive powers since they
are inductive.
Therefore, the following relations are obvious:
PNh > 0 , PLLh > 0 and Q Nh > 0 , Q LLh > 0 for h
Under these conditions, the balance equations imply:
PNLh < 0 , QNLh < 0 , for h 1
407
In other words, the supply of active and reactive powers on the higher
harmonics represents the non-linear load. The total active and reactive powers for
this load are:
PN = PN 1 + PNh > PN 1
h=2
QN = QN 1 + QNh > QN 1
(6.42)
h=2
h=2
h=2
h=2
(6.43)
With the above equations we can easily represent the diagram of the power
flows (Fig. 6.27).
The fact that in a system with sinusoidal generators the sources of the higher
harmonics are the non-linear loads has been known for long time. In the above
theory, this idea is taken further to estimate the powers supplied by the non-linear
loads.
PLL1
QLL1
Pg1
PN1
Qg1
QN1
PNL1
QNL1
Linear
load
Network
Non-linear
load
PLLh
QLLh
PNh
QNh
PNLh
QNLh
Fig. 6.27. The power flows in the power systems from Figure 6.26.
408
Basic computation
kp =
P
=
S1
P
P12
(6.44)
+ Q12
where P is the total active power absorbed by the load and S1 = V1 I1 is the apparent
power at the fundamental harmonic.
1
NT1
+ NT1
(6.45,a)
pdt
1
vdi =
2
= 1
NT1
+ NT1
1
id v =
NT1
( )
id t d t = 1
NT1
+ NT1
di
1
v dt =
dt
NT1
+ NT1
+ NT1
( vd t ) d t = V I
1 1
dv
dt =
dt
(6.45,b)
sin 1
The reasoning followed in [6.20] and [6.27] was to separate the main
product, the fundamental power terms, from the pollution, the nonfundamental components and their cross-terms. This approach recognizes the
following issues:
utilities generate and distribute nearly perfect fundamental sinusoidal
voltage;
the consumer expects fundamental sinusoidal voltage;
in almost all cases, more than 99% of the total active power flowing in the
network is fundamental active power.
This approach has the advantage of allowing the fundamental power terms to
be treated in the classical way. At the same time, it provides convenient measures
of the level of harmonic pollution present in the network.
*)
Reprinted with permission from Std. IEEE 1459/2000 IEEE Standard definitions for the
measurement of the electric power quantities under sinusoidal, nonsinusoidal, balanced, or
unbalanced conditions 2000 IEEE [6.20].
409
hmax
V h sin( h1t + vh ) ; i H = 2
h=2
hmax
sin(h1t + ih )
(6.46,a)
(6.46,b)
h=2
From the above relations it can be defined the rms square voltage and current.
Separating the fundamental components V1 and I1 from the harmonic components
VH and IH, we obtain:
V 2 = V12 + VH2 and I 2 = I12 + I H2
(6.47)
where
VH2 =
hmax
h=2
hmax
2
h
= I 2 I12
h=2
(6.48)
or S N = S 2 S12
where: S1 is the fundamental apparent power, which consists of the fundamental
active power P1 and the fundamental reactive power Q1, i.e.:
S12 = (V1 I1 ) 2 = P12 + Q12 where P1 = V1 I1 cos 1 and Q1 = V1 I1 sin 1 ;
SN the nonfundamental apparent power which consists of three
components:
S N2 = (V1 I H ) + (VH I1 ) + (VH I H )
2
(6.49)
The first component is the product of fundamental rms voltage and harmonic
rms current. Usually this is the dominant term. Even in the ideal case when the
voltage is perfectly sinusoidal this term exists if I H > 0 . This term, V1 I H , may be
called current distortion power, designated by DI. The second term, VH I1 , is the
product of the fundamental rms current and the harmonic rms voltage. It may be
called voltage distortion power, designated by DV, and represents a reflection of the
voltage distortion at the observed bus. The third component may be called
harmonic apparent power SH, and can be further divided as follows:
S H2 = (VH I H ) = PH2 + N H2 .
2
410
Basic computation
where PH =
hmax
V I
h h
h=2
S N I H VH VH I H
=
+
+
S1 I1 V1 V1 I1
or, writing as a function of the total harmonic distortions of the voltage VTHD and
current ITHD, respectively:
SN
S1
(6.50)
The error of the approximation in (6.50) is less than 1% for ITHD greater than
40%. An even better approximation is obtained with the expression:
SN
S1
( ITHD )2 + (VTHD )2
(6.51)
(6.52)
DPF =
P1
= cos 1
S1
(6.53)
411
remains a significant value for this concept where the fundamental powers are
monitored separately from the nonfundamental.
The total power factor can be defined as:
PF =
P + PH
( P / S )[1 + ( PH / P1 )]
[1 + ( PH / P1 )] DPF
P
= 1
= 1 1
=
(6.54)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
S
1 + ( S N / S1 )
1 + VTHD
+ ITHD
+ VTHD
ITHD
S1 + S N
2
I 2 = I12 + I H2 = I12 1 + ITHD
2
Pi = RI 2 = RI12 1 + ITHD
Assuming that the resistance R does not vary with the frequency, and the DC
component is zero, it results:
2
Pi = Pi1 1 + ITHD
> Pi1
(6.55)
412
Basic computation
where Pi1 = RI12 is the active power losses by Joule effect at the fundamental
frequency, in the series elements.
A more accurate expression of the power losses is given by
2
, with > 1, because the effect of increasing harmonic
Pi = Pi1 1 + ITHD
2
Pv = GV 2 = GV12 1 + VTHD
Assuming that the conductance G does not vary with the frequency, and the
DC component is zero, it results:
2
Pv = Pv1 1 + VTHD
> Pv1
(6.56)
where Pv1 = GV12 is the active power losses at fundamental frequency, in the
shunt elements.
If the increasing effect of the conductance Gh, due to the harmonics presence,
2
the expression (6.56) becomes Pv = Pv1 1 + VTHD
, where > 1 for overhead
DPF
1 + ( S N / S1 )
(6.57)
from where it results that PF < DPF , which shows the decrease of the power
factor.
413
ICBh
Ih
RLL
j
CCB 1h
jLLL
Ih
NL
LL
jLS1h
jLT1h
CB
a.
b.
1
2f1 Le C
(6.58)
where: C is the equivalent capacitance of the network and of the capacitor bank;
Le the equivalent inductance of the circuit, given by:
Le =
LLL (LS + LT )
LLL + LS + LT
and
LS the system inductance;
LT the transformer inductance;
LLL the linear load inductance;
Taking into account the following definitions:
LLL =
U n2
U2
Q
; ( LS + LT ) = n ; C = 2
Ql
S sc
Un
414
Basic computation
S sc
LS + LT S sc
Ql
1 +
1 +
=
Q
LLL Q S sc
(6.59)
where: Ssc is the short circuit apparent power of the supply system;
Q the capacitive reactive power delivered on the fundamental frequency
by the capacitor bank and the capacitances-to-ground of the line;
Ql reactive power on the fundamental frequency absorbed by the linear
load.
Analyzing the relation (6.59) we see that the increase in reactive power
delivered by the capacitor bank and the decrease in the inductive load, leads to
decrease in the resonance frequency and therefore the possibility of reaching
dangerous harmonic range (h<13) occurs.
The current ICBh absorbed by the capacitor bank on the hth harmonic has the
following expression:
I CBh =
Ih
2
h 1 CLe 1
h 2 12CLe
2
1
j
RLL h1C
(6.60)
S sc
Q
1 +
Qc S sc
S sc
Q
1 +
1 , therefore I CBhr
Qc S sc
possible that the capacitor banks to be damaged.
Usually, the term RC 1
I hr , being
415
voltages. Assuming that the voltages do not have DC components and every triplen
harmonic has the same initial phase and equal to 0, 2 / 3 and 2 / 3 . The
fundamental harmonic voltages may be described by de following relations:
va1 = 2V1 sin 1t ; vb1 = 2V1 sin ( 1t 2 / 3) ; vc1 = 2V1 sin ( 1t + 2 / 3)
The hth harmonics of the phase-to-neutral voltages are:
vah = 2Vh sin ( h1t + vh ) ; vbh = 2Vh sin ( h1t h 2 / 3 + vh ) ;
vch = 2Vh sin ( h1t + h 2 / 3 + vh )
where vh represents the phase angle between the voltage at the hth harmonic and
the fundamental voltage.
For h = 3 p , where p is a integer number, the phase-to-neutral voltages
becomes:
vah = 2Vh sin ( 3 p1t + vh )
vbh = 2Vh sin ( 3 p1t 3 p 2 / 3 + vh ) = 2Vh sin ( 3 p1t + vh )
vch = 2Vh sin ( 3 p1t + 3 p 2 / 3 + vh ) = 2Vh sin ( 3 p1t + vh )
In wye-connected circuits, the phase-to-phase voltages are equal to the
difference between the corresponding phase-to-neutral voltages. Since the phaseto-neutral voltages of triplen harmonics are equal and in phase, their differences are
zero. An interesting conclusion is that the phase-to-phase voltages do not contain
triplen harmonics, therefore U V < 3 .
When the wye-connected load circuit (Fig. 6.29) is provided with neutral
wire [6.24], the third harmonic and other triplen harmonics of the current add into
the neutral conductor harmonic currents with the same order, giving rise in current
flowing through he neutral conductor:
I 0,3 p = 3
2
3p
= 3 I 32 + I 62 + I 92 + K
a
b
c
Va
Ia
Vb
Ib
Vc
Ic
Z0
N
VN
I0
416
Basic computation
Taking the phase a as reference, for the configuration in Figure 6.29, the
following relations can be written for the 3rd harmonic:
I 0,3 p = 3I a ,3 p
(6.61,a)
V a ,3 p = Z a ,3 p + 3Z 0,3 p I a ,3 p
(6.61,b)
(6.61,c)
V a ,3 p
Z a ,3 p + 3Z 0,3 p
and replacing it in the second equality of (6.61,c), we obtain the expression of the
neutral-to-ground voltage:
V N ,3 p =
V a ,3 p
1 + Z a ,3 p / 3Z 0,3 p
(6.62)
When the load circuit is without neutral wire, the sum of the currents will
always be zero. The conclusion is that the currents and the phase-to-neutral
voltages at the consumer do not contain triplen harmonics. Each triplen harmonic
of the phase-to-neutral voltages leads to neutral voltage displacement at the
consumer; therefore, the neutral voltage of the consumer is the sum of triplen
harmonic voltages, that is:
VN ,3 p = 3 V32 + V92 + V152 +K .
417
based devices. The software implemented into the digital measurement devices
should be based on appropriate calculation algorithms of power and power factor
according to standards.
Thus, the reactive power (or its equivalent N) in single-phase circuits can be
calculated using the relations:
Q=
hmax
V I
h h
sin h , N = S 2 P 2 , Q1 = V1 I1 sin 1
h =1
PF =
P +Q + D
P
; DPF =
S
P1
P12
+ Q12
P1
P
P
= .
; kP
2
2
S1
P1 + Q1 S1
i [A]
v
25
0
t [s]
-25
-250
-500
Phase
DPF
a.
Ih [A]
12
8
4
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
b.
Voltage
rms 232.7
Peak 324.6
THD 2.3
rms
THD 2.3
fund
Crest 1.39
8 deg
Current
9.44
19.79
61.22
77.43
2.10
0.99
PF
0.78
Power kW
1.71
kVA 2.20
S
kVAd 0.23
D
kVAr 0
Q
c.
Fig 6.30. Measurement of power and PF in circuits with non-linear loads [6.31]:
a. voltage and current waveforms; b. harmonic spectrum of current; c. device output.
418
Basic computation
i2a
b
i2b
i2b
i2a
i1a
i2c
i1b
i2c
Measurement
system
Fig. 6.31. Delta-connected
current measurement
transformer.
i1c
419
h the phase shift between the hth order harmonic currents in the
primary and secondary windings of the transformer. It is mentioned
that, for inductive load this value is negative.
From Figure 6.31 it can be seen that the current measured on the phase a in
the secondary of the transformer is:
i2' a = i2 a i2b
where i2 a and i2b are the currents flowing through the windings of phases a and b
of the current transformer.
Expressing in complex form, for the hth harmonic, the above relation
becomes:
'
I 2 a ,h = I 2 a ,h I 2b ,h =
2h
.
exp j (ih h ) 1 exp j
k
3
I1a , h
'
I 2' a ,h = 3
I 1a ,3 p 1
k
exp j ih h m
6
Therefore, the rms value of the current in the secondary of the transformer is:
I 2' a =
where: I1a ,1
k 2
( I1a,1 ) +
2
( I
1a ,3 p 1
p =1
<
3
I1a , rms
k
420
Basic computation
where
Rdc =
R1 0.004398 l
h
[] and x = 0.3545
[]
0.938
Rdc l
The above relations are valid for belted cables. In order to take into account
the effect of the current flows in short-circuited screens of a single-core cable or
individually screened three-core (H type) cables some requirements have been
recommended in the same work.
Transformers
The parameters of the classical models need to be modified in order to take
into account the frequency dependence. As the internal resonant frequencies of
high-voltage power transformers occur well above the range of interest for
harmonic penetration studies, the inter-winding capacitances and capacitances to
ground of transformers have very little effect on the accuracy of the results. The
frequency dependence of the resistance accounts for the increased transformer core
losses with frequency due to the skin effect.
Assuming that the transformers are not operated in saturation, various
representations have been suggested in literature to replace the leakage inductance
(Fig. 6.32,a,b) [6.32].
Xh
Rh
Rh
Xh
Rh = 0.1026 khX 1 ( J + h )
Rh = 80 X 1
X h = hX 1
X h = hX 1
a.
b.
Xh
RS
Rp
Rs = X 1 tan , R p = 10 X 1 tan , X h = h X 1
2
tan = exp 0.693 + 0.796 ln Sn 0.0421 ( ln Sn )
c.
Fig. 6.32. The transformer harmonic models: a. parallel connection;
b. series connection; c. series-parallel connection.
421
X h = hX d''
and the skin effect is taken into account by considering:
Rh = hR1
Capacitors
The reactance XC of the capacitor bank at the hth harmonics is given by the
formula:
XC =
1
h1C
Loads
When carrying out harmonic penetration studies in transmission systems, it is
not usual to represent the system from generators right through individual
consumer loads. At some point down the network the elements are aggregated into
an equivalent circuit. Typically, equivalent circuits are used at the points of supply
to distribution authorities, which ensure power to individual consumers within the
load centres.
Various models have been proposed for consumer loads, some of them
related to individual components and others as component aggregated models.
Various suggested combinations of the active and reactive power demand at
fundamental frequency are shown in Figure 6.33 [6.32, 633].
Models a and b [6.32] can be considered as common practice models and are
very easy to use. They are unable to distinguish the static from the rotating part of
the load. Both models c and d, being considerably more complex, provide an
explicit differentiation by using a factor that represents the fraction of the rotating
part of the load.
422
Basic computation
Ph+jQh
Xh
Rh =
Rh
Ph+jQh
Xh
Vh
2
V12 ; X = hV1 ; k = 0.1 h + 0.9
h
kQ1
kP1
Rh
Rh =
hV 2
V12 ;
Xh = 1
Q1
P1
b.
a.
P1+jQ1
P1+jQ1
Xa
Xs
Xs
Xp
Vh
Vh
Rs
Ra
Rs
X s = 0.073 hRs ; Rs =
V12
P1
c.
Vh
RS =
V12
; X S = hRS (Q1 / P1)
P1 (1 q )
Ra = Rm 1 + k (hf1 )0.5
Xa =
V12
P1 q
X lr h 2 ( hf1 )
d.
423
The harmonic impedance of an electric network, seen from any node, is the
positive-sequence impedance, which is dependent on the frequency seen in that
node. The impedances of the elements of a system at harmonic frequencies are
determined on the basis of their value at fundamental frequency.
The complete system can never be described in full into the harmonic studies.
It is therefore necessary to limit the dimensions of the system for some parts using
the equivalent impedances representing its behaviour to harmonic disturbance.
These impedances vary to a great extent over time and from one point of the
system to another. They depend, among other things, on the short circuit power of
the systems, the length of lines, the presence of capacitor banks for reactive energy
compensation and the load level of the system.
Either an experimental or a digital simulation method or a combination of
both can be used to estimate these impedances.
Measurement methods
The basic principle of measuring the harmonic impedance is to make use of
(inter) harmonic currents Ih injected at the point where the (inter) harmonic Z h
impedance is to be measured, then using Ohms law [6.30]:
Zh =V h / Ih
(6.63)
assuming that no (inter) harmonic voltage was represented in the network prior to
the current injection (Fig. 6.34). Where pre-existing harmonic source was
represented, the quantities Vh and Ih must be replaced by Vh and Ih:
Z h = V h / I h
network
Zh
Ih
Vh
source
Yh
Jh
424
Basic computation
Use of harmonic
currents from existing
non-linear installations
The
Switching transients or
measurement
natural variations
method of
harmonic
impedance
Direct injection of
harmonic currents
Non-linear loads as
unique harmonic
current sources
Making use of preexisting harmonic
sources
Switching of capacitor
banks
Switching of
transformers
Natural variations
Special use of
equipment as harmonic
current generators
Electric railways
Low voltage
capacitor and
MV/LV transformer
Saturated
transformer
Use of interharmonic
current generators
Eh
Ih
Vh
Yh
Jh
Fig. 6.35. Equivalent circuit for a feeder and the remaining system
425
Z h ( f ) = Z h ( f ) e j ( f ) =
Ghiu ( f )
Ghii ( f )
426
Basic computation
427
Although, system lines do not introduce harmonics and often act as filters
reducing distortions, other components contribute intrinsically to the deformation
of the voltage wave. The generators, which, despite the optimised construction, do
not provide perfectly sinusoidal voltage, and mainly transformers, which act as
harmonic sources during their operation in saturated conditions, can be given as
example.
Load with non-linear current-voltage characteristics connected to the system
and fed by a practically pure voltage absorb non-sinusoidal currents. These currents
cross the Thevenin impedance of the system and generate voltage. These voltages
are more deformed and more intense and higher than the currents. Among all these
loads, a distinction can be drawn between two broad categories [6.34]:
loads such as arc furnaces;
loads supplied with power from devices including semiconductors such as
power converters and electrical domestic appliances.
Arc furnaces
Arc furnaces are the most difficult to study as their power can reach
extremely high values. It is nevertheless possible to determine experimentally
empirical models of harmonic injections produced by these loads. The arc furnace
is modelled according to the equivalent circuit diagram in Figure 6.36.
R
Fig. 6.36. Equivalent circuit of an arc
furnace.
Ih
X
Ih =
Sn
3U n
odd order h:
Ih =
where Sn is the apparent power of the furnace and Un is the rated phase-to-phase
voltage.
428
Basic computation
i(t)
Load
Figure 6.38 presents the shape (a) and spectrum (b) of the current absorbed
by a conversion bridge.
i
Id
Ih 100
I1 80
[%] 60
a.
40
20
0
11
13
b.
Fig. 6.38. Shape over time (a.) and spectrum of the current absorbed (b.)
of a six-pulse rectifier.
For example, let us take a static converter of apparent power Sn, with rated
phase-to-phase voltage Un and pulse order p (6 or 12). Such a converter can be
modelled by a source of harmonic currents Ih, such that:
for instant switching of thyristors:
Ih =
429
Sn
, with h = pk 1 , k = 1, 2, ..., n
3U n h
Ih =
Sn
1.2
3U n h
h
, with h = pk 1 , k = 1, 2, ..., n
Electro-domestic loads
All electrical household devices (television sets, video recorders, etc.),
connected in millions of units to the low voltage distribution system, contribute to
the greatest extent to harmonic pollution of the system. The first supply step of
these appliances is formed of a diode bridge followed by capacitive filtering; other
appliances are motorized via an electronic controller (in general a triac switch) or
use discrete power regulation from a single diode placed in series. They all
generate substantial harmonic currents and contribute to a large extent to the
voltage wave distortion.
For example, Figure 6.39 presents the spectrum of the current absorbed by a
computer monitor.
430
Basic computation
[Y h ] [V h ] = [I h ]
(6.64)
where [Ih] is the known current vector (for current injection scan) and [Vh] is the
nodal voltage vector to be solved.
The current has a magnitude determined from typical harmonic spectrum and
rated load current of the harmonic-producing equipment under study:
(6.65)
where h is the harmonic order and the subscript spectrum indicates the typical
harmonic spectrum of the element. Equation (6.65) is then solved only for the
harmonic frequency.
The load flow computer programs, which model the harmonic-producing
devices as constant power loads, calculate the fundamental frequency current
injected from the load toward the system. Assuming that the current has a phase
angle of i1, the phase angle of the harmonic current ih corresponding to the nonlinear element can be determined by:
(6.66)
where ih-spectrum is the typical phase angle of the harmonic source current spectrum.
This approach is very efficient for analysing the power system with power
electronic devices. The fundamental frequency load flow solution is also beneficial
for providing more accurate information such as base voltages that can be used for
distortion index calculations.
Harmonic iteration method is another used method [6.35]. In this
method, a harmonic-producing device is modelled as a supply voltage-dependent
current source:
(6.67)
I h = F (V1 ,V2 ,...,VH , c) ; h = 1, ..., H
where (V1, V2, ...., VH) are the phase harmonics of the supply voltage and c is a set
of control variables such as converter firing angle or output power. This equation is
first solved using an estimated supply voltage. The results are used like the current
sources in equation (6.64), from which nodal harmonic voltages are then obtained.
431
The voltages are used to calculate more accurate harmonic current sources from
equation (6.67). This iterative process is repeated until convergence is achieved.
The Newton based method takes into account the voltage-dependent nature
of non-linear devices to solve simultaneously the systems of equations (6.64) and
(6.67). This method generally requires that the device models to be available in a
closed form where its derivatives can be efficiently computed. An important step of
this method is the formulation of the system equation. In [6.36], the equation (6.64)
is formulated as a power flow equation and the control variables (firing angles) are
solved based on the converter specifications.
Furthermore, the phase-shifting effects of transformers on harmonics can be
easily represented using three-phase modelling.
Besides the frequency-domain methods described above, others techniques
have also been developed for harmonic analysis in the time-domain [6.37]. The
simplest approach is to run a time simulation until a steady-state is reached.
Electromagnetic transient programs such as EMTP have been used as such a tool.
Complex techniques, such as the shooting method, have been proposed to
accelerate the convergence to steady-state. One of the main disadvantages of the
time-domain based methods is the lack of load flow constraints at the fundamental
frequency.
The state variables analysis is another method used for study of
harmonic disturbances [6.38, 6.39], which is based on the network admittance
matrix inversion technique.
The variable analysis as a concept, which was initially introduced in
automatics, has been soon extended to many other domains. It supposes that the
development of a linear system depends on its past and on the input signals applied
at a given moment. The introduction of a number of variables judiciously selected
allows the future of the system to be forecasted using these data only. Its
application to power networks allows to effectively analyse their frequency
behaviour by trying to find the series (zeroes of the system) and parallel (poles of
the system) resonance frequencies.
In the framework of the state variable method, the system behaviour is
described by the classical equations:
x& = A x + B j
(6.68')
u =C x
where: A
B
C
x
u
j
is
(6.68")
432
Basic computation
ii + ji = Ci dt + R + iij
i
dii
ui = Li
dt
u u = L diij + R i
j
ij
ij ij
i
dt
(6.69)
dii
1
= ui
d
t
L
i
Rij
diij
1
1
= iij + ui u j
Lij
Lij
Lij
dt
dui
u
1
1
1
= ii iij i +
ji
Ci
Ci Ri Ci
dt Ci
(6.70)
or
iij
ui
i
ii
Ci
Li
Lij
Ri
Rij
j
ji
uj
433
nl
64748
R
terms L
A=
terms 1
m 8
64
4744
1
terms
L
1
terms
RC
nl
(6.71)
nl
m
8
6474
8 64447444
1
0 L 0
0 L 0 C
1
1
M L M
L
0
0
C2
B=
q
M
L
M
M
0 L M
1
0 L 0
0
0 L
Cm
nl
m 8
6474
8 644744
0 L 0 1 0 L 0
C = M L M 0 1 L 0 m
M L M
M 0 L M
0 L 0 0 0 L 1
(6.72)
or, if we denote by IN the unity matrix of order n, the equation (6.72) becomes:
X ( s ) = ( sI N A) 1 B J ( s )
(6.73)
Using the Ohms low, the relation between the harmonic nodal voltages ui
and the injected currents ji, is:
U ( s) = Z (s) J ( s)
(6.74)
Z = C ( sI N A) 1 B or Z = C
adj( sI N A)
B
det ( sI N A)
(6.75)
434
Basic computation
is the matrix obtained from A by eliminating the line and the column k+nl, it
results:
1 det ( sI N 1 Ak )
(6.76)
Z k ( s) =
C k det ( sI N A)
Analysing the expression (6.76) we see that the poles of the system
correspond to the eigenvalues of the matrix A, and the zeroes of the system seen
from the node k correspond to the eigenvalues of the matrix Ak.
The equivalent impedance seen from any node of the network will therefore
have n poles and n-1 zeroes.
In most cases the injection of the harmonic disturbance is modelled as a
current source, the presence of impedance peaks (poles) at frequencies multiple of
f1 generate high harmonic voltages at these frequencies. However, too low
impedance at the frequency that corresponds to the tariff setting remote control
signals may give raise to certain problems. The impedance, in fact, seen from the
nodes of the network must be high enough to ensure the proper propagation of the
signals. From these remarks, we can infer three rules for placing the impedance
poles and zeroes: a pole must be set far away from the harmonic frequencies if it is
blocked by a zero; the zeroes must be set close to each harmonic frequency or to
poles so as to compensate them; the case of the central remote control frequency
must be taken into consideration.
Application
As a practical application of the above-presented method, one of the most frequently
study network is considered. Passive filters for harmonics cancellation are installed on the
medium voltage bus from a transformer station, supplying a harmonic polluted distribution
network (Fig. 6.41). These filters have a double role: to absorb the corresponding harmonic
currents and to compensate the reactive power on the fundamental frequency up to the
desired level.
S
u1
110 kV
20 kV
LL
Lf
3
Cf5
1/j kC 1
i12
Lf
4
Cf7
R12
u2
i2
j kL 2
NL
1
j1
j kL12
j kL1
i1
R2 j kL
23
3
j3
i23
u3
i24
1/j kC 3
1/j kC 2
j2
j kL24
u4
j4
4
1/j kC 4
435
The filtering-compensation device contains a resonant circuit for the 5th and 7th
harmonics, present in the current absorbed by the non-linear component of the load. The
sizing criteria used for the filters components leads to the same inductance for the two
filters.
Table 6.6 presents the rated parameters of the networks elements and the
corresponding equivalent parameters (referred to 20 kV), while Figure 6.42 shows the
equivalent electrical circuit, used for writing the state equations and the matrix A.
Table 6.6
Rated parameters and equivalent parameters of the networks elements
Network
elements
System
Transformer
Linear
load
Filtering/
Compensation
devices
Rated parameters
SSC = 1000 MVA
US = 110kV
Sn = 25 MVA
Psc = 130 kW
Un MV = 22 kV
usc = 11 %
Pc
Qc [MVAr]
[MW]
a 4
b 6
4
c 8
d 10
Qk1 [MVAr]
a
2.833
b
2.25
c
1.667
d
1.083
Equivalent parameters
XS = 0.4
LS =1.27310-3 H
L1 =LS
RT = 0.101 R12 = RT
XT = 2.13
LT = 6.77910-3 H
L12 = LT
Rc []
R 2 = Rc
100
66.667
50
40
Lf [H] L23 = L24 = Lf
0.028
0.035
0.048
0.073
Xc = 100
Lc = 0.318 H
L2 = L c
Cf5 [F]
14.43
11.46
8.488
5.517
Cf7 [F]
7.362
5.847
4.331
2.815
The active load, corresponding to the linear load, supplied from the medium voltage
bus of the substation is considered by its four values (ad cases). In order to obtain the
desired value of the power factor (0.96), the necessary values for capacitances and
inductances of the passive filters are determined.
The connection points between the coils and capacitors of the two filters are
considered buses of the equivalent network (numbered by 3 and 4 in Fig. 6.42); therefore,
the filters coil can be considered series connected and the capacitors can be considered
shunt connected. In each of the networks buses a current source (even fictive because the
state matrix does not change) and a capacitor (even of fictive value C1 = C2 = 10 10 F ) are
connected.
For this application, this consideration is not necessarily, so that by applying the
Kirchhoffs laws on the equivalent circuit, we obtain the following state matrix of the
network:
436
Basic computation
A= 0
1
C
1
0
1
Ls
R12
L12
1
L12
1
C2
0
1
C4
1
C2
1
C1
1
C2
1
C2
1
C3
0
1
Lc
1
L12
1
L23
1
L24
0
0
1
L23
0
1
C2 R2
L24
Case
a
b
c
d
Each the four cases, the frequency dependence of the impedances seen from the
networks buses, determined with the classical method, is presented in Figure 6.43.
437
Zk2 []
Zk1[]
4
100
3.33
80
a
b
2.67
2
60
b
c
40
1.33
20
0.67
150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400
150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400
f [Hz]
f [Hz]
b. node 2
a. node 1
Zk3
4000
Zk4 []
[]
7000
3200
5600
a
4200
2400
c
1600
b
a
2800
b
c
1400
800
150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375
0
150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400
f [Hz]
f [Hz]
c. node 3
d. node 4
Fig. 6.43. Frequency dependence of the impedance seen from the networks buses.
By analysing the obtained values, the following conclusions can be drawn:
the values of the frequencies of the parallel and series harmonic resonances that
can appear into the considered network, obtained by means of the state variables
method, are almost identically with those obtained by means of the classical
method, for all the four cases of the load and filtering-compensation devices
connected;
the zeroes seen from the bus 2, where the filtering-compensation devices are
installed, are obtained on the frequencies of 250 Hz and 350 Hz, meaning that the
passive filters are correctly sized in order to absorb the 5th and 7th current
harmonics injected by the pollution source;
in the presence of the filtering-compensation devices, there is no risk of causing
any parallel resonance because the networks poles are positioned at nondangerous frequencies.
438
Basic computation
439
Table 6.8
Table 6.9
Maximum admissible limits for harmonic
Maximum admissible limits for harmonic
currents of the devices supplied by the public
currents of the devices supplied by the
LV networks: A, B, D classes
public LV networks: C class
Harmonic
Harmonic
Device
Device Harmonic order current
Harmonic order h current I [A]
Ih
Type
Type
h
h
[%]
I
3
2.3
2
2
30 PF
4
0.43
3
5
1.14
5
10
C class
6
0.30
7
7
7
0.77
9
5
8 h 40
11 h 39
1.84/h
3
h even number
h odd number
9
0.4
11
0.33
13
0.21
15 h 39
2.25/h
h odd number
The above value
B class
multiplied by 1.5
A class
2
1.08
Like A class, but only
D class
for odd number
harmonics
440
Basic computation
C1
R
L
R
C
C
a.
C2
C
c.
b.
d.
The single-tuned filter is the most common shunt filter in use. Its main
characteristics on the 5th harmonic, when connected to low voltage inductive load,
are shown in Figure 6.45,a, while Figure 6.45,b presents a typical frequency
response of the filter connected to the network.
Zh
[p.u.]
Zh
[p.u.]
0.6
capacitive
0.5
inductive
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
1
7 h
a.
7 h
b.
Fig. 6.45. Typical frequency response of notch filter: a. filter alone; b. filter and sysyem.
The frequency response of the filter is just the harmonic impedance seen at
its terminals. Examination of the filter response reveals the following
characteristics [6.41]:
its harmonic impedance has a very low value at the frequency for which it
is tuned;
when the source impedance is inductive, there is a resonance peak, which
always occurs at a frequency lower than the frequency for which the filter is tuned;
there is a sharp increase in impedance below the tuned frequency due to the
proximity of the resonant frequency;
the impedance increase with frequency for frequencies above that at which
the filter is tuned.
The filter in question can be characterized by impedance and quality factor.
The filters impedance is given by the following relation:
Z = R + j ( L 1/ C )
where R, L and C are the filters parameters, i.e. resistance, inductance and
capacitance.
441
L / C r L 1/ r C
=
=
R
R
R
1
1
2 ( Ls + L)C
I1
Load
Xs
VC,1
V1
I h2
1hC
442
Basic computation
or
V1
1
1 L
1C
VC ,1
1
1C
V1
1 12 r2
or
VC ,1 = V1
h2
h2 1
(h 2 1) I h
V11
h2
h
(6.77)
In the second case (b), we start from the condition that, at the fundamental
frequency, the reactive power Q1 provided by the filter should be equal to the rated
value QCn . Therefore:
Q1 = QCn =
V12
V 2 C
h2
= 1 21 = 2 V12 1C
X C ,1 X L ,1 1 1 LC h 1
(6.78)
From the latter relation it results the value of C, and from the resonance
condition at the hth harmonic, we can obtain the value of L.
For multiple parallel single-tuned filters ( h = 5, 7, 11, ... ), establishing the
capacity Cn of the capacitor bank is performed based on the following two
conditions:
the total reactive power of the capacitor bank should be minimum:
2
I h2
VC ,11Ch +
= min
h1Ch
h = 5,7,...
the reactive power at fundamental frequency should have the average value
QCn , therefore:
Q1 =
QCn =
h2
V12 1C
2
1
h
h =5,7,...
443
is
il
Non-linear
load
Ls
Iaf
Control
444
Basic computation
It should be noted that the active filter must satisfy the basic laws of
association of current and voltage sources; for example, in Figure 6.48, the active
filter current is defined by the network, and can therefore be controlled only in
voltage.
Vaf
Non-linear
load (Electronic)
~
Control
Active filter
is
il
iaf
~
~
Active filter
V af
~
~
Reactive
element
iaf
Load bus
a.
V af
~
iaf
Load bus
Reactive
element
b.
Fig. 6.50. Connection type of active filter: a. series/shunt; b. shunt/series.
445
Current source
Voltage source
Inductive, current-source
Capacitive, voltage-source
Non-linear load type
loads or harmonic current
loads or harmonic voltage
sources
sources
Independent on the source
Independent on Zs, and/or ZL
impedance Zs, or currentCompensation
for voltage loads, but
source but dependent on Zs
dependent on ZL when the
characteristics
when the load impedance ZL
load is current source type
is low
A low impedance shunt branch
Injected current flows into the
(e.g. a shunt passive filter or a
load side and may cause
Application considerations
capacitor bank) is needed when
overcurrent when applied to a
applied to an inductive or
capacitive or voltage source
current source load
Current harmonics filtering,
Load on the
current unbalance, reactive Current harmonics,
Solutions to AC supply current compensation, voltage reactive current
power
flicker
quality
Voltage unbalance, distortion,
problems AC supply on
flicker, notching, interruptions
the load
reactive current, dips, swells
In addition, the active filters can be combined with passive filter to enforce
filter effectiveness and reduce active filter rating.
Taking into account the advantages and the disadvantages of active and
passive filters a mixed solution can be used. In Figure 6.51, the block diagram
using an active series filter and a shunt passive filter with three branches is
presented: two branches tuned on the 5th and 7th harmonic orders and a high-pass
446
Basic computation
filter. This filter mitigates parallel harmonic resonance between the passive filter
and the supply system, blocking the access into the filter or load of the existing
harmonics; this implies low cost operation.
iL
iaf
if
Non-linear
load
Active
filter
h=5 h=7 high-pass
filter
447
max V V
Vmax
100 [%]
100 [%]
Vaverage
V
where:
)(
)(
max V V = max Va V , Vb V , Vc V
factor uV is defined by the ratio of the negative sequence voltage V to the positive
+
sequence voltage V :
uV = V
V = uV exp ( V )
+
448
Basic computation
uV = V V + 100 [%]
(6.79)
uV =
1 + 3 + 6
100 [%]
(6.80)
where:
=
4
4
U ab
+ U bc4 + U ca
(U
2
ab
2
+ U bc2 + U ca
uV' =
S
S sc
(6.82)
where S is the load power, in MVA, and Ssc is the three-phase short circuit power
level at the point of connection of the load, in MVA.
The voltage unbalance occurring at the point of common coupling due to a
combination of unbalanced three-phase loads or phase-to-phase loads also
calculated in terms of the negative-sequence current I is:
uV'' =
3 I U
S sc
(6.83)
I1
100 [%]
I1+
(6.84)
449
motor heating
motor losses
50
7
9 10
8
voltage unbalance [%]
Fig. 6.52. Increase in motor heating and losses in terms of voltage unbalance.
450
Basic computation
Linear Network
LN
BL
UBL
The active and reactive powers balance is satisfied for each sequence,
separately:
+
+
+
Pg+ = PLN
+ PBL
+ PUBL
0 = PLN
+ PBL
+ PUBL
0
0
0
0 = PLN
+ PBL
+ PUBL
+
+
+
Qg+ = QLN
+ QBL
+ QUBL
(6.85)
0 = QLN
+ QBL
+ QUBL
0
0
0
0 = QLN
+ QBL
+ QUBL
The network and the balanced load being passive loads, absorb positive
active power on each sequence, and thus:
+
0
+
PUBL = PUBL
+ PUBL
+ PUBL
PUBL
(6.86)
451
+
Consequently, this load absorbs from the supplier an active power PUBL
,
which is greater than it would need, uses PUBL and reinjects the difference into
the balanced load causing supplementary losses:
0
+
0
+
+
0
PLN + PBL = PLN
+ PLN
+ PLN
+ PBL
+ PBL
+ PBL
= PLN
+ PBL
PUBL
+ PUBL
(6.87)
These relations suggest the power flow diagram given in Figure 6.54.
BL
PBL , QBL
Pg , Qg
PLN , QLN
LN
PUBL , QUBL
UBL
0
PBL + PBL
QBL + QBL0
0
PLN + PLN
QLN + QLN0
0
PUBL + PUBL
0
QUBL + QUBL
The fact that the unbalanced loads are the sources of negative- and zerosequence powers, although intuitively known, has not been explicitly stated before.
The complex, active and reactive powers are conservative for each sequence (+, -,
0) separately. Generally, the negative- and zero-sequence active powers reinjected
in the network by the unbalanced load represents supplementary losses.
In all this reasoning the analogy with the non-sinusoidal conditions is
evident. The flow of reactive power can be similarly interpreted; this produces a
supplementary reactive load on the generator and the balanced loads. All these
considerations clearly show that the positive-, negative- and zero-sequence power
flows must be separated and distinctly accounted.
Under these conditions the power factor of a balanced or unbalanced load can
be defined as the ratio between the total active power absorbed by the load and the
apparent power of symmetry:
kp =
P P+ + P + P0
P
=
= cos + + U+ = k p+ + k pn
+
+
S
S
S
(6.88)
0
PU = P + P the real power of the unbalance (non symmetry);
k p+
k pn
452
Basic computation
(6.89,a)
I a2 + I b2 + I c2
3
(6.89,b)
2
2
U ab
+ U bc2 + U ca
9
where the rms voltages U ab , U bc and U ca are measured from phase to phase. The
equivalent current I e is calculated in terms of the rms currents I a , I b , I c .
For a four-wire system the above relation becomes:
Ve =
1
2
+ U bc2 + U ca2
3 Va2 + Vb2 + Vb2 + U ab
18
(6.90,a)
I a2 + I b2 + I c2 + I 02
3
(6.90,b)
and
Ie =
*)
Reprinted with permission from IEEE Standard 1459-2000 Definition for the
measurement of electric power quantities under sinusoidal, non-sinusoidal, balanced or
unbalanced conditions IEEE 2000, and IEEE Working Group on Non-sinusoidal
Situations: Effects on meter performance and definitions of power Practical definitions
for powers in systems with non-sinusoidal waveforms and unbalanced loads: A discussion,
IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 79 87, January 1996 IEEE 1996.
453
and
2
I e2 = I e21 + I eH
I2 + I2 + I2
Va21 + Vb21 + Vc21
; I e21 = a1 b1 c1
3
3
3
h 1
2
2
2
I ah
+ I bh
+ I ch
3
h 1
The ratio between the squares of SeN and Se1 can be written:
2
SeN
2
2
2
VeH
Ve1
and
I THDe =
I eH
I e1
454
Basic computation
This approach of decomposing the apparent power, Se, has the following
useful features:
conveniently separates the fundamental apparent power and its active and
reactive components from the non-fundamental apparent power;
provides a useful measure of the degree of harmonic pollution in the
normalized ratio S N Se1 ;
provides a useful measure of the degree of unbalance pollution in the
normalized ratio Su1 Se1 .
The IEEE standard 1459-2000 [6.20] defines an arithmetic apparent power,
vector apparent power and Budeanus apparent power.
The per phase apparent powers are given by:
S a = Va I a ; Sb = Vb I b ; Sc = Vc I c
and
S a2 = Pa2 + Qa2 ; Sb2 = Pb2 + Qb2 ; Sc2 = Pc2 + Qc2
The arithmetic apparent power is:
S A = Sa + Sb + Sc
and the vector apparent power is:
SV = P 2 + Q 2 = (Pa + Pb + Pc ) + j (Qa + Qb + Qc ) = P + jQ
(6.91)
Sb
Sa
Qa
0
Pa
Qb
Qc
Pc
Pb
SV SA
Fig. 6.55. Arithmetic and vector apparent powers under sinusoidal conditions.
Reprinted with permission from IEEE Standard 1459-2000 Definitions for the
measurement of electric power quantities under sinusoidal, nonsinusoidal,
balanced or unbalanced conditions IEEE 2000.
455
(6.92)
with
P = Pa + Pb + Pc ; Q = Qa + Qb + Qc ; D = Da + Db + Dc
where: Pa, Pb, Pc are the per phase active powers;
Qa, Qb, Qc per phase reactive powers, according to Budeanu;
Da, Db, Dc per phase distortion powers, according to Budeanu.
Additional to the already defined power factor, due to the unbalance in
voltage, other definitions should be given: the effective power factor PFe = P Se ;
the arithmetic power factor PFa = P S A ; the geometric power factor PFV = P SV ;
and the positive-sequence power factor PF+1 = P1+ S1+ , where S1+ is the fundamental
positive-sequence apparent power and P1+ is the fundamental positive-sequence
active power.
SA
SV
SV
Pa
P
Da b
Dc
Pc Qc
Db
Sb
Sa
Sc
Qb
Qa
Fig. 6.56. Arithmetic SA and vector SV apparent powers: unbalanced nonsinusoidal conditions. Reprinted with permission from IEEE Standard 1459-2000
Definition for the measurement of electric power quantities under sinusoidal,
non-sinusoidal, balanced or unbalanced conditions IEEE 2000.
456
Basic computation
The major drawback of the power factor definition stems from the difference
between the quantities [Qa + Qb + Qc ] + [ Da + Db + Dc ] and S A2 P 2 (Fig. 6.56).
2
MV
PCC
LV
LV
single-phase
loads
single-phase
loads
457
example from Figure 6.58,c, and if the load is connected only to the secondary of
the transformer T2, all the three phases of the network will be unequally loaded
(Fig. 6.58,d).
a
b
VcN
c
M
T1
N/2
N/2
N 3/2
a
T2
b M
a.
b
c
Ia
Ib
VbN
b.
Ic
Ia
T2
T1
I
T1
U2
U1
U2
U1
VaN
M
I/ 3 I/ 3
Ic
Ib
2I / 3
T2
I1=I
I2=I
c.
b
c
b
c
Ia
Ib
T1
d.
Ic
Ia
T2
T1
I1=I2=I
I
C
L
e.
L1
Ic
Ib
I1
I2
C1
C2
L2
R1
T2
R2
f.
458
Basic computation
For the case of a single-phase linear load, the currents absorbed from the
network, determined by superposing the currents from Figures 6.48,c and 6.48,d,
results:
1
1
I , I b = 1 +
I and I c = 1
I
3
3
3
Ia =
When two loads are considered (Fig. 6.48,f), for which reactive power is
'
provided by the capacitor bank for full power factor correction (the phasors I 1 and
'
'
'
Ia =
I 2 , I b = I 1 I 2 and I c = I 1
1
3
I2
or in absolute values:
Ia =
2
3
I1 , I b = I1 1 +
2
3
and I c = I1 1 +
2
3
Ic
Ib
Ia
T1
T2
C
459
industrial load. A capacitor bank C1, sized so that to provide a unity power factor
(Ica is in phase with Uca), is connected in parallel with the secondary of the
transformer T that supplies the two-phase load (e.g., arc furnace or welder). The
symmetrizing circuit (Fig. 6.60) consists of the capacitor bank C2 and the coil L2.
These devices are sized so that the three currents I a , I b and I c form a symmetrical
system (of equal magnitudes but shifted in time by 2/3) and are in phase with the
phase-to-neutral voltages (resistive behaviour).
a b c
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ica
Iab
C2
b
Ibc
L2
c
Ic Ica
two-phase
load
C1
Vc
Ia
Ubc
Uca
Iab
Ib
Ibc
Va
N
Vb
Uab
Ica
a.
b.
Knowing that:
I ab =
3V
3V
P
and I ca =
, I bc =
X L2
X C2
3V
it results:
3V
3V
P
=
=
3V
X C2
X L2
where X C2 is the capacitive reactance of the capacitor bank C2, and X L2 is the
inductive reactance of the coil L2.
We then obtain:
1
P
P
=
and C2 =
2
L2 3 3 V
3 3V 2
460
Basic computation
or:
BL = G
3 and BC = G
P tan
or BC1 = BLoad
3V 2
where tan corresponds to the natural power factor of the two-phase load.
Practical cases show that the active power P is variable in time. In order to
ensure the adaptive symmetrization of the load, the capacitor banks C1 and C2 and
the coil L2 should provide self-regulation of their parameters according to the load.
The Steinmetz connection provides very good symmetrization of the load on
the three phases. Instead, it has the following disadvantages:
at the fundamental frequency, the assembly load compensator can be
equivalent with a perfectly balanced impedance but at other frequencies;
these corresponds to the superior order harmonics produced by the same
load or the neighbouring loads, leading to a strong unbalance. Furthermore,
the compensator must be sized so that to avoid the resonance with the
network, at the harmonics present under normal operating conditions.
manually or automatic control of C1, C2 and L2 leads to frequent voltage
oscillations into the network, due to commutations.
These inconveniences can be corrected with modern applications of power
electronics.
It is known for long time that the static reactive power compensation system
(SVS) can be used to balance the load currents and to improve the power factor of
unbalanced power systems [6.45, 6.46]. Each phase of the SVSs can be
independently controlled and it can provide a different amount of reactive power
compensation.
In [6.46] the derivation of load balancing theorem is based on the
symmetrical component method. However, the same result can also be obtained by
minimizing the quadratic sum of three-phase currents.
Most of the studies about SVSs concentrate on application techniques, such
as using high speed programmable controllers or microprocessors and solving sub
optimal solutions when discrete-tap compensators are used.
In the three-phase four-wire distribution networks, unbalanced loads may
produce negative- and zero-sequence currents. In order to improve the load bus
power factor these currents have to be reduced accordingly. The technique uses a
wye (Y) connected SVS and a delta () connected SVS to give different amount of
reactive power compensation to each phase. While the -SVS is used to eliminate
the negative-sequence currents, the Y-SVS is used to eliminate the zero-sequence
currents and the imaginary part of the positive sequence currents. Figure 6.61
461
[6.47] illustrates the simplified connection circuit of the SVS to the three-phase
four-wire system, in which the electronic part was not represented.
a
b
c
N
Ia
Ia
Ib
l
b
Ic
Ic
IN
IN
Unbalanced
load
Ia
Ib
IYc
Ca
Cb
Cc
I b
I a
Y
N
I c
ab
I bc
Cab Cbc
I ca Cac
Fig. 6.61. An unbalanced three-phase four-wire distribution system
with SVSs connected at the load terminals.
In order to achieve the load balancing and full reactive power compensation,
we start from the following equalities:
( ) = 0 ; Re ( I ) = 0 ; Im ( I ) = 0 ; Re ( I ) = 0 ; Im ( I ) = 0
Im I
(6.93)
Equations (6.93) have infinite number of solutions because there are six
unknowns (susceptances of the Y-SVS and the -SVS) and five equations. An
additional constraint together with the five ones in (6.93) will offer a unique
solution. The additional equation needs an additional constraint. The first suggested
constraint is that the imaginary part of the positive-sequence component of the load
current should be eliminated by the Y-SVS because the -SVS does not generate
imaginary part of positive sequence currents. The new constraint is given by:
I ab + I bc + I ca = 0
(6.94)
462
Basic computation
l
I a = I aa jI ar ; I b = I ba jI br ; I c = I ca jI cr
(6.96)
Other two constraints may be used. The first is the condition of minimum
squared sum of the SVS currents ( ( I c ) 2 = min ) and the second is the minimum
(I V )
c
= min ).
The obtained load bus voltages and currents are used to calculate the on-line
compensation susceptance values of the SVSs. The SVSs can provide a different
amount of reactive power to each phase such that, although the load is unbalanced,
the system will be balanced, seen from the load bus. The SVSs can also maintain
the load bus voltage at a certain value in addition to the balancing effect.
The problem is difficult because the network operates under a non-sinusoidal
steady-state. Under these conditions, the problem can be solved by means of
simultaneous operation of the reactive power compensation devices. One of the
most efficient methods consists in using passive shunt filters. These are, in fact,
single-tuned filters on the harmonic current to be cancelled. For their frequency the
equivalent impedance is practically zero, but it has capacitive character for low
frequencies, and so does for the fundamental frequency. For each harmonic current
which is to be filtered, a three-phase symmetrical wye-connected single-tuned filter
is needed. This will have a double effect: firstly, it will cancel the corresponding
harmonic current, and secondly, it will compensate the reactive power at the
fundamental frequency. Furthermore, the value of the reactive power to compensate
is one of the designing criteria for the filter elements.
Therefore, the problem of the reactive power compensation in distribution
networks that supply unbalanced and non-linear loads has to be solved taking into
account the correlation with the effects of the present or future electrical devices
used for load balancing and for the non-sinusoidal steady-states amelioration,
respectively. In this respect, the case of unbalanced and non-linear equivalent load,
connected to a three-phase network is considered.
Ia
a
b
c
Ia
Unbalanced and
nonlinear load
Ia
IaY
Bbc
CkY
LkY
Bab
Bca
Y compensator (filters)
compensator
463
The aim is to achieve a full compensation of the load reactive power and
complete cancellation of its distributing effects. These corrections can be made by
means of a simultaneously balancing-filtering device. This device consists in a
simplified configuration of a branch with three-phase filters (single-tuned wyeconnected filters) and a delta-connected compensator that contains only inductive
susceptances (Fig. 6.62).
The analytical form of the compensator functions can be inferred using the
component parts of the current supplied by the network to the load-compensator
system. Thus, it is possible to write the relations:
+
(6.97)
In [6.47], two designing criteria for the compensator elements are proposed
(that are in fact criteria for reactive power compensation). The single-tuned filter
(here called wye-compensator) and the delta-compensator can fulfil both their
special functions of filtering and balancing and also the reactive power
compensation:
criterion a the designing of the filtering elements under the condition of
full compensation of reactive power at fundamental frequency, the load balancing
function being accomplished by the delta-compensator;
criterion b the designing of the filtering elements under the condition of
full compensation of reactive power injection minimization (at fundamental
frequency), this time the delta-compensator having to accomplish both the load
balancing and compensation functions, up to unity power factor at fundamental
frequency;
Star (Y) compensator design
a) Assuming that a single harmonic current is filtered, the capacitance and
inductance is given by the following relations:
Ch =
h 2 1 I1c
1
and Lh = 2 2
2
V1 1
h 1 Ch
h
(6.98)
where I1c is the current needed to compensate the imaginary part of the positivesequence current of the load;
V1 rated phase-to-neutral voltage of the network;
1 fundamental angular frequency.
b) The capacitance resulted from the minimization of the installed reactive
power is (equation (6.77)):
Ch =
I
1
h
h Vc 1
(6.99)
464
Basic computation
Vc =
V1 h 2
; Vc > V1
h2 1
(6.100)
(6.101)
( I c ,1 I ba,1 ) +
(2 I ar,1 I br,1 I cr,1 )
I bc
,1 =
3
3 3
1 a
1
( I a ,1 I ca,1 ) +
( I ar,1 + 2 I br,1 I cr,1 )
I ca
,1 =
3
3 3
I ab
,1 =
(6.102)
Application
A numerical application is used to evaluate the quantitative effects of the
compensation and to perform a comparison between the two compensation criteria.
Consider an equivalent load, connected to a 20 kV network, for which the phase
currents at fundamental frequency and at the fifth harmonic are taken into account. Both the
currents system at the fundamental frequency and the currents system at the fifth harmonic
are considered unbalanced, but without the zero-sequence (absent into the three-phase
distribution networks). As known, the three-phase currents system at the fifth harmonic has
only negative-sequence, for the positive-sequence they appear only in cases of unbalanced
loads, but even in these cases its amplitude is usually lower than the amplitude at the
corresponding negative-sequence. A computer program implemented under Borland Pascal
has been used for this application. This program includes a procedure that generates the
three-phase currents system both for the fundamental and fifth harmonic with adequate
features, as mentioned above.
Table 6.11 presents two patterns for load currents (both for fundamental and fifth
harmonic) and the designed parameters of the compensators elements, respectively the
465
currents flow (on phase components and sequence components) inside the loadcompensator assembly, as a result of taking into consideration the two criteria.
Table 6.11
Results of the numerical application
first pattern
Ia1s*= 90.000 - j 32.757 A
Ib1s*= 83.599 - j 90.301 A
Ic1s*= 36.965 - j 55.980 A
second pattern
Ia1s*= 72.800 - j 42.031 A
Ib1s*= 84.282 - j 70.043 A
Ic1s*= 54.282 - j 65.980 A
I(+)1s= 92.128 A
I(-)1s= 33.428 A
I(+)1s= 92.122 A
I(-)1s= 17.478 A
I *= 9.685 + j 23.275 A
I *= 20.000 - j 1.749 A
I *= -6.830 + j 1.830 A
The abbreviation S was used for load, and the abbreviation E was used for the
load-compensator assembly. Some other quantities are also given for the load: cos (+)1L
is the power factor of the positive sequence at fundamental frequency, k n()1L is the
466
Basic computation
Many techniques have been proposed to improve the supply side power
factor, to balance the load and to cancel out the harmonics generated by power
electronic loads [6.49]. These schemes usually employ single/three-phase voltage
source inverters that are supplied from a DC storage capacitor and operate in
current control mode to track a specified reference current waveform. The single
most important issue in such a scheme is the generation of the reference current
waveforms that, when injected into the power systems, cancel out the load
harmonics and/or improve the supply power factor. Of the various methods that
have been proposed for generating the reference current waveforms, the
instantaneous p-q theory has gained considerable attention. This theory is
extremely versatile and can be utilized to compensate either the fluctuating or
constant part of the load reactive power as well as the fluctuating part of the real
power.
In [6.49], the theory of instantaneous symmetrical components for generating
the instantaneous reference current waveforms to balance a given load is used. It
has been observed that the instantaneous power in an unbalanced system contains
an oscillating component that rides a DC value. The objective of the compensating
system is to supply this zero-mean oscillating power such that the DC component
467
can be supplied by the source. The structure of the compensating system depends
on the manner in which the load is connected (Fig. 6.63).
vsa
~v
~v
~
sb
sc
isa
ila
isb
ilb
isc
ilc
vsa
~v
~v
~
sb
sc
ifa
ifb
isa
isb
ifab
ilab
isc
ifc
a.
ifca
ilca
ilbc
ifbc
b.
One of the major advantages of the scheme is that the desired source power
factor angle can be explicitly defined. Furthermore, it is easy to implement on-line
since the desired compensator currents are directly computed. The drawing also is
computationally simple since it does not require complicated transformations.
Chapter references
[6.1]
[6.2]
[6.3]
[6.4]
[6.5]
[6.6]
[6.7]
[6.8]
[6.9]
[6.10]
Dugan, R.C., McGranaghan, M.F., Santoso, S., Beaty, H.W. Electrical power
systems quality, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2003.
Grigsby, L.L. The electric power engineering handbook, CRC Press, 2000.
Bhattacharya, K., Bollen, M.H.J., Daalder, J.E. Operation of restructured power
systems, Kluwer Academic Publishers, London, 2001.
West, K. Power quality application guide: Harmonics, True RMS the only true
measurement. Copper Development Association, IEE Endorsed Provider, July
2004.
Domijan, A., Heydt, G.T., Meliopolos, A.P.S., Venkata, S.S., Wert, S.
Directions of research on electric power quality, IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery,
Vol. 8, No. 1, pp. 429 436, January 1993.
IEC 61000-4-30 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4-30: Testing and
measurement techniques - Power Quality Measurement Methods, 2000.
EN 61000-2-5 Electromagnetic Compatibility: Environment Classification of
electromagnetic environments, 1995.
WG14.31 Custom Power - State of the art, July 2000.
IEEE Standard 446-1987 IEEE Recommended practice for emergency and
standby power systems for industrial and commercial applications (IEEE orange
book).
IEC 61000-2-8 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 2: Environment.
Section 8: Voltage dips and short interruptions on public electric power supply
systems with statistical measurement results, 2000.
468
[6.11]
[6.12]
[6.13]
[6.14]
[6.15]
[6.16]
[6.17]
[6.18]
[6.19]
[6.20]
[6.21]
[6.22]
[6.23]
[6.24]
[6.25]
[6.26]
[6.27]
Basic computation
*** Network protection & automation, Guide, Alstom, 2002.
Bollen, M.J. Algorithms for characterizing measured three-phase unbalanced
voltage dips, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 18, No. 3, pp. 937944,
July 2003.
Zhang, L., Bollen, M.J. Characteristic of voltage dips (sags) in power systems,
IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, Vol. 15, No. 2, pp. 827832, April 2000.
EN 50160 Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public distribution
system, CENELEC, 1999.
Poeat A., Arie A.A., Crian O., Eremia M., Alexandrescu V., Buta A.
Transportul i distribuia energiei electrice (Transmission and distribution of
electric energy), Editura Didactic i Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1981.
Pelissier, R. Les rseaux dnergie lectrique, Tome I, Dumod, Paris, 1971.
IEC 61000-3-6, Assessment of harmonic emission limits for the connection of
distorting installations to MV, HV and EHV power systems (draft), May 2005.
IEC 61000-4-7, Ed. 2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4-7: Testing
and measurement techniques General guide on harmonics and interharmonics
measurements and instrumentation, for power supply systems and equipment
connected thereto, 2002.
Hanzelka, Z., Bie, A. Power quality application guide: Harmonics,
Interharmonics. Copper Development Association, IEE Endorsed Provider, July
2004.
IEEE Standard 1459-2000 Definitions for the measurement of electric power
quantities under sinusoidal, nonsinusoidal, balanced or unbalanced conditions,
2000.
IEEE Task Force on Harmonics modelling and simulation Modelling and
simulation of the propagation of harmonics in electric power networks, Part I:
Concepts, models and simulation techniques, IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery,
Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 452 465, January 1996.
Budeanu, C. Puissance reactives et fictives, Editura IRE, Bucureti, 1927.
Golovanov, Carmen, Albu, Mihaela, et al. Probleme moderne de msurare n
electroenergetic (Modern measurement problems in power systems), Editura
Tehnic, Bucureti, 2001.
Arie, A., Negu, C., Golovanov, Carmen, Golovanov, N. Poluarea cu armonici
a sistemelor electroenergetice funcionnd n regim permanent simetric
(Harmonic pollution of power systems operating under symmetrical steady-state
conditions), Editura Academiei Romne, Bucureti, 1994.
ugulea, A. Power-flows under non-sinusoidal and non-symmetric periodic and
almost periodic steady-states of electrical power systems, 6th Into, Proceedings of
IEEE International Conference on Harmonics in Power Systems, Bologna, pp. 388
395, 1994.
ugulea, A. Criteria for the definition of the electric power quality and its
measurement systems, ETEP, Vol. 6, No. 5, pp. 357 363, September/October
1996.
IEEE Working Group on Non-sinusoidal Situations: Effects on meter performance
and definitions of power Practical definitions for powers in systems with nonsinusoidal waveforms and unbalanced loads: A discussion, IEEE Trans. on Power
Delivery, Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 79 87, January 1996.
[6.30]
[6.31]
[6.32]
[6.33]
[6.34]
[6.35]
[6.36]
[6.37]
[6.38]
[6.39]
[6.40]
[6.41]
[6.42]
[6.43]
[6.44]
469
470
[6.45]
[6.46]
[6.47]
[6.48]
[6.49]
Basic computation
Lee, S.Y., Wu, C.J. On-line reactive power compensation schemes for
unbalanced three phase four wire distribution feeders, IEEE Trans. on Power
Delivery, Vol. 8, No. 4, pp. 1958 1965, October 1993.
Gyugyi, L., Otto, R.A., Putman, T.H. Principles and applications of static
thyristor-controlled shunt compensators, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and
Systems, Vol. 97, pp. 1935 1945, 1978.
Pan, A., Buta, A., Ticula, E. Criteria for reactive power compensation in power
distribution networks with unbalanced and nonlinear loads, Proceedings of the 3rd
International Power Systems Conference, Timisoara, pp. 96 101, November 6-7,
1999.
Buta, A., Pan, A. Criterii de compensare a puterii reactive n reele cu sarcini
dezechilibrate (Reactive power compensation criteria in networks with
unbalanced loads), Energetica Revue, Vol. 45, No. 5 6, pp. 273 289, 1997.
Ghosh, A., Joshi, A. A new approach to load balancing and power factor
correction in power distribution system, IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, Vol. 15,
No. 1, pp. 417 422, January 2000.
Chapter 7
POWER AND ENERGY LOSSES
IN ELECTRIC NETWORKS
7.1. Introduction
7.1.1. Background
As with any physical process, electric power transmission and distribution
requires energy consumption associated with irreversible thermodynamic
conversions. This consumption, referred to as losses in electric networks is
referenced as such in the technical literature and international statistics.
In the supplying process of consumers with energy, losses occur during
generation, transmission and distribution stages. Generally, it is considered that, an
average of 8% from the energy produced by the all sources is lost during
generation stage and 10% during transmission and distribution. Figure 7.1 shows
the power balance of a developed power system.
Energy generated
in power plants
Internal
consumption in
power plants
~ 8%
Losses in
the
electric
networks
~ 10%
Total sources
100%
Energy delivered
to the consumers
~ 82 %
Energy
imported
Energy
exported
472
Basic computation
In establishing the tariffs for the power transmission and distribution, the cost
of the losses in the electric networks represents a significant component and, in a
market economy, it is a weighty element in the competition between companies.
Taking into consideration that these network losses range in various
countries between 8 to 15% of the consumed electric energy, the energy saving is
one of the main energy sources, and special concerns has been dedicated, in all the
power systems, to their reducing as much as possible. Studies performed
emphasized that most often, the losses reduction is more economicaly than the
corresponding increase of the generating capacities [7.1].
A decisive element in changing the losses outlook was the evolution of the
oil cost compared to the copper and aluminium cost, which are components of the
lines and transformers. Between 1970 and 1994, the cost of oil increased more than
3 times, while the copper and aluminium costs practically kept unchanged or even
had decreased. According to the actual forecast [7.1, 7.2], this situation is likely to
be unchanged all through 2010.
Statistically, the energy losses in the electric networks result from the
difference between the energy injected into the networks by the power plants,
including the energy imported from neighbouring systems, and the energy sold to
consumers including the exported energy. These losses include three components:
Own technologic consumption (o.t.c.) associated with the power
transmission and distribution processes in compliance with the installation
design requirements;
Technical losses due to deviations from the designed operation state, either
through incomplete development of the installations or through improper
operation;
Commercial losses (positive or negative) resulting from errors introduced
by the inaccuracy of the metering units and unorganised electric energy
records, including unaccounted consumption of the metering transformers
and meters, as well as the electric power theft.
Therefore, the reduction studies of what we improperly call losses in the
electric networks, require three distinct analyses:
(i) Optimization of the transmission and distribution process in the designing
stage and setting the theoretical technologic consumption for various
operation states of the installations;
(ii) Elimination of the technical losses in the networks by framing with the
optimum operation state of the installations, by observing the investment
program and through the optimum operation of the installations;
(iii) Improve the electric energy record within the administrative organization
of the enterprises so that the influence of some calculation or
measurement errors on the values reported for the network losses to be
minimal.
Each of the three direction studies should aim the achievement of a maximum
gain on the whole system, while satisfying the safety conditions of supply required
473
by all consumers. This desideratum, for a given pattern of the sources and
consumers, leads to the concerns of reducing the power delivery costs by reducing
the network power losses.
Physically, the technologic consumption of active power (energy) in systems
networks is the sum of the technologic consumptions located in:
line conductors and the windings of the transformers or autotransformers
through Joule effect. The losses by thermal effect (Joule) are due to the
current passing through the conductors and also to the active and reactive
powers, and can be reduced, in a given case, by increasing the cross sectional
area of the wire or by reducing the amperage (through voltage increase,
reactive power compensation, etc.). In appropriate sized electric networks,
loaded at their rated capacities, these losses represent the main rate;
the magnetic core of the transformers or autotransformers, due to the
magnetic field presence, through eddy currents (flux) and hysteresis
phenomenon. The power losses due to the transformers (autotransformers)
magnetization do not depend upon the load. Their weight can be decreased
by optimal sizing and utilization, as well as avoidance of useless operation.
lines of 220 kV and higher rated voltage, due to the presence of the electric
field through corona phenomenon;
the dielectric of the high voltage insulation, mainly in polluted areas or
during fog time.
Of the total amount of power losses, in appropriate sized networks, the loadfree losses due to corona phenomenon, losses through dielectric and in improper
insulations have a low weight.
The meters consumption, in terms of their quality and number, can increase
the losses into the networks by 0.53% (for instance in Germany, the
consumption of the 25,000,000 installed meters represents 2% of all the losses in
the networks [7.3]).
Losses determination for an electric network, based on measurements,
represents both technically and economically, a difficult issue. Given the low
percentage of the losses in various elements of network and the accuracy of the
metering units mounted in installations, the determination, by measuring per
element of network losses is obviously not feasible. Therefore:
In high and very high voltage networks, the losses determination is
achievable by comparing the injected and the withdrawal energy from a contour,
since the number of the input-output points is relatively small and a simultaneous
reading of the meters is feasible mostly under the actual conditions of the market
economy when the transmission network dispose of a metering systems. Also,
given the reduced number of elements, it is possible to perform post calculation in
terms of the elements loading and even in real time, thanks to an appropriate
computerized system existence;
In medium and low voltage networks this comparison can only be done in
special situations, since in many countries it is not possible an accurate
474
Basic computation
determination of the energy sold for a given period, because, generally, the reading
of all the meters takes more than a week. In the medium voltage networks it is
possible to perform a post calculation of the technologic losses on those elements
whose loading is monitored (recorded) operatively or even in real time if an
appropriate computerized system exists;
For low voltage networks, the post calculation method is not widely used
because it is rational only for the study of smaller parts of the network, the
manpower and costs involved for metering being less than for the entire low
voltage network analysis. The obtained results can be used as guiding values for
the networks with comparable configurations and consumption.
The creation of the electricity market has imposed the development of a
simultaneous centralized reading system of the meters of all consumers within a
company, making possible a more accurate ascertainment of the losses and their
costs, respectively, for the power distribution.
Taking into consideration the above-mentioned aspects, it can be said that the
amount of the power losses is an indicator that characterizes the operation of a
power system. The values of this indicator are determined even in the early
planning, designing and sizing of equipments stage, when the level of the justified
technologic consumption is established. This leads to an optimum of the whole
power system subjected to the actual market economy framework for the
transmission network and each electricity company but not being an achievable
minimum.
During operation, the optimum level of the technologic losses in the electric
networks, for a certain network topology and generation scenario, can be reached
by optimal reconfiguration of the network according to the real conditions or
correct voltage adjustment in terms of the load behaviour and weather conditions
(for the reduction of the losses caused by corona phenomenon). As a result of the
powerful hardware and software from the operative control centres, of the
automatic voltage control, the supervising of the network loading, local reactive
power generation etc., operating regimes near to optimum can be obtained. Also,
with appropriate software, the technical losses achieved in the chosen configuration
can be determined in real time.
475
Table 7.1
1982
6.69
1985
6.70
1989
7.73
1990
9.00
1995
11.98
2000
13.93
2001
13.81
2.82
2.84
3.55
3.74
2.43*
2.08*
2.12*
3.87
3.86
4.18
5.26
9.55**
11.85**
11.69**
Energy
generated in the
network
[%]
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Energy delivered
to the consumers
[%]
93.31
92.27
91.01
89.96
88.02
86.07
86.18
Loss in
the
networks
[%]
6.69
7.73
8.99
10.04
11.98
13.93
13.82
From the analysis of the electric power balance before 1989 and after 1990
the following conclusions can be drawn:
the change of the generation pattern by the increase of the energy weight
delivered at 400 kV voltage (from 9.50% to 15.25);
the electricity import reduction from 2.3% in 1989 up to 1.5% in 1994;
the change of electricity consumption structure through export variation,
the consumption decrease at 220 kV (mainly by reducing and rationalizing
the consumption of the aluminium factories), the variation at 110 kV
correlated with the activity of large industrial enterprises (the increase
during 19761989 and tremendous decrease after 1989) and the increase of
the importance of the MV consumption (mainly after 1989 through the
development of the small and average enterprises) and LV.
476
Basic computation
The above mentioned factors have various effects on the losses in the electric
networks: the increase of sources share at 400 kV leads to losses increase, while
the increase of sources at 110 kV leads to losses decrease, the consumption
reduction at 220 kV and its increase al MV and LV having the same effect, the
losses increase.
477
1980
7.14
5.71
10.04
7.85
8.19
6.93
4.70
7.29
9.21
9.05
6.53
12.16
8.08
7.99
9.04
10.78
1989
6.31
5.32
10.49
6.94
6.77
8.80
4.35
7.84
10.83
7.45
7.73
13.58
7.92
7.19
8.68
9.73
1990
6.13
5.52
10.75
6.83
5.13
7.51
4.58
8.72
10.85
6.85
9.00
12.48
7.81
7.09
6.60
8.40
1991
6.24
5.30
14.49
6.74
4.35
7.61
4.71
8.61
10.79
7.06
10.31
13.37
8.01
7.04
6.64
11.40
1992
5.96
5.21
14.45
7.40
6.59
7.07
4.11
7.65
9.19
6.72
10.88
14.28
8 .55
7.08
6.67
12.63
1993
9.08
6.77
13.27
9.66
6.23
8.40
5.37
8.41
13.34
8.72
10.76
13.90
7.90
9.35
7.99
16.19
478
Basic computation
for electric lines: rated voltage, network type (overhead, cable, pole type,
cross sectional area of the active and protection conductors, cable
characteristics etc.)
for transformers: rated voltages, rated power, unit type (transformer with
single or several windings, autotransformer), transformation ratio,
magnetization current, no-load losses, load losses at rated power, short
circuit voltage;
for reactors: rated voltage, rated current, rated power, losses of active
power through coil;
for capacitors: rated voltage, rated power, losses through dielectric or
dissipation factor (loss factor).
The information obtained help us to establish the parameters associated to the
model that, for various operation states, will provide the no-load and load losses.
Further on, besides the theoretical approaches in chapters 2 and 3, aspects
related to the calculation of losses on the long transmission lines are detailed.
Thus, the power losses can be determined:
i) as the difference between the powers at the lines ends:
*
P = Re[U 1 I 1 U 2 I 2 ]
Q = Im[U 1 I 1 U 2 I 2 ]
(7.1)
I2 =
1 2
Ix d x
l0
where I x can be expressed as per parameters from one of the lines end:
I x = I 2 cosh x +
U2
sinh x
Zc
I x = I 1 cosh x
U1
sinh x
Zc
or
+
P(2) = r0 2 2 2
+
2 2 Zc2 2
2
2U2 2
P2 cosh 2l 1 Q2 cosh 2l 1
+
Zc
Zc
2
2
(7.2,a)
479
+
Q(2) = x0 2 2 2
+
2 2 Zc2 2
2
2U 2 2
+
P2 cosh 2l 1 Q2 cosh 2 l 1
+
Zc
Zc
2
2
(7.2,b)
P(1) = r0 1 2 1
+
2 2 Z c2 2
2
2 U 1 2
P1 cosh 2l 1 Q1 cosh 2l 1
Zc
Zc
2
2
(7.2,c)
Q(1) = x0 1 2 1
+
2 2 Zc2 2
2
2U1 2
P1 cosh 2l 1 Q1 cosh 2l 1
Zc
Zc
2
2
(7.2,d)
where P(1) , Q(1) respectively P( 2 ) , Q( 2 ) are the active and reactive power
losses, respectively, calculated according to the power at the sending and receiving
end , respectively.
It is worth mentioning that P( 2 ) P(1) , P(1) < P , P( 2 ) > P(1) and
P( 2) + P(1)
= P .
2
Figure 7.2 shows the percentage error between power losses calculated with
relations (7.2) and the one determined with relation (7.1), for various loads of a line
of 750 kV, 400 km, 5400 mm2, A1-Ol, where stands for the power factor.
The determination of the power losses in the networks, dependent on both the
network configuration and consumers state and the loading of various sources
(power plants and reactive power sources), is carried out through a steady state
calculation. In this respect, it should be mentioned that:
it is very important to model no-load losses for all types of transformers
and mainly of the distribution ones (110 kV/MV and MV/LV);
it is required the modelling of 220 kV networks in the calculation of the
operating states and more of the losses caused by corona phenomenon. For
a certain type of overhead line (OHL), losses variation due to corona
phenomenon in terms of the operation voltage can be represented by a
polynomial, whose coefficients are determined by regression. In Romania,
480
Basic computation
for the existing lines, with cross sectional area of 2450 mm2 and
3300 mm2, respectively, the relation:
Pcorona = a + bU 2
(7.3)
P1-P
P
=1
=0.9
=0.8
=0.9
=0.7
-1
1000
2000
leading
state
P2[MW]
leading
state
-2
-3
Fig. 7.2. Percentage errors between power losses determined by means of relations (7.1)
and (7.2) for a line of 750kV, 400km, 5400mm2 Al-Ol.
481
The relation (7.3) allows us to obtaine guiding average values, taking into
consideration the actual values for each line (configuration, route, average multiannual weather conditions).
In steady-state calculation, for the optimization of the voltage level and
reactive power compensation, the modelling of the static characteristic of the load
is also required. Notice that the simple switching of the taps, disregarding the load
characteristics, can lead to other effects than the ones intended. Thus, switching the
taps towards the direction of the voltage increase on the consumption bus-bar can
result in increased consumption of reactive power that may determine the voltage
drop at bus-bars, supply and consumption.
W = 3R I t2 dt
(7.4)
constitutes a very difficult issue, as in practice the accurate knowledge of It for the
entire period analyzed is impossible; also, in many cases even the accurate
knowledge of the value R is difficult, R being lines electric resistance. This issue
necessitated the use of simplified ways for determination of the own technologic
consumption. To this effect, two distinct calculation cases are considered.
a. Own technologic consumption practically load independent corresponds to
the product between the own technologic consumption of power and the
duration the respective element is powered (obviously, disregarding the
voltage variations influence, either by considering the rated voltage or a
medium operation voltage);
b. Own technologic consumption dependent of the load that appears at:
series elements that supply a radial consumer, when the operation state
of the element is determined by the consumption characteristics and its
annual variation;
basic network elements of the power system, whose state is influenced
by a large number of factors (network structure, consumption level and
482
Basic computation
W = 3R0
2
lt dldt
(7.5)
0 0
where I lt is the current at distance l and instant t, while R0 is the resistance per
length unit of the line.
The overall energy loss is made up of no-load losses (losses by corona
phenomenon and insulation) and load losses. Neglecting the losses through
insulation, the relation can be written as:
LT
W = 3R0
(I
' 2
lt ) dldt
+ Wcorona
(7.6)
0 0
where Wcorona are the energy losses caused by corona phenomenon, established
by considering weather condition, I lt' the current through the line, minus the shunt
currents through line conductance.
For the relatively short lines, in the equations of the long line the hyperbolic
sine can be replaced with the circular one, and the cosine with 1, and the relation
(7.6) becomes:
T
W = 3R I t2dt + Wcorona
(7.7)
S
W = Pscc t dt + W0
S
0 nom
(7.8,a)
483
or:
2
I
W = Pscc t dt + W0
I
0 nom
(7.8,b)
Wc.s
Q
= K P Pcs,nomT + (1 K P )Pcs,nom
Q
0 cs,nom
dt
(7.9)
For the installations with series capacitors (for the series compensation)
T
Wc.c
I
= pc Qnom,c
I
0 nom,c
dt
(7.10)
Wb = pbQnom,bT
Wc = pcQnom,cT
(7.11)
where pb and pc are the o.t.c. of power of the coil, respectively capacitor.
In order to determine the own technologic consumption of energy by means
of relations (7.5) and (7.6) it is required to know the law of time variation of the
current flowing through the element. In the general case, this law cannot be
mathematically expressed. That is why, for the consideration of current variation in
time, various assumptions are taken into consideration and various calculation
methods have been elaborated for the calculation of the integral value.
484
Basic computation
I, S
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
t [h ]
2
t dt
2
t t
T
n
t =1
(7.12)
2
t
t =1
I t2 dt =
n 1
T 2
I 0 + I n2 + 2 I t2
2n
t =1
(7.13)
W = 3 R
T
n
2
t
(7.14)
t =1
or
W = 1.5 R
n 1
T 2
2
I
I
2
I t2
+
+
0
n
n
t =1
(7.15)
t =1
St
U t*
(7.16)
or
2
2
n 1
T S0
Sn
St
W = R
+
+
2
*
*
*
n U0
Un
t =1 U t
(7.17)
485
(7.18)
W S = S t2 dt
(7.19,a)
W S =
S
i =1 j =1
2
ij t ij
(7.19,b)
486
Basic computation
where i is the number of the day in the characteristic period, i (1, n ) ; j number
of the level in the load curve; i, j (1, m ) ; S ij load on the level j in the day i;
calculation period in the studied period T, (1, N ) .
WS' = n
2
j tj
(7.20)
j =1
k n
S 2j t j =
j =1
2
ij tij
i =1 j =1
From the last equality, it is possible to obtain the equivalence factor of the
operating states during the period :
n
k =
S
i =1 j =1
m
2
ij tij
(7.21)
S 2j t j
j =1
The energy losses in the networks for the period T will be:
W ST = k i
k
1
'
W S
(7.22)
The graphical integration method can be applied relatively easily with the aid
of computers. It can be considered a standard method for the elimination of errors
introduced by other methods. It is a correct method for the complex meshed
networks as well.
3 RI T = 3 R I t2dt
0
from which:
487
T
I=
2
t dt
(7.23)
From the expression (7.22) it results that, for the calculation of the rootmean-square current it is necessary to know the real load curve. The expression
under the radical can be calculated by means of relations (7.12) and (7.13).
If the value of I is known, e.p.o.t.c. in the element is determined by means of
the formula:
W = 3 RI 2T
(7.24)
Sm, p
U nom
where S m , p is the root-mean-square of the power that flows through the element;
U nom the rated voltage, considered constant; R the element resistance; T the
calculation period.
This calculation method is called the method of the root-mean-square current,
and, when the relations (7.12) and (7.13) are used for his determination, this
method can be considered as another way of applying the diagram integration
method. In this form of application it provides no advantage with respect to the
diagram integration method.
In practice, the method of the root-mean-square current is appropriate for
distribution networks, mainly MV. In this case, the root-mean-square current I is
determined by means of empirical relations, in terms of the mean value of the
current I mean and the quadratic dependence factor k p :
I = I mean k p
(7.25)
or in terms of the maximum current I max and the number of hours of the maximum
power utilization, e.g. through a dependence of the form:
(7.26)
or the calculation is performed in terms of the maximum current I max and the
losses time :
I = I max
Tmax
(7.27)
488
Basic computation
W = Pt dt = PmaxTmax P
(7.28)
from which:
T
P dt
t
Tmax P =
(7.29)
Pmax
In Figure 7.4,a the expressions given above are represented, the area of the
rectangle determined by Pmax and Tmax P being equal to the area determined by
axes and the curve Pt ; Tmax P is called the number of hours of the maximum active
power utilization. Obviously, such times, representing a period conventionally
adopted, when on the line operating at maximum loading an energy equal to the
actual one is transmitted, can be also determined for the reactive power (Fig.
7.4,b):
T
Q dt
t
Tmax Q =
(7.30)
Pmax
and for the current (and for the apparent power, respectively), (Fig. 7.4,c):
T
Tmax =
I t dt
I max
S dt
t
S max
(7.31)
489
It is worth noticing that, because the curve S (t ) is fuller than that of P(t ) ,
Tmax P < Tmax . This observation should be taken into consideration at the application
of various formulae for the losses time calculation.
The determination of the energy losses per element requires, naturally, losses
calculation for each curve point I t = f (t ) and then their summation. The same
energy losses occurs in the element considered with a constant loading, equal to the
maximum loading, during a period of time , smaller than the calendar period of
operation, taking into account that, in this case, during the entire period, the
maximum power losses occur. From this results the name for time of maximum
losses or, more often, losses time.
Pt
Qt
2
t
P
2
max
Pmax
2
max
Qt2
Pt
p
TmaxP
a.
Qt
Qmax
Q
TmaxQ
b.
St
St 2
2
Smax
St
Smax
Tmax
c.
Fig. 7.4. Determination of values Tmax and .
2
t dt
(7.32)
2
I max
Thus, losses time is a conventional time during which, within the element,
operating at maximum loading, the same energy losses as during operation at
actual loading, variable loading, within period of time T, occur. Consequently, the
energy losses will have the expression:
2
2
= 3 RImax
=R
Smax
(7.33)
490
Basic computation
where I max is the maximum load current, S max apparent maximum power, U
voltage at maximum load, most frequently approximated by U n .
In order to use the formula (7.33), firstly, it is necessary to evaluate in each
concrete case the losses time value . Usually, the value is determined
empirically or through regressions, in terms of the number of hours of the
maximum active power utilization and the power factor.
Basically, there is a tight correlation between the number of hours of the
maximum power utilization, Tmax , and the maximum power only in the networks
of voltage up to 110 kV (220 kV), where the influence of the capacitive load of the
respective network can be neglected.
In order to calculate the losses time, many formulas are established in terms
of at least the maximum current value (or of the maximum apparent, active or
reactive power), mean current value (active, reactive or apparent power) and losses
calculation duration. To enhance the accuracy for the losses time determination,
some authors introduced additional information, such as the minimum value of the
current (power).
In West European countries and American companies [7.17, 7.18],
considering that a sufficiently accurate determination of the maximum value ( I max ,
Pmax , Qmax , S max ) is not feasible in practice unless there are appropriate recording
installations (printmaxigraph, computerized systems, up-to-date meters), the
analysis is based on the load factor with reference to the apparent power kU or
active power kUP .
The load factor is defined as the ratio between the average apparent power
and the maximum apparent power:
kU =
S med I med
=
S max I max
(7.34)
Pmed
Pmax
(7.35)
and
kUP =
T
where is the losses time and T the operating period.
* =
(7.36)
491
For the calculation of the o.t.c. associated with the active power, the literature
provides several relations for the determination of p* (Table 7.4). In [7.17], it is
shown that for p* , the following general relation can be used:
p * = pkU + (1 p ) kU2
with p = (0.15K 0.3) according to the consumption type.
The work [7.19] deals with values of the loss factor in distribution
obtained as average of the values used in many power systems corresponding to a
curve type B (Fig. 7.5,b) with loading ranging between 4.2% and 10%. The values
are given in Table 7.4 (formula 6). Figure 7.6 presents the dependencies between
loss factor and load factor for an A and B load type.
Pmax[%]
Pmax[%]
100
100
75
75
Consumption
100 % or 0%
50
50
25
25
10
15
[h]
24
20
[h]
10
a.
15
20
24
b.
Fig. 7.5. Extreme types of load curves: a. load type A; b. load type B.
Losses
factor [%]
100
Distribution
feeder
80
60
Type A
load
40
Distribution
transformer
Type B
load
20
Load
factor [%]
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
Fig. 7.6. Dependency between the load factor and loss factor for a type B curve
(distribution).
492
Basic computation
Table 7.4
Expression for the loss factors in terms of the parameters P and kUP .
Author
Formula
P* = k UP
Wolf [7.27]
Fleck and
Rahn [7.29]
Langrehn
[7.29]
P* =
(
1
= (k
2
1
2
kUP + kUP
2
2
UP
P * = 0.124 + Tmax 10 4
P*
Observations
1.6
P * = kUP
Iansen [7.29]
Kezevici
[7.28]
Militaru
[7.34]
kUP
2 kUP
P* =
Curve
no.
+ kUP + kUP
Average curve
P * = 2Tmax* 1 +
[7.26]
1 Tmax*
1 + Tmax* 2
Pmin
Pmax
P
1 min
Pmax
Glazunov
[7.31]
Fig. 7.8
[7.30]
P * = kU (0.66 + 0.34kU )2
[7.30]
P* = kU kU
VDEW
[7.32]
[7.33]
[7.1]
Wolf [7.27]
P* = kU2
[7.17]
Indicate P in terms of
Tmax P and
Valid for variable and
discontinuous diagrams
The same, if kU > 0.25
493
8000
s [h]
= 0.8
4000
4
5
= 0.6
6000
=1
2000
2
kU, max
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Q*i = cP*ib
(7.37)
where P*i and Q*i are the actual ordinates of the active and reactive power
expressed in per units, the base value being their maximum value; c and b are
constants, coefficients of a regression.
By considering this dependency, the relationship between the times T*max P
and T*max Q corresponding to maximum active and reactive loads are determined by:
T*max P = T*bmax Q
(7.38)
(7.39)
494
Basic computation
If the maximum values of the active and reactive power coincide in time,
which is characteristic to the distribution networks, the total losses time is:
* = *P cos 2 max + *Q sin 2 max
(7.40)
(7.41)
495
tj =
ji ni
(7.42)
t =1
(7.43)
The first term of these expressions refers to the no-load losses, the second to
the load losses, third and fourth terms to the losses determined by the model with
distributed parameters, as well as the passage of the capacitive current of the line.
496
Basic computation
P t
(7.44)
j j
t =1
(7.45,a)
P T
ci i
(7.45,b)
i =1
T = T ' ).
i
(7.46)
where WS represents the losses caused by the apparent power transmitted on the
line.
497
For the problem studied, it is considered that the safety in operation of the
electric networks of various types and maintenance conditions are the same and
therefore, the damages at the consumers following failures in the network generally
are not taken into consideration.
In the first criteria category the well known criterion of present total
discounted costs (PTDC), is included which, in the last time, as for the practice in
the countries with developed power systems (e.g. EdF), ignores the equivalencing
investment afferent to power losses differences. Actually, this investment is
considered non-necessary since it leads to a false result of the analysis.
Furthermore, for an enterprise that supplies electricity (respectively purchased from
producers), even if required at power system level, it has no influence on the
economical efficiency of the respective enterprise. PTDC value is established as
referred to one updating year selected (for instance, the investment commencement
year, start-up year, etc.).
The calculation relation is [7.15]:
PTDC =
Ds
I t (1 + a) t +
t =1
Ds
Ds
(C
+ Cet + Dt )(1 + a) t
t = d +1
(W
'
ni
(7.47)
+ Wrt )(1 + a) t Wn (1 + a) Ds
t = d +1
where: I t
Ct
Cet
Dt
Ds
are
Wn (Wni ') remanent value after the period Ds and after a limited
operating period, respectively;
Wrt
residual value (in our case Wrt = 0 );
d
execution period.
a
discount rate, with:
a = ad + ar + a s
ad
activity interest rate (10 25%);
ar
risk rate (1 1.5%);
as
safety rate (for social security) (0.5%)
Applications
The following input data are considered:
study period, 10 years;
annual operation expenses for substations, 6% of investment value;
498
Basic computation
the cost of kWh for the equivalencing of the power losses in the medium voltage
networks in the expression of PTDC is e = 65 /MWh;
where:
(7.48)
(1 + a )
5.65 .
i =1
D Ds
VRM = I 0.05 + (1 0.05) v
= 0.525 I
Dv d
(7.49)
(1 + a )i + P0Te (1 + a )i +
+ e
P (1 + a )
(7.50,a)
0.726 I (1 + a )
Ds
or
PTDC = I 1 + k
+ P0Te
0.726(1 + a ) Ds +
(1 + a )
(1 + a )
+ e
P (1 + a )
i
W (1 + a )
(7.50,b)
or post calculations:
PTDC = 1.105 I +
P (1 + a )
65 []
(7.51)
499
If we denote by Ps the power losses under running load in the year 1 and by
the annual percentage of the load growth, it results the sum:
n
Psi (1 + a )
i =1
Ps Ps (1 + )2 Ps (1 + )4
+
+
+K =
1+ a
(1 + a )2
(1 + a )3
n
(1 + )2
1
Ps 1 + a
=
=
1 + a (1 + )2
1
1+ a
Ps (1 + )2 n (1 + a )n
=
(1 + a )n (1 + )2 (1 + a )
For the calculation of the following relation can be used [7.17]:
(7.52)
S med
; T is the operation period.
S max
In the end, the option with the minimum PTDC will be chosen.
The second category of the efficiency criterion consists of the followings:
(i) Net present income (NPI), which evaluates the annual cumulated,
proceeds:
where ku =
NPI =
Ds
Vt (Ct + I t )
(1 + a)t
t =1
(7.53)
NPIR =
NPI
Ds
t =1
It
(1 + a )t
(7.54)
500
Basic computation
Ds
Vt Ct
(1 + IRR)
t =1
=0
(7.55)
(V
t =1
) (
CtB Vt A CtA
=0
(1 + a )t
(7.56)
(iii) Pay back period (PBP) represents the time period required for the
recovery of the initial investment value (financed from own funds) from the annual
returns associated with it.
Simple pay back period (SPBP)
I=
T'
(V
Ct )
(7.57)
t =1
I
Vt Ct
(7.58)
1
a
I t (1 + a ) t =
T"
t =1
(Vt Ct )
(1 + a) t
(7.59)
where d is the period of carrying out the investment (between the year d and the
start-up year).
The pay back period can also be calculated under the form of pay back period
of investment differences through annual expenses differences. It is proposed the
application under this form, as the revenue-sum cashed from the selling of a fixed
electricity quantity, cannot be accurately determined when performing the analysis.
Therefore:
PBP =
I 2 I1
C1 C 2
(7.60)
501
For the cost of losses under running load, if consider a variation in time of the
costs, to apply the simple pay back period criterion, the utilization of the
levelizing factor is required, to obtain a constant value of them during the
entire analyzed period [7.13, 7.18]:
Plevelized = Ps
(1 + )2 N (1 + a )N
a
2
(1 + ) (1 + a ) (1 + a )N 1
(7.61)
i
1
1
(1 + i ) N
(7.62)
where C min and C k stand for both carrying charge and variable ones, while RaNK
and RaN min represents the reimbursement rate in the two options.
The relation (7.62) can also be used to check the opportunity of existent
equipment rehabilitation:
K' =
I RT Ra
<1
C C RT
(7.63,a)
K1 =
IRa
<1
C C RT
(7.63,b)
502
Basic computation
K1 =
IRa
<1
V C
(7.64,c)
503
504
Basic computation
505
Chapter references
[7.1]
[7.2]
[7.3]
[7.4]
[7.5]
[7.6]
[7.7]
[7.8]
[7.9]
[7.10]
[7.11]
[7.12]
[7.13]
[7.14]
[7.15]
[7.16]
[7.17]
[7.18]
[7.19]
[7.20]
[7.21]
[7.22]
[7.23]
506
[7.24]
[7.25]
[7.26]
[7.27]
[7.28]
[7.29]
[7.30]
[7.31]
[7.32]
[7.33]
[7.34]
Basic computation
Kaialov, G.M. Opredelenie poteri energii v electricescoi seti po srednim
znaceniam nagruzok v eio uzlah, Electricestvo, Vol. 6, pp. 19, 1976.
Secretariat CAER Electroperedacia 750 kV Vinia Zapadno Ukrainskaia
Albertia (Hungary), Moscow, 1979.
*** Spravocinic po proiectivanui electroelecticeskih system, Moscow, 1977.
Wolf, M. Die Berechnung der elektrischen Verluste bei schwankenden. ETZ,
1931.
Kezevici, V.V. Zavisimosti cislo ceasov poteri ot ispolzovania maximuma,
Elektriceschie stantii, No. 9, pp. 29 31, 1948.
Zebisch, M. Netzverluste, Berlin, VEB Verlag Technik, 1959.
Morgenstern, M. Sur la dtermination des pertes dnergie par effet joule dans
un lment de rseaux soumis a un rgime de charge variable, Revue Gnrale de
lElectricit, Tome 68, No. 3, May 1939.
Glazunov, A.A. Elektriceskie seti i sistem, Moscow, Gosnergoizdat, 1960.
*** Netzverluste. Eine Richtlinie fur ihre Bewertung und ihre Verminderung,
Frankfurt (Main), Ausgabe 2, VDEW e.V, 1968.
*** Standard Handbook for Engineering, New York, Toronto, London, 1957.
Militaru, P. Analiza critic a metodelor pentru determinarea pierderilor de
energie pe elemente de reea folosind un numr redus de informaii (timpul de
pierderi) (Critical analysis of the methods to determine the energy loss on network
elements using scarce information (losses time)), Symposium of Electric Power
Networks, Iai, 1981.
Chapter 8
PERFORMANCE METHODS
FOR POWER FLOW STUDIES
8.1. Introduction
Formulation and importance of the power flow problem for the power system
steady-state operation and development planning have been underlined in the
chapter 2. In accordance with the concepts, definitions and notations, presented
over there, in the present chapter a network with n nodes and l branches is
considered. The network structure comprises nc=dim(c) nodes of PQ-type,
ng=dim(g) nodes of PU-type and a slack node, denoted by e, so that n = nc +ng+1.
To define the power flow problem, the essential aspects are remembered
below, as follows:
knowing:
voltage magnitude and phase-angle at the slack node: Ue, e = 0;
active and reactive powers, demanded at the PQ-nodes: Pci , Qci , i c ;
voltage magnitudes and active powers, generated at the PU-nodes:
Pgi , U i , i g
510
In the following, the performance methods are presented, well known for
their rapidity and efficiency: Newton-Raphson method and the other ones derived
from it: Newton decoupled and fast decoupled. At present, due to the high
performances of the computer technology, these methods are extensively used.
Based on the linearization of the steady-state model, the Newton-Raphson
method provides a very accurate solution by using a successive approximation
process. In comparison with Seidel-Gauss, the Newton-Raphson method requires
much more computer memory but it has a high convergence rate, which does not
depend on the system size. Nevertheless, the Newtons approximation process is
convergent providing that the first approximation of the solution is close enough to
the exact solution. Therefore, to perform this, some Seidel-Gauss iterations are
usually used before Newtons approximations.
Newton decoupled and fast decoupled methods, based on a series of
approximations to the Newton-Raphson method, require much smaller computer
memory and provide a good solution without significant increasing in the number
of iterations.
Likewise, the mentioned above methods can be efficiently integrated within
power flow optimization problems, as well as to small signal and voltage stability
studies, since power flow Jacobian is a sensitivity matrix.
511
Y iiU i +
Y ik U k
k =1,k i
Pi jQi
= 0, i = 1,...,n
*
Ui
(8.1)
For each node i, by separating the real and imaginary parts from (8.1), it
results two nonlinear algebraic equations, expressing the nodal current balance,
which can be written in different forms depending on the chosen coordinates. If
only rectangular coordinates are used, it is obtained:
n
n
PU '' QiU i'
G U '' + B U ' +
GikU k" + BikU k' i 2i
=0
ii
i
ii
i
2
U i' + U i"
k =1,k i
( ) ( )
(8.2)
( ) ( )
P cos i + Qi sin i
(
)
+
=0
sin
Y
U
Yik U k sin ( k + ik ) i
ii i
i
ii
Ui
k =1,k i
(8.3)
n
Pi sin i + Qi cos i
Y U cos( + )
=0
Yik U k cos( k + ik )
i
ii
ii i
Ui
k =1,k i
where:
ii = ii , ik = ik
2
2
* *
*
*
*
S i = U i I i = U i Y iiU i +
Y ik U k , i = 1,..., n
k =1, k i
* *
*
*
U i Y iiU i +
Y ik U k (Pi + jQi ) = 0, i = 1,..., n
k =1, k i
(8.4)
512
For each node i, by separating the real and imaginary parts from (8.4), it
results two nonlinear equations whose form depends upon the used coordinates.
Thus, in case of rectangular coordinates for Y and U , it is obtained:
n
n
'2
" 2
'
'
"
"
+
+
+
G
U
U
U
G
U
B
U
U
GikU k" + BikU k' Pi = 0
ii i
i
i
ik k
ik k
i
k =1, k i
k =1, k i
n
n
'
"
'
U ' 2 + U " 2 +U "
B
G
U
B
U
U
GikU k" + BikU k' Qi = 0
i
i
ik k
ik k
i
ii i
k =1, k i
k =1, k i
(8.5)
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
2
+
G
U
U
U k [Gik cos(i k ) + Bik sin (i k )] Pi = 0
ii i
i
k =1, k i
+
B
U
U
U k [Gik sin (i k ) Bik cos(i k )] Qi = 0
i
ii i
k
=
1
,
k
(8.6)
It can be observed that the equations (8.6) are equivalent to the equations
(2.97).
Another form of power balance, often met, results by expressing both
admittance and voltage in polar coordinates:
n
2
Yik U iU k sin (i k ik ) Pi = 0
YiiU i sin ii
k =1, k i
2
Y
U
cos
Yik U iU k cos(i k ik ) Qi = 0
+
ii
i
ii
k =1, k i
(8.7)
513
Sb
S
, I kb = b
U ib
U kb
where U ib and U kb are the base voltages, equal to the rated values of the voltage
levels, corresponding to the node i and respectively k.
Further, denoting per unit quantities by subscript asterisk, per unit nodal
voltages and currents are obtained:
U i* =
Ui
U
I
U
, U k * = k , I i* = i = I i ib
U ib
U kb
I ib
Sb
(8.8)
Si
P
Q
, Pi* = i , Qi* = i
Sb
Sb
Sb
(8.9)
ik U k ,
i = 1,..., n
(8.10)
k =1, k i
which becomes:
I i*
n
Sb
= Y iiU i*U ib +
Y ik U i *U ibU k *U kb , i = 1, ..., n
U ib
k =1, k i
ik *U k * ,
i = 1, ..., n
(8.11)
k =1, k i
Y ii * =Y ii
U ib2
U U
, Y ik * =Y ik ib kb
Sb
Sb
(8.12)
514
Y i 0* = Y ii *
ik * ,
i = 1,..., n
k =1, k i
U ib , Sb from the last relations (8.8), and then is replaced in the first relation from
(2.102), obtaining the per unit expressions of the nodal currents:
I i* =
S i*
, i = 1,..., n
*
U i*
(8.13)
Obviously, the equations (8.11) and (8.13) are formally identical with the
original equations, written in physical units. Generally, it can be easily observed
that passing state quantities from physical units to per unit keeps invariant the form
of all network equations.
f (x ) = 0
(8.14)
f i (x1 , x2 ,K , xm ) = 0, i = 1,K, m
(8.15)
515
f x ( p 1) +
f
x
(x x ( ) ) = 0
p 1
x = x ( p +1 )
(8.16)
f
is the Jacobian matrix a nonsingular square matrix, calculated in the
x
point x ( p 1) . Because of error of linearization, by solving for x the equation (8.16)
it is not possible to obtain the exact solution X but a new approximate solution
x ( p ) will be found. By denoting the correction vector x ( p ) = x x ( p 1) , for
where
x = x ( p ) it results:
x ( p ) = x ( p 1) + x ( p )
(8.17)
f
f (p) =
x
x = x ( p 1 )
x (p)
(8.18)
in which the quantity from the left-hand side defines the error vector of f:
f ( p ) f x ( p 1) .
Under these conditions, from (8.17) and (8.18), the formula of successive
approximations of the Newton method results:
( p)
=x
( p +1)
f
+
x
( p)
f
(
p +1 )
x=x
(8.19)
516
Pi (U , ) Pi sp = 0, i c g
Qi (U , ) Qisp = 0, i c
(8.20)
where Pi sp and Qisp are the specified nodal powers, while the nodal powers, briefly
denoted as functions of U and , have the expressions:
n
2
(
)
=
+
,
P
U
G
U
U
U k (Gik cos ik + sin Bik sin ik ), i c g
i
ii i
i
k =1,k i
n
Q (U , ) = B U 2 + U
U k (Gik sin ik Bik cos ik ), i c
ii i
i
i
k =1,k i
where ik = i k .
(8.21)
The equations (8.20) are to be solved for variables U and by N-R method.
They do not include the equation of the slack node where both voltage magnitude
and phase-angle are fixed.
The functions fi from (8.15) are identified with the functions from the lefthand side of equations (8.20), which by linearizing lead to a set of equations,
written in vector form as equation (8.18), in which the error vector of nodal powers
has the components:
(8.22)
i( p ) , i c g; U i( p ) , i c
(8.23)
(8.24)
n
2
( p)
( p 1)
+U i( p1)
U k( p 1) Gik sin ik( p 1) Bik cos ik( p 1) , i c
Qi = Bii U i
k =1, k i
517
The elements of the Jacobian matrix in the linearized equations are the partial
derivatives of the functions (8.21) with respect to the variables i , i c g and
k + i U i +
U k , i c g
Pi = i +
k
U i
U k
i
k
k
g
c
c
k i
k i
Qi
Q
Qi
Q = Qi +
k + i U i +
U k , i c
i
i
U
i
k
i
k g c
k c U k
k i
k i
(8.25)
P N
N 1
LL = Q1
Q1
M
1
Qnc
Qn
1
c
L
O
L
L
O
L
P1
N
M
PN
N
Q1
N
M
Qnc
N
P1
U1
U1
M
PN
U1
U1
Q1
U1
U1
M
Qnc
U1
U1
L
O
L
L
O
L
P1
U nc
1
U nc
M
M
PN
U nc N
U nc
LLL (8.26)
Q
1
Un
U nc c U1 U 1
Qnc
U
U
nc
nc
U nc
U nc
N
L U U
(8.27)
where [P] and [Q] are the sub-vectors of the nodal power errors, whose
elements are calculated with the relations (8.22), (8.24), while [] and [U U ]
are the correction sub-vectors, representing the unknowns in equation (8.27). The
Jacobian sub-matrices are also denoted by:
518
n
Pi
U i = 2GiiU i2 + U i
U k (Gik cos ik + Bik sin ik ) = Pi + GiiU i2
U i
k =1, k i
N ii =
J ii =
n
Qi
U k (Gik cos ik + Bik sin ik ) = Pi GiiU i2
= Ui
i
k =1, k i
Lii =
n
Qi
U i = 2 BiiU i2 + U i
U k (Gik sin ik Bik cos ik ) = Qi BiiU i2
U i
k =1, k i
H ik =
Pi
= U iU k (Gik sin ik Bik cos ik )
k
N ik =
Pi
U k = U iU k (Gik cos ik + Bik sin ik )
U k
J ik =
Qi
= U iU k (Gik cos ik + Bik sin ik ) = N ik
k
Lik =
Qi
U k = U iU k (Gik sin ik Bik cos ik ) = H ik
U k
(8.28)
Notice that, since H ik = Lik , J ik = N ik and all diagonal terms can be
computed by using the available values of the nodal powers, the computational
effort is substantially reduced.
Considering the network outlined in Figure 8.1, in which there exist three
types of node, as follows: 1 slack node, 2 and 3 PQ-nodes, 4 PU-node, the
equations (8.26), particularized to this case, will be written as:
P2
H 22
P3
0
P4 = H 42
Q2
J 22
Q3
0
H 33
H 43
0
J 33
H 24
H 34
H 44
N 22
N 33
N 43
N 42
J 24
J 34
L22
0
L33
2
3
4
(8.29)
U 2 U 2
U 3 U 3
P2
H 22
Q2
J 22
P3 = 0
Q3
0
P4
H 42
N 22
L22
0
0
N 42
519
2
U 2 U 2
L33
H 24
J 24
H 34
J 34
N 43
H 44
0
H 33
0
N 33
J 33
H 43
3
U 3 U 3
(8.30)
P1 , Q1 P2 ,Q 2
1
P3 , Q 3 P4 , Q 4
( )
U ( ) (G
n
p 1
ik
k =1, k i
(8.32)
where:
Qimin = Qgimin Qcisp , Qimax = Qgimax Qcisp , i g
considering the existence of the specified reactive powers, consumed at the nodes g.
520
U isp U i
0.001
Ui
(8.33)
Qi = Qimax ; U i U isp ;
U isp U i
0.001
Ui
(8.34)
U i
, i c
i , i c g;
Ui
( p)
(8.35)
i( p ) = i( p 1) + i( p ) , i c g
( p)
( p)
( p 1) U i
U
U
U i( p 1) , i c
=
+
i
i
(8.36)
ic g
ic
(8.37)
where the specified errors P and Q have usually a unique value, comprised in
the interval 0.001 0.05 MW/MVAr.
521
The experience of power flow computation by N-R method shows that the
convergence can be ameliorated by using a start method, e.g., Seidel-Gauss during
23 iterations before Newtons approximations.
In order to coherently describe the algorithm of the N-R method, the
following supplementary notations are introduced:
MaxApp maximum number of approximations, usually adopted of values
in the interval 2030;
MaxP maximum absolute value of the nodal active power error.
MaxQ maximum absolute value of the nodal reactive power error.
Ir indicator regarding the treatment of the PU-nodes:
Ir = 1 , if the restrictions on reactive power are verified;
Ir = 1 , if the restrictions on reactive power are not verified.
App number of approximations in which the PU-nodes are maintained in
the set g;
LimDiv limit of the absolute active and reactive power error, over which
the computational process is considered as divergent. It is usually adopted
of values in the interval 104106 MW/MVAr.
Further, the most used algorithm of the N-R method is detailed, as follows:
1. Initialization of iterative process:
Initialization of approximation counter: p = 1;
Initialization of nodal voltages:
U i = 1, i c; U i = U isp U in , i g; i = 0, i c g
Initialization of maximum power error values: MaxP = MaxQ = 0.
2. While (MaxP > P or MaxQ > Q ) or (p < 3) execute repeatedly the
following sequence:
2.1. Compute the active and reactive nodal powers using relations (8.24);
2.2. Compute the left-hand side vector from (8.26), using relations (8.22);
2.3. Compute maximum nodal power errors:
MaxP = max Pi and MaxQ = max Qi
ic g
ic
522
2 x 400
MVA
2 x 400
MVA
AT 1
400 kV
Pc2 + jQc2
AT 2
220 kV
4
Pc4 + jQc4
Pc3 + jQc3
Q g4
Type
of node
1
2
3
4
slack
PQ
PQ
PU
Pgi
Q gi
Pci
Qci
Q gimin
Q gimax
Ui
MW
0
0
0
0
MVAr
0
0
0
Qg 4
MW
0
420
320
300
MVAr
0
140
130
150
MVAr
-100
MVAr
100
kV
400
400
220
225
523
(8.38)
Type of link
1-2
1-3
2-4
3-4
The autotransformers AT1 and AT2 are of the same type, with the catalogue data:
Nominal apparent power:
Sn = 400 MVA
Primary nominal voltage:
Up = 400 kV
Secondary nominal voltage:
Us = 231 kV
Percentage voltage under short-circuit test:
u sc = 11.5%
Active power losses under short-circuit test:
Pscnom = 1,020 kW
i0 = 0.5%
P0 = 290 kW
wn = 13, Up = 1.25%
AT1 and AT2 operate with nominal transformation ratio N = 400/231 =1.7316. The
parameters of the equivalent circuits, corresponding to the network links were first
calculated in physical units [S], as indicated in chapters 1 and 2. They are given in Table 8.3.
524
12
13
23
34
0.0063518 - j 0.0610677
0.0009636 - j 0.0434569
0.0009636 - j 0.0434569
0.0090899 - j 0.0553413
ik
ik 0
=y
N ik
ki 0
j 0.0003555
0.0000018 - j 0.0000125
0.0000018 - j 0.0000125
j 0.0002369
1
1.7316
1.7316
1
ki 0
The errors from the convergence test (8.38) were chosen of values:
P = 0.05 MW, Q = 0.05 MVAr .
To perform the per unit computation, the following base quantities were chosen:
base apparent power: Sbase =100 MVA;
Y 22 =
Y 33 =
Y =
44
(y
(y
((y
((y
12
12
+y
120
+ y 210
+ y 310
13
24
)U /S
+ y + y )U /S
)N + y + y )U
)N + y + y )U
+y +y
+ y 420
13
24
2
13
2
24
130
240
34
34
2
1b
2
2b
340
430
base
= 11.70755 j166.6906
base
= 11.70755 j166.6906
2
3b /S base
2
4b /S base
= 5.80057 j89.75537
(8.39)
= 5.80057 j89.75537
(8.40)
400
400
220
225
= 1, U 2 =
= 1, U 3 =
= 1, U 4sp =
= 1.02273
400
400
220
220
and the per unit specified nodal powers are obtained with the relations:
(8.41)
Pg 2 Pc 2
Sb
525
320
300
0 420
= 4.2, P3sp =
= 3.2, P4sp =
= 3.0
100
100
100
Q2sp =
140
130
= 1.4, Q3sp =
= 1.3
100
100
(8.42)
0.05
= 0.0005, and
100
(8.43)
For the particular network, studied here, the expressions (8.24) of the nodal powers,
to which the expression of Q4 is added, are:
P2 = G22U 22 + U 2U1 [G21cos( 2 1 ) + B21sin ( 2 1 )] +
2
Q2 = B22U 2 + U 2U1 [G21sin ( 2 1 ) B21cos( 2 1 )] +
2
Q3 = B33U 3 + U 3U1 [G31sin (3 1 ) B31cos(3 1 )] +
P = G U 2 + U U [G cos( ) + B sin ( )] +
44 4
4 2
42
4
2
42
4
2
4
+ U 4U 3 [G43cos( 4 3 ) + B43sin ( 4 3 )]
2
Q4 = B44U 4 + U 4U 2 [G42sin ( 4 2 ) B42 cos( 4 2 )] +
+ U 4U 3 [G43sin ( 4 3 ) B43cos( 4 3 )]
(8.44)
where 1 = 0, U 4 = U 4sp = 1.02273, and the parameters G and B represent the real and
imaginary parts from (8.39), (8.40).
In each Newton-Raphson p-approximation, the linear matrix equation (8.26), of the
general form:
A ( p ) x( p ) = b ( p )
(8.45)
is solved, as shown in Appendix 1. Here, A(p) is the Jacobian matrix, x(p) the unknown
vector of corrections, and b(p) the right-hand side vector, whose elements represent the
actual errors of the nodal powers, used in the convergence test.
The first estimation of the main unknowns is:
(20 ) = 0 , U 2(0 ) = 1, 3(0 ) = 0 , U 3(0 ) = 1, (40 ) = 0
(8.46)
(8.47)
526
(8.48)
igc
ic
( )
H 22 =
P2
= Q2(1) B22 U 2(0 )
2
N 22 =
P2 (0 )
U = P2(1) + G22 U 2(0 )
U 2 2
J 22 =
Q2
= P2(1) G22 U 2(0 )
2
L22 =
Q2 (0 )
U = Q2(1) B22 U 2(0 )
U 2 2
H 33 =
P3
= Q3(1) B33 U 3(0 )
3
N 33 =
P3 (0 )
U = P3(1) + G33 U 3(0 )
U 3 3
J 33 =
Q3
= P3(1) G33 U 3(0 )
3
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
2
Q3 (0 )
U 3 = Q3(1) B33 U 3(0 ) = 3.85861 ( 89.75537 ) 12 = 85.8968
U 3
2
P
= 4 = Q4(1) B44 U 4sp = 1.23746 ( 89.75537 ) 1.022732 = 95.119
4
L33 =
H 44
( )
H 24 =
)]
P2
= U 2(0 ) U 4sp G24 sin (20 ) (40 ) B24 cos (20 ) (40 ) =
4
)]
Q2
= U 2(0 ) U 4sp G24 cos (20 ) (40 ) + B24 sin (20 ) (40 ) =
4
527
)]
P3
= U 3(0 ) U 4sp G34 sin 3(0 ) (40 ) B34 cos 3(0 ) (40 ) =
4
)]
Q3
= U 3(0 ) U 4sp G34 cos 3(0 ) (40 ) + B34 sin 3(0 ) (40 ) =
4
)]
P4
=U 4sp U 2(0 ) G42 sin (40 ) (20 ) B42 cos (40 ) (20 ) =
2
)]
P4 (0 )
U = U 4sp U 2(0 ) G42 cos (40 ) (20 ) + B42 sin (40 ) (20 ) =
U 2 2
)]
P4
= U 4sp U 3(0 ) G43 sin (40 ) 3(0 ) B43 cos (40 ) 3(0 ) =
3
)]
P4 (0 )
U = U 4sp U 3(0 ) G43 cos (40 ) 3(0 ) + B43 sin (40 ) 3(0 ) =
U 3 3
The obtained Jacobian matrix, denoted here A(1) , has the following form, as shown
in equation (8.30):
2
2
3
4
165.4334
-11.6646
0
0
-67.7250
3
11.7505
167.9478
0
0
-1.5017
0
0
93.6140
-5.9678
-27.3939
0
0
5.6333
85.8968
-4.4995
4
-67.7250
1.5017
-27.3939
-4.4995
95.1190
0
0
0
0
0.4094
0.0196
67.7250
0
0
3.2735
0
0
93.6140
5.6333 27.3939
0.0637 86.2559
2.7531
0.2926 0.0331
59.5327
528
4.24295
(21)
2.95637
(1) 0.01933
(U 2 U 2 )
= 0.06153
y (1) = 3.03272 , x (1) =
3(1)
(1)
(U 3 U 3 ) 0.03040
2.36527
0.09330
5.55430
(41)
and the new approximate values of the voltage magnitudes and phase-angles result:
(21) = (20 ) + (21) = 0 + ( 0.06247 ) = 0.06247
(8.49)
After two approximations of the nodal powers, the reactive power at node 4 is
P2(2 ) P2sp
(2 ) sp
Q2 Q2
b (2 ) = P3(2 ) = P3sp
(2 ) sp
Q3 Q3
P (2 ) P sp
4 4
Q2(2 ) 1.4 + 1.13105 0.26895
P3(2 ) = 3.2 + 3.28434 = 0.08434
Q3(2 ) 1.3 + 1.07533 0.22467
P4(2 ) 3.0 + 2.98259 0.01741
igc
ic
161.4410
-15.3537
0
0
-66.3392
3
7.1651
159.1789
0
0
-3.5192
0
0
96.3707
-9.4429
-28.0652
0
0
2.8743
94.2200
-5.5306
4
-66.4300
-0.5752
-28.3597
3.7373
94.4044
529
0.00091135
(22 )
(2 ) 0.00178045
(U 2 U 2 )
= 0.00070312
x (2 ) =
3(2 )
(2 )
(U 3 U 3 ) 0.00228166
0.00081853
(42 )
and the reactive power at node 4, Q4(3) = 0.33226 , does not verify the condition (8.43). It
follows that, further, the node 4 will be treated as a PQ-node, having the specified reactive
power Q sp = 0.5 , and the quantity U sp becomes U (2 ) .
4
In consequence, the dimension of equation (8.45) increases by a unity, and the error
vector of the nodal powers becomes:
P2(3) P2sp
(3) sp
Q2 Q2
P (3) P sp
b (3) = 3(3) = 3sp
Q3 Q3
P (3) P sp
4 4
Q4(3) Q4sp
As it can be seen,
max Pi(3) = P2(3) = 0.00021 < P , max Qi(3) = Q4(3) = 0.1634 > Q
igc
ic
hence, the convergence test is not verified because of passing node 4 from g to c.
This time, the Jacobian A(3) has a new configuration, as:
530
161.1390
-15.4191
0
0
-66.2214
3.5066
3
7.0196
158.3401
0
0
-3.5066
-66.2214
0
0
96.1604
-9.3307
-27.9927
5.5605
4
0
0
2.9304
93.5615
-5.5605
-27.9927
-66.43118
-0.5679
-28.3007
3.6858
94.2142
-9.0671
0.5679
-66.3118
-3.6858
-28.3007
3.0673
93.5489
(23)
(3)
(U 2 U 2 ) 0.00121663
3(3)
0.00007567
x (3) =
(3) =
(
)
U 3 U 3 0.00089600
( 3 ) 0.00002365
4
(U U )(3) 0.00291408
4
4
Q2(4 ) 1.4 + 1.3999971 0.0000029
P3(4 ) 3.2 + 3.1999894 0.0000106
=
=
Q3(4 ) 1.3 + 1.2999992 0.0000008
P4(4 ) 3.0 + 2.9999728 0.0000272
(8.51)
531
Since
max Pi(4 ) = P4(4 ) = 0.0000028 < P , max Qi(4 ) = Q4(4 ) = 0.000491 < Q
igc
ic
it follows that, in fact, the convergence have been reached after three approximations.
The per unit values of (8.51), representing the final result, are given in physical units
in the next table, together with the voltages, expressed in physical units.
Table 8.4
i
Node
i
1
2
3
4
radians
0
-0.063308
-0.060906
-0.094096
Ui
degrees
0
-3.627
-3.490
-5.391
pu
1.00000
0.97772
1.02713
1.01975
kV
400.00
391.09
225.97
224.34
The other quantities of interest: power flows, power losses, reactive power of line
capacitances may be directly calculated by using the formulae from the subsections 2.3.2.3,
2.3.2.5, with the values from Table 8.4 and parameters from Table 8.3. The results are
presented in Table 8.5.
Table 8.5
Branch
i-k
12
13
24
34
Pik
MW
629.01
417.88
204.54
96.69
Qik
MVAr
116.90
156.88
45.06
-5.54
Pki
MW
-624.53
-416.68
-203.84
-96.16
Qki
MVAr
-185.04
-124.45
-34.71
-15.24
Pik
MW
4.48
1.20
0.7
0.53
Qik
MVAr
43.12
32.43
10.35
3.24
Qikcap
MVAr
111.26
0
0
24.02
[P ] = [H][]
(8.52)
532
[Q] = [L] U
(8.53)
ik k
, i c g
(8.54)
U i
U k
+
Lik
, i c
U i k i , k c
Uk
(8.55)
k i
k c g
Qi = Lii
become:
(8.56)
By replacing expressions (8.56) into the equations (8.54) and (8.55), the
following sets of equations are obtained:
Pi
= BiiU i i
BikU k k , i c g
Ui
k i , k c g
(8.57)
n
Qi
= Bii U i
Bik U k , i c
Ui
k i , k c
(8.58)
533
(8.59)
where Bii' and Bik' are calculated using only the branch reactances.
2) In equation (8.58), those network elements, which do not significantly
influence the reactive power flows, are neglected:
branch conductances;
phase-shifter regulation, considering only voltage regulation by
transformer taps.
In this case, the right-hand side coefficients in equation (8.58) are denoted
and calculated by the relations:
(8.60)
It follows that the equations (8.57) and (8.58) can be written in matrix form:
P
U = [B'][]
(8.61)
Q
U = [B"][U ]
(8.62)
534
In conformity with the XB-variant, the elements of the matrix [B'] are computed in
function of the network series reactances. Thus, from Table 8.2 and autotransformer data, it
results:
Reactance of line 1 2:
x12 = 0.324 100 / 2 = 16.2
Reactance of line 3 4:
x34 = 0.414 85 / 2 = 17.595
11.5 400 2
= 23
100 2 400
from Table 8.3 become y = j bik = j (1 xik ), i k , for
ik
535
U 22b
400 2
= ( 0.061728 0.043478)
= 168.331
100
Sb
'
2
B33
= b34 + b13 N13
'
B44
)US
2
3b
220 2
= 90.605
100
'
B33
'
'
B24
= B42
= b24 N 24
'
'
B34
= B43
= b34
U 2bU 4b
400 220
= 0.043478 1.7316
= 66.253
100
Sb
U 3bU 4b
220 220
= 0.056834
= 27.508
100
Sb
[B'] = 0
B'
42
0
'
B33
'
B43
'
0
66.252
B24
168.331
'
0
90.605 27.508
B34 =
'
66.252 27.508
90.605
B44
The result of the LU-factorization of the matrix [B'] , stored in the same matrix is:
0
66.252
168.331
0
90.605 27.508
0.394 0.304
56.178
Computation and factorization of the matrix [B"]
The elements of this matrix are associated only to the PQ-nodes, namely 2 and 3. In
the XB-variant, the matrix [B"] is of 22-dimension, having the non-zero elements,
determined from (8.39):
"
"
B22
= Im(Y 22 ) = 166.691, B33
= Im(Y 33 ) = 89.755
so that
"
[B"] = B22
0
0
0 166.691
=
"
89.755
B33 0
0
89
.
755 U 3
3 3
(8.63)
536
It can be easily observed that, the matrix [B"] is already factorized, and the solution
of (8.63) can be directly expressed as:
Q2
1
U 2 = 166.691 U
Q
1
3
U =
3 89.755 U 3
(8.64)
(8.65)
(8.66)
(1)
(1)
sp
P3 = P3 P3 = 3.2 + 0.16728 = 3.03272
(1)
(1)
sp
P4 = P4 P4 = 3.0 0.06601 = 3.06601
Since max Pi(1) = P1(1) = 4.24295 > P , the convergence test on the active powers
ig c
is not verified.
The components of the left-hand side vector from (8.61) result:
P2
U
2
P3
U
3
(1)
P2(1)
4.24295
= 4.24295
1
P3(1)
3.03272
= 3.03272
1
P4(1)
3.06601
= 2.99787
1.02273
(1)
P4
U
4
(1)
U 2(0 )
U 3(0 )
U 4(sp )
(1)
(0 )
(1)
3 = 3 + 3 = 0 + ( 0.06367 ) = 0.06367
(1)
(0 )
(1)
4 = 4 + 4 = 0 + ( 0.09948) = 0.09948
(8.67)
537
With the angle values (8.67) and available voltage magnitudes, the new values of the
nodal reactive powers, computed with expressions (8.44) are:
Q2(1) = 2.10216, Q (1) = 3.77449
(8.68)
Since max Qi(1) = Q2(1) = 3.50216 > Q , the convergence test on the reactive
ic
U
2
(1)
Q3
U
3
Q2(1)
=
U (0 )
2
(1)
Q3(1)
3.50216
= 3.50216
1
=
U (0 )
3
2.47449
= 2.47449
1
Q2
3.50216
1
U 2(1) =
=
= 0.02101
166.691 U 2
166.691
(1)
(1)
Q3
1
2.47449
=
= 0.02757
U 3 =
89.755 U 3
89.755
(8.69)
(8.70)
(2 )
(2 )
sp
P3 = P3 P3 = 3.2 + 3.32365 = 0.12365
(2 )
(2 )
sp
P4 = P4 P4 = 3.0 + 3.35836 = 0.35836
Since max Pi(2 ) = P4(2 ) = 0.35836 > P , the convergence test on active powers is
ig c
not verified.
538
U
2
(2 )
P3
U
3
P4
U4
P2(2 )
0.19867
=
= 0.20293
0.97899
U 2(1)
(2 )
P3(2 )
0.12365
= 0.12033
1.02757
P4(2 )
0.35836
= 0.35040
1.02273
(2 )
U 3(1)
U 4sp
(2 )
(1)
(2 )
3 = 3 + 3 = 0.06367 + 0.00299 = 0.06068
(2 )
(1)
(2 )
4 = 4 + 4 = 0.09948 + 0.00547 = 0.09401
(8.71)
(8.72)
and the reactive power at the node 4 is Q4(2 ) = 0.32408 . This value, computed after two
approximations, does not verify the restriction (8.43). Hence, the node 4 is to be treated as a
PQ-node with the specified reactive power Q4sp = 0.5 . In this case, the quantity U 4sp
becomes U (41) .
(8.73)
Since max Qi(2 ) = Q4(2 ) = 0.17592 > Q , the convergence test on the reactive
ic
"
"
B24
= B42
= Im(Y 24 ) = 66.22
"
"
B34
= B43
= Im(Y 34 ) = 26.785
539
so that
"
B22
[B"] = 0
B"
42
"
B24
66.220
0
166.691
"
B34 =
0
89.755 26.785
"
66.220 26.785
B44
89.755
0
"
B33
"
B43
0.3973 0.2984
55.455
U
2
(2 )
Q3
U
3
Q4
U4
Q2(2 )
Q3(2 )
U 2(1)
(2 )
(2 )
0.01104
= 0.1128
0.97899
0.04393
=
= 0.042752
1.02757
U 3(1)
Q4(2 )
1.17592
=
= 1.14979
1.02273
U 4(1)
(2 )
(1)
(2 )
U 3 = U 3 + U 3 = 1.02757 0.00567 = 1.02190
(2 )
(1)
(2 )
U 4 = U 4 + U 4 = 1.02273 0.02058 = 1.00215
(8.74)
Because the computational process is, further, similarly repeated, the main numerical
results of each approximation, beginning from the third one, are presented in the Table 8.6.
For lack of space, it was necessary to give up the variables and U , which,
otherwise, can be easily calculated inspecting the table.
Likewise, based on voltage magnitudes from Table 8.6, it is not difficult to verify the
conditions (8.34) for p = 3 and p = 4, and to conclude that the node 4 cannot return to the
PU-nodes.
Table 8.6 contains also the answers No and Yes to the convergence tests referred
to the active (CP) and reactive (CQ) nodal power errors.
Considering the volume of calculation, the convergence has been reached after less
than five approximations.
The final results, marked by F in the Table 8.6, are given in per unit and physical
units in the Table 8.7. It is observed that the results are, practically, identical to those
obtained by N-R method, presented in the Table 8.4.
540
Table 8.6
Approximation p
4
5
P2( p )
-4.28080
-4.14351
-4.19749
-4.19994
P3( p )
-3.13342
-3.25052
-3.19863
-3.20005
P4( p )
-2.99030
-2.99994
-3.00167
-3.00003
P2( p )
0.08080
-0.05649
-0.00251
-0.00006
P3( p )
-0.06658
0.05052
-0.00137
0.00005
P4( p )
-0.00970
-0.00006
-0.00167
0.00003
CP
No
No
No
Yes
(2p )
-0.06289
-0.06329
-0.063304 F
3( p )
-0.06138
-0.06088
-0.060894 F
(4p )
-0.09395
-0.09409
-0.094086 F
Q 2( p )
-1.39587
-1.40397
-1.39993
Q3( p )
-1.28338
-1.31388
-1.30014
Q 4( p )
-1.47390
-0.50470
-0.50021
Q 2( p )
-0.00413
0.00397
0.00007
Q3( p )
-0.01622
0.01388
0.00014
Q 4( p )
0.97390
0.00470
0.00021
CQ
No
No
Yes
U 2( p )
0.97763
0.97773 F
U 3( p )
1.02691
1.02713 F
U 4( p )
1.01956
1.01973 F
Table 8.7
Node
i
1
2
3
4
radians
0
-0.063304
-0.060894
-0.094086
Ui
degrees
0
-3.627
-3.489
-5.391
pu
1.00000
0.97773
1.02713
1.01973
kV
400.00
391.09
225.97
224.34
541
BikU inU kn
kcg , k i
(i k ) , i c g
(8.75)
In the per unit computation, the expressions (8.75) get the form:
Pi =
Bik
kcg , k i
k ) , i c g
or in matrix form:
[P] = [C][]
(8.76)
Bik
kcg , k i
, i c g , Cik = Bik , i, k c g , k i
After solving equation (8.76) for [], the active power flow on each branch
(i, k) results:
Pik = Bik (i k )
(8.77)
In addition, considering an average value of the power factor in the network,
an approximate evaluation of the active power losses can be obtained.
Application 3
The DC method will be applied in order to find active power flows in the network,
described in Application 1. The per unit computation will be performed.
By using only the network series reactances, the matrix equation (8.76) may be
written as a set of equations:
542
where:
U 2bU1b
1 400 400
= 98.765
B21 = B12 = b12 S
16.2
100
b
'
B24 = B42 = B24 = 66.253
B = B = B = B = 66.253
31
24
42
13
'
B34 = B43 = B34 = 27.508
'
'
where the parameters b12 , B24
, B34
have been calculated in Application 2.
In the matrix form (8.76), the coefficient matrix is:
B21 + B24
[C] = 0
B42
0
B31 + B34
B43
0
B24 165.018
66.253
93.760 27.508
B34 = 0
B42 + B43 66.253 27.508
93.760
and the vectors, containing angles and specified nodal active powers, are:
2
P2
4.2
P4
3.0
[] = 3 , [P] = P3 = 3.2
By factorising matrix [C] , the equation (8.76) is solved for [] . The following
values, in radians, are obtained:
2 = 0.0637, 3 = 0.0621, 4 = 0.0952
The per unit active power flows, resulted from (8.77) are:
P12 = B12 (1 2 ) = 98.765 (0 + 0.0637 ) = 6.2885
The final results, including angles in degrees and active powers in MW are given in
the next tables.
Table 8.8
Node
i
1
2
3
4
radians
0
-0.0637
-0.0621
-0.0952
degrees
0
-3.650
-3.557
-5.457
Table 8.9
Branch
i-k
12
13
24
34
Pik
pu
6.2885
4.1115
2.0885
0.9115
MW
628.85
411.15
208.85
91.15
543
544
Equation (8.62) from the fast decoupled method is replaced by the equation:
[(P + Q ) / U ] = [B][U ]
(8.79)
(8.80)
Also, in order to limit the effect of large values of Gik in computing the value
(8.81)
(Pi i Qi ) =
(Qi + i Pi ) =
1
ik k
1
ik U k
i c
(8.82)
where i = rik xik = Gik Bik , and k stands for the set of nodes adjacent to the
node i. If the assumption of constant value of r/x branch ratio, convergent to the
PQ-nodes, is not true, a mean value can be used, e.g.,
n
Gik
i =
k =1; k i
Bik , i c
k =1; k i
(8.83)
By neglecting the term Nik from the first relation (8.25), corresponding to the
nodes i g it is obtained:
Pi =
545
ik k
, ig
(8.84)
'
f
= I sf + I f , f F
546
Isf
If
IF
F
F
a.
b.
[Y EE ] [Y EF ] [U E ] [I E ]
= '
[Y ] [Y ]
I F
FF [ U F ]
FE
[ ]
(8.85)
[Y EE ][U E ] + [Y EF ][U F ] = [I E ]
'
[Y FE ][U E ] + [Y FF ][U F ] = I F
[ ]
(8.86)
547
be obtained. Thus, expressing [U E ] explicitly from the first equation (8.86), and
then replacing it into the second one, it results:
{[Y
FF
(8.87)
representing the nodal matrix equation of the Ward equivalent. It can be written in
the general form:
[Y ][U
r
FF
] = [I'F ] + [I EF ]
(8.88)
in which the nodal admittance matrix of the reduced network, denoted by the
superscript r, results:
[Y ] = [Y
r
FF
FF
] [Y FE ][Y EE ]1 [Y EF ]
(8.89)
while the complex vector of the supplementary currents, injected at the F-nodes,
given by the relation:
[I EF ] = [Y FE ][Y EE ]1 [I E ]
(8.90)
contains the currents, transferred from the eliminated E-nodes to the boundary
nodes.
r
Practically, the admittance matrix Y FF is obtained by using the Gauss
elimination technique, applied to the
E-nodes in equation (8.85). As observed,
IEF
this operation does not involve knowledge
of the vector [U E ] , and can be performed
[ ]
[ ]
this case, the complex vector [I EF ] results from (8.88). This possibility is very
548
convenient especially when the complex nodal powers at E-nodes change, whilst
the topology and parameters of the external network remains unchanged.
The WI equivalent presents some inconveniences, as follows:
its construction requires information about all the external network data;
r
its nodal admittance matrix Y FF is a full matrix;
[ ]
yi0 =
Si
*
Ui
Pi Qi
*
Ui
, iE
549
Ii
IF
IF
y i0
a.
b.
Fig. 8.6. Linearization of the E-nodes.
2. Forming the ZPB network by detaching the above shunt admittances from
the ground, the node 0 remaining of zero voltage, and attaching a new branch Oe
whose extremity e is the equivalent node (Fig. 8.7). The complex power and
current, injected at the node e, must be equal to the sum of complex powers
respectively currents, injected at the E-nodes:
Se =
P + jQ ,
i
iE
Ie =
iE
iE
Ue =
Se
*
Ie
y i0
y 0e
Ue
M
F
Ie
E
Fig. 8.7. Forming the ZPB network.
S e . Therefore the branch Oe must be calibrated such that its losses be equal and
in opposite sign to quantity S e :
*
y 0e =
Se
U e2
Thus, the balance of power between nodes i E and node e is equal to zero.
The nodal matrix equation of the external system, extended with ZPB
network, can be written as:
550
[Y EE ]
[Y ]
0E
[Y FE ]
[0]
[Y E 0 ] [Y EF ] [0] [U E ] [0]
[0] Y 0e 0 0
Y 00
=
[0] [Y FF ] [0] [U F ] [I 'F ]
[0] Y ee U e I e
Y e0
(8.91)
where
Y 00 = y 0e
y
iE
i0
, Y 0e = Y e 0 = y 0e , Y ee = y 0e
[ ] [Y ] [U
[ ] Y U
Y rFF
r
Y eF
r
Fe
r
ee
F
e
[ ]
I 'F
=
I e
(8.92)
corresponding to reduced network of the REI model (Fig. 8.8), in which the
remainder nodes are e and F. Thus, the state of the eliminated E-nodes is now
synthetically described by the node e.
IF
Ue
Se
F
Fig. 8.8. The REI equivalent with one REI-node.
[ ]
r
551
g
IF
c
a.
01
02
G
IF
C
b.
Application 4
Calculate the contingencies in a studied network belonging to the network TEST,
given in Appendix 2, by using the REI-Dimo equivalent with one fictitious node for the
external network.
The studied network, chosen as shown in Figure 8.10, contains the nodes 1, 10, 11,
12, 13, whilst the external network contains the other 8 nodes.
Starting from the reference power flow, calculated with data from Appendix 2, the
ZPB network, including the node 0 and the fictitious node e = 14, was built. It is
represented by dotted lines in Figure 8.10.
Further, by using Gauss elimination of the nodes 2, , 9 and 0, the REI equivalent is
obtained. It is attached to the studied network, as shown in Figure 8.11.
The contingency analysis was performed considering the outage of the following
elements in the studied network: line 11-12, line 1-10, and generator group at node 11. The
calculation have been carried out on the complete network TEST, as well as in case of
using the REI model of the external network. The results, including the reference power
flow, are centralized in the Table 8.10.
The use of the REI model leads to the errors, denoted by , and determined for each
branch with the formula:
552
P Pext
S lim
100
where: P
is the active/reactive power flow in the branches of the studied network, when
the network TEST is completely represented;
Pext the active/reactive power flow in the branches of the studied network, when
the network TEST is represented by the REI model;
Slim the thermal limit of the apparent power for a given line (see Imax from
Appendix 2).
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
e=14
Se
10
1
12
~
11
13
Ie
14(e)
y 10,1
y 1,14
y 1,10
10
1
12
~
13
11
-59.8
19.8
-78.4
-14.9
33.9
41.8
115.3
56.9
160.6
-58.8
57.5
94.1
1 - 12
(2)
1 - 10
10 - 11
11 - 12
11 - 13
12 - 13
-59.8
MVAr
115.3
MW
Base case
1 - 12
(1)
Lines
132.4
19.8
140.4
74.8
125.5
125.5
MW
39.1
40.4
-84.5
15.9
-57.2
-57.2
MVAr
Complete
network
132.4
19.9
140.3
73.9
125.9
125.9
MW
39.1
40.4
-84.2
16.4
-56.7
-56.7
MVAr
Using
REI model
Outage of line 11 - 12
105.1
46.6
-91.9
200.8
-95.6
-95.6
MW
41.4
35.1
-10
-92.4
-53.9
-53.9
MVAr
Complete
network
102.6
49.4
-84.0
191.4
101.2
101.2
MW
41.9
36.0
-10.1
-99.3
-46.7
-46.7
MVAr
Using
REI model
112.6
39.4
112.6
150.0
66.2
120.7
120.7
MW
51
26.6
-34.4
-73.2
22.3
-59.9
-59.9
MVAr
Complete
network
112.2
43.6
108.9
144.3
66.3
120.8
120.8
MW
52.2
48.6
5.1
-89.2
23.4
-63
-63
MVAr
Using
REI model
Table 8.10
554
It is easily to find that the obtained errors are generally small. They take values less
than 1% for line contingencies. Related to these, the errors for group contingency are larger,
taking values in the intervals 0.03-1.29% for P and 0.03-11.85% for Q .
M Ii
Nie
Iei e I
e
Ue
M
F
1
I , iE
* ei
N ie
(8.93)
reflecting the invariance of the complex apparent power at passage from the
primary side to the secondary one.
The voltage U e may be arbitrary chosen providing that its value be different
of zero, and then the quantities N ie , i E are calculated from the first equations
(8.93). Also, it can be observed that the complex apparent power, injected at the
node e, is equal to the sum of the complex apparent powers, injected at the
E-nodes.
Under the above conditions, the reduced network will keep only the nodes e
and F, and the problem is the search for its nodal equations. For that purpose, the
following procedure can be performed:
1. The matrix equations (8.86) of the original unreduced external system are
written in the form:
555
I i = Y ik U k + Y if U f , i E
kE
f F
'
I f = Y fi U i + Y ff U f , f F
iE
(8.94)
I ei = Y ik N *ie N ke U e + Y if N *ie U f , i E
k E
f F
'
I f = Y fi N ie U e + Y ff U f , f F
iE
3. Since I e =
ei
(8.95)
iE
*
*
Y ik N ie N ke U e +
Y if N ie U f
I e =
iE f F
iE kE
'
I = Y N U + Y U , f F
ff
f
f iE fi ie e
(8.96)
I e = Y ee U e + Y ef U f
f F
'
I = Y U + Y U , f F
fe
ff
e
f
f
(8.97)
*
Y ik N ie N ke
Y ee =
iE k E
*
Y ef = Y if N ie , f F
iE
Y = Y N , f F
fi
ie
fe
iE
(8.98)
The expressions (8.98) point out a simple and direct way to calculate
EIT admittances. The equivalent configuration is outlined in Figure 8.13 where the
shunt admittances are also shown. Their expressions are:
Y e 0 = Y ee
ef
f F
f0
=Y
ff
Y fe , f F
556
IF
Yfe Yef
Yf0
e Ie
Ye0
557
'
y0 f =
S f
U 2f
'
, f F; y 0e =
S F
U e2
O
Sf
Se
Se
e
F
a.
b.
Fig. 8.14. Updating the REI equivalent.
S
f F
558
S e = S e + S F
3. Complete information on the external network, together with a reference
power flow, is available. In this case, a new reduced model of the external system,
as WI, REI or EIT, is constructed, and then will be updated by fictitious injections
of power at the boundary nodes each time when their state change, as indicated at
the point 2.
Appendix 8.1
SPECIFIC ASPECTS OF THE POWER FLOW COMPUTATION
OF LARGE ELECTRIC NETWORKS
The power flow computation represents a problem that can be as a principle solved
by the methods, exposed in the chapters 2 and 8. Mathematically, by linearizing and,
sometimes, particularizing a nonlinear system of equations, this problem is reduced to the
solving of a linear system. At the first view, solving such a system does not imply
difficulties, since the classical methods from the linear system theory can be used.
However, the power flow computation for the great networks, having usually the
number of nodes by hundreds, even by thousands, necessitates taking into account some
specific aspects regarding algorithm programming in a given frame of computer
performances. These aspects are shown in the following.
Formalizing the problem and transforming the real network into an ideal one
One of major preoccupations of the programmers is that to implement algorithms,
able to be applied to as great as possible number of networks. For that purpose, the
networks must be uniquely described. This means:
Formalizing the problem; the action consists in working the entering data so that
they be easily and coherently recognized by an implemented algorithm;
Transforming the real network into an ideal one by modifying the network
topology in order to simulate the shutting of coupling devices and to transform the
parallel branches into a single one.
Memorizing (storing) the sparse matrices
For a network with n nodes and l links, the nodal admittance matrix contains
complex elements from which only n diagonal and 2 l off-diagonal elements are nonzero. The filling coefficient of this matrix is defined by the ratio of the sum of non-zero
elements to the total number of elements:
n + 2l
=
(A.1)
n2
In the great electric power networks the ratio l / n has an average value of 1.3. By
replacing this value in (A.1), it results = 3.6 / n. Hence, for the networks whose number
of nodes is comprised between 100 and 1000, the quantity takes values between 3.6% and
0.36%. It follows that the memorizing and computing effort can be spectacularly reduced if
the sparsity of the nodal admittance matrix and Jacobian will be taken into consideration in
algorithm programming.
Memorizing these matrices implies memorizing the diagonal and non-zero offdiagonal elements, as well as the matrix structure, as follows:
559
The diagonal elements are stored into a complex n-dimensional vector for nodal
admittance matrix, and into sub-matrices of dimension 22 for Jacobian (denoted
YD, and respectively JD);
The non-zero off-diagonal elements are stored into a complex 2l-dimensional
vector for nodal admittance matrix, and into sub-matrices of dimension 22 for
Jacobian (denoted YND, and respectively JND).
The matrix structure (common for both above mentioned matrices) is stored by using
three chain-coupled lists, usually named LOC, KOL and NEXT. The dimension and stored
information of these vectors are given below:
LOC n-dimensional vector of integer numbers. For the current node i, the order
number of the first link of i is k = LOC(i), whilst YD(i) and JD(i) respectively, store the
diagonal elements of the respective matrices;
KOL 2l-dimensional vector of integer numbers. For the current link i j,
corresponding to the position m in the list of branches, the order numbers of the nodes i and
j are: KOL(2m) = j and KOL(2m+1) = i. The values of this link are stored in the
corresponding positions 2m, 2m+1 of YND and JND, respectively;
NEXT 2l-dimensional vector of integer numbers. For each node, the order
(increasing or decreasing) of node links is stored in the vector NEXT.
To illustrate the technique of storing the nodal admittance matrix with the aid of the
chain-coupled lists, a network structure with 6 nodes and 7 branches is considered, as
shown in Figure A.1.1, where the matrix Y nn , and a certain order of branch reading are
specified.
1
Order of
branch
reading:
1.
25
2.
63
3.
14
4.
12
5.
56
6.
62
7.
64
Y11
Y12
Y21
Y22
3
4
Y25
Y26
Y14
Y36
Y33
Y44
Y41
Y52
Y62
Y63
Y64
Y46
Y55
Y56
Y65
Y66
In conformity with the above definitions, the structure and admittance vectors are
filled in, as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
YD
11
22
33
44
55
66
LOC
1
5
2
1
YND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14
Y 25 Y 52 Y 63 Y 36 Y 14 Y 41 Y 12 Y 21 Y 56 Y 65 Y 62 Y 26 Y 64 Y 46
KOL
1
5
2
2
3
4
3
3
4
6
4
6
5
2
5
4
6
3
6
1
7
2
8
1
9
6
10
5
11
2
12
6
13
4
14
6
560
NEXT
1
8
2
9
3
10
4
0
5
7
6
14
7
0
8
12
9
0
10
11
11
13
12
0
13
0
14
0
Y ij
ji
Next_i
Next_j
where: i, j
are the order numbers of the nodes which define the branch;
Y ij , Y ji the values of the branch admittances;
Next_i
Next_j
The data structure for the nodes can be chosen of the form:
i
Y ii
Loc
where: i is the order number of the node; Y ii the value of the diagonal element; Loc
address of first link of the node i.
Solving the sets of linear equations
Obtaining solution of power flow problem by a Newton type method always leads to
solving a linear set of equations, written in matrix general form as
Ax=b
(A.2)
(A.3)
561
a41 a42
a13
a23
a33
a43
a14 l11 0
a24 l21 l22
=
a34 l31 l32
a44 l41 l42
0
0
l33
l43
l44
0
0
0
u11 u12
0 u 22
0
0
0
0
u13
u 23
u33
u14
u 24
u34
u 44
(A.4)
where the non-zero elements of the matrices L and U, which are to be calculated, are
pointed out.
The factorization (A.3) is used to solving two triangular systems of equations derived
from (A.2), namely:
Ly=b
(A.5,a)
Ux=y
(A.5,b)
and
whose solutions can be easily found. Firstly, the equation (A.5a) is solved for the
intermediate vector y by forward substitution:
y1 =
b1
,
l11
yi =
1
lii
b
i
i 1
l
j =1
ii y j
, i = 2, 3, ..., n,
(A.6,a)
yn
1
, xi =
u nn
uii
y
i
uij x j , i = n 1, n 2, ..., 1
j = i +1
(A.6,b)
(A.7)
562
uij = aij
1.
ik u kj
, i = 1, 2, ..., j
(A.8,a)
k =1
2.
lij =
1
u jj
j 1
a
lik u kj , i = j + 1, j + 2, ..., n
ij
k =1
(A.8,b)
The sums in the right-hand side of (A.8a), and respectively (A.8b), are considered to
be equal to zero for i = 1, and respectively for j = 1.
By examining relations (A.8,a) and (A.8,b), it follows that a certain a ij is used only
once, such that l ij or u ij can be stored into the place of a ij in the matrix A. For example,
in the particular case (A.4), it results:
u11 u12
l
21 u 22
l31 l32
l41 l42
u13 u14
u 23 u 24
u33 u34
l43 u 44
(A.9)
It can be also observed that, the unknown vector x can be stored into the right-hand
side vector b.
Determining order of node elimination
From relations (A.8), it follows that, during the process of factorisation, the
appearance of the elements l ij or u ij is possible even if the element a ij does not exist in
initial matrix A. In consequence, the filling coefficient of A increases, leading to
increasing in the necessary memory for storing the factorised matrix, as well as in the
computing time.
To conserve as much as possible the sparsity of the matrix A, it is necessary to
change, into a certain way, the order of the matrix rows or, in other words, the node
numbering, to minimize the number of the new elements, introduced by the factorising
process. This procedure is called ordering, and the entire factorisation process is known as
ordered factorisation.
Among the methods of node ordering, met in the literature, those proposed in [8.19],
[8.20] are the most known. Thus, one of the three methods, exposed below, based on the
number of the node links, can perform the node ordering, as follows:
1. The nodes are rearranged in the increasing order of their number of links; this
order is kept constant until the end of the factorising process;
2. Before eliminating each node, the remainder nodes are rearranged in the
increasing order of their number of links;
3. Before eliminating each node, the elimination of all the remainder nodes is
simulated to find the node, which introduces the minimal number of new links;
this is the next node to be eliminated.
The first method is the simplest one but it cannot control the sparsity during the
factorisation.
The third method ensures the best conservation of sparsity but it necessitates large
memory and computing time. Therefore its using is limited.
The second method is the most used because it performs an acceptable compromise
between the saving of memory and that of time.
563
Appendix 8.2
STRUCTURE AND STEADY STATE DATA OF THE NETWORK TEST
The structure of the network TEST comprises 5 power stations, 8 power substations
and 15 transmission lines with simple or double circuits, as shown in Figure A.2.1. The
nodal and line data are given in the next tables.
6
7
4
8
10
12
~
13
11
Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PQ
PU
PQ
PQ
PU
PQ
PU
PQ
PQ
PQ
PU
SN
PQ
Qg
Pc
Qc
Qmin
Qmax
Pg
[MW] [MVAr] [MW] [MVAr] [MVAr] [MVAr]
0
0
250
155
255
0
0
0
190
0
0
60
35
0
0
190
130
240
0
0
0
180
0
0
220
135
240
0
0
0
180
0
0
60
35
0
0
130
70
0
0
200
140
165
0
0
- 60
160
0
0
0
300
0
0
150
90
-
U
[kV]
220
230*
220
220
225*
220
225*
220
220
220
233*
235*
220
564
Number
of
circuits
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R
[]
X
[]
B
[S]
Imax
[A]
9.90
5.50
9.80
9.80
5.30
7.40
4.00
6.60
6.60
6.65
4.60
4.00
5.30
7.90
5.30
3.60
5.50
60.6
31.5
62.8
62.8
32.3
45.2
24.2
41.8
41.8
37.9
28.3
24.2
32.3
4.85
32.3
22.2
33.5
416
202
406
406
222
311
167
272
272
243
195
167
222
333
222
153
230
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
875
The quantity Imax in Table A.2.2 represents the thermal limit of the phase current.
Chapter references
[8.1]
[8.2]
[8.3]
[8.4]
[8.5]
[8.6]
[8.7]
565
Chapter
(9.1)
where i and Ui are the voltage angle and module of the node i. The angles of nodal
voltages are not measurable but the modules are easily measurable if the state
vector is known and it is possible to compute all the active and reactive injected
powers, power flows, power looses, efficiency of transfer, hourly cost of
generation, marginal costs, etc. Using the nodal admittance matrix [Ynn], it results:
Pi=
U U Y cos (
i
j ij
ij
(9.2,a)
(9.2,b)
jn
Qi=
U U Y sin (
i
jn
j ij
ij
) (
) (
(9.2,d)
(9.2,e)
568
y ij 0 = yij 0 ij 0
(9.2,f)
(9.2,g)
The meanings of the notations from (9.2) are depicted in Figure 9.1.
yij
Sij i
Vi
yij0
j Sji
yji0
Vj
In the steady state evaluation the data of consumers and sources for a system
with known structure (Ynn) are used. The state estimation uses the measurement
quantities P, Q, E (measured voltage magnitude) and the matrix Ynn that offer all
information about system structure. Unfortunately nobody is perfect! The
estimation could be complicated because of P, Q, E telemetry; some quantities are
metered with errors. Also, system configuration can have structure errors because
of possible errors in the switch position.
The estimator is an algorithm that identifies the existence of some errors of
measurements or of structure, corrects or eliminates them and computes the final
and correct system state.
The number of state variables (9.1) is (2n1) because the reference axis is the
slack node axis with SB = 0. The number of measurements, m, is greater than (2n1):
(9.3)
For every node, the injected active and reactive powers and the nodal voltage
are known. Every branch is characterized by four power flows active and reactive
(at sending and receiving ends). The number of redundant measurements is:
mr = m (2n 1)
(9.4)
569
x
xR2
; f 2 (x ) =
R1 + R2
R1 + R2
I
Fig. 9.2. Simple circuit.
R1
E, r = 0
R2
ek2
kn
(9.5)
2
k
1
12
1
x
+ 2
z1
R
R
+
2
1
2
xR2
MIN
z 2
R
1 + R2
570
How can be appreciated this result? Computing the values of both measurements, it
is natural to compare with z1 and z2:
( )
f 2 (x1) = 5.85 V;
( )
r2 = z 2 f 2 (x1) = 6 5.85 = 0.15 V
r
= rw
If rw1 > rw 2 means that the wrong measurement is the current. It is possible to
continue in two ways: the first way consists in the elimination of the suspect measurement,
and the second one consists in the correction of the suspect measurement.
Eliminating z1, obtain:
z 2 (R1+R2 )
=8 V
x 2 =
R2
and the current should be:
~z = 2 A
1
( )
~z = f 1 = 1.95 A ; z = 6 V
2
1
1 x
Computing x, it results:
x 2 = 7.98 V
rP1 =
( )
~
z1 f 1 x 2
= 1.95 1.995 = 0.045
1
rP 2 =
( )
z 2 f 2 x 2
= 6 5.985 = 0.015
2
The interactive process is here convergent and will be stopped when the difference
between two successive values of x in below a specified limit, such as x = 0.05. Because:
571
If for the same case the measurement of voltage is more accurate and assuming:
1
1
= 1; 2 = 3
12
2
it is obtained:
1
x = 7.928 V
( )
f 1 x1 = 1.982 A rw1 =
( )
f 2 x1 = 5.946 V rw2 =
r1
= 0.482
1
r2 0.054
=
= 0.0935
2
1/ 3
572
algorithm. Self-scaling Givens rotations are used for the numerically robust
solution of the problem [9.21].
(9.7)
The overdetermined systems are solved using the weighted least squares
method (WLS) [9.1 9.4]. If the number of equations is higher than the number of
unknown quantities it is impossible to get an exact solution. In that case, the best
solution results by minimisation of the sum of weighted errors. The relation (9.7)
represents the sum of weighted squares errors:
J ( [x ] )=
k m
2
k
1
2k
The weighted matrix W is of diagonal type with terms 1/2. The minimisation
of the performance index is obtained by equating with zero its partial derivatives
with respect to the quantities U and :
J ( [x ] )
( [x ] ) = 2 [F ( [x ] ) ] t [W ] [ [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ]]
(9.8)
(9.9)
[ ]
Assuming the set of initial values x 0 and accepting the first order correction
of the Taylor series expansion,
[x] = [x 0 ]+ [x 0 ]
[ f ( [x] ) ] = [ f ( [x 0 ] )]+ [ f ( [x] )] [x 0 ] = [ f ( [x 0 ] )]+ [F ( [x 0 ] )][x 0 ]
[x ] 0
(9.10)
573
[F ( [x ]+ [x ] ) ] [W ] ( [Z ] [ (x ) ] [F ( [x ] ) ] [x ] ) = [0]
0
(9.11)
[F ( [x] ) ] [F ( [x 0 ] ) ]
(9.12)
and therefore
[F ( [x ] ) ] [W ] ( [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] [F ( [x ] ) ][x ] ) = 0
[F ( [x ] )] [W ][F ( [x ] ) ][x ] = [F ( [x ] ) ] [W ] ( [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] )
0
[F ( [x ] )] [W ] [F ( [x ] ) ][x ] = [F ( [x ] ) ] [W ]([Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] )
k
The product:
[F ( [x ] ) ] [W ] [F ( [x ] ) ] = [G ( [x ] ) ]
k
(9.13)
(9.14)
[G ( [x ] ) ][x ] = [F ( [x ] ) ] [W ] ( [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] )
k
(9.15)
represents the estimator. Solving the system (9.15) it results the corrections [xk] so
that:
[x ] = [x ]+ [x ]
k +1
(9.16)
[ ]
[ ]
Usually, the set of initial values for the state vector is 0 = [0] and U 0 = [U n ] .
The iterative calculation finishes, if the process is convergent by the rule
imposed by operator, comparing the maximum difference between variables from
two successive iterations:
xik +1 xik < x , i, i (2n 1)
[ ] = [G ( [x ] ) ] [F ( [x ] ) ] [W ] ( [P] [P( [ ], [U ] ) ] )
(9.17)
(9.18)
and
k
QE
QE
QE
574
NG(NE)
1
NC
2
LT
C
0
The branch 12 is an overhead line of 400 kV, 300 km length and the branch 10
represents an inductive consumer of 50 MVAr.
y10 = j
Q
U
=j
50
420
= j 2.8 10 4 S
(9.19)
[x] t = [2 , U1, U 2 ]
(9.20)
Thus, the overdetermined system has 8 equations and 3 unknown values, and the
Jacobian matrix will be:
[F ] =
575
U1
U n2Y12
U n2Y12
U n2Y12
U2
P
2U nY11
U nY12
1
2
12
U nY12
U nY12
U nY12
2U nY11
U nY12
U nY12
(9.21)
Q
The Jacobian matrix (9.21) have been computed assuming the following hypotheses:
G = 0; ii = ; ij =
2
2
i j = 0; U i = U n
(9.22)
For instance:
P1 = U12Y11 cos ( 11 ) + U 1Y12U 2 cos (1 2 12 ) =
P1
= U1U 2Y12 cos 2 U n2Y12
1
E1
=1
U1
E1
=0
U 2
Having a very accessible way to determine the terms of the Jacobian matrix, the gain
matrix (9.8) with [W] = [1] will be:
G = FtWF
2 U n2Y12 U n2Y12
[G ] = 1
U n2Y12
1.056 U nY12
U nY12
U nY12
U nY12
U nY12
U nY12
1 U n2Y12
1
2 U n2Y12
1
12 U n2Y12
1
1
1.056 U nY 12
1
2
U nY 12
1
12
U nY 12
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
U nY 12
U nY 12
U nY 12
1
(9.23)
576
2 3
0
[G ] = 1
2
0
0
0
2 2
3.1151 U n Y12 + 1 3.056 U n2Y122
3.056 U n2Y122
3 U n4Y122 + 1
2
49.84 48.89 U1 =
49
48.89
U 2
)
)
)
(
(
(9.24)
Only one wrong measurement is accepted (P1 = 350 MW instead of 400 MW), with:
02 = 0; U10 = 400 kV; U 20 = 400 kV
After three iterations, the final solution of the state vector is:
2 = 12.9139, U1=420.5671 kV, U 2=407.6906 kV
Measured value
Calculated value
P1 = 350 MW
P2 = 400 MW
P12 = 400 MW
Q1 = 150 MVAr
Q2 = 3.62 MVAr
Q12 = 100 MVAr
E1 = 420 kV
E2 = 407.48 kV
383.35 MW
383.35 MW
383.35 MW
146.67 MVAr
9.09 MVAr
97.55 MVAr
420.56 kV
407.69 kV
Table 9.1
Weighted residue
r p= r
33.35
16.64
16.64
3.32
5.47
2.45
0.56
0.21
The maximum weighted residue is of P1, followed by P2 and P12. The influence of
error of P1 on the reactive powers and voltages is relatively small because the dominant
correlation is P ~ and Q ~ U. The procedure of detection and identification of bad data,
simply in this case, cannot be based on the visual perception of residues or on an intuitive
decision. An exigent analysis is necessary.
577
J ( [x ] ) = [ [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] ] t [W ] [ [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] ] = [0]
If exist errors then J ( [x ] ) > 0 , having small or great values. Comparing
J ( [x ] ) = 0.2 with J ( [x ] ) = 1640 , the intuition says us that in the first case the
errors are insignificant and they do not have to be taken into account, while in the
second case it can be at least suspicious. The obvious question is: if J ([ x ]) is
greater than zero how big should be the threshold p that say us if there exist errors?
Taking into account that the errors e have a normal repartition Gauss the
weighted square sum of J ([ x ]) has a 2 (Helmert) repartition.
Density
of
prob.
5
(m red )
15.09
(Pa = 0.01)
J(x)
(9.25)
Table 9.2
mred
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pa = 0.05
3.84
5.99
7.82
9.49
11.07
12.59
14.07
15.51
Threshold values
Pa = 0.01
mred
6.64
9
9.21
10
11.35
20
13.28
30
15.09
40
16.81
60
18.48
120
20.09
Pa = 0.05
16.42
18.31
31.41
43.77
55.76
72.08
146.57
Pa = 0.01
21.67
23.21
37.57
50.89
63.69
88.38
158.95
578
rN =
(9.26)
[r ] = [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ]
(9.27)
[r ] + [r ] = [Z ] + [Z ] [ f ( [x + x ] ) ]
or
[r ] + [r ] = [Z ] +[Z ][ f [ (x ) ] ] [F [ (x ) ] ] [x ]
Taking account of (9.27) it results:
[r ] = [Z ] [F ( [x ] ) ] [x ]
[F ( [x ] ) ] t [W ] [Z ] [ f ( [x ] ) ] = [0]
or
because
then
[F ( [x + x ] ) ] t [W ] [ [Z ] + [Z ] [ f ( [x + x ] ) ] ] = [0]
[F ( [x + x ] ) ] t [W ] [ [Z ] + [Z ] f ( [x ] ) [F ( [x ] ) [x ] ] ] = [0]
[ ( [x ] ) ] t [W ] [ [Z ] [F ( [x ] ) ] [x ] ] = [0]
[x ] = [0]
and [F ( [x + x ] ) ] t [F ( [x ] ) ]
(9.28)
579
[r ] = [Z ] [F ( [x ] ) ] [G ( [x ] ) ]1 [F ( [x ] ) ] t [W ] [Z ]
[r ] = [I ] [F ( [x ] ) ] [G ( [x ] ) ]1 [F ( [x ] ) ] [W ]
t
[Z ]
(9.29)
[r ] = [[W ]1 [F ( [x ]) ] [G ( [x ] ) ] ] [F ( [x ] ) ] t [W ] [Z ]
1
[r ] = [W ]1 [F ( [x ] ) ] [G ( [x ] )]1 [F ( [x ] ) ] t = [R ]
[Z ]
[W ]1
[W ]1
(9.30)
[R] = [W ]1 [F ( [x ] ) ] [G ( [x ] )]1 [F ( [x ] ) ] t
(9.31)
[] = [ (diag R ) ] 1/ 2
(9.32)
(9.33)
(9.34)
Residue
33.35
16.64
16.64
3.32
5.47
2.45
0.56
0.21
Standard deviation
0.8252
0.8252
0.8252
0.7983
0.8063
0.7963
0.7093
0.7299
Normalized residue
40.41
20.16
20.16
4.15
6.78
3.06
0.78
0.28
580
ri i2
=
Z i i2
Zi =
i2
( ri )
2
i
(9.36)
2
2
~
Z i = Z i i2 ri = Z i i rNi
i
i
(9.37)
The difference between the value of a measurement and the corrected one
will be interpreted as a multiple of the standard deviation:
~
Z i Z i = bi i
bi = i rNi
i
(9.38)
The multiple b is compared with the threshold value "c". If all values are less
than this threshold then there are no errors. If some values are larger than the
threshold, there exists big errors, and the measurement with the largest value of the
absolute value of b will be identified as bad data. Usually, c = 4.
581
The correction has the advantage of keeping the same number of measurements. By
relation (9.37) we obtain the solution:
~
2
Z i = Z i i rNi
i
~
P1 = 350 +
1
40.41 = 398.97 MW
0.8252
With this measurement corrected and with other seven ones, the estimation is
repeated. The result is obviously positive.
Sometimes, errors regarding interactive measurements could appear, the estimation
leading to an erroneous solution, but catalogued as good estimation. If one considers, for
instance, P1 = 350 MW (400) ; P12 = 350 MW (400) ; Q12 = 200 MVAr (100) the
remaining of measurements being correct, the final result is obtained after 5 iterations, as it
can be seen in Table 9.4.
Table 9.4
Estimation evolution
Stage
J( x )
9049
II
1689
III
247
IV
29.3
rN
Q12 = 85.8
Q2 = 46.7
Q1 = 40
P2 = 37.6
P12 = 20.88
P1 = 20.7
Q2 = 14.65
Q1 = 11.54
P12 = 3.05
Q1 = 4.31
Q12 = 4.3
P2 = 2.07
P2 = 2.32
Q2 = 2.1
Q12 = 1.8
Suspected
measurement
Corrected
value
State
Q12
200 92.5
correct
P2
400 353
false
Q2
3.3 21.3
false
Q1
149.2 143.7
false
false
582
The above example, moreover possible in reality, relives the decision of algorithm to
treat also desperate situations even if the end is wrong.
[Z ] = [ f ( [x] ) ] + [e]
The errors of a measurements set, selected as suspect, are estimated with
formula:
(9.39)
583
e r
r
e
e
3
1
x
0
Fig. 9.5. The example for HTI method.
584
(9.40)
to be invertible.
if the matrix in question is invertible, then the measurement is suspicious
being introduced into the list of suspected measurements;
the matrix Pss1 is calculated by expansion, including the new suspected
measurement;
the errors vector of suspected measurements are then determined by:
(9.41)
(9.42)
The list with suspect measurements is ended when the value of J ( x) index,
for the (m s) correct measurements, is below the specified detection threshold.
2) Testing of the hypothesis whether one element from the list of suspect
measurements is erroneous or not, is based on the condition:
)
esi < i , i = 1...s
(9.43)
where i is the statistical threshold chosen so that:
to exceed the risk of unidentification, denoted by ;
to maintain below a reasonable limit the risk of false alarm, denoted by ,
when is not a restriction;
It has been demonstrated that the appropriate test consists in comparing the
estimation for the normed error:
)
eNi =
585
)
esi
(P )
1
ss
0 i N
i =
where: eWi
ii
min
2
(P )
(P )
1
ss
eWi + Nmax
1
ss
ii
ii
min
2
= 3 ; eWi = 20 ; = 14
586
P1
P12
Q12
Estimation Threshold
Residue
rN
|e|
32.12 0.8249 38.94
48.16
44.16
17.63 0.8249 21.37
1.45
2.69
16.43 0.7983 20.58
28.6
0.24
P2
Measurement
Corrected
value
error
398.3
no error
error
98.6
no more
errors
Decision
Even if the normalized residue of P12 is larger than the residue of Q12, the
identification is perfect. With J and b tests, the estimation necessitates two steps.
587
(supernodes) are determined only the boundary nodes and injections of these
islands obtained via the topological algorithm are retained for the numerical
analysis [9.25]. The existing numerical methods are based on the number of zero
pivots that may appear during the factorization of the gain on the Jacobian matrix.
As the number of network nodes and injection measurements increase numerical ill
conditioning may arise and the zero pivots may be misclassified.
U U Y
i
j ij
cos i j ij
jn
) (
First of all, the term corresponding to the shunt active power losses is neglected and
all the voltages as well as the admittances are considered equal to 1 p.u.; furthermore,
neglecting the conductance, the impedances angles become equal to / 2 . Therefore:
U i = U j = 1 p.u.; Yii = Yij = yij = 1 p.u.; ii =
ij =
UU Y
i
j ij
cos i j ij
jn \ i
Pi = 12 1 0 +
1 1 1 cos
i
j n \ i
Pi =
sin i j
=
2 jn \ i
( )
i
(9.43)
jn \ i
Expression (9.43) was obtained taking into account that the differences between the
angles corresponding to the nodes incident to the branch i j are generally small. Therefore:
(9.44)
588
The first application (Fig. 9.6) refers to a four-node system where the injected active
powers are taken as measurements:
P1 = 2 1 2 3
P2 = 1 + 2 2 3
P3 = 1 2 + 3 3 4
P4 = 3 + 4
1
3
P1
P2
P3
P4
[ ]
The system is observable because all pivots are equal to one, except for the last pivot,
which is zero, corresponding to the phase angle of the slack node.
In Figure 9.7, the problem of redundant information, but non-uniform, is shown. The
measurements are: P1, P2, P12, P21, P23, P32.
589
1
4
II
2
The Jacobian matrix, the gain matrix and the superior triangularized one have the
form:
1 2
3 4
1 2 1 1
2 1 2 1
12 1 1
[FP ] =
21 1 1
1 1
23
32
1 1
7 6 1
6 9 3
[GP ] =
1 3 4
1
2
3
4
1 6 / 7 1/ 7
1
1
[U P ] =
0
0
The system is not observable although m >> (2n 1). We find then an observable
island (I) consisting of the nodes 1, 2 and 3, and another island (II), unobservable,
consisting of the node 4. The same results would have been obtained knowing only two
measurements, that is P1 and P2:
1
2
3 4
1 2 1 1
[FP ] =
2 1 2 1
590
p
0
By acceptance of any pseudo-measurement from the group P3, P34, P43 and P4 both
systems become observable. For the case with six measurements to which we add, for
instance, P34, the gain matrix and the superior triangularized one are obtained:
7 6 1
6 9 3
[GP ] =
1 3 5 1
1 1
1 4 / 5 1/ 5
1
1
[U P ] =
1
1
The limit situation, with only two measurements P1, P2 and a pseudo-measurement
P34, leads to:
5
4
[GP ] =
1
4 1
5 1
1 3 1
1 1
1 4 / 5 1/ 5
1
1
[U P ] =
1
1
0
The two parallel studies show an interesting issue: the power flows P12, P21, P23 and
P32 are irrelevant measurements therefore they can be eliminated. Normally, the question is:
what is relevant and what is not into the measurements domain? The answer can be easily
get showing that, if three measurements are available that is P12, P23, P34, the system is
observable. Thus, P1, P2, P21 and P32 became irrelevant. Therefore it is sufficient to know
one injected power or one transferred power on a branch incident to a node so that this one
to be seen.
6
4
P1
591
1
1 4
2 -2
3 -2
4
5
6
2
-2
1
1
3 4 5 6
-2
1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
P6 5
6
1 -1
-1 1
1 1 -3 1
1 1 -3 1
-3 -3 9 -3
1 1 -3 1
P4
Fig. 9.8. Six-node system with the contribution of the power injection measurements.
The powers flow has a different contribution, with the same sparsity pattern as the
corresponding Y matrix (the Y matrix of a network formed by the branches with the given
power flow measurements) (Fig. 9.9).
2
P21
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 -2
2 -2 2
3
1 -1
4
-1 1
5
1 -1
6
-1 1
P12
1
P65
P43
3
U U Y sin (
i
j ij
ij
jn \1
Qi = 1i2 1 1 +
1 1
i
jn \i
1 ( 1) =1i2
1 1
i
jn \i
) (
592
Q ji = 12j 1 j 1i
If consider the four-node system with four injected reactive powers (Fig. 9.10) the
conclusion is apparently obvious. Being available four measurements the system should
have been observable but it is not. As will be seen further the redundancy is compulsory.
Any redundant measurement is sufficient.
Q1 = 112 11 12 11 13
Q2 = 122 12 11 12 13
Q3 = 132 13 11 13 12 13 14
Q4 = 142 14 13
1
4
Q1
Q1
= 11 = 1;
= 1; etc.
U 2
U 3
1
1
2
[FQ ] = 3
2
3
1 1
1
1
1 1 1 1
1 1
2 1 2 1
[GQ ] =
1 2 2 1
2 2 4
1 1
2
[U Q ]
593
1 1/ 2 1 1/ 2
1 2 / 3 1/ 3
=
1
1
0
The last pivot is zero therefore the system is not observable. Any additional
information voltage or power flow confirms the observability. If a voltage is accepted
into the node 1, the Jacobian, gain and superior triagularized matrices become:
1
1
2
[FQE ] = 3
4
1
[GQE ]
[U Q ]
3
1
=
2
1
2
3 4
1 1
1
1
1 1 1
1 1
1
1 2 1
2 2 1
2 4
1
2
1 1/ 3 2 / 3 1/ 3
1 4/5 2/5
=
1 3/ 4
1
This time, with only one redundant measurement the system become observable. All
pivots on the main diagonal of the superior triangularized matrix are equal to unity thus the
system is observable. It is compulsory an information of voltage type in order to fix the
voltage level. With E1 as pseudo-measurement, the system becomes observable.
An interesting situation is the case of the same system but with three measurements
(Fig. 9.11).
1
3
II
III
594
[FQE ]
2
3 4
1 1
1
= 2 1
1
3
1
1
[GQE ] =
1
1 1
1 1 2
1
1 2 3 4
1 0 1
[U QE ] =
1 1
0
1
The system is split into three islands: the island I consisting of the nodes 1 and 2 is
observable, node 3 represents the second island (II), unobservable, and the node 4 to which
a measurement of voltage type is assigned, represents also an observable island. If a
measurement that offers additional information for node 3 is accepted, for instance Q23, the
system becomes observable. The new matrices F, G and U are:
1
2
3 4
1 1
1
1
2 1
FQE =
3
1 1
4
1
[ ]
[GQE ] =
1
2
3
1
[U QE ] =
1
1
1
1
595
It is possible the system to contain more zero pivots. In this case, successive pseudomeasurements are proposed, evaluating the effect of each one, until the system becomes
unobservable.
Besides the presented method for observability determination of power systems,
topological methods are used.
Chapter references
[9.1] Monticelli, A. State estimation in electric power systems, Boston, Dordrecht,
London, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1999.
[9.2] Eremia, M., Criciu, H., Ungureanu, B., Bulac C. Analiza asistat de calculator a
regimurilor sistemelor electroenergetice (Computer aided analysis of power
systems regimes), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1985.
[9.3] Eremia, M., Trecat, J., Germond, A. Rseaux lectriques. Aspects actuels, Editura
Tehnic, Bucureti, 2000.
[9.4] Neme, M. Sisteme electrice de putere. Probleme actuale (Power systems. Actual
problems), Editura Orizonturi Universitare, Timioara, 2003.
[9.5] Schweppe, F.C., Wildes, J. Power system static state estimation, Parts I-III, IEEE
Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 89, pp. 120 135, January 1970.
[9.6] Garcia, A., Monticelli, A., Abreu, P. Fast decoupled state estimation and bad data
processing, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 98, pp. 1645 1652,
October 1979.
[9.7] Holten, L., Gjelsvik, A., Aam, S., Wu, F.F., Liu, W.H.E. Comparison of different
methods for state estimation, IEEE Trans. on Power and Systems, Vol. 3, pp. 1798
1806, November 1988.
[9.8] Simoes-Costa, A., Quintana, V.H. A robust numerical technique for power system
state estimation, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 100, pp. 691
698, February 1981.
[9.9] Simoes-Costa, A., Quintana, V.H. An orthogonal row processing algorithm for
power system sequential state estimation, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and
Systems, Vol. 100, pp. 3791 3800, August 1981.
[9.10] Gu, J.W., Clements, K.A., Krumpholz, G.R., Davis, P.W. The solution of illconditioned power system state estimation problems via the method of Peters and
Wilkinson, Proc. on PICA Conf., Houston, Texas, pp. 239 246, 1983.
[9.11] Wang, J.W., Quintana, V.H. A decoupled orthogonal row processing algorithm
for power system state estimation, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems,
Vol. 103, pp. 2337 2344, August 1984.
[9.12] Monticelli, A., Murati, C.A.F., Wu, F.F. A hybrid state estimator: Solving normal
equations by orthogonal transformations, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and
Systems, Vol.105, pp. 3460 3468, December 1985.
[9.13] Gjelsvik, A., Aam, S., Holten, L. Hachtel's augmented matrix method - A rapid
method improving numerical stability in power system static state estimation, IEEE
Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 104, pp. 29872993, November 1985.
[9.14] Liu, W.H.E., Wu, F.F., Holten, L., Gjelsvik, A., Aam, S. Computational issues in
the Hachtels augmented matrix method for power system state estimation, Proc. on
Power Systems Computation Conf., Lisbon, Portugal, 1987.
596
[9.15] Wu, F.F., Liu, W.H.E., Lun, S.M. Observability analysis and bad data processing
for state estimation with equality constraints, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.
3, pp. 541 548, May 1988.
[9.16] Alvarado, F., Tinney, W. State estimation using augmented blocked matrices,
IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 5, pp. 911 921, August 1990.
[9.17] Monticelli, A., Wu, F.F. Network observability: Identification of ovservable
islands and measurement placement, IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and
Systems, Vol. 104, pp. 1035 1041, May 1985.
[9.18] Contaxis, G.C., Korres, G.N. A reduced model for power system observability
analysis and restoration, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 3, pp. 1411 1417,
November 1988.
[9.19] Korres, G.N., Contaxis, G.C. Identification and updating of minimally dependent
sets of measurements in state estimation, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 6,
pp. 990 1005, August 1991.
[9.20] Abur, A., Celik, M.K. Least absolute value state estimation with equality and
inequality constraints, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 8, pp.680 686, May
1993.
[9.21] Kliokys, E., Singh, N. Minimum correction method for enforcing limits and
equality constraints in state estimation based on orthogonal transformations, IEEE
Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 15, pp. 1281 1286, November 2000.
[9.22] Monticelli, A., Wu, F.F. Network observability: Theory, IEEE Trans. on Power
Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 104, pp. 1042 1048, May 1985.
[9.23] Monticelli, A., Wu, F.F. Observability analysis for orthogonal transformation
based state estimation, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 1, pp. 201 206,
February 1986.
[9.24] Korres, G.N. A robust method for equality constrained state estimation, IEEE
Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 17, pp. 305 314, May 2002.
[9.25] Korres, G.N., Katsikas, P.J., Clements, K.A., Dawis, P.W. Numerical
observability analysis based on network graph theory, IEEE Trans. on Power
Systems, Vol. 18, pp.1035 1045, August 2003.
Chapter
10
Objectives
Optimization Function
Seconds
Automatic Generation
Control (AGC)
Minutes
Hours
Days
Weeks
Optimal Unit
Commitment (OUC)
Months
Maintenance Scheduling,
Interchange Coordination
Years
Maintenance Scheduling,
Expansion Planning
598
The development of OPF in the last two decades has tracked progress closely
in numerical optimization techniques and advanced in computer technology. For
OPF studies, the power system network is typically modelled at the main
transmission level, including generating units. In an OPF, the values of some of
control variables need to be found so as to optimize (maximize or minimize) a
predefined objective.
The scheduling is done over time (minutes, hours, days, etc). This forms a
hierarchical structure, typically from OPF, to load dispatch, unit commitment,
maintenance scheduling and expansion planning. Recent introduction of
deregulation into electricity supply industry adds new dimensions in such
optimization problems with the maximum market benefit as its objective, [10.54].
Load forecasting
One of the first steps in power system development planning is to forecast the
loads, loads that the networks will supply. The load estimation used in electric
networks planning must consider not only the future loads, but also their
geographical positions, for permitting the designer to locate and to dimension the
electric equipment.
Load forecasting includes long-term, medium-term, short-term, and dispatch
mode. Typically, long term forecast covers up to a period of 20 years and is
normally used for generation and transmission planning. The planning of
maintenance, scheduling of fuel supply, energy contracts requires medium load
forecast, which covers a period of a few weeks with a resolution of daily and
provides the peak load and the daily energy requirement, [10.55].
System load forecasting is an essential operation in power system control
centres. Short-term load forecasting is one of the most important procedures in the
real-time control of power generation and efficient energy management systems. It
is used for establishing the power station operations and the unit operation plan,
together with generation spinning reserve planning of energy exchanges. In other
words, the optimal utilization of generators and power stations is completely
dependent upon the accuracy of load forecasting.
Estimation of loads, particularly of the peak loads, is the basis for the system
state estimation, and for technical and economic calculations. Load estimation, and,
especially peak load demand, influences various aspects of power systems planning
such as: generating powers, transformer and conductor sizing, capacitor bank
placement, and so on. Hence, the peak load estimation is a problem of a special
interest. In order to properly analyse the performance of power systems, it is essential
that accurate estimates of power consumption be obtained. In order to estimate the
load, various mathematical formulations and methods have been developed.
Many forecasting models have been proposed and implemented in this field
based on time-series, regression, expert system models and so on. Over the last
decade, a great deal of attention has been paid to the use of Artificial Neural
Networks (ANN) to model load. In short-term and medium-term load forecasting
weather forecasts is a key input, and especially when the ANN method is used.
599
In the recent years, control centres in distribution went through some drastic
changes. Evolving from simple Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) systems, the concept of Distribution Management System (DMS) gained
growing acceptance. A DMS must provide a set of functions, namely for switching
decision and operation, which rely on the basic tool of power flow calculus. The
problem of generating a coherent load set is critical in distribution, because usually,
the only real time measurements available at a SCADA system are power or
current values at the sending end of a feeder emerging from a medium-voltage
(MV) substation. One must therefore rely on other type of data, recorded in
commercial files, to try inferring the values of load.
A modern DMS must try to address the problem of evaluating actual
synchronized flows and making this compatible with any measurements available
at a SCADA system at any time. The complexity of the problem increased with the
connection at distribution level. In this situation a modern technique, based on
fuzzy set model, can provide a good operating solution. The core of this technique
is the fuzzy correlation model, [10.16]. The combination of the fuzzy approach
with the system expert leads to an efficient and robust tool.
Depending on the specific objectives and constraints, there are different OPF
formulations. The typical objectives are:
minimization of total generation cost;
minimization of the active power losses;
maximization of the degree of security of the system;
optimization of the Voltage-Reactive power control.
The achievement of these goals are very important, since these utilities are
forced to operate the system with minimal resources consumption and maximal
degree of security.
In the first section of this chapter, the horizon of power system optimization
problem is presented. In the next sections, the background of the mathematical
programming, the optimization techniques in operating planning and the most
efficient, used in OPF and Optimal Unit Commitment (OUC) are described. The
choosing of the method depends on available data, the imposed goal and accuracy.
An important attention is paid to the OUC in deregulated markets. Finally, the
strategies optimization in deregulated market is presented.
600
g j (X ) 0,
(10.1)
j = 1, 2,K, n
601
disadvantage of this approach is that it can only minimize the total active power
losses of the system. The second approach does not have the mentioned
disadvantage, but it is more involved computationally, [10.46].
In losses minimization, the usual control variables are:
generator buses voltages;
transformer tap changing position;
switchable shunt capacitor and reactors;
phase-shifter angles.
Out of these, a great deal of control can be achieved by using generator bus
voltages and transformer tap changing as control variables. Phase-shifter angles are
normally used to alleviate line overloads.
As in the MTGC case, a large number of equality and inequalities constraints
can be used in MAPL models, namely: network power balance equation at each
bus, bounds on all variables and so on.
The following assumptions are made in the formulation of the losses
minimization, [10.46]:
Losses minimization is done following a cost minimization, and thus the
active power generations, excluding the slack bus generation, are held at
their optimal values.
Generator bus voltages and transformer tap changing are used as control
variables. Shunt reactances and phase-shifter angles, where available, are
held at nominal values.
Transformer tap ratios are treated as continuous variables during the
optimization, after which they are adjusted to the nearest tap position.
Current flows are controlled approximately, using restrictions on the real
and imaginary components of the complex voltage across the lines.
Contingency constraints are neglected.
(U
i
i =1
U i ref ) 2 +
(Q Q
i
i =1
i ref
)2
(10.2)
602
where: U, Q
603
604
The pool is an e-commerce market place. The ISO uses a market clearing tool,
to clear the market, which is normally based on a single round auction. Participants
provide their supply costs, demands values and various technical constraints such
generator output limits and so on. The ISO optimizes both generation and
transmission systems simultaneously, subject to constraints. The ISO serves the
economic dispatch function, deciding which generators will be committed. The ISO
reduces flows by directing various generators to adjust their outputs. From an
economic point of view, the ISO induces counter flows by differentiating energy
prices by location. The energy price at a bus is derived from optimization with
constraints as the shadow price and reflects the marginal value precisely.
Under new structures, generation companies schedule their generators with
the objective to maximize their own profit without regard for system social benefit.
Power reserve and prices become important factors in decision process. For
optimization of the strategies in deregulated market ordinal optimization technique
are often used. Thus, a systematic bid selection method is developed to obtain
good enough bidding strategies for generation suppliers.
(10.3)
g i ( X ) bi , i = 1,K, ng
X j 0,
j = 1, K , n
where: X
is the vector of independent variables (the decision variables);
F(X)
the cost function (the objective function);
h(X), g(X) the equality and inequality constraints respectively.
There are different classes of such problems, depending on the way the function
and constraints are expressed. For example, the decision/control variables involved can
be discrete or continuous; the objective function can be linear or nonlinear and so on.
605
10.2.1.1. Definitions
Definition 1
X = X 1 + (1 ) X 2 ; [0,1]
(10.4)
In the geometrical terms, this means that if the end points of a segment
belong to a convex set , then the whole segment belongs to the set too.
Definition 2
F X 1 + (1 ) X 2 F ( X 1 ) + (1 ) F ( X 2 ) ; [0,1]
(10.5)
If in previous relation only the inequality sign is valid, F(X) is strictly convex
function.
Definition 3. Reduced gradient expression
Starting from minimization problem:
(10.6)
606
h h
X + Y
t
Y
X = 0
Y h
X = Y
(10.8)
(10.9)
h
X
(10.10)
whence
1
F2 ( X ) F1 h h F1
X = X X Y Y
t t
(10.11)
2F
2
X1
H(X ) =
2F
X X
n 1
2 F
X1X 2
2F
X nX 2
2F
X1X n
2F
X n2
(10.12)
For the strictly convex functions, in the statements 2 and 4, only the
inequality sign is valid, and the matrix H(X) is positive definite.
607
Theorem 2
Let X* be the minimum point of a convex function F(X) in a convex set .
Then:
(F ( X * ) , X X * ) 0 , X
(10.13)
The necessary condition for a minimum over the whole space, Rn, is the
equality:
F ( X * ) = 0
(10.14)
(10.15)
(10.16)
i =1
g i ( X )
X j
= 0,
j = 1,..., n
g i ( X ) 0 , i = 1,..., m
(10.17)
i g i ( X ) = 0 , i = 1,..., m
i 0 , i = 1,..., m
608
eliminate extra variables. The general idea of such problems is perhaps best
illustrated by an example, given in Figures 10.1 and 10.2.
F(X)
River
P
M
M
g(X,Y)=0
g(X)
River
Suppose that a farmer, how is in quite a hurry, wants to reach C, starting from
M, and passing by a point P, which belongs to riverbank, [10.36]. To put this into
more mathematical terms, the problem is to find the point P for which the distance
d(M,P) from M to P, plus the distance d(P,C), from P to C, is a minimum:
Minimize F ( P) = d ( M , P) + d ( P , C )
subject to: g ( P) = 0
(10.18)
Our first way of thinking about this problem can be obtained directly from
the picture itself. We will use the handy fact that an ellipse is a set of points P, for
which the total distance from one focus to P to the other focus is constant. In our
problem, that means that find the desired point P on the riverbank, we must simply
find the smallest ellipse that intersects the curve of the river.
It is obvious from the picture that the perfect ellipse and the river are truly
tangential to each other at the ideal point P. More mathematically, this means that
the normal vector to the ellipse is in the same direction as the normal vector to the
riverbank.
As geometric interpretation constrained extreme occur at points where the
contours of F are tangent to the contours of g(X,Y) = 0. In our case, we have two
functions that have the same normal vector, so
( F ( P )) = ( g ( P ))
(10.19)
where is a constant multiplier, which is necessary because the two gradients will,
in general, have different magnitudes.
The value of is approximately the increase in the optimum value of F(X),
when the constraint is increased by 1 unit.
How to distinguish maxima from minima? There is a second derivative test
for classifying the critical points of constrained optimization problems. If we have
609
more than one constraint, it turns out that all you need to do is to replace the right
hand side of the equation, with the sum of the gradients of each constraint, each
with its own (different) Lagrange multiplier.
Application
( x + y ) , on the circle
( x + y 4 = 0).
With the objective function
F ( x, y ) = x + y
So, using
F ( x , y ) = g ( x , y )
gives:
Minimum:
1 + 2 x =1 + 2 y = 0 ;
x= y=
1 + 2 x =1 + 2 y = 0;
x= y=
2 ; =
1
2 2
Maximum:
x2 + y2 = 4
2 ; =
1
2 2
y
F
Pmax
F = -1
g
( 2, 2)
F = -2
F = -2 2
x
F
(-
2,- 2)
F=2 2
F=2
Pmin
g
F=1
F=0
610
Minimize F ( X )
X
subject to: h1 ( X ) = 0
g1 ( X ) 0
(10.20)
h2 ( X ) = 0
g2 (X ) 0
where h2(X) = 0 and g2(X) 0 are the complicating constraints, namely constraints
that if relaxed, problem (PP) becomes much more easily. The Lagrangian function
(LF) is defined as, [10.43]:
L( X , , ) = F ( X ) + t h2 ( X ) + t g 2 ( X )
(10.21)
( , ) = minimum L( X , , )
X
subject to: h1 ( X ) = 0
(10.22)
g1 ( X ) 0
The dual function is concave and, in general, non-differentiable, [10.43]. This
is a fundamental fact in the algorithm of the LR methods. The dual problem (DP) is
then defined as:
(DP)
Maximize (, )
,
subject to: 0
(10.23)
(RPP)
611
~ ~
Minimize L( X , ,
)
X
subject to: h1 ( X ) = 0
g1 ( X ) 0
(10.24)
(DPP)
Minimize
L( X , , ~)
i
i =1
Xi
subject to: h1i ( X i ) = 0 ; i = 1,..., n
(10.25)
g 1i ( X i ) 0; i = 1,..., n
This problem is called the decomposed primal problem (DPP). The resulting
sub problem can be solved in parallel. Under local convexity assumptions, the local
duality theorem says that:
F ( X * ) = (* , * )
(10.26)
where X* is the minimizer for the PP and (* , * ) , the maximizer for the DP.
In the nonconvex case, given a feasible solution for the PP, X, and a feasible
solution for the DP, (,), the weak duality theorem says that:
(10.27)
F ( X ) (, )
LR generates a separable problem by integrating some constraints into the
objective function, through penalty factors, which are functions of the constraints
violations, [10.20].
By assumption the Lagrangian problem is relatively easy to solve, there are
three major questions in using the Lagrangian Relaxation method, [10.46]:
Which constraints should be relaxed?
How to compute good multipliers?
How to deduce a good feasible solution to the original problem, given a
solution to the relaxed problem?
The penalty factors, referred to the Lagrangian multipliers, are determined
iteratively. The procedure is dependent on the initial estimates of the Lagrangian
multipliers and the method used to update these. The most used technique for
estimating the Lagrangian multipliers relies on sub gradient algorithms or heuristic,
[10.20].
Application
Consider the problem [10.20]
Minimize ( x 2 + y 2 )
x, y
subject to: ( x + y ) 2 2 = 0; x, y 0
612
2 , F( 2 , 2 ) = 4.
The Lagrange multipliers associated to the equality constraint has the optimal value
*= 2
Minimize ( y 2 + y 2 )
x
whose solutions are x and y.
+ ( x + y 2 2 )
Step 3. Convergence checking. If multiplier does not change sufficiently, stop;
the optimal solution is x* = x, y* = y. Otherwise the procedure continues in
Step 1.
In this algorithm the following values can be considered: = 1 and an initial
multiplier value = 1.
AL ( x, , , , ) = F ( X ) + T h2 ( X ) + T g~2 ( X , Z ) +
1 ~
2
g 2 ( X , e)
2
(10.28)
2i
613
614
615
Methods for applying reliability
criterion to power system planning
Treatment as a restriction
(n-1)
criterion topology
Multiobjective optimization
Interruption costs
Fig. 10.4. Methods for using reliability in the power systems planning.
616
617
cos
U2
1
0.5
0.5
cos
U2
1
0.5
The problem is to find a set of control variables X i and tci , so that the objective
function:
N
F=
i =1
u 2i
i =1
~
Q
= F1 + F2
(10.29)
N tc =
tc tc
30
i 1
(10.30)
i =1
N
N CB1 =
X1 X1
i
i 1
(10.31)
(10.32)
i =1
N
N CB 2 =
X2 X2
i
i 1
i =1
The membership functions regarding the voltage deviation and, respectively, reactive
power transit, are shown in Figures 10.5 and 10.6. In the objective function (10.29), the
term F1 quantifies the desirability of maintaining the secondary bus voltage, as close as
possible to the specified value, and the term F2 quantifies the desirability of keeping the
reactive power flow in the main transformer, as small as possible at all hours during the
day. The optimization model (10.29) (10.32) enables us to determine the optimal control
values of X i and tci at each hour during the observed period of time. The dynamic
programming principle will be applied to solve the optimization problem. The recurrence
formula to reach the status (H,QCB) at hour H has the form:
(10.33)
where: F (H , QCB ) is the total value of the objective function to reach the status
(H, QCB );
FH (H , X i ) the value of the objective function for the transition from the status
(H1, QCB ), to the status (H, QCB ).
618
To obtain the second bus voltage, the calculated transformer ratio (CTR) must be
rounded at the real transformer ratio (RTR) at each step of the FDP, by adjusting the
correspondent value of the tci . Each step of the FDP supposes two possibilities for CB
(on/off).
Numerical results
The proposed method has been applied to several cases. For example, we present in
Figure 10.7 a distribution station case.
U1=110 kV
Sn=25 MVA
110 kV / 22 kV
+ 9 x 1.78%
U2=110 kV
QCB
P2+jQ2
Table 10.2
Numerical Results for case QCB = 2.4 MVAr
H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Q2
P2
[MW] [MVAr]
5.75
5.15
5.25
5.75
6.00
7.00
8.75
12.5
15.0
15.5
15.7
16.0
1.2
1.00
0.90
1.20
1.30
2.00
4.00
7.00
11.25
11.62
11.80
12.00
tc
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
0
-1
-1
-1
-1
H
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Q2
P2
[MW] [MVAr]
15.50
15.00
14.50
12.50
10.50
7.75
6.75
6.25
6.00
5.75
5.75
5.75
11.60
11.25
10.80
7.00
6.00
3.50
3.00
1.75
1.30
1.20
1.20
1.20
tc
-1
-1
0
0
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
619
620
621
which are inspired by a well established and successful system, the nature. Several
different types of evolutionary search methods were developed independently:
Genetic programming (GP);
Evolutionary programming (EP), which focuses on optimizing continuous
functions without recombination;
Evolutionary strategies (ES), which focuses on optimizing continuous
functions with recombination;
Genetic algorithms (GA), which focuses on optimizing general
combinatorial problems.
The main applications developed worldwide in the last years:
Load forecasting;
Optimal power flow;
Optimal unit commitment;
Operating and expansion planning;
Optimal capacitor placement and control;
Tariff selection;
Alarm processing and fault diagnosis;
Control of power consumption.
The Table 10.3 presents the intelligent techniques and their main properties.
The Evolutionary programming (EP) is a stochastic optimization method in
the area of evolutionary computation, which uses the mechanics of evolution to
produce optimal solutions to a given problem, [10.68]. It works by evolving a
population of candidate solutions toward the global minimum through the use of a
mutation operator and selection scheme. The EP technique is particularly well
suited to non-monotonic solution surfaces, where many local minima may exist.
EP seeks the optimal solution by evolving a population of candidate
solutions, over a number of generations or iterations. During each iteration, a
second new population is formed, from an existing population, through the use of
mutation operator. This operator produces a new solution, by perturbing each
component of an existing solution, by a random amount. The degree of optimality
of each of the candidate solution or individuals is measured by their fitness, which
can be defined as an objective function of the problem.
Through the use of a competition scheme, the individuals in each population
compete with each other. The winning individuals form a resultant population,
which is regarded as next generation. For optimization to occur, the competition
scheme must be such that the more optimal solutions have great chance of survival
that the poorer solutions. As example, enhancement of the optimization methods by
using genetic algorithms, [10.20] proposes a method, where Lagrangian relaxation
incorporates genetic algorithms to solving the optimal commitment problems.
The Artificial Neural Networks (ANN) are used too to improvement of the
optimization methods. Most gradient-based optimization methods involve a major
difficulty the derivation of the objective function. Usually, a great number of
objective functions cannot be derivable and, frequently, are not continuous. A
method for computing the network output sensitivities, with respect to the input
622
A = { x, A ( x ) x X }
Primary
Application
Genetic
Optimization
Algorithm
Neural
Pattern
Network Recognition
Fuzzy
Logic
Control
Expert
System
Decision
Making
Strengths
Weaknesses
Parallelism.
Easy Implementation
Easy Implementation.
Learning with data.
Manipulates inaccurate
concepts such as: bigger,
smaller, high, old.
Explains the results
obtained.
Explains completely the
process of solution.
623
624
while maintaining the security of the system, [10.71]. The costs associated with the
power system may depend on the situation, but in general they can be attributed to
the cost of generating power at each generator. From the viewpoint of an OPF, the
maintenance of system security requires keeping each device in the power system
within its desired operation range at steady state. This will include maximum and
minimum outputs for generators, maximum MVA flows on transmission lines and
transformers. The transmission and distribution of the electric energy at a desired
voltage profile is a measure of not only the quality, but also the security of supply.
The optimal voltage profile is defined as the profile corresponding to the minimum
active power losses, [10.11, 10.28].
In this order, the OPF will perform all the steady-state control functions of
the power system, including generator control and transmission system control. For
generators, the OPF controls generator MW outputs, as well as generator voltages.
For the transmission system, the OPF may control the tap ratio or phase-shifter
angle of the transformers, switched shunt control, and all other flexible ac
transmission system (FACTS) devices.
Another goal of an OPF is the determination of system marginal cost data.
This marginal cost data can aid in the pricing of MW transactions, as well as the
pricing ancillary services such as voltage support through MVAr support. In
solving the OPF using Newton method, the marginal cost data are determined as a
by-product of the solution technique, [10.71].
Ci = ai + bi PGi + ci PG2i
where: PGi [MW]
(10.34)
bounds constraint;
ai , bi , and ci the coefficients of the consumption characteristics.
Therefore, this objective function will minimize the total system costs:
F(X ) =
(a + b P
i
i Gi
+ ci PG2i
(10.35)
Pi = U i
625
U [G
k
ik
k =1
Qi = U i
U [G
k
ik
k =1
(10.36)
where: PGi , QGi are active and reactive power of the generator i;
PLi , Q Li
(U (G U
'
i
ik
'
k
k =1
Qi =
(10.37)
k =1
+ Q Li = 0
For each generator, a voltage set of points () can be enforced. In this case,
an equality constraint for each generator is added, [10.71]:
U Gi U Gi = 0
(10.38)
(10.39)
(10.40)
(10.41)
626
The states variables correspond to quantities that are set as a result of the
controls, but must be monitored. They are also of interest at the solution.
The states include all system voltages ( U i ) and angles ( i );
The constraint variables are variables associated with the constraints.
These include all the Lagrange multipliers.
627
QGC (Q ) + T TSC
i
iq
i n \ e , dimension N 1
(10.43)
i q , dimension Q,
ij r , dimension R,
i C , dimension C,
i n , dimension N,
ijr ( tcij )
ijr
ij b , dimension B,
is
objective function;
active power losses;
reactive generation cost at bus i;
tapes shift cost at transformers (ij), determined by
statistical data (tape shift wear and break-down risk);
[U]
voltage magnitude vector, dimension N;
[]
voltage angles vector, dimension (N 1);
[tc]
transformers tap changing matrix, dimension R;
e
network slack bus;
T
time period considered, [hours];
c, q, r
the sets of the consumers buses, buses with reactive
control, respectively, buses with tapes swift.
The MAPL variables are:
[ Z ] = [[ X ][Y ]]t ; [ X ] = [[U q ][tc ]]t ; [Y ] = [[ ] [U c ]]t
(10.44)
628
Minimize F ( Z1 , Z 2 , ..., Z M ) , M = I + D
subject to: hi ( Z1 , Z 2 , ..., Z M ) = 0 , i = 1, 2, ..., D
g i ( Z1 , Z 2 , ..., Z M ) 0 , i = 1, 2, ..., M c
(10.45)
(10.46)
The iterative procedure (10.46) in the case of the conjugated gradient can be
written as, [10.10, 10.32]:
d ( k ) = g k + k d k 1 , i =1, 2,K
(10.47)
d 0 = g0
(10.48)
k =
( gk , gk )
( g k 1 , g k 1 )
(10.49)
The equality constraints arise from the operation equations at buses. The
admissible limits of the powers, of the voltages at the buses and of the power flows
give the inequality constraints. The number of the variables is equal to the size of
the vector Z, M = I + D , where I and D are the number of the independent,
respectively, dependent variables.
[ ]
[ f ]+ [Jf ][Z ] 0
0
1
where: [Z]
is
the new variables vector (for the QM);
[H]
629
The algorithm seems simple, but it includes a point key: the solution of the
model (10.50).
The model (10.50) belongs of the sequential quadratic programming, with
linear equality and inequality constraints. There are many methods for solving
these models, such conjugated reduced gradient, Newton, quasi-Newton and so on.
In order to use the conjugated reduced gradient, the constraints of the above model
will be handled by separating them in two sets: active and inactive:
[ ]
1
1
+ [X ] [H ][X ] + [Y ] [H ][Y ] + [X ] [H ][Y ]
2
2
xx
yy
xy
subject to:
0
1
0
a
ax
ay
1x
(10.51)
1y
] [Jf ] [FQ ]
(10.52)
(10.53)
(10.54)
where:
1
ay t
After the elimination of the variable [Y], from (10.51) (10.54), the QM
achieves the final form:
1
Minimize FQR([X ]) = FQR 0 + [G ][X ] + [X ] t [H r ][X ]
(10.55)
2
[Y ] = Ty [X ] + [T ]
(10.56)
[ ]
(10.57)
(10.58)
630
(10.59)
(10.60)
ar
ax
ar
0
a
[X ] = [X ] + [D ] ; [D ] = [[D ]] ;
D
k 1
0k
0k
k = 1,2,
(10.61)
where: [Dk], k the direction of the motion from point [Xk] in the iteration (k),
respectively, the length of the step in direction [Dk].
The length of the step is calculated with conjugated (reduced) gradient
method:
k 1
k 1
k 1
k>1
opt
0k
(10.62)
(10.63)
0k
0k
(10.64)
f l j (X k 1 )
0k
[f1x ]t [ D ]
; k = min ( opt , ad )
(10.65)
In order to reduce the number of control variables, in the beginning, the first
order sensitivities of losses to all control variables are computed. Then, an
Efficient Coefficient (EC) for power losses reduction can be defined as:
max
EC i = ( u P losses )i u i
(10.66)
which represents the product of the ith component of the reduced gradient by the
maximum amount that control i can be shifted, without causing any limit violation.
Discarding those devices whose ECs are lower than a threshold, the remaining ones
are considered in the optimization process, [10.9, 10.10, 10.44]. This is a quasioptimal algorithm, which has the following advantages, [10.10, 10.44]:
Control actions are sequential rather than simultaneous. This is more
adapted to the operators needs and to the way they work (sequential, by
nature).
631
7
10
220 kV
110 kV
9+ j2
6+ j4
4
1
-20.2 j11
(-20.2-j7.2)
2
49.8+ j78.5
-11+ j2.9
6
13+ j6
35+ j20
9
5
15+ j25
632
Variable
F[MW]
F [%]
tc 1-2
tc 5-6
tc 8-9
F[MW]
F [%]
tc 1-2
tc 5-6
tc 8-9
Number
of QP
Iteration
Initial
amount
Final
amount
0.6184
100
12
9
5
0.5943
96.10
11.29
9.59
4.96
0.5879
95.07
11.76
10.17
2.03
0.5878
95.05
11.78
10.17
2.03
0.5945
96.13
12
10
2
0.6184
100
12
9
5
0.5943
96.10
11.29
9.59
4.96
0.5879
95.07
11.76
10.17
2.03
0.5878
95.05
11.78
10.17
2.03
0.5921
95.74
11.79
10.17
1.92
0.5920
95.73
12.04
10.47
1.92
0.5945
96.13
12
10
2
0.62
F [MW]
0.6 1
0.6 0
0.5 9
0.5 8
3
4
Iteration N um b er
Fig. 10.9. F [MW] as function of iterations number for a test network 220/110 kV.
633
Z
L X L X
L
2 L(z ) XX
Hessian = [H ] =
0
0
= LX
Z
Z
i j L
0
0
X
(10.68)
(10.69)
The scarcity of the Hessian matrix will be exploited in the solution algorithm.
From this, according to optimization theory, the Karush-Kuhn-Tucker necessary
conditions of optimality are, [10.43, 10.71]:
L X ( Z * ) = L X ([ X * , * , * ]) = 0;
L ( Z * ) = L ([ X * , * , * ]) = 0;
*
(10.70)
L ( Z ) = L ([ X , , ]) = 0;
*i 0 if g ( X * ) = 0
*i = 0 if g ( X * ) 0
*i = Real
634
k U
U i < U i min
Penalty Functions
i min U i ;
W = 0
; U i min U i U i max
i
2
(10.71)
While the inequality constraint is not violated, the penalty function has a
value of zero. As the constraint begins to be violated, the penalty function quickly
increases. Another advantage of the quadratic penalty function is the ability to
control how hard or soft to make the constraint.
(a + b P
i
i ( generators )
i Gi
+ ci PG2i +
i
i ( penalties )
gi ( X )
(10.72)
Subject to:
Pi = 0
h( X ) = 0 Qi = 0
U U = 0
i set
i
2
S 2 S
0
max
ik
ik
PG PG max 0
i
i
PG i min PGi 0
g ( X ) 0 U i U i max 0
U i min U i 0
tc tc
ik max 0
ik
tcik min tcik 0
The constraints on the reactive power at each generator are not included in
the problem as stated above. These constraints will be taken care of by treating a
generator bus at a Q limit as a load bus. This is commonly done in a power system,
when modelling generator reactive power limits, [10.71].
635
636
variants are being extended to solve all kind of programs: from linear, to nonlinear
and from convex, to non-convex (the latter with no guarantee regarding their
convergence). In the same way, they are also being applied to solve all sorts of
practical problems. Optimization of power system operations is one of the areas,
where IP methods are being applied extensively, due to the size and special
features of these problems, [10.51, 10.61 10.63, 10.65 10.67, 10.73].
The computational effort for each iteration of an IP algorithm is dominated
by the solution of large, sparse linear system. Therefore, the performance of any IP
code is highly dependent on the linear algebra kernel.
Interior-point methods are usually classified into three main categories,
[10.15]: projective methods, affine-scaling methods and primal-dual methods.
Projective methods include Karmarkar original algorithm, and are responsible for the
great interest set to the area. Affine-scaling methods were obtained as simplifications
of projective methods. They do not share all the good theoretical qualities of
projective methods, but their reduced computational complexity and simplicity made
them become very popular at the time and the most effective in practice. Primal-dual
methods include path-following methods and potential reduction methods. The
primal-dual algorithms that incorporate predictor and corrector steps are currently
accepted as the computationally most effective variants.
The first theoretical results for primal-dual path-following methods are due to
Megiddo (1986), who proposed to apply a logarithmic barrier method to the primal
and dual problems simultaneously. The path-following algorithms that incorporate
Mehrotra predictor-corrector technique are, at present, accepted as the most
computationally effective IP algorithms. Additional improvements to Mehrotra
algorithm are usually achieved by applying multiple corrector steps.
Although logarithmic barrier IP methods were devised to solve general NLP
problems, research on IP methods for NLP has been lately motivated mainly by the
superb performance of the IP variants for LP, an area that has received much
attention and enjoyed incredible progress.
The computational effort of each iteration of an IP method is dominated by
the solution of large, sparse linear systems of the form
D 2
At X r
=
0 Y w
(10.73)
Then, it is essential to consider efficient methods for their solution, which can
be either direct or iterative methods. Typically, the linear systems (10.73) are
solved using direct factorization. Direct methods usually consider the normalequations form,
Y = AD 2 At
] (AD r w)
1
X = D 2 At y + D 2 r
(10.74)
637
F(X )
h( X ) = 0
subject to:
(10.75)
g min g ( X ) g max
where: X Rn
a
vector function with conventional power flow equations
h:R
and other equality constraints;
g : Rn Rp a vector of functional variables, with lower bound gmin and
upper bound gmax, corresponding to operating limits in the
system.
Henceforth, we assume that F(X), hi(X) and gi(X) are twice continuously
differentiable.
The IP method described in this section transforms all inequality constraints
in (10.75) into equalities, by adding non-negative slack vectors. The non-negativity
conditions (s, z) 0 are handled by incorporating them into logarithmic barrier
terms:
p
Minimize F ( X ) k
(ln s + ln z ) ;
i
s, z > 0
i =1
subject to: h( X ) = 0
s z + g max g min = 0
(10.76)
g ( X ) z + g max = 0
638
L(Y ) = L( X , s, z , , , ) = F ( X ) k
(ln s + ln z ) h( X )
i
i =1
(10.77)
(10.79)
s + z g max + g min = 0
(10.80)
g ( X ) + z g max = 0
X F ( X ) J h ( X )t + J g ( X )t = 0
(10.82)
h( X ) = 0
(10.83)
are
)
v = v + ;
e = [1, 1, , 1]t
(10.81)
the gradient of F;
the Jacobian of h;
the Jacobian of g;
vectors of Lagrange multipliers, called dual
variables;
a vector of ones.
639
s
S + k e
k
Z
Zv + e
0
s z + g max g min
=
0
Jg
g ( X ) z + g max
v
0 J gt 2X L J ht X X F ( X ) + J h ( X )t J g ( X )t
0 0 Jh
0
h( X )
(10.84)
)
where: = diag (1 , ..., p ) , = diag(v1 , ..., v p )
0
0 )
I I
0 I
0 0
0 0
S
Z
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
j 2X h j ( X ) +
j =1
g ( X )
j
2
X
(10.85)
j =1
J ht X rX
=
0 r
(10.86)
rX = F ( X ) + J h ( X )t J g ( X )t
(10.87)
r = h( X )
(10.88)
J d = 2X L(Y ) + k J g ( X )t S 2 + Z 2 J g ( X )
(10.89)
(10.90)
v = k Z 2 z
k +1 = k + kD
s k +1 = s k + kP s
k +1 = k + kD
z k +1 = z k + kP z
v k +1 = v k + kD v
(10.91)
640
where the scalars kP (0, 1] and kD (0, 1] are the step length that can be taken
along y, given by:
s k
zk
kP = min 1 , min i si < 0 , i zi < 0
i s
zi
i
)
k
vk )
kD = min 1 , min i i < 0 , )i vi < 0
i
vi
(10.92)
where (0,1) is a safety factor to ensure that Yk+1 will hold the strict positivity
)
condition (s, z, , v ) > 0.
In Step 3, the kth iteration is considered converged if
{ {
3 =
X F ( X k ) J h ( X k )t k + J g ( X k )t v k
1+ x
+ v
(10.93)
F ( X ) F ( X k 1 )
k
k
1+ X k
2 ; 4 =
1 + F(X k )
or
k
X
g( X k )
(10.93')
4 2
where 1, 2 and are predetermined tolerances, and k is the residual of the
complementary conditions, obtained by:
)
k = ( s k )t k + ( z k )t v k
(10.94)
k
If not converged, then Y is reduced based on an expected decrease of the
average complementary residual, as
k
k +1 = k
, k = max 0.99 k 1 , 0.1
(10.95)
2p
where (0,1) is expected (not necessarily realized) decrease in k, known as the
centring parameter.
641
)
k Zv
Zv
s z + g max g min
0
2
y L(Y ) Y =
(10.96)
+ +
g ( X ) z + g max
0
0
F ( X ) + J h ( X ) t J g ( X ) t v 0
0
h( X )
0
0
(10.97)
where: Yaf is an affine direction, the pure Newton direction that is obtained
when we set k = 0 in (10.84). The affine direction is responsible
for optimization, that is, reducing primal and dual infeasibility
and complementary gap;
Yce a centring direction, whose size is governed by the adaptively
chosen barrier parameter k. The centring direction, given by the
second vector from the right-hand side of (10.96), keeps the
current point away from the boundary of the feasible region and
ideally close to the barrier trajectory to improve the changes for a
long step to be made in the next iteration;
Yco is a corrector direction, defined by the last vector in the right-hand
side of (10.96) that attempts to compensate for some of the
nonlinearity in the affine direction.
642
)
z
Zv
af
s
z
g
g
af
max
min
Y2 L(Y )
=
g ( X ) z + g max
vaf
X af F ( X ) + J ( X ) J ( X ) v
h
t
g
t
h( X )
af
(10.98)
estimate kaf
k+1
for
kaf
k
af
= min k
2
k
, 0.2 af
2 p
(10.100)
This procedure chooses kaf to be small when the affine direction produces a
large decrease in complementary, kaf <<< k , and chooses kaf to be large
otherwise.
The Corrector Step
Instead of computing the combined centring-corrector direction Yce + Yco
and then adding Yaf, it computes the full direction Y at once from:
0
0
0
)
S
Z
0
Z
I
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
J gt
0
0
0
0
Jg
2X L
Jh
s
S + k e S af af
)
k
Zv + e Z af vaf
s z + g max g min
=
g ( X ) z + g max
v
J ht X X F ( X ) + J h ( X ) t J g ( X ) t v
0
h( X )
(10.101)
0
0
0
0
643
Since the predictor and corrector steps are based on the same matrix
factorization, the additional effort in predictor-corrector method is in the extra
linear system solution to compute the affine direction, and in the extra ratio test to
compute af. What are usually gained from this small extra effort per iteration are
reductions in the iteration count and in overall solution time, [10.63].
644
The problems associated with the unit commitment have been generally
difficult to solve because of the uncertainty of particular aspects. For instance, the
fuel availability, the imprecise load forecasts, the variable costs affected by the
generating units feeding with different fuel or water rates, and losses caused by
reactive flows are generally unpredictable in the real applications. These and other
inconsistency problems affect the overall economic operation of the electric power
system. In order to reach a feasible solution to this problem, different constraints
must be considered, such as spinning reserve, thermal unit constraints, fuel
constraints, power generation-load balance, security constraints, etc.
Nowadays, in the electricity market based on a pool, the Independent System
Operator (ISO) receives energy bids from producers and consumers and determines
for every hour the market clearing price, the power production of every bidding
generator, and the consumption level of every consumer. The target is to maximize
the net social welfare, [10.2].
Unit commitment has grown in importance recently, now only to promote
system economy but also for the following reasons, [10.46]:
Start-up, shut-down, and dynamic considerations in restarting modern
generating facilities are much more complex and costly that they were for
smaller older units;
Grown in system size to the point where even small percentage gains have
become economically very important.
The application of computer-based unit commitment programs in electric
utilities has been slow due to the following reasons:
Unit commitment programs are not readily transferred between systems;
There are political problems, constraints, and peculiarities of systems that
are not easily amenable to mathematical solutions and may be very hard to
model in the first place.
The OUC problem is a complex mathematical optimization problem, with
both integer and continuous variables. Thus the OUC problem has commonly been
formulated as a nonlinear, large scale, mixed-integer combinatorial optimization
problem with constraints. A survey of literature on the OUC methods reveals that
various numerical optimization techniques have been employed to approach the
OUC problem. Specifically, there are priority list methods, integer programming,
dynamic programming, branch-and-bound, Benders decomposition, Lagrangian
relaxation, genetic algorithms, etc. Since improved OUC schedules may save the
electric utilities millions of dollars per year in production costs, the search for closer
to optimal unit commitment continues, [10.15, 10.20, 10.39, 10.66, 10.67, 10.70].
645
units, for use in meeting forecasted demand over a future short-term horizon.
Therefore, the objective function is expressed as the sum of fuel and start-up costs
of the generating units. The generic optimal unit commitment problem can be
formulated as, [10.20]:
Minimize F ( X , P) =
[F ( P
NG H
i =1 h =1
Gih
) + STi (1 X i ( h1) ) X ih
(10.102)
Gih
i =1
X ih Dh
(10.103)
X
i =1
ih PGi max
Dh + Rh
(10.104)
(10.105)
X ih = 1 for
it
< upi
(10.106)
t = h upi
h 1
(1 X
it )
< downi
(10.107)
t = h downi
where: Fi ( PGih ) is fuel cost function of the ith unit with generation output;
PGih
(10.34)
646
Dh
Rh
Pi min
Pi max
upi
downi
The Lagrangian relaxation (LR) method uses Lagrange multipliers for the
system constraints (power balance and reserve) and adds the associated penalty
terms in the objective function to form the Lagrangian function. For fixed values of
the Lagrange multipliers, the Lagrange function is separable by unit. Therefore, the
minimization of the Lagrange function is decomposed to NG (NG is the number of
the units) smaller minimization problems, one for each unit.
Based on duality theory, the LR method subsequently tries to find those
values of the Lagrange multipliers that maximize the dual objective function. This
is a very hard problem to solve. Even if the solution to the dual problem was found,
due to the non-convexity of the primal (original problem) objective function,
feasibility of the primal is not guaranteed. The efforts of the LR method are
focused on finding some values for Lagrange multipliers that satisfy system
(coupling) constraints and meanwhile reduce as much as possible the gap between
the values of the primal problem objective function and Lagrange function, [10.39].
The LR decomposition procedure is dependent on the initial estimated of the
Lagrangian multipliers and on the method used to update the multipliers. Another
difficulty with LR based methods is that computational performance is very
dependent on the method, by which the Lagrangian multipliers are updated.
Currently most techniques used for estimating the Lagrangian multipliers rely on a
sub-gradient algorithm or heuristics, [10.20]. With the Lagrangian multipliers h ,
h = 1, K, H , and h , h = 1, K, H , using the constraints (10.103) and (10.104),
respectively, the form of the corresponding Lagrangian function is:
L ( X , P, , ) = F ( X , P ) +
h Dh
h =1
+ h Dh + Rh
h =1
NG
P
i =1
Gih
PGi max X ih )
i =1
NG
X ih ) +
(10.108)
647
q * = max q ( , )
(10.109)
q( , ) = min L( X , P, , )
(10.110)
where:
X,P
NG
[ F ( P
i
i =1 h =1
Gih
( D
h
+ Dh + Rh )
h =1
The term
H
[F (P
i
h =1
Gih
(10.112)
can be solved separately for each generating unit, without regard for what is
happening on the other generating units. Then the minimum of the Lagrangian
function L( X , P, , ) is found by solving the minimum for each generating unit
over all time periods:
min L( X , P, , ) =
NG
i =1
min
[F (P
Gih ) +
STi (1 X i ( h 1) )
h =1
(10.113)
( D
h
+ h Dh + h Rh )
h =1
648
Pmax = Pn
[MW]
1. Classically-coal
195
2. Classically-coal
250
3. High technology on coal
300
Generator type
Pmin
[MW]
50
70
60
ai
[tcc/h]
26.8905
32.7164
48.5935
bi
ci
[tcc/MWh] [tcc/MW2h]
0.1978
0.0029
0.3250
0.0036
0.1925
0.0011
P1 [MW]
190.0000
163.2891
169.1651
189.7707
189.7700
P2 [MW]
250.0000
161.7166
155.8348
135.2292
135.2300
P3 [MW]
185.0000
299.9942
300.0000
300.0000
300.0000
F(P) [tcc]
521.7820
414.0734
411.2703
408.5067
408.5067
540
F (P) [tcc]
520
480
440
400
440
2
Iteration N um ber
F ( X ) = 0.0072 X 2 + 0.3250 ;
0.0022 X + 0.1925
3
0
0
0.0058
2X F ( X ) = 0
0.0072
0
0
0
0.0022
649
1 0 0
J g (X ) = 0 1 0 ;
0 0 1
2X g 2 ( X )
0 0 0
2X g1 ( X ) = 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
= 0 0 0 ;
0 0 0
2X
J h ( X ) = [1 1 1] ;
Let
us
chose
= 0.99995 ,
0 0 0
g 3 ( X ) = 0 0 0
0 0 0
2X h( X )
= 0.25 ,
0 0 0
= 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 = 0.01 ,
0 = 0.1 ,
{ {
50
= 70 ;
60
g max
195
= 250 ;
300
g = g max g min
145
= 180
240
145 190 50
145 108.75
240 185 60
240 125
z = 180 135 = 45
240 125 115
0
0
108.75 0
0 = 0.01 0
135 0
0
0 125
0
36.25 0
0
v = 0.01 0
45 0
0
0 115
4
1 0.9195 10
4
1 = 0.7407 10
1 0.8 10 4
4
3
1 0.9195 10 0.1839 10
1 0.7407 10 4 = 0.1481 10 3
1 0.8 10 4 0.0069 10 3
0 = 1 ,
650
Iteration 1
The Newton direction is obtained by solving reduced system (10.89):
0
0
1 0 0
0.0058
Jd = 0
0.0072
0 + 0.010 1 0
0 0 1
0
0
0.0022
2
2
108.75 0
0 1 0 0
0
36.25 0
0
45 0 0 1 0 =
135 0 + 0
0 115 0 0 1
0 125
0
0
0
0
0.00581
= 0
0.00721
0
0
0
0.0022
3
1.2998 1
1 0 0 0.1839 10 0.2999
0
0
1 X 1 0.29998
0.00581
0
0.00721
0
1 X 2 1.1251
=
0
0
0.0022 1 X 3 0.4005
0
0
1
1
1
45.8254
X = 151.4594 ; = 0.03381
197.2848
With relations (10.90) are calculated:
1 0 0 45.8254 45.8254
z = 0 1 0 151.4594 = 151.4594
0 0 1 197.2848 197.2848
45.8254
s = 151.4594
197.2848
0
108.75 0
135 0
= 0.01 0
0
0 125
3
45.8254 0.03874 10
151.4594 = 0.08311 10 3
197.2848 0.12626 10 3
651
0
36.25 0
45 0
v = 0.01 0
0
0 115
3
45.8254 0.03874 10
151.4594 0.08311 10 3 =
197.2848 0.12626 10 3
0.3875 10 3
= 0.8311 10 3
0.2754 10 3
3
4
0.8 10 0.0069 10 0.08690 10
0.3875 10 3 0.03874 10 3 0.3487 10 3
135
115
108.75
1P = min 1, 0.99995 min
,
,
= 0.58288
45.8254 151.4594 197.2848
0.08 10 3
0.27586 10 3 0.2222 10 3
,
,
1D = min 1, 0.99995 min
= 0.29709
3
0.12626 10
0.3487 10 3 0.7479 10 3
The new primal and dual variables are computed with relation (10.91):
190
45.8254 163.2891
X 1 = 250 + 0.58288 151.4594 = 161.7166
185
197.2848 299.9942
108.75
45.8254 82.0391
36.25
45.8254 62.9609
z1 = 45 + 0.58288 151.4594 = 133.2833
115
197.2848 0.00575
0.03874 10 3 0.1034 10 3
0.9195 10 4
652
3
0.1722 10
h( X 1 )
= 0 < 103 ;
= 197.2848 > 10 3 ;
14 = 0.2625 > 10 3
Iteration 2
169.1651
X = 155.8348 ;
300
2
0.1034 10 3
2 = 0.0988 10 3 ;
3
0.0425 10
87.9151
s = 40.8348 ;
240
2
57.0848
z = 139.1651 ;
0.2875 10 6
0.0688 10 3
v 2 = 0.0988 10 3 ;
2
0.5924 10
2 = 1.0138
= 26.4963 > 10 3 ;
h( X 2 )
= 0 < 103 ;
24 = 0.004373 > 10 3
653
Iteration 3
189.7707
X = 135.2292 ;
300
3
36.4792
108.5207
3
s = 20.2292 ; z = 159.7707 ;
0.2874 10 6
240
0.0688 10 3
0.1034 10 3
2
0.0425 10 3
0.5924 10
= 20.6056 > 10 3 ; h( X 3 )
Iteration 4
189.77
X = 135.23 ;
300
4
36.4782
108.52
4
s = 20.23 ; z = 159.7717 ;
0.2874 10 6
240
0.1034 10 3
4 = 0.0988 10 3 ;
0.0425 10 3
4 = 1.01382 ;
4P = 1 ;
4D = 0.94464823 10 -5 ; F ( X 4 ) = 408.5067 ;
4 = 0.4951 10 3 < 10 3 ;
h( X 4 )
0.0688 10 3
v 4 = 0.0988 10 3 ;
0.5924 10 2
= 0 < 103 ;
= 0.9527 10 3 < 10 3 ;
654
have incorporated the simplified network model into the scheduling problem
formulation by using Lagrangian relaxation (LR), augmented Lagrange relaxation
(ALR) and so on.
The OPF considers only power system at a particular instant and generally is
unable to model time-related constrains (e.g. ramping rates) or energy related
constraints (e.g. generation contract, fuel storage and reservoir capacity). With time
related and energy related constraints considered, OPF becomes a dynamic OPF
(DOPF) problem, [10.66]. However, the OPF problem for a large system in itself is
a very large complex nonlinear programming problem. Adding time-related
constraints and new decision variables creates a very large scale complex problem
encompassing both time and the network features. The solution method is therefore
very crucial for the success of this integration.
Other papers propose an iterative multi-stage method, to integrate power
system scheduling and OPF together. The optimization problem is then decoupled
into a primary stage, of minimizing the cost of active power generation, and a
secondary stage, of minimizing the power system losses. The result of one-stage is
used to update the parameters of another stage. However, like other iterative
methods, this method may have convergence problem.
By introducing a set of duplicating variables and relaxing the duplicating
equations with a set of Lagrangian multipliers, the problem can be decomposed
into a standard power system scheduling problem and a series of OPF problems,
one for each hour. In this case, the genetic algorithms can be used to transfer a
population of dual feasible solutions into a good primal feasible solution.
A direct nonlinear interior-point method (IPM) is adopted [10.66], to solve
the DOPF problem as a single optimization problem, rather than many separated
optimization sub-problems coordinated by LR or other techniques. The proposed
method takes advantage of both the super sparsity technique of Newton OPF and
the advantage of IPMs to handle inequality constraints.
Consider a power system with NG units, the objective is to minimize the total
generation cost over a scheduling horizon. This minimization is subject to the time
separated constraints, such as load demand and reserve requirement, and the time
related constraints which couple the generation of individual unit across hours. The
time unit is one hour and the planning horizon T may vary from several hours to a
week. A nonlinear DOPF model can therefore be formulated as follows, [10.66].
Objective function
The DOPF extends the objective function of the OPF problem to minimize
the generation cost across the whole time horizon:
Minimize F =
Nt NG
(F (P
t=1 i=1
Pi
(10.114)
655
Within every single time period, the following constraints should be satisfied
(subscript t is omited for simplicity):
Power output limits of generator i:
PGi min PGi PGi max
QGi min QGi QGi max
(10.39)
(10.115)
R R
i
min
(10.116)
(10.42)
[U [G
k
ik
k =1
Qi = U i
(10.36)
[U [G
k
k =1
ik
(10.117)
Other control variables like taps of LTC transformers and shunt capacitance
can be included as well.
656
Time-related constraints
The time-related constraints, like ramping rates, are dynamic operational
constraints. As a result of these dynamic operational constraints, the operational
decision at a given hour may affect the operational decisions at a later hour.
(10.118)
In (10.118), upper limit and lower limit of ramping rates are in the same
manner. For the notation of simplicity, only the upper limit is shown in the
following derivation:
(10.119)
Git
Pc max i
(10.120)
In some cases, generators have fixed generation contract for the scheduling
horizon:
P
t
where: Pcmin i
= Pc i
G it
(10.121)
Pcmax i
Pci
Pcit = PGit
Here Pci means the maximum available energy of unit i for the contract period.
In [10.66], constraint (10.121) is handled as inequality constraint, in order to utilize the
advantage of interior-point method of dealing with inequality constraints:
Pci
P
t
Gi t
Pci +
(10.122)
657
Minimize
Ft ( X t )
t
subject to:
ht ( X t ) = 0 ;
g min t g t ( X t ) g max t
PGt +1 PGt PR max
Pc min i
P
t
Gi t
Pc max i
t = 1,K, N t
t = 1,K, N t
t = 1,K, N t 1
(10.123)
i = 1,K, N c
658
659
(10.124)
where and are the Lagrangian multipliers of the equality and inequality
constraints respectively.
Using interior-point technique for the this problem, the model for OPF is
obtained, those algorithm is presented below, [10.67]:
Step1. Initialization;
Step 2. Choosing step size;
Step 3. Barrier factor;
Step 4. Convergence criteria.
660
661
The ISO then evaluates these bids using its security constrained unit commitment
optimization computer model. This model schedules generation and price
responsive demand hour-by-hour for the operating day so as to respect all generator
and security (reliability) constraints and to minimize operating cost.
E n ergy Price
[$/M W h ]
A ggregated D em an d
Bid C urve
ISO
Generation
Level & ECP
Generation
Level & ECP
Bidding
Strategies
Participant 1
Participant 2
A ggregated Supply
Bid C urve
MCP
E n ergy
[M W h ]
Participant 3
System D em an d
Based on supply bid curve and demand bid curve, ISO determines Market
Clearing Price (MCP), Figure 10.12, [10.29]. The suppliers in the market energy
are paid at the MCP. For the bid curves, which are the true marginal ones, the
following remarks can be performed. If a generator unit is on the margin (MCP)
during all the hours of scheduling period, total payment it receives will equal its
energy bid. If a generator unit is not on the margin, the total payment it receives
will exceed its energy supply bid, [10.69]. Therefore, the MCP must be calculated
for each hour of the scheduling period so that to be sufficient to completely recover
all costs of committed generator units, [10.30].
MCP is public information made available by the ISOs, but aggregate offers
and demands are not available in many electricity markets, [10.49]. Producers and
consumers rely on price forecast information to prepare their corresponding
bidding strategies. If a producer has a good forecast of next day MCP, it can
develop a strategy to maximize its own benefit and establish a pool bidding
technique, to achieve its maximum benefit. Similarly, once a good next-day price
forecast is available, a consumer can derive a plan to maximize its own utility,
using the electricity purchased from the pool. In the current literature, approaches
based on neural networks, time series are used in the forecast of next-day
electricity price, [10.49]. In the literature, the simulation has been used for its
simplicity, and bidding strategies are discretized, such as bidding high, bidding
low, or bidding medium. With discrete bidding strategies, payoff matrices are
constructed by enumerating all possible combinations.
It is very interesting to find a model and a method for optimization bidding
strategies from the viewpoint of a utility, say Participant i, [10.69]. We assume that
for all generators, the production cost is a quadratic function of generated power,
Ci = ai + bi Pi + ci Pi 2
is the active output of generator i;
where: Pi [MW]
ai , bi , and ci the coefficients of the cost function.
(10.34)
662
(10.125)
663
Instead of asking the best for sure, we seek the good enough with high
probability. This goal softening makes the optimization problem much
easier.
To apply ordinal optimization framework to integrated generation scheduling
and bidding, major efforts are needed to build power market simulation models and
to devise a strategy to construct a small but good enough select set. The basic idea
is to use a rough model that describes the influence of bidding strategies on market
clearing price, MCP.
In this section we assume that each generator bids more values (slices) in the
market, one for each generator slice, corresponding to the each portion of cost curve.
This is equivalent to assuming that each generator owns more slices (production
units), with bidding low, bidding medium, bidding high, and so on.
a
[$/h]
105
96
105
94
b
[$/MW h]
12
9.6
13
9.4
c
[$/MW2 h]
0.0120
0.0096
0.0130
0.0094
Min Generation
[MW]
50
50
50
50
Max Generation
[MW]
250
250
250
250
(10.126)
C 4 = 94 + 9.40 P + 0.0094 P 2
Table 10.8
Size [MW]
50
50
50
50
50
Generated
Power
GP [MW]
50
50 - 100
100 - 150
150 - 200
200 - 250
664
Slices
Number
1
2
3
Size [MW]
50
100
100
Generated
Power
GP [MW]
50
50 - 150
150 - 250
Table 10.10
Generator Bid Prices (250 MW Slices) [$/MWh] bidding high
Slices
Number
1
Size [MW]
250
Generated
Power
GP [MW]
50 - 250
Other combinations can be performed, apart from the considered cases, bidding
low, bidding medium and bidding high, simultaneously, for all the suppliers. The unit
commitment and aggregated supply bid curve (50 and 100 MW Slices) for bidding
medium are given in Table 10.11 and Figure 10.13.
Table 10.11
Unit Commitment for various Demands (with 50 and 100 MW slices)
bidding medium
Merit
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Bid Price
[$/MWh]
12.22
12.48
12.85
13.12
14.48
14.78
15.30
16.30
16.40
17.60
18.42
19.92
Generator
Unit
4
2
4
2
4
2
1
1
3
3
1
3
Number
Slices
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
1
2
3
3
Demand
[MW]
50
100
200
300
400
500
550
650
700
800
900
1000
Table 10.12
Awards and Revenues for the Generators Units (50 MW Slices) bidding low
Demand
[MW]
MCP
[$/MWh]
200
400
600
800
12.48
13.92
15.45
17.32
GR1 GR2
0 100
0 100
0 200
0 200
100 250
0 250
200 250 100 250
0
0
1545
3465
GR3
1248.00
0
2784.00
0
3862.50
0
4331.25 1732.5
GR4
1248.00
2784.00
3862.50
4331.25
Total
Revenues
[$/h]
2496
5568
9270
13860
665
18
3
MCP_800
17.60
MCP_600
16.30
MCP_200 4
12.85
12
MCP_400
14.48
0
16
0
200
400
600
800
1000
Fig. 10.13. Aggregated Supply Bid Curve with 50 and 100 MW Slices bidding medium.
Table 10.13
Awards and Revenues for the Generators Units (50 and 100 MW Slices) bidding medium
Demand
[MW]
MCP
[$/MWh]
200
400
600
800
12.85
14.48
16.30
17.60
Awards Powers
[MW]
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP4
0
50
0 150
0 150 0 250
100 250 0 250
150 250 150 250
Generators Revenue
[$/h]
GR1 GR2 GR3 GR4
0 642.33
0
1927
0 2171.40
0
3619
1630 4075.00
0
4075
2640 4400.00 2640
4400
Total
Revenues
[$/h]
2569.33
5790.40
9780.00
14080.00
Table 10.14
Awards and Revenues for the Generators Units (250 MW Slices) bidding high
Demand
[MW]
MCP
[$/MWh]
200
400
600
800
14.48
14.78
18.42
19.92
Awards Powers
[MW]
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP4
0
0
0 200
0 150
0 250
100 250
0 250
250 250
50 250
Generators Revenue
[$/h]
GR1 GR2 GR3 GR4
0
0
0 2896
0 2217
0 3695
1842 4065
0 4065
4980 4980 996 4980
Table 10.15
Benefits for the Generators Units (50 MW Slices) bidding low
Demand
[MW]
200
400
600
800
Generators Benefit
[$/h]
GB1
GB2
GB3
GB4
0
96.00
0 120.00
0 384.00
0 434.00
120 766.50
0 831.00
480 1235.25 197.50 1299.75
Total
Benefits
[$/h]
216.00
818.00
1717.50
3212.50
Total
Revenues
[$/h]
2896
5912
9972
15936
666
Generators Benefit
[$/h]
GB1 GB2 GB3 GB4
0
42.33
0 211.5
0 419.40
0 587.5
205 979.00
0 1043.5
465 1304.00 292.50 1368.5
Total
Benefits
[$/h]
253.83
1006.90
2227.50
3430.00
Table 10.17
Benefits for the Generators Units (250 MW Slices) bidding high
Demand
[MW]
200
400
600
800
Generators Benefit
[$/h]
GB1 GB2 GB3 GB4
0
0
0
546.5
0 465
0
663.5
417 969
0 1033.5
1125 1884 208.5 1948.5
Total
Benefits
[$/h]
546.5
1128.5
2419.5
5166.0
The comparison of results for the three strategies shows the influence bidding
low/medium/high on MCP, awards and revenues for the generator units.
Ideally, each generator participant in the energy market will select the binding
strategy that maximizes its profits. Using a discrete bidding strategy, a simulation bidding
can be performed for multiple possible combinations. The number of combinations depends
on the available information. Using an ordinal optimization technique, a good enough
bidding strategy is obtained, with reasonable computation effort.
In a typical short-term forward wholesale electricity market where products are
auctioned sequentially, one often observes significant market inefficiency and price
volatility thus the recent growing impetus in developing integrated short-term forward
markets where electric energy, reserves, and transmission capacity are auctioned
simultaneously. Such markets need new computational methods and models for
determining market clearing price and physical (delivery/consumption) schedules, [10.31].
Chapter references
[10.1] Alguacil, N., Conejo, A.J. Multiperiod optimal power flow using benders
decomposition, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 15, No. 1, pp. 196 201,
2000.
[10.2] Arroyo, J.M., Conejo, A.J. Multiperiod auction for a pool-based electricity
market, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 17, No. 4, pp. 1225 1231, 2002.
[10.3] Bakirtzis, A., Biskas, P., Zousmas, C., Petridis, V. Optimal power flow by
enhanced genetic algorithm, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 17, No. 2, pp.
229 236, 2002.
[10.4] Carlos, C.A., Bose, A. Correctability of voltage violations in on-line contingency
analysis, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 9, No. 3, pp. 1651 1657, 1994.
[10.5] Carpentier, J. Contribution Ltude du dispatching conomique, Bull. Soc.
Franaise Electr., Vol. 3, pp. 431 447, 1962.
667
[10.6] Crin, Gh., Georgescu, Gh., Gavrila, M., Bonciu Cl. Reele neurale artificiale
i sisteme expert n electroenergetic (Artificial neural networks and expert
systems in power systems), Editura Gh. Asachi, Iai, 1994.
[10.7] Crin, Gh., Alexandrescu, V., Voinea, E., Muat, M. Minimum emission
control using the existing components, Proc. of National Energy Conference,
CNE98, Vol. 3, pp. 86 90, Romania, Neptun, 1998.
[10.8] Crin, Gh., Alexandrescu, V., Bonciu, Cr., Voinea, E. Multiobjective
optimization using fuzzy logic, Proc. of the 6th Internat. Symposium on Automatic
Control and Computer Science, SACCS98, Vol. I, pp. 202 207, Romania, Iasi,
1998.
[10.9] Crin, Gh., Bonciu, Cl., Musat, M., Zisman, Z. Losses minimization in power
systems using artificial neural networks, Proc. of Mediterranean Electrotechnical
Conference, MELECON98, Vol. II, pp. 1103 1106, Israel, Tel-Aviv, 1998.
[10.10] Crin, Gh., Hazi, Gh. Mthode de programmation quadratrique successive,
Bull. IPI, Fasc. 1-2, Section III, Electrotechnic, Energetic, Electronic, pp. 127
131, 1998.
[10.11] Crin, Gh., Alexandrescu, V., Bonciu, Cl., Brladeanu, E. Coordination of
voltage/reactive power control using fuzzy dynamic programming, Proc. of
ELECTRIMACS99, Vol. I, pp. 127 131, Lisbon, Portugal, 1999.
[10.12] Crin, Gh., Alexandrescu, V., Grigora, Gh., Moshe, M. Peak load estimation
in distribution networks by fuzzy regression approach, Proc. of Mediterranean
Electrotechnical Conference, MELECON 2000, Vol. III, pp. 907 910, Nicosia,
Cyprus, 2000.
[10.13] Crin, Gh., Grigora, Gh. Inteligen artificial. Optimizri n
electroenergetic (Artificial intelligence. Optimisations in power systems), Editura
Venus, Iai, 2001.
[10.14] Crin, Gh., Grigora, Gh. Tehnici de optimizare. Aplicaii n electroenergetic
(Optimization techniques. Applications in power systems), Editura Venus, Iai,
2002.
[10.15] Crin, Gh., Grigora, Gh. Unit commitment optimization by interior-point
method, Proc. of the 2nd European Conference on Intelligent Systems &
Technologies, ECIT2002, Romania, Iasi, 2002.
[10.16] Crin, Gh., Alexandrescu, V., Grigora, Gh. Application of the powers
correlation in fuzzy modelling, Bull. P.I. Iai, Fascicula 5A, s. Electrotehnic, pp. 297
302, 2002.
[10.17] Chen, Y.L., Liu, C.C. Interactive fuzzy satisfying method for optimal multiobjective VAR planning in power systems, IEE Proc. on Gener.Transm.Distrib,
Vol. 141, No. 6, pp. 554 560, 1994.
[10.18] Chen, Y.L., Liu, C.C. Optimal multi-objective VAr planning using an interactive
satisfying method, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 644 669,
1995.
[10.19] Chen, H., Wang, X. Cooperative coevolutionary algorithm for unit commitment,
IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 17, No. 1, pp. 128 133, 2002.
[10.20] Cheng, C.P., Liu, C.W., Liu, C.C. Unit commitment by Lagrangian relaxation
and genetic algorithms, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 15, No. 2, pp. 707
714, 2000.
[10.21] Conejo, A., Jimenez Redondo, N., Prieto, F. Lagrangian relaxation applications
to electric power operations and planning problems, pp.173 203, in: Song, Y.H.
Modern optimization techniques in power systems, Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Dordrecht, Boston, London, 1999.
668
[10.22] Conejo, A.J., Contreras J., Arroyo, J.M., Torre S. Optimal response of an
oligopolistic generating company to a competitive pool-based electric power
market, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 17, No. 2, pp. 424 430, 2002.
[10.23] Corsi, S., Marannino, P., Losignore, N., Moreschini, G., Piccini, G.
Coordination between the reactive power scheduling function and the hierarchical
voltage control of EHV ENEL system, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 10,
No. 2, pp. 686 694, 1995.
[10.24] Dommel, H.W., Tinney, W.F. Optimal power solutions, IEEE Trans. on Power
Apparatus and Systems, Vol. 87, pp. 1866 1876, 1968.
[10.25] Eremia, M., Crisciu, H., Ungureanu, B., Bulac, C. Analiza asistat de calculator
a regimurilor sistemelor electroenergetice (Computer aided analysis of power
systems regimes), Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 1985.
[10.26] Eremia, M., Trecat, J., Germond, A. Rseaux lecrtiques. Aspects actuels,
Editura Tehnic, Bucureti, 2000.
[10.27] Eremia, M., Petricic, D., Bulac, A.I., Bulac, C., Tritiu, I. Tehnici de inteligen
artificial. Concepte i aplicaii n electroenergetic (Artificial intelligence
techniques. Concepts and applications in power systems), Editura AGIR,
Bucureti, 2001.
[10.28] Florez, J., Tapia, A., Criado, R., Grijalba, J.M. Secondary voltage control based
on a robust multivariable PI controller, Proc. of the 11th PSCC, Vol. II, pp. 1011
1016, 1993.
[10.29] Guan, X., Ho, Y.Y., Lai, F. An ordinal optimization based bidding strategy for
electric power suppliers in the daily energy market, IEEE Trans. on Power
Systems, Vol. 16, No. 4, pp. 788 797, 2001.
[10.30] Hao, S., Angelidis, G.A., Singh, H., Papalexopoulus, A.D. Consumer payment
minimization in power pool auctions, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 13, No.
3, pp. 986 991, 1998.
[10.31] Hao, S., Zhuang, F. New models for integrated short-term forward electricity
markets, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.18, No. 2, pp. 478 485, 2003.
[10.32] Hazi, Gh. The consideration of statistic-probabilistic characteristics in the
optimization of power systems regimes, PhD thesis, Universitatea Tehnic Gh.
Asachi din Iai, Iai, 1996.
[10.33] He, Y., Song, Y.H., Wang, X.F. Bidding strategies based on bid sensitivities in
generation auction markets, IEE Proc. on Gener.Transm.Distrib., Volume 149,
Issue 1, pp. 21 26, 2002.
[10.34] He, Y., Song, Y.H. Integrated bidding strategies by optimal response to
probabilistic locational marginal prices, IEE Proc. on Gener.Transm.Distrib., Vol.
149, Issue 03, pp. 633 639, 2002.
[10.35] Huse, E.S., Wangensteen, I., Faanes, H.H. Thermal power generation scheduling
by simulated competition, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 14, No. 2, pp. 472
477, 1999.
[10.36] Jensen, S. Lagrange multipliers, http//:home.uchicago.edu/~sbjensen/Tutorials/
Lagrange.html.
[10.37] Karmarkar, N. New polynomial-time algorithm for linear programming,
combinatorica, Vol. 4, pp. 373 397, 1984.
[10.38] Kasztenny, B., Rosolowski, E., Izykowski, J., Saha, M., Hillstrom, B. Fuzzy
logic controller for on-load transformer tap changer, IEEE Trans. on Power
Delivery, Vol. 13, No. 1, pp. 164 170, 1998.
669
[10.39] Kazarlis, S.A., Bekirtzis, A.G., Petridis, V. A genetic algorithm solution to the
unit commitment problem, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 83
89, 1996.
[10.40] Lampinen, J. Multiobjective nonlinear Pareto optimization, Report,
Lappeenranta University of Technology, 2000.
[10.41] Liu, X., Vialas, C., Ilic, M., Athans, M., Heilbronn, B. A new concept for tertiary
coordination of secondary voltage control on a large power network, Proc. of the
11th PSCC, Vol. II, pp. 995 1002, Avignon, 1993.
[10.42] Lu, F.C., Hsu, Y.Y. Fuzzy Dynamic Programming Approach to Reactive Power/
Voltage in a Distribution substation, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 12, No.
2, pp. 681 688, 1997.
[10.43] Luenberger, G. Linear and non-linear programming, Reading, MA: AddisonWesley Publishing Company, pp. 295 392, 423 450, 1984.
[10.44] Martinez Ramos, J.L., Gomez, A., Cortes, J., Ruiz, E.M., Salinas, Y. A hybrid
tool to assist the operator in reactive power/voltage control and optimization,
IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 760 767, 1995.
[10.45] Martini, P. Game theory: retail power markets explained, The Risk Desk
Monday, May 28, 2001.
[10.46] Momoh, J. Electric power system applications of optimization, Marcel Dekker
Inc., New York Basel, 2001.
[10.47] Nakashima, T., Niimura, T. Market plurality and manipulation: performance
comparison of independent system operators, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems,
Vol. 17, No. 3, pp. 762 767, 2002.
[10.48] Nejdawi, I., Clements, K., Davis, P. An efficient interior point method for
sequential quadratic programming based optimal power flow, IEEE Trans. on
Power Systems, Vol. 15, No. 4, pp. 1179 1183, 2000.
[10.49] Nogales, F.J., Contreras, J., Conejo, A.J., Espinola, R. Forecasting next-day
electricity prices by time series models, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.17,
No. 2, pp. 342 348, 2002.
[10.50] Pshenichny, B.N., Danilin, Y.M. Numerical methods in extremal problems, Mir
Publishing House, Moscow, 1982.
[10.51] Quintana, V.H., Torres, G.L. Introduction to interior-point methods, PICA'99 in
Santa Clara, http://thunderbox. uwaterloo. ca/~ieee-ipm / index.html
[10.52] Saneifard, S., Prasad, N., Smolleck, H. A fuzzy logic approach to unit
commitment, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 988 995, 1997.
[10.53] Santos, A., Costa, G.R.M. Optimal-power-flow solution by Newtons method
applied to an augmented Lagrangian gunction, IEE Proc.-Gener.Transm.Distrib.,
Vol. 142, No. 1, pp. 33 36, 1995.
[10.54] Song, Y.H. Modern optimization techniques in power systems, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, Boston, London, 1999.
[10.55] Song, Y.H. Advanced technologies and power systems deregulation, Erasmus
Intensive Program Advanced technologies in Power Systems: FACTS and A.I.,
pp. 13 64, Politehnica University of Bucharest, 27 May 7 June 2002.
[10.56] Song, Y.H. Modern optimization techniques in power systems, Erasmus
Intensive Program Advanced technologies in Power Systems: FACTS and A.I.,
pp. 65 96, Politehnica University of Bucharest, 27 May 7 June 2002.
[10.57] Song Y. H. Operation of market-oriented power systems, Springer Publisher,
Early, 2003.
670
[10.58] Sun, D. H., Ashley B., Brewer B., Hughes A., Tinney W. F. Optimal power flow
by Newton approach, Trans. on IEEE, Vol. PAS-103, No. 10, pp. 2684 2880,
1984.
[10.59] Swarup, K.S., Yamashiro, S. Unit commitment solution methodology using
genetic algorithm, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.17, No. 1, pp. 87 91,
2002.
[10.60] Torre S., Arroyo, J.M., Conejo, A.J., Contreras, J. Price marker self-scheduling
in a pool-based electricity market: A mixed-Integer LP approach, IEEE Trans. on
Power Systems, Vol.17, No. 4, pp. 1037 1042, 2002.
[10.61] Torres, G.L., Quintana, V.H. An interior-point method for nonlinear optimal
flow using voltage rectangular coordinates, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.
13, No. 4, pp. 1211 1218, 1998.
[10.62] Torres, G.L., Quintana, V.H. Optimal power flow by a nonlinear
complementarity method, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 15, No. 3, pp. 1028
1033, 2000.
[10.63] Torres, G.L., Quintana, V.H. On a nonlinear multiple-centrality-corrections
interior-point method for optimal power flow, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems,
Vol. 16, No. 2, pp. 222 229, 2001.
[10.64] Xiao, Y., Song, Y.H., Sun, Y.Z. A hybrid stochastic approach to available
transfer capability evaluation, IEE Proc. on Gener.Transm.Distrib., Vol. 148,
Issue 5, pp. 420 426, 2001.
[10.65] Xie, K., Song, Y.H. Interior point methods and applications in power systems,
in: Song, Y. H., Modern optimization techniques in power systems, Kluwer
Academik Publishers, Dordrecht, Boston, London, 1999.
[10.66] Xie, K., Song, Y.H. Dynamic optimal power flow by interior point method, IEE
Proc. on Gener.Transm.Distrib., Volume 148, Issue 1, pp. 76 83, 2001.
[10.67] Xie, K., Song, Y.H. Power market oriented optimal power flow via an interior
point method, IEE Proc. on Gener.Transm.Distrib., Vol. 148, Issue 6, pp. 549
556, 2001.
[10.68] Yuryevich, J., Wong, K.P. Evolutionary programming based optimal power flow
algorithms, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 14, No. 4, pp. 1245 1250,
1999.
[10.69] Zhang, D., Wang, Y., Luh, P.B. Optimization based bidding strategies in the
deregulated market, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.15, No. 3, pp. 981 986,
2000.
[10.70] Wang, X., Song, Y.H., Lu, Q. Lagrangian decomposition approach to active
power congestion management across interconnected regions, IEE Proc. on
Gener.Transm.Distrib., Vol. 148, Issue 5, pp. 497 503, 2001.
[10.71] Weber, J.D. Implementation of a Newton-based optimal power flow into a power
system simulation environment, MS Thesis, University of Illinois, Urbana, 1997.
[10.72] Weber, J.D., Overbye, T. An individual welfare maximization algorithm for
electricty markets, IEEE Trans. on Power Systems, Vol.17, No. 3, pp. 590 596,
2002.
[10.73] Wei, H., Sasaky, H., Kubokawa, J., Yokoyama, R. An interior point nonlinear
programming for optimal power flow problems with a novel data structure, IEEE
Trans. on Power Systems, Vol. 13, No. 3, pp. 870 877, 1998.
[10.74] Wei, H., Kubokawa, J., Yokoyama, R. Large scale hydrotermal optimal flow
problems based on interior Point nonlinear programming, IEEE Trans. on
Power Systems, Vol. 15, No. 1, pp. 396 403, 2000.
Chapter 11
LOAD FORECAST
11.1. Background
Since the electric energy storage on a large scale is not possible, the main role
of the power network is to transport the demanded energy to consumers. Therefore,
it is very important to study and analyse the evolution of the load in order to
operate and design the power network, because all the other decisions are based on
the consumed energy [11.3, 11.16].
The importance of accurate load estimation for a long time period is also due
to the following aspects [11.12]:
the designing and construction period of power plants, substations, electric
lines, etc. is quite long (5 15 years);
the power equipment life is very long (35 150 years);
the investment costs are very high (million, even billion dollars);
the damages caused by the power supply interruption are very important;
the optimisation cost is a basic condition for the exploitation of a power
system, it being possible to be achieved if accurate present and future
amount of power consumption is known.
The load forecast is the scientific activity that targets the estimation of the
energy and power consumption based on the analysis of miscellaneous
information, so that the estimated consumption can finally match the real one [11.5].
The load forecast has the following characteristics [11.13]:
it is a dynamical activity, which is strongly influenced by the time factor;
the correct appraisal of some uncertain factors evolution is essential for
the realistic forecast;
the forecast results are strongly necessary in order to justify the decisions
related to the power system development and operation;
the load forecast errors imply high extra costs:
if the load was underestimated, extra costs will be caused by the
damages due to lack of energy, or by the overloading of the system
elements;
if the load was overestimated, the network investment costs overtake the
real needs, and the fuel stocks are overvalued, locking up, in an
unjustified way, capital investment.
672
Load forecast
673
674
W
T
C
t
0
S
1. The trend (T) is the main load component, establishing the main load
variation form.
2. The cyclic component (C). It is due to some slow-varying causes such as
the correlation supply demand, which lasts more than a year.
3. The seasonal component (S) is caused by certain parameters, which
represent seasonal fluctuations. This components variation period lasts
only a few months and it is almost the same for all the years.
4. The random component ( ) is due to accidental causes that have not been
mentioned above.
So, the load is due to the summing up of the above mentioned components:
W (t ) = T (t ) + C (t ) + S (t ) + (t )
(11.1)
W (t ) = T (t ) C (t ) S (t ) (t )
(11.2)
Load forecast
675
linear:
W (t ) = a + bt + (t )
(11.3)
W (t ) = W0 (1 + ) + (t )
(11.4)
exponential:
t
(11.6)
W (t ) = k e GNP(t )
(11.7)
W (t ) W (t )
GDP(t ) GDP(t )
(11.8)
x i
+
xi
(11.9)
GNP (t , t + 1)
W (t )
GNP
(11.10)
e=
W (t, t + 1) W (t )
GNP(t , t + 1) N
(11.11)
672
linear
Mathematical
expression
W (t ) = a + bt
Graphical
representation
Substitution
y = a 0 + a1 x
y =W x = t
a 0 = a a1 = b
y = a0 + a1 x +
polynomial
W (t ) = a + bt + ct 2 + L
+ a2 x 2 + L
y =W
a2 = c
exponential
W (t ) = a e
x=t
a0 = a a1 = b
y = a 0 + a1 x
bt
y = ln W
x=t
a 0 = ln a a1 = b
logarithmic
W (t ) = ln (a + bt )
y = a 0 + a1 x
y = eW
x=t
a0 = a
a1 = b
y = a 0 + a1 x
logistic
W (t ) =
a
b + c e dt
y = ln[W (a Wb )]
x=t
a 0 = ln 1 c a1 = d
The summing up is performed for all the N periods, of the time taken into
consideration. The two terms in brackets define the limits of the interval on which
the variation of the number, symbolised by , is calculated.
There are two important situations:
linear model relative to its parameters;
non-linear model relative to its parameters.
when its parameters influence the structure of the model.
Since it is very difficult, from the mathematical point of view, to identify a
non-linear model, linear models are generally used. However, if the model that has
to be used is non-linear with respect to its parameters, it should be converted to
obtain a linear model, by changing the input and the output data. The logistical
Load forecast
673
model (Table 11.1) is the most adequate example for this situation; as found from
the Substitution column. Calculating the coefficients a and b, using the existing
data, then, using the above transformations, a linear model is obtained. After
finding the a0 , a1 coefficients, by using the existing transformation relations, it is
very easy to obtain the d, c parameters.
According to its variables, a mathematical model can be:
endogenous when the load is considered to be a time function W (t ) = f (t ) ;
the load forecast is performed by function extrapolation from the past to
the future, method called direct forecast; the time can be considered as a:
continuous variable, because the models are continuous;
discrete variable, whose values are known at equal time samples; in
general, discrete endogenous models are called time series.
Exogenous, when the variables on which the load depends are the climatic,
the economical, the demographic factors, etc., the time not being taken into
account in this structure W (x1 ,K, xn ) = f (x1 ,K, xn ) ; since the load forecast
uses an exogenous model it is called indirect forecast; every parameter is a
time function: xi = gi (t ) ;
combined: W (t , x1 (t ),K, xn (t )) = f ( x1 (t ),K, xn (t )) .
From the load point of view, the forecast models used can be:
global (synthetic) models, when the load is seen as a whole;
analytical models, when the load is obtained by summing up some of the
components, the forecast being realised at the components level.
674
past load, are adequate in the preliminary step of the long term forecast;
however, the results have a low accuracy;
exogenous models are more complex, need the knowledge of some extra
data and even of the explicative parameters evolution in future, so that
the energy forecast to be possible; the results are useful for the medium
term forecast;
the energy price is the most important variable which has to be taken
into consideration into the standard models;
global models are less recommended for the normative studies;
the introduction of some limits is very important for medium and long
term studies;
the models that use the elasticity coefficient of the energy price give
acceptable results only for short and medium periods of time.
it is useful to include limits which take into consideration the
environmental restrictions and energy preserving requirements; when the
limits are set, the following aspects must be analysed:
have these limits any role at all?
is there any asymptotic conduct of the load evolution which justifies the
setting of the limits?
can models with limited growth be introduced in the study, models that
take into account the existence of the expected limits?
the models setting must take into account also the methodology used for
the identification of the model:
if it is suitable for the actual analysed situation;
if the objective (technical) and subjective (related to the staff
competence) conditions are accomplished, related to the personal
qualification, for their application.
Load forecast
675
676
The most important inherent source of errors is the sudden and significant
change of conditions that leads to the work hypothesis violation. This fact is
difficult to predict, but its consequences are, in general, dramatic for the forecast
result. In such cases, the best solution is to update the load forecast using the new
initial conditions.
Many difficulties can occur in the load forecast and they are caused by:
incomplete data or too short time series for the past;
the difficulty to combine more different systems (technical, economical,
social systems) in one mathematical model;
the number of variables may be very important;
the existence of some qualitative parameters difficult to quantify; the fuzzy
set theory is very useful in such cases; it is more and more amplified in our
field.
(11.12)
(11.13)
Y (t ) = S (t ) + C (t ) =
n2
n2
i =1
i =1
(11.14)
2
n
i and Ti =
i
n
(11.15)
) 2
ai =
n
) 2
bi =
n
W (k ) sin k
i
k =1
n
W (k ) cos k
, i = 1, 2, K , n 2
(11.16)
k =1
(11.17)
Ti = n i
(11.18)
tan i = bi ai
(11.19)
Application 1
The load of a residential area is represented in Table 11.2. Determine the periodical
components of the considered load and then separate the trend and the random component.
Table 11.2
The cyclical and the random components data
Month
W [MWh]
Month
W [MWh]
Month
W [MWh]
Month
W [MWh]
Month
W [MWh]
Month
W [MWh]
1
2.572
7
1.960
13
2.978
19
1.942
25
2.730
31
1.126
2
2.900
8
1.763
14
3.305
20
1.403
26
3.482
32
0.9493
3
2.547
9
2.668
15
2.376
21
1.794
27
2.478
33
2.073
4
2.511
10
2.146
16
2.817
22
1.749
28
2.797
34
1.719
5
2.891
11
1.599
17
3.170
23
1.471
29
3.729
35
0.9443
6
3.117
12
1.855
18
3.313
24
1.523
30
3.371
36
1.626
Figure 11.3 shows the evolution of the residential area load during the 36 months that
have been taken into consideration.
[MWh]
4
3
yk
2
1
0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
[month]
672
1
0.09011
2
-0.0368
3
0.6878
4
0.04385
5
0.01302
6
-0.02071
bi
-0.1199
-0.1726
-0.3028
0.1383
0.03057
0.03636
Pi
i
ai
0.15000
7
-0.07506
0.1765
8
-0.001041
0.7515
9
0.4534
0.1451
10
0.09771
0.03323
11
-0.01665
0.04184
12
-0.0269
bi
-0.108
-0.03823
-0.4364
0.03729
0.1403
0.07851
Pi
i
ai
0.1316
13
0.02427
0.03824
14
0.0343
0.6293
15
-0.09003
0.1046
16
0.0243
0.1413
17
0.0206
0.08299
18
0.0000
bi
0.02264
0.01112
-0.0601
0.02607
-0.009395
0.07215
Pi
0.1439
0.1143
0.1015
0.1446
0.1286
0.1846
Using this information, the periodogram represented in Figure 11.4 can be plotted. It
can be seen that the most important values of the amplitudes correspond to the 3rd and 9th
harmonics: P3 = 0.7515 and P9 = 0.6293 . It is obvious, even from Table 11.3, that these
values are threefold bigger than the amplitudes of the others harmonics.
[MWh] 0.8
0.6
Pi
0.4
0.2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
i
Fig. 11.4. The periodogram.
Figure 11.5 represents the evolution in time of the cyclical and the seasonal
components, calculated with relation (11.14). Using the relation (11.12), the trend variation
and the load random component variation are obtained, represented in Figure 11.6.
Load forecast
673
[MWh]
2
1.2
yk
0.4
-0.4
-1.2
-2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
[month]
k
Fig. 11.5. The cyclical and the seasonal components.
[MWh]
3
2.7
Tk+k
2.4
2.1
1.8
1.5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
[month]
674
E , 1 , 2 , ..., p = 0 +
(11.20)
j =1
(11.21)
j =1
where the symbol 2 is using for the variance of the random variable .
In most cases the coefficients 0 , 1 , K, p and the variance 2 are
unknown, so they are expected to be evaluated as better as possible.
Between the realisation yi , xi1 , K, xip , ei of , 1 , 2 , ..., p , , the
following relation inferred from the hypothesis of the multiple linear regression
exists:
p
yi = 0 +
j ij
j =1
+ ei with i = 1, 2,K, n
(11.22)
The relation (11.22) written under a matrix form represents the probabilistic
model of the multiple linear regression:
y = X + e
(11.23)
where:
X = 1 x1
1 X 11
1 X
21
L xp =
M
M
1 X n1
L X1 p
L X 2 p
O
M
L X np
(11.24)
y = [ y1 , y2 , K, yn ] t
= 0 , 1 , K, p
e = [e1 e2 L en ] t
where [ ] t stands for the transposition of a vector (or a matrix), therefore y, and
e are column vectors.
Load forecast
675
(11.25)
which has to be minimised to get the best values of the regression coefficients. So,
)
the best values of the regression coefficients in the sense of the least squares
(LS) correspond to the situation when the sum of the errors squares is minimal.
Therefore, the imposed condition is that the derivative of function S to be zero.
)
S ( )
= 2 X t y + 2 X t X = 0
=)
The following equation is derived from the function above:
)
X t X X t y = 0
(11.26)
(11.27)
where
X + = Xt X
Xt
(11.29)
with
A = XVXt
A = XX t
(11.31)
(11.32)
()
()
(11.35)
672
The sum of squared errors (SSE), where the errors represent the differences
between the achievements and the estimation, is [11.19]:
n
SS E =
(y y )
i
)
= y t y t Xt y
(11.36)
i =1
formula used to calculate the SS E from the initial data of the problem;
The variance estimator is:
)
2 = MS E =
SS E
n p 1
(11.37)
R2 =
( yi y ) 2
i=1
(y
)
y)2
i=1
(y
y)
= 1
SS E
s yy
(11.38)
i =1
(y
y)2
(11.38')
i=1
is the sum of the square of the differences toward the average value. If for
)
every i we have got yi = yi , then the adjustment of the experimental data
linear model is perfect and the result is: R 2 = 1 ;
Eliminating the SS E between the relation (11.37) and (11.38), a practical
relation used to calculate the estimated variance is obtained:
1 R2
)
s yy
2 =
n p 1
(11.39)
)
It can be seen that if the adjustment is perfect ( R = 1 ) then 2 = 0 ;
If ei N (0, 2 ) , so it has a normal distribution with zero average and the
variance , then the confidence interval 100 (1 ) for the regression
coefficient is given by:
Load forecast
673
)
i t
2
where:
t
2
, n p 1
, n p 1
( )
)
)
)
S E i i i + t
2
, n p 1
( )
)
S E i
(11.40)
( )
)
y0 t
2
where:
, n p 1
)
)
1 + x t0 Vx 0 y 0 y 0 + t
2
x'0 = 1 x01 L x0 p
,n p 1
)
1 + x t0 Vx 0
(11.42,a)
(11.42,b)
)
j
( )
)
SE j
(11.43)
If: t 0 j > t 2,n 2 then the hypothesis H0: j = 0 is eliminated and the hypothesis
H1: j 0 is accepted. represents the distribution threshold value.
It is worth mentioning that if a significant R 2 can be found, so that no
regression coefficient, taken separately, is much different from zero: this can
happen only if there is a strong correlation between the predictors.
674
Aii 1
n
ii
= p +1
i =1
(11.46)
x x
x
x
x
Load forecast
675
Application 2
Forecast, taking into account the influence of the random component, the industrial
load for the period 2000 2005, using the direct extrapolation method for the exponential
trend. The annual load for the period 1995 2001 is illustrated in the table below:
Table 11.4
The load data
Year
W [GWh]
1995
1.06
1996
1.37
1997
1.61
1998
1.97
1999
2.24
2000
2.69
2001
3.01
1
X
7 ,1
y7
e7
)
n
)
0
1 t
t
= X X X y = ) = 7
1 X
i ,1
i =1
( )
i =1
7
i =1
X i ,1
X i2,1
yi
i =1
yi X i ,1
i =1
676
with X 1 =
1
n
X k ,1, Y =
k =1
1
n
k =1
explained variables. As a consequence, all the sums in which the variables are at an odd
power become zero and the relations for the parameter calculus are the following:
)
n
) b0
B = ) = 0
b1
7
)
0 0
X
Y
i
i
7
7
B0
X i2 X i Yi or B) = i =71
i =1
i =1
X i2
i =1
)
)
)
)
1 = b1 and 0 = Y b1 X 1 .
1
, n p 1
limits of the confidence interval are calculated according to the relation (11.42):
1
)
)
)
)
y0 2,57 1 + xt Vx 0 = y0 2.57 1 + +
7
X 02
7
2
i
i =1
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
SUM
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
21
1.51
1.62
1.76
1.89
2.10
2.30
2.60
y = ln (W ) X
0.4121
0.4824
0.5653
0.6366
0.7419
0.8329
0.9555
4.6268
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
X2 Y = y y
9
4
1
0
1
4
9
28
-0.2489
-0.1785
-0.0957
-0.0244
0.0810
0.1719
0.2945
X*Y
0.7466
0.3571
0.0957
0.0000
0.0810
0.3439
0.8836
2.5078
)
y
)
y y
0.3923
0.4818
0.5714
0.6610
0.7505
0.8401
0.9297
0.0198
0.0006
-0.0061
-0.0244
-0.0086
-0.0072
0.0258
( y y$ ) 2
3.93E-04
3.42E-07
3.71E-05
5.95E-04
7.39E-05
5.17E-05
6.68E-04
1.82E-03
)
)
the estimated coefficients of the linear regression: B1 = 0.0896 ; B0 = 0 ;
)
)
1 = 0.0896 ; 0 = 0.3923 ;
Load forecast
677
)
)
the estimated parameters of the exponential model: a = 1.4803 ; b = 0.0896 ;
)
the estimated variance for the linear regression: 2 = 0.364 10 3 ;
y
1.0192
1.1088
1.1984
1.2879
x
7
8
9
10
0.0287
0.0313
0.0342
0.0373
y +
1.0479
1.1401
1.2325
1.3252
y
0.9905
1.0775
1.1642
1.2506
W min
2.7710
3.0307
3.3147
3.6252
2.6926
2.9373
3.2033
3.4925
W max
2.8517
3.1270
3.4299
3.7630
The load evolution for the past period and its forecast, accompanied by the minimal
and the maximal variation limits caused by the random component are illustrated in
Figure 11.8 [11.11].
4
Real load
3.5
Load forecast
Maximum load
forecast
Minimum load
forecast
2.5
2
20
00
19
98
19
96
19
94
19
92
19
90
1.5
Application 3
Table 11.7 illustrates the daily load for an industrialised area according to 4 main
parameters:
the industrial production daily quantity;
the number of the inhabitants from the area on the period the energy was
measured;
the atmospheric temperature of that day;
the power cost prices the moment it was measured.
It is requested:
a) to establish a linear mathematical model including the calculation of its
coefficients;
b) to estimate the variance of the measured values compared to the linear
mathematical model;
c) to find out the multiple correlation coefficient;
678
e)
f)
g)
h)
to find out the confidence interval for the forecasted energy value from point c);
to find out the confidence interval for the mathematical model coefficients;
to check if there can be null coefficients;
to find out the studentised residua of the daily consumed energy.
Table 11.7
The daily load data
W [GWh]
Daily load
x1
Daily quantity
production
[107 $]
x2
Number of
inhabitants
[106 loc.]
36.998
55.055
69.780
44.912
43.012
61.736
33.696
43.798
54.275
54.403
1.15
1.05
1.30
1.92
1.47
1.23
1.76
1.85
1.62
1.58
2.135
2.203
2.071
2.178
2.123
2.035
2.117
2.192
2.094
2.015
x3
Daily
atmospheric
temperature
[o C]
35
11
-13
32
20
10
37
27
15
5
x4
The energy
cost price
[$/MWh]
35
42
55
30
61
38
49
52
32
57
a) The mathematical model for the load in the area corresponds to the relation (11.1),
particularised for p = 4 :
W ( x1, x2 , x3 , x4 ) = 0 + 1x1 + 2 x2 + 3 x3 + 4 x4
where the meaning of the variables corresponds to the columns of Table 11.4.
It is now possible to create the matrix X , according to its definition from
relation (11.24):
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.15 1.05 1.30 1.92 1.47 1.23 1.76 1.85 1.62 1.58
Xt = 2.135 2.203 2.071 2.178 2.123 2.035 2.117 2.192 2.094 2.015
11
32
20
10
37
27
15
5
13
35
35
42
55
30
61
38
49
52
32
37
Using some routine calculations for relation (11.32) the following matrix is obtained:
Load forecast
679
4.37 90.366
197
4.37
1.635
1.217
t
-1
V = (X X) = 90.366
0.217
42.421
0.018 0.105
0.223
0.064 0.0075
0.012
0.223
0.018
0.105
0.00085
0.00024
0.064
0.0075
0.012
0.00024
0.00102
0.679
0.226
0.022
0.111
0.042 0.165
0.137
0.217
0.221 0.226
0.157
0.513 0.072 0.119
0.21
0.094
0.108
0.274
0.031 0.022 0.072 0.586 0.147 0.013
0.084 0.237
0.111
0.111
0.119 0.147
0.4
0.218
A = X V X' =
0.172
0.218
0.042
0.21
0.013 0.084 0.436 0.044
0
.
094
0
.
274
0
.
218
0
.
218
0
.
167
0.471
0.097 0.201
0.208
0.208 8.622 10 3
0.046 0.241 0.22
0.044
0.029
0.067
0.343
0.167
0.266
0.028
2.902 10 3
0.363
0.08
0.046
0.241
0.22
0.097
0.201
0.208
0.201
3
8.622 10
0.08
0.465
t = VXt W t = [0 L 4 ] t = [13.131
5.014
25.467
0.813 0.245]
b) In order to assess the variance of the real values for the load W vector towards
v )
the established mathematical model, the energy forecasted values y = W elements are
firstly calculated according to relation (11.30).
t = ( AW)t =
W
= [36.246 55.268 69.481 44.866 43.367 61.813 33.791 43.545 54.549 54.339]
SS E
0.544
=
= 0.109
n p 1 10 4 1
680
s yy =
( y y)
i
= 1150
i =1
Then, calculate the multiple correlation coefficient using the relation (11.38):
R2 = 1
SS E
0.544
= 1
= 0.98855
1150
s yy
It can be seen that R 2 is very close to 1, which means that the modelled process
the daily load can be correctly represented through a multiple linear regression, which
depends on the 4 chosen explanatory variables.
d) The one-day load forecast, characterised by the following parameters x1 0 = 1.55 ;
x2 0 = 2.105 ; x3 = 25 ; x4 0 = 50 is calculated by introducing the values of parameters in
0
e) The value of the confidence interval band for the above forecasted load results
from relation (11.42,a):
W0 = t
2
)
1 + x t0 Vx 0 = 2.01 0.33 1.206 = 0.728
, n p 1
f) The confidence intervals are established for the mathematical model coefficients.
Load forecast
681
)
i = t
2
, n p 1
)
t = [9.309 0.848
)
S E (i )
4.32
0.019 0.021]
The lower and the upper limits for the confidence interval of a coefficient of the
mathematical model is obtained by subtracting, respectively by summing, the estimated
value of the coefficient in question with the confidence band that has already been
calculated. Therefore:
)
min t = [ 3.821
4.166
21.47 0.832 0.266]
)
max t = [ 22.44
5.862 29.787 0.793 0.234]
( )
( )
g) Checking if one of the coefficients might be zero implies the calculation of the
statistical variables using the relation (11.43):
)
j
t0 j =
)
SE j
( )
It can be seen that all the components of the t 0 vector are bigger than the t = 2.57
threshold ( = 5% , n p 1 = 5 ). Therefore, for every coefficient of the multiple linear
regression the hypothesis H1: j 0 is true, in other words, using a probability of 95%,
every coefficient differs from zero.
h) The studentised residua of the consumed energy are calculated using the
relation (11.46):
)
W Wi
rsti = ) i
1 Aii
rstt = [ 0.16
0.54
0.03
1.19
1.51
0.51
Notice that all the studentised residua of the daily load are included in the interval
(-2; +2), therefore none of the forecasted load values can be included in the category of
aberrant errors, they all represent plausible values.
Note: Calculations were performed in Mathcad software tool, product under licence
from Mathsoft Corporation, from Canada, as a support to our application.
682
y (t ) = (t ) = W (t ) T (t ) C (t ) S (t )
(11.47)
If the value of the random component is small as compared to the value of the
other components of the load, its analysis cannot be justified from a practical point
of view. It is recommended only to appreciate its highest variation interval,
according to what it has already been said [11.21].
If the random component is important, then for their modelling it must be
performed a preliminary analysis that should investigate:
a) the stationarity level of that time period which indicates if the random
component was correctly separated from the other components;
b) the predictability level of the time period, which establishes if the random
component can be forecasted, or if it has to be assimilated to the white
noise.
rj = 1 n
(y
j = 0, 1,K, n 4
yk + j )
k =1
(11.48)
(11.49)
r0
n
(11.50)
Load forecast
683
a y
i
k i
= zk
(11.51)
i =0
a y
(11.52)
i k i
i =1
y (k + j|k 1) =
a y (k 1 + i|k 1) a y
i k i
i =1
(11.53)
i = j +1
The ai coefficients are determined through the least squares method, which
leads to the solving of the overdeterminated system of equations formed by the
relations (11.52) where y ( k|k 1) is replaced by yk for k = m + 1,K, n (with
n >> m ) and having ai as unknown quantity. The solution for the
overdeterminated system of equations can accurately be obtained using the
orthogonal transformation method.
The determination of the model term number (m) is performed through
unidirectional research. The appreciation criterion is given by minimising the
square deviation sum of the estimated values towards the real values.
684
is called a time series. This time series can be also considered a finite sequence of
random components y (1), y (2), K , y (n ) the components of a multidimensional
random variable [11.18, 11.21].
Technically speaking, the time series { y (t )} is a data sample also called
achievement (realisation), extracted from a random process, illustrated by a finite
sequence of random variables (we use the term of statistical population from the
Mathematical Statistics):
y ( ) , K , y ( n ), K , y ( 2 ), y ( 1), y (0 ), y (1), y (2 ), K , y (n ), K , y (+ )
An important property of this time series is the fact that all the random
variables taking part at the series report on the same physical, biological, social
fact. Thus, there are some interdependencies between the time series values and
they have to be underlined when analysing the time series to obtain a regularity
synthesis that allows the prediction of the future values of the random process
y (n + 1), y (n + 2 )K on the basis of the existing reality y (1), y (2), K , y (n ) .
For instance, if the analysed random process is the hourly electric energy
numerically equal to the electric power average for one hour of the load
belonging to an electric network bus, the process is achieved by measuring, for a
day, the hourly average electric power: P(1), P(2 ), K , P(24 ) . The electric power
of the bus is a random process because we cannot state for certain, only knowing
the time series, which the required electric power values for the next hours will be
P(25), P(26 ), etc . If the achievements for the past few hours are analysed, an
average anticipation only if taking into account the load medium evolution can
be obtained. The average tendency can be growing if the load is growing as a result
of a positive conjuncture, or conversely, if the conjuncture is negative. Oscillations
caused by the weather can superpose on the tendency, and they influence the
normal running of the climate control systems connected to that bus. If more
electric loads from the same area are analysed, they may be similar or different. In
the first case, the properties of the random variables the distribution law, the
average value and the variance can be alike, in the second case, they can partially
or totally differ.
Load forecast
685
Figure 11.9 illustrates the chart of the existing relations between the three
main elements taken into consideration: the process, the realisation and the model.
Its structure establishment represents the first step of the model identification.
To do this, the following elements are used as tools [11.18]:
The AutoCorrelation Function (ACF);
The Partial AutoCorelation Function (PACF).
The validation and the diagnosing represent the third step in the model
realisation. It is achieved by checking the model using different methods proposed
in literature, by simulating in the same conditions as those of the represented
process, and by comparing the results from the calculation to the realisations of the
process.
If the model has not gone through the validation step, it can be improved by
taking again the identification estimation validation cycle, until the expected
results are obtained. The identification, the estimation and the validation steps are
covered as many times as necessary until the quality of the model fulfils all the
required conditions.
PROCESS
Stochastic mechanism for
series values generation
Validation
&
Diagnosis
Measurement
MODEL
Process mathematical
representation
REALISATION
Disposable series values
Identification
&
Estimation
Implementation
APPLICATIONS
Simulation, Forecast,
Decision making
Fig. 11.9. The relations existing between the process, the realisation and the model.
After having finally obtained the model, its implementation follows, which
includes the forecast, the simulation, the decision-making, the management, etc.
In order to forecast the future values of the time series, the available values
must be introduced in the model at that moment. The future interest values are
established based on the future values of the time series and using a quite simple
recursive calculation.
686
Next, a discrete and a quite general model are adopted for the random
process. It is available for the majority of the applications, including those related
to the estimation of the future values. A discrete model is preferable in order to
avoid the difficulties caused by the introduction of the continuous white noise. The
discrete models can be easily implemented in a numerical calculation program.
Even more, the choice of this discrete model does not restrict the approach
generality, the obtained results being available also for the continuous models.
(t)
RATIONAL
STABLE
FILTER
y(t)
( )
( )
y (t ) = H q 1 (t )
(11.54)
where:
t represents the discrete time: t = 1, 2, K , k , K , . The continuous time is
calculated using the relation t c = t T , where T represents the signal
sample time. T has to fulfils the condition given by sampling theorem
T < 0.5 Tmin , where Tmin represents the least time constant afferent to the
process;
The lag operator q 1 means:
y (t 1) = q 1 y (t )
(11.55)
represents the discrete dead time of the analysed process. It respects the
causality principle: 0 . It is obvious that (t ) = q (t ) ;
( )
( ) B(q )
A(q )
H q 1 =
1
1
(11.56)
Load forecast
687
In order to ensure the stability condition, the module of the roots of the
characteristic equation A(x ) = 0 must be greater than 1, (they have to be found
outside the unity circle of the complex plane).
The model given by the relations (11.54) and (11.56) is too general. It has to
be adapted to the desired purpose.
In order to forecast the trend of the load, it is generally used the
AutoRegressive Integrated Moving Average (ARIMA) model. It has two
components:
the integrator one which allows the presence in the A q 1 polynomial of a
(1 q )
1 d
( )
( )
( )(
A q 1 = A1 q 1 1 q 1
(11.57)
y1 (t ) = 1 q 1
y (t ) = d [ y (t )]
(11.58)
( )
( )
A1 q 1 y1 (t ) = B q 1 (t )
(11.59)
y1 (t ) = 1 q 1 y (t ) = y (t ) y (t 1)
(11.58')
because the polynomials from the relation (11.59) have the form:
( )= 1+ a q
A1 q
( )= b
Bq
+ b1 q
+ L + a na q
na
+ L + bnb q
= 1+
na
a q
i
i =1
nb
= b0 +
(11.60)
nb
b q
i
i =1
The real time series contain some periodical components that cannot be
included in the ARIMA adopted model ( na , d , nb ). The elimination of the
periodical component is a simple process.
Notice that if this component has the T C period, it can reappear over T C
intervals:
688
y (t ) = y (t TC ) = q TC y (t )
(11.62)
It is obvious now that if the time series contains a cyclical component whose
period is T C , then a 1 q TC factor has to correspond to the A1 q 1 polynomial
from relation (11.59). So the polynomial can be factorised in the following product:
( )
A1 (t ) = 1 q TC A2 (t )
(11.63)
( )(
( )
)
A (q ) y (t ) = B (q )(t )
A2 q 1 1 q TC y1 (t ) = B q 1 (t )
therefore :
(11.64)
y2 (t ) represents the time series from which the cyclical component of period
T C has been eliminated:
y2 (t ) = 1 q TC y1 (t ) = y1 (t ) y1 (t TC )
(11.65)
Load forecast
689
obtained through a visual, simple and efficient analysis, based on the researcher
experience:
if there is a statistical correlation between the observations;
if the process that caused the time series is steady or if it is not;
if the process is not steady, then must be appreciated the way in which the
average, the variance, or both of them are influenced;
if the model contains other cyclical components, except for the trend
component.
As a result, decisions can be taken concerning:
the separation of components;
providing the steady character, by finding the logarithm of a number, by
derivation, etc.
For the identification methodology elaborated by Box and Jenkins to be
applied, the time series has to be brought to the typical form of the ARMA ( na , nb )
models, using the transformations (11.58) and (11.59) adequately chosen,
performed on the initial realisation.
2) Determine the estimated auto-correlation function (ACF). In this regard,
)
the estimated correlation coefficients are calculated ( rk ) from the observations,
)
shifted by k periods of time, belonging to the same realisation. The rk (k )
coefficient represents an important statistical measure of ordered pairs
[ y(t ), y(t + k )] , being an ACF estimation. It is a dimensionless number situated in
)
the interval (-1, +1). If r)k = 0 then the variables are not correlated. The rk = 1
value indicates a perfectly positive correlation, respectively a negative one between
)
the variables. The estimated value rk of the auto-correlation coefficient supplies
estimation, more or less accurate, on the theoretical auto-correlation coefficient rk .
The standard formula for the calculation of the auto-correlation coefficients is:
nk
)
rk (k ) =
nk
[y(t ) y ]
t =1
s yy
(11.66)
t =1
where y represents the average value of the model observations. In the case of a
steady process, it can be an estimation of the average value of the statistical
population, in the first approximation. In general, it is recommended that k n 4 .
)
3) Determine the partial auto-correlation function (PACF) estimated to kk ,
)
which is, in the main, similar to the ACF estimated to rk . The partial autocorrelation refers to the correlation degree between y (t ) and y (t + k ) taking into
account the effects of the series values y (t ) , which are between the two time
)
periods t and t + k . The partial correlation coefficient estimated to kk represents a
690
statistical size that supplies an estimation for the theoretical partial auto-correlation
coefficient kk . In the case of a steady time series, the calculation of the partial
auto-correlation coefficients is performed using the method proposed by Durbin:
)
)
1,1 = r1
)
k , k =
) k 1 )
)
rk k 1, j rk j
j =1
k 1
k = 2, 3, K
)
)
k 1, j r j
(11.67)
j =1
)
)
) )
kj = k 1, j k , k k 1, k j
k = 3, 4, K; j = 1, 2, K, k 1
)
Mention that, by definition, the estimated PACF is kk (k ) .
)
4) After the calculation of the auto-correlation coefficients, estimated to rk ,
)
and the partial auto-correlation coefficients, estimated to kk , the following
hypothesis is checked: might they be equal to zero? In this regard, the statistics
from Table 11.8 are assessed.
Table 11.8
The necessary formulae for the estimation of the auto-correlation coefficients
nullity, and of the estimated partial auto-correlation coefficients nullity
)
)
rk
kk
Coefficient
)
)
kk kk
rk rk
)
)
t
=
t
=
The t statistics
)
)
kk
rk
s (rk )
s (kk )
The approximation of the
standard error of the
values distribution
)
s(rk ) =
k 1
1
)
1 + 2 r j2
n
j =1
)
s (kk ) =
1
n
AR (1)
ACF
Exponential damping:
Positive values if a1 < 0 ;
Values whose sign is
alternative, the first one is
negative if a1 > 0 .
PACF
Peak for the lag value 1, and then it
is cancelled:
The peak is positive if a1 < 0 ;
The peak is negative if a1 > 0 ;
Load forecast
AR (2)
MA (1)
691
Sum of exponential or
symmetrical functions depending
on the signs and the values of the
a1 , a2 parameters.
Peak for the lag value 1, then it is
cancelled:
The peak is positive if b1 > 0 ;
The peak is negative if b1 < 0 .
MA (2)
ARMA
(1,1)
692
Load forecast
693
1
n na nb
[ y ( t ) y ( t )]
(11.68)
n
y (t )
is useful for the model precision and its forecast precision characterisation.
In practice, we choose to express the forecast precision using the
forecasted confidence interval values.
6) We analyse if the model matches for the studied series. If the answer is
negative, we go back to the identification step to select other models that can
approximate the series data more correctly. We build these new models using the
recommendations and the conclusions obtained in the validity diagnose stage.
The main objective of the analysis is the obtained residua calculated as
difference between the realisation values { y (t )} and the values provided by the
identified model of the process in question.
)
e(t ) = y (t ) y (t )
(11.70)
694
a) The graphical representation of the residua is the first step. The visual
analysis of the graphic, accompanied by a large experience, can quickly mark out
some significant issues regarding the determined model:
big data error detection: the existence of some residua bigger than the
double standard deviation, make very probable the existence of incorrect
acquired data or the presence of a large perturbation due to the external
identifiable causes;
the variance value modification suggests the necessity to apply data series
logarithmic transformations.
b) The residua independence checking represents the most important ARIMA
model statistic relevance test. If the identified model residua are correlated we can
find a better model, which identifies more precisely the process dynamics and
which has better AR and MA coefficients combination.
During the model validation diagnose stage, the Residua Auto-correlation
Function RACF (k ) represents the main analytical instrument. The residua autocorrelation coefficient is:
nk
)
rk (e ) =
nk
[e(t ) e ]
t =1
see
(11.71)
t =1
)
In the case of a well-built ARIMA model, all the RACF (k ) = rk (e )
components are theoretically zero. In reality, even in the case of a correctly
identified model we can have RACF values different from zero, as a result of the
sample error or of the fact that time-limited realisations are used. So, in practice, it
is very important to see if, for RACF, its components are or not important. In this
respect we can make use of:
the t test that uses the formula proposed by Bartlett for the calculation of
the residua auto-correlation coefficients variance;
the Ljung Box test.
c) The model oversizing represents another validation technique. We
introduce a new parameter in the model we have to validate. We check if the
extended model is better for the process. As a rule, it should be avoid the
simultaneous introduction of two AR and MA parameters, because it could cause
serious estimation and steadiness problems due to the parameters redundancy.
We can also reduce the number of parameters, one by one. Although it is a
good thing from many points of view (the easiness, the steadiness, the calculation
speed, etc.), we have to analyse, to justify and to appreciate the parameters we want
to reduce.
d) The time series splitting into data under-sets and the identification of a
single model for each series that represents another validation technique. If the
Load forecast
695
established models do not significantly differ between them and are not very
different from the complete series model, then the analysed process does not
change its properties in time, that can be verified using an adequate test, and the
new models are important for the analysed stochastic process. If there are big
differences between the new models, we have to analyse the following two
possibilities:
either the identification process failed and we have to resume and to
modify it, in order to obtain the expected result;
or the models are correct, but the studied stochastic process varies in time.
It is important to mention that the time series splitting is possible only if the
database is large, so that the under-sets contain each, enough observations.
The validation diagnose stage has to end either with a clear conclusion or
with model modification recommendations. They contain generally:
extended or reduced models;
the model structure changing by reanalysing the FAC and FACP;
replacing the residua model in the original model;
the form of the y1 (t ) realisation, etc.
na
i =1
ai y (t + l i ) +
nb
b (t + l i )
i
(11.72)
i =0
696
)
(t i ) = y (t i ) y (t i 1)
(11.73)
The noise series terms (t + i ) that cannot be determined in the future are 0.
In that case, the following estimator is found:
)
y (t + l t ) =
l 1
na
a y(t + l i ) a y(t + l i ) +
i
i =1
nb
i =l
)
bi [ y (t + l i ) y (t + l i 1)]
(11.74)
i =1
)
V [e (t + l )] = i2 2a
i =0
(11.75)
( ) q
A q 1
( )
= B q 1
(11.76)
i =0
If the noise that generates the series has a normal probability distribution and
the ARMA is fit for the analysed time series then the forecasted error will be
distributed normally.
The confidence intervals can be found for every forecasted value, if all these
are taken into account. For significance degree the confidence interval limits
are:
)
)
)
y min,max (t + l ) = y (t + l ) u 2 V [e (t + l )]
(11.77)
where u
If some transformations were made to obtain the time series model, the
results refer to the transformed series data. Therefore, in order to obtain the original
series forecast results, we have to make appropriate transformations, on the
estimated values and on the confidence intervals.
Load forecast
697
698
Load forecast
699
x0
1
y1,0
w[1] 1,0
w[2] 1,0
1
y1,1
x1
y2,1
x2
y2,2
x3
y2,3
xI0
w[1] I1,I0
s=0
y1,I1
y2,I2
w[2] I2,I1
s=1
s=2
In Figure 11.13, xi represents the input values; y represents the output values;
Is is the number of neurons on the layer s; w[jis ] is the synaptic weight for the
connexion between the neuron i from the layer s and the neuron j from the layer
s 1 ; s is the layer index.
Before the employing of MLP be possible for the load forecast, it is
necessary that its weights are initialised with values so that for a certain input
vector to obtain through the MLP an output vector as close as possible to the output
vector. This process of the weights computation represents the training step of the
MLP. Once trained, the network can be tested for the architecture and weights
validation or subsequent for employment in practice.
The training process consists in finding the right weights to produce a desired
ANN output from a given input. A well-known algorithm is the back-propagation,
which can be simplified in the following form [11.2]:
Step 1. Initialise the weights with small random values.
Step 2. Propagate forward an example through the MLP. A model is chosen
from the training data set (input desired output). In some
implementations, the models can be shuffled. Based on the weights
of neurons, the output value is computed using the normalized data:
I L 1 [ s ] [ s 1]
o[js ] = [js ]
w ji oi
i =0
[s]
where o j is the output of neuron i on the layer s and [js ] is the sigmoid
activation function of the neuron i on the layer s.
Step 3. Update the weights through back-propagation. An iterative algorithm
is used, by propagating backward the error gradient from the output
layer toward the input layer, using the relations:
700
The software STLF v1.3 has been developed within the Doctoral School in Electrical Power
Engineering from University Politehnica of Bucharest, by Silviu Vergoti.
Load forecast
701
(i) Short term load forecast at the Romanian power system level
During the configuration and validation period of the forecast model, using
the training on a long time horizon (one year), the optimal architecture was chosen
from more than 70 configurations. It has 57 input neurons, 12 hidden neurons and
24 output neurons. The inputs correspond to 48 hourly loads (the day before and
the same day one week before), 2 temperatures (from Bucharest and Cluj) and 7-bit
day encoding. All other ANN configurations tested resulted in slightly higher
errors. A forecast example can be seen in Figure 11.14,a,b. The forecasts are
usually less accurate in winter than in summer since the electric heating is more
developed than the air conditioning.
The day encoding allows forecasting weekend days with greater accuracy
within the same model. During the use of the program, the operators have built
separate models for weekends and Mondays, slightly improving the forecast
quality.
Finding the optimal configuration was a time-consuming job since each
architecture had to be trained and tested. The goal was to find a structure that does
not overfit the data and provides forecast with an acceptable error. The size of the
training set was one year, the special days being excluded automatically by the
software (fixed holidays, such as May 1st and Christmas, and moving holidays,
such as Easter).
The accuracy of the ANN based forecasts was tested on one year of data
excluding the holidays. The daily load profile was forecasted using the trained
network, and subsequent it was compared to the real profile. The average
percentage absolute error was used to evaluate the accuracy of the forecast per each
hour. The errors resulted for the case analysed are mostly less than 24%, as
shown in Figure 11.15. (note that, the first term in Figure 11.15 represents the
error, and the second term represents the percentage of examples for which the
error appear).
702
Real
Real
Forecasted
Prog
7500
MW
7000
6500
6000
5500
5000
4500
4000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
a.
7000
Real
Real
Forecasted
Prog
6500
MW
6000
5500
5000
4500
4000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
b.
Fig. 11.14. Load forecast example for the Romanian power system:
a. winter day; b. summer day.
4-6%
4-6%
10%
10%
>6%
>6%
3%
3%
<2%
50%
2-4%
2-4%
37%
37%
Fig. 11.15. Distribution of the forecast error for the Romanian power system.
Usually, the largest errors are found in wintertime, since most of the holidays
are located here and there was no correct data available for training. Also, the load
curves of long weekends (holidays immediately proceeding or following
weekends) are harder to predict. Some weeks in autumn or spring, characterized by
rapidly changing weather, presented quite large forecast errors.
Load forecast
703
(ii) Short term load forecast at the distribution system level of Bucharest
For Bucharest, the 24 h forecast was performed 2-5 days before, in terms of
requirements of the company. In this regard, the training and validation were
performed on short periods and the separation of the models of the weekend days
from the working days was used. The use of the forecasted temperature as input
variable had a significant influence on the forecast accuracy due to the
unavailability of data from the day before the forecasted day.
Figure 11.16 shows the daily load forecast results obtained after the program
running for a week from August 2002.
forecast
real
error
a.
b. Tuesday
c. Wednesday
d. Thursday
e. Friday
Fig. 11.16. Seven forecast examples for one week: from a. Monday to e. Friday.
704
f. Saturday
g. Sunday
Fig. 11.16. Seven forecast examples for one week: from f. Saturday to g. Sunday.
(the forecasted values are black, and the real values are grey)
From figure 11.16 we can also see that large errors appear for off-peak hours
and during the weekend due to the increase in temperature and therefore due to the
start-up of air-conditioning installations.
(iii) Conclusions
The neural networks have proven to be very accurate in short term load
forecast. In practice, it is hard to obtain a STLF with an average percentage
absolute error less than 2-3% for a 24 h prediction.
The daily use of the program on national and regional contours and on
different time horizons, reaching 5 days in advance, without the help of the weather
inputs, is between 5-10% and the operator can improve the forecast using his or her
experience.
The elimination of the special days from the training set and the use of
additional weather inputs (e.g., cloudiness) can decrease the error to values that can
satisfy the exigency of any dispatcher.
Another way to improve the accuracy is to use a short training period and
to retain the MLP with a moving day frame.
Chapter references
[11.1] Bakirtzis, A.G., Petridis, S.J., Kiartzis, S.J., Alexiadis, M.C., Maissis, A.H. A
neural network short term load forecasting model for the Greek power system,
IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 858 863, May 1996.
[11.2] Crin, Gh., Gavrila, M, Georgescu, Gh., Bonciu, C. Reele neuronale
artificiale i sisteme expert n energetic (Artificial neural networks and expert
systems in electric power systems), Editura Gheorghe Asachi, Iai, 1994.
[11.3] Civanlar, S., Grainger, J.J. Forecasting distribution feeder loads: modelling and
application to volt/VAr control, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol. 3,
No.1, pp. 255 262, January 1988.
[11.4] Crian, O., Buta, A., Lutrea, B., Kilyeni, t. Prognoza consumului de energie
electric (Load forecasting), Energetica revue, Vol. XXII, No. 101112, pp. 405
414, 1974.
Load forecast
705
Chapter
12
724
725
In the case of the substations the land on which these are built is permanently
used, the dimensions varying in large limits according to their operating voltages,
complexity, types of equipment and constructive disposal. Outside the substation
fence there are no further restrictions and normally, the land may be used properly.
In the case of the electric overhead lines routed over agricultural areas, the
land taken out from it is only that on which the foundations are cast, but restrictions
in use of agricultural equipment appear in the vicinity of poles or towers, and
especially of guyed portals. A much higher impact appears in the case of the lines
routed over forested areas, where the right of way has to be kept clear from the
initial vegetation, in order to avoid the decreasing under the minimum allowed of
clearance between the energized parts of line and trees [12.1]. In industrial areas
the clearances from the lines to the buildings and the other different facilities have
to be kept in accordance with technical prescriptions.
In the case of underground cables the impact is a minor one, normally these
being laid much closed to roads, railways or other utilities, and even in the case of
laying in agricultural areas, their depth does not restrict the agricultural works.
In the case of new substations the lands of intense productive agriculture and
of course the forestry have to be avoided. The design of the substations has to be
done in such way as to diminish the necessary surface as much as possible, by
using very compact arrangement and equipment.
As to the overhead lines, the use of compact configurations for poles or
towers, of multi-circuit lines where possible and avoiding the guyed portals
supports are the most important means to reduce this type of impact [12.1].
726
places where the clearances from the energized parts of the line to vegetation are
less than those compulsory imposed by technical prescriptions.
Concerning the access roads, these will be constructed in the case of no other
roads, even not public ones as those used for agriculture or forest maintenance.
During the excavation and pouring of foundation concrete the most adequate
technologies will be adopted, allowing a minimal surface of land to be used for.
The same holds for pole or tower erection. In the case of the mountainous
areas, the technology of rod-by-rod erection will be applied instead of using cranes
or other huge equipment, which need large surfaces of lands.
During stringing a very narrow right of way will be deprived of vegetation, to
allow the lay of pilot wire, the conductor stringing having to be done only by using
this technology.
If this type of impact is not high during the line erection, due to the proposed
mitigation means, the impact will be low during the maintenance works, too.
727
In case of high voltage lines crossing sensitive areas the use of thicker shield wire
may lead to decrease the bird mortality rate. Also, the use of bird flight diverters
as: balloons, spirals, strips on shield wires and phase conductors may be helpful
[12.8]. For low voltage and medium voltage crossing sensitive areas, insulated
conductors use is the best solution, even if a bit more expensive.
Regarding the vegetation removal it is clear that in such areas the mechanical
removal has to be preferred this time.
728
effects on vegetation.
The effects of the conductor or clamp surface field, if the corona discharge
occurs, are:
audible noise;
radio and television interference;
ions and ozone generating.
The electric field intensity of the high voltage electric overhead lines at
ground level or close to it is decreasing by square root of the distance between the
measurement or calculation point and the line axis. In Figure 12.1 the ground level
electric field intensity variation is described as function of the distance to the line
axis of 132 kV, 230 kV, 400 kV and 765 kV of the single circuit type [12.8].
10
8
6
4
2
765kV
400kV
220kV
132kV
0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10
0 10
20
30
40
50
A general idea about the different levels of the electric field intensities,
generated by different sources, may be drawn from Figure 12.2 [12.8].
The typical values of the electric field intensities at ground level are [12.1]:
1 10 kV/m, under a 400 kV single circuit with horizontal configuration;
0.5 1.5 kV/m at 30 m from the above line axis;
0.1 kV/m at 65 m from the above line axis;
5 25 kV/m inside switchyards.
The electric field intensity near the energized conductor surface may reach, at
6 cm, respectively 20 cm distance from the surface, values of hundreds,
respectively tens of kV/m for 400 kV lines, these values being important for live
line men screen suites manufacturers to protect the live working crews properly.
As previously mentioned, the electric field intensity at the conductor and
clamp surface may have negative effects if the corona discharge occurs. The
corona discharge is caused by the air ionization around those energized elements
and the electric breakdown of the air in those areas, if the electric field intensity is
729
high enough to produce them. Different impurities or protrusions (e.g. water drops,
insects, pollution particles and others) on the energized elements cause a local
enhancement of the electric field intensity.
Under transmission lines
Close to transmission lines
Under distribution lines
Close to distribution lines
In homes and buildings
Next to electrical appliances
Next to electric blankets
In some occupations
0.1
Fig. 12.2. Electric field intensities, in V/m, generated by different electric utilities and
appliances. Redrawn with permission from CIGRE W.G.36.01 Electric Power
Transmission and the Environment: Fields, Noise and Interference, Preliminary Report,
1993, Copyright CIGRE 1993. All rights reserved.
During the design stage different possibilities are taken into consideration to
prevent the corona discharge from occurring, but in bad weather conditions, there
is almost impossible to avoid it, from the economical point of view. Anyhow, for
the utilities operating at a nominal voltage less than 200 kV, the corona discharge
is not probable.
730
731
working in the proximity of high voltage electric power utilities is affected. Then,
the scientific interest increased, the scientists began to analyse the eventual
negative effects of the electric field on the people living in the electric power utility
neighbourhood, too. In 1979, the first epidemiological study was published,
suggesting the connection between the childhood leukaemia and the exposure to
the power frequency magnetic field in the residential areas [12.14]. Therefore,
since 1980, the interest in the electric field has diminished, being replaced by huge
scientific works trying to establish the biological impact of the magnetic field.
Nevertheless, between 1996 and 2000, some reports were published stating
that a high attention has to be given to the electric field too, showing a connection
between an increased cancer incidence and the electric field [12.15, 12.16, 12.17,
12.18, 12.19]. But, the epidemiological studies on the residential exposure to the
power frequency field do not offer any support to these statements [12.20]. First of
all, the epidemiological studies showed an increased risk of leukemia for children
living close to areas where there were no high voltage utilities, but distribution
lines, characterized by a high magnetic induction and low electric field intensity
[12.13]. Second, all the epidemiological studies considering both exposures, to the
electric and the magnetic field, showed a risk association (in the case it was found)
with the magnetic field (7 studies performed in Canada, Great Britain, New
Zealand, Norway and USA) [12.20].
The epidemiological studies on professional exposure do not support J. R.
Ashley and R. W. P. Kings statements. These studies could not separate the
electric field from the magnetic field of the electric power utilities in operation.
Practically, to enable someone to study the electric field exposure only, the utilities
would need to be operated without currents, which is impossible for longer periods.
In laboratory conditions, tests on the electric field exposure have been
performed on animals, resulting changes in their daily rhythm and the reduction of
the melatonin hormone at 2 130 kV/m exposures in mice and rats. Their nervous
system has also been affected [12.21]. Chicken exposure to the electric field of
0.1 100 kV/m showed no influence effect [12.22].
Volunteer studies performed between 1974 and 1982 in France, Germany and
the USSR showed no influence of the electric field intensities lower than 20 kV/m
[12.12]. Above this value the lowering of the work exactitude and the latency of
the visual motor responses (32 and 64 kV/m) may be met.
Therefore it may be concluded that the connection between the electric field
exposure and the cancer risk is a pure speculation, already denied by
epidemiological studies and laboratory tests [12.20].
However, the effect of the electric field on peacemakers by electromagnetic
interference has to be emphasized, the persons with such devices have to avoid
undercrossing a high voltage line or visiting a switchyard, or even their close
neighbourhoods, since the maximum allowed electric field intensity for such a
device is of about 1 kV/m. G. S. Boutros, in 1983, and T. W. Dawson, in 2000,
proposed a maximum intensity of 5 6 kV/m, but P. S. Astridges 1993 study
confines it to a value of only 1.5 kV/m [12.20]. The situation is similar for those
people with implanted defibrillators or other implanted biomedical devices. It has
732
to be mentioned that in the case of such a level exceeding there appears a small
probability of device malfunction, but not a danger at all.
733
Other researches developed in the USA between 1971 and 1974 observed
some wheat and soy bean crops under 765 kV electric overhead lines or even
within the fence of a 765 kV switchyard, concluding that the electric field with the
intensity which may be met under these circumstances does not affect the normal
growth [12.24].
There must be also mentioned a recent paper of the Thailand researchers
[12.25] on the influence of 10 and respectively 25 kV/m electric field on bean
sprouts. The results show that after 5 days of exposure the height of the stems and
the length of the roots are effected, the increase being of 11%, respectively 23% if
the electric field intensity is 10 kV/m and 25%, respectively 33% and the electric
field intensity is 25 kV/m.
In conclusion, since the electric field intensity of the high voltage and extra
high voltage lines does not exceed 16 kV/m in the line right of way there are no
risks concerning the partial or total damages of any type of vegetation.
60
50
40
30
D
20
10
31
63
125
Frequency [Hz]
734
Figure 12.4 shows the diagram of the audible noise as function of the
distance from a 400 kV double circuit line axis. It may be seen that the audible
noise decreases with the square root of the distance to the line axis [12.1].
46
45.5
45
Hcond=11.5 m
44.5
44
Hcond=15.5 m
dBA
43.5
43
Hcond=19.5 m
42.5
42
41.5
41
40.5
40
-50 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5
10 15 20 25 30 35
40 45 50
735
5
10
15
20
25
0.1
0.2
1
0.5
Frequency [Mhz]
[MHz]
The interference intensity decreases strongly with the distance from the
source. In Figure 12.6, the radio interference level is described as function of the
distance between the reception point and the source [12.8].
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
15
30
45
Distance [m]
60
75
736
Reception quality
No audible interference
Just perceptible interference
Audible interference, but perfect speech reception
Intelligible speech, but unacceptable music reception
Difficult understandable speech
Unacceptable
Frequency [MHz]
TV ( First band) 47 68
FM (second band) 87 108
TV (third band)
174 230
737
Definitely objectionable
Somewhat objectionable
Perceptible not annoying
Noise just perceptible
(70dB Signal)
Noise imperceptible
10 20 30 40 50
Signal To Noise Ratio [dB]
Fig. 12.7. Reception quality vs. signal/noise ratio. Redrawn with permission from
CIGRE W.G.22.14 High Voltage Overhead Lines Environment Concern, Procedures,
Impacts & Mitigations, Final Draft Report, July 1998, Copyright CIGRE 1998.
All rights reserved.
738
739
product depositions on the human head models placed in under high voltage lines
as compared to the control heads placed far from the line.
In his preliminary report, Prof. D. L. Henshaw showed there are increased
risks for human health due to the indirect action of the corona ions, the main
diseases implied being: childhood leukaemia, lung cancer and skin cancer. Prof. D.
L. Henshaws hypothesis was considered interesting by other researchers, but has
to be confirmed by further studies.
740
vicinity of the high voltage utilities, for both residential and occupational
exposures.
The effects on vegetation resulted to be of no harm at all at the electric
field intensity to be met under the transmission lines and even inside the
switchyards.
The audible noise generated by the high voltage utilities is generally not
hearable if no rain or air humidity, but even in bad weather, the measured
noises showed to be within the allowed range.
Since the AM interference depends directly on the corona discharge, the
level is higher during bad weather. The recommended limits are not
exceeded but accidentally.
The FM interference has an increased level during bad weather too,
especially due to bad contacts and polluted insulators. If the technical
conditions of the utilities are suitable, the interference level is kept,
generally, under the recommended levels.
The ions and ozone generation have not a direct harmful action on the
human health , but the indirect action of the corona ions, as described by
Prof. D. L. Henshaw, may present an increased risk of some disease
development and although Henshaws hypothesis has not been confirmed
by other studies, special measures of the corona discharge mitigation have
to be taken, especially in substations and at the transmission line entries to
those substations which are situated close to residential areas.
Governmental and professional organizations have issued exposure
guidelines for the public and for the electric workers (occupational exposure). The
limits range from the maximum allowed current density through human body of 10
mA/sqm., at which physiologic effects may occur, to lower densities with which no
negative effects could be stated following the performed analysis. Different values
were obtained, mainly because of the different electric resistance to ground
considered in calculations.
For general public exposure, the limit is within the range of 2 10 kV/m, but
mostly 5 kV/m. For occupational exposure, the limit is within the range of
5 30 kV/m, but mostly 10 kV/m.
Table 12.3 shows all the acknowledged recommended limits [12.29].
Table 12.3
Maximum limits of the recommended exposure to electric field of industrial frequency
No
0
1
2
Organization / Year
Country
10
12
21)
741
Table 12.3 (continued)
0
3
4
5
Argentina
Australia
10303)
Austria
10303)
7
8
Belgium
Bulgaria
25
1998
10
21
22
23
27)
88)
Croatia
101)
10
21)
Czech
Republic
101)
10
21)
10
Finland
France
5
5
109)
4
5
105)
5
105)
Germany
10
306)
Hungary
17 2003
20
5
3
52)
105)
5
105)
206)
5
Greece
19
Costa Rica
11 2000
18
5
21)
5
Italy
24 Bundesrat, 1999
National Radiological Protection Board,
1993
American Conference of Governmental
26
Industrial Hygienists, 2000
27 USA, 2002
25
3
25
1004)
62.5
2504)
10
206)
5
204)
5
10
South Korea
10
Switzerland
United
Kingdom
USA
10
25
10
25
USA
12
711
742
743
25
765kV
20
15
10
400kV
220kV
5
132kV
0
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
Distance from centre of line [m]
Fig. 12.8. Magnetic induction diagrams as function of the distance to single circuit lines
of 132, 230, 380 and 765 kV. Redrawn with permission from CIGRE W.G.36.01
Electric Power Transmission and the Environment: Fields, Noise and Interference,
Preliminary Report, 1993, Copyright CIGRE 1993. All rights reserved.
744
A
100
50
B
C
0
-10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0
2 4 6
8 10
10
100
1000
Fig.
12.10.
Magnetic
induction generated by
different electric utilities and
appliances. Redrawn with
permission from CIGRE
W.G.36.01 Electric Power
Transmission
and
the
Environment: Fields, Noise
and
Interference,
Preliminary Report, 1993,
Copyright CIGRE 1993.
All rights reserved.
745
746
studies and the laboratory studies. If, from the epidemiological studies there may
be concluded the relative risk factors for the incidence of different possible
diseases (not only cancer), i.e. higher than 5 strong evidence, 1.5 3 weak
association and less than 1.5 meaningless, from the experimental research could
be evinced the biophysical mechanisms for the systematic initiation or promotion
of cancer and other illnesses [12.20].
Many epidemiological studies and laboratory experiments were performed
and are under way at this time too, in many countries.
There will not be analysed all these studies and experiment results, but the
most comprehensive work in this field, the so named California Report [12.32].
Since 1993 the California Department of Health Sciences has led a project The
California EMF Project. The cost of the project was of over 7 millions US$. The
project included the review of all the studies and experiments performed all over
the world till June 2000 and of course the latest comprehensive study of National
Institute of Environmental Health Sciences of U. S. A. (NIEHS report) published
on May, 4, 1999 [12.33] and other own performed studies. On behalf of the
California Public Utilities Commission three scientists working for California
department of Health (DHS) were asked to review all the mentioned studies. These
scientists had more than 10 years of experience in the field of the electromagnetic
fields and had a very low initial confidence that the electromagnetic fields could
cause epidemiological detectable diseases (less than 12%). The project was
released for public comment on June, 13, 2001. The final draft was already issued
in June, 2002 and took in consideration other studies finalized after June 2001 and
articles brought to attention during the public comment period.
From the epidemiological studies taken into account in California EMF
Project and the other finalized after June 2002, as mentioned by J. Moulder [12.20]
there were enlisted the following relative risk factors (RR) for the residential
exposure:
childhood leukaemia (20 studies) RR = 0.80 2.00 (average 1.25);
childhood brain cancer (9 studies RR = 0.80 1.70(average 1.20);
childhood lymphoma (8 studies) RR = 0.80 4.00 (average 1.80);
all childhood cancer (7 studies) RR = 0.90 1.60 (average 1.30);
adult leukaemia (6 studies) RR = 0.85 1.65 (average 1.15);
adult brain cancer (5 studies) RR = 0.70 1.30 (average 0.95);
all adult cancer (8 studies) RR = 0.70 1.35 (average 1.10).
In the case of the electric occupational exposure:
leukaemia (45 studies) RR = 0.80 2.10 (average 1.20);
brain cancer (35 studies) RR = 0.90 1.90 (average 1.15);
lymphoma (12 studies) RR = 0.90 1.80 (average 1.20);
lung cancer (15 studies) RR = 0.65 1.45 (average1.05);
female breast cancer (10 studies) RR = 0.85 1.50 (average 1.10);
male breast cancer (10 studies) RR = 0.65 2.80 (average 1.25);
all cancer (15 studies) RR = 0.85 1.15 (average 1.05).
Other health conditions as: miscarriage, reproductive and developmental,
amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Alzheimers disease, acute myocardial
747
infarction, suicide and other were considered in California EMF project, too.
Experimental research works on animals showed different results, sometimes,
contradictory. It is clear that fields with an induction of mT levels have negative
effects, but this level was not considered relevant for the present evaluation. There
are still difficulties in choosing the right species to test, but it was a slight
confidence by the mammary tumour and chicken evidence.
The geno-toxicity studies indicated that EMF may be a risk factor at some
stages of cancer, but not an initiator. The signal transduction studies concluded the
blocking of anti-proliferate effect of melatonin at 1.2 T (not replicated in vitro till
now). Also, prolonged exposure to magnetic induction of over 50 T leads to
negative effects on signal transduction [12.32].
The three DHS reviewers conclusions concerning the effects of the
electromagnetic field on health were not identical, each one quoting a different
degree of certainty for the different analysed conditions.
The main conclusions [12.32] are:
to one degree or another, all three of the DHS scientist are inclined to
believe that EMFs can cause some degree of increased risk of childhood
leukaemia, adult brain cancer, Lou Gehrigs Disease and miscarriage;
all three scientists had judgements that were close to the dividing line
between believing and not believing that EMFs cause some degree of
increased risk of suicide;
for adult leukaemia, two scientists are close to the dividing line between
believing or not believing and one was prone to believe that EMFs cause
some degree of increased risk.
But there are some associated findings of the California Project pointed out
by Prof. D. L. Henshaw from the University of Bristol [12.34], which may explain
a possible mechanistic connection between the magnetic field and some disease
increased risk. There were five studies showing the effect of the low frequency
magnetic field induction of 1.2 T on the ability of melatonin to inhibit cancer cell
proliferation [12.35]. At the same time magnetic fields lower than 0.2 T may
reduce the nocturnal production of melatonin in the pineal gland of human
populations [12.34]. Even if this possible mechanistic understanding is not full
confirmed, The absence of clear mechanistic story and the failure of many
experiments with aspects of the EMF mixture to produce any mechanistic effects,
did not pull confidence of causality much below what it was initially, as Prof. D.
L. Henshaw wrote.
But, it is a specific field of occupational exposure, which was not covered by
California Report. This is the live maintenance of the high and extra high voltage
transmission lines and substations. The magnetic induction met is relatively high,
of maximum 100 T, if hot sticks techniques are used and of mT order, as much
as 7.5 mT, if barehanded techniques are used. Records of magnetic induction
annual exposure were performed in the Republic of South Africa [12.36, 12.37]
and in the USA [12.38]. In Republic of South Africa the maximum yearly exposure
748
reached 40.83 mThours, the maximum peak magnetic induction being less than
200 T. If live working barehanded techniques are used, the yearly dosages are
much higher, but no records were available. This is the case of Ukraine, where on
750 kV lines a magnetic induction of 7.5 mT may be achieved at conductor surface
[12.39]. But at 10 20 cm distance the magnetic induction level is ten times lower.
From Kheifets 1999 study [12.20], reanalyzing three previous occupational
exposure studies done on nine company workers from Canada, USA and France,
there may be pointed out that at cumulative exposures of more than
40 Thours/year there is a weak relative risks for brain cancer (RR more than 2)
and a strong one for leukaemia (RR more than 3).
A separate attention has to be given to people using peacemakers or other
implanted similar devices, since the device operation may be affected by the
magnetic induction. The minimum level of interference may be considered at 40 T
as resulted from a 2002 theoretical study of T. W. Dawson and K. Caputa [12.20].
749
In 1989, Dr. Krizak, from Yugoslavia, tested the Lepidum Sativum plants
under 50 Hz magnetic fields of 6, 12 and 18 mT, for a period of four days. The root
lengths were most affected being shortened with 13 42% but the shoot length was
not affected mainly.
Stephen Smith in the U. S. A. conducted some experiments on the effect of
power frequency magnetic induction on vegetation. In 1984 he started to use 0.2 to
2 mT magnetic induction influence on four species: Impatiens Sultani, Begonia,
Forsythia and Ilex Japonica. All species demonstrated decreased root elongation,
the highest being in case of the Forsythia, but Forsythia and Begonia developed
twice roots than the controlled ones.
Later, in 1991, S. Smith started other experiments on Raphanus Sativus, the
common radish. Smith found out that the plants under low power frequency
magnetic field and calcium ion coupling possibility are slower to generate but grew
more rapidly. In 1996, Mark Davis from U. K. checked the Smith results testing the
AC magnetic field on barley (Hordeum Vulgare), radish (Raphanus Sativus) and
mustard plant (Sinapsis Alba).
In the case of radishes and barley the wet root weights, dry leaf weights, dry
whole weights and stem diameter were greater than the control ones. The
researches performed by Amador Valley High School from Plesanton, USA
[12.23], by applying a magnetic induction of 3.9 mT at 60 Hz on the Brassica rapa
plants over a period of 43 days, were concluded that even during the first 15 days
no significant differences were observed, except a lighter colour of the leaves in the
case of the tested plants, during growing cycle (between 15th and 43rd day)
significant differences could be seen as taller tested plants by 10.5%, heavier pod
mass by 208%, larger pod width by 96.46%.
750
The indirect biological effects due to the induced currents through human
body are the same as the ones studied in the case of the electric field. The
physiological limit of 10 mA/sqm. has to be applied here also. But, for a
magnetic field induction of 10 T, for example, the induced current density
is only of 40 A/sqm. [12.10]. A magnetic induction of 2.5 mT may lead
to a current density of 10 mA/sqm., but this induction is not to be usually
encountered either in the residential areas, or in the occupational areas,
with the exception of the live working maintenance of the high voltage
utilities.
Direct perception cannot be met with residential or occupational exposure.
Even in the case of live working maintenance with bare hands technology
the hands may only be placed in the magnetic field with induction
over 5 mT.
There are not magnetic field effects on vegetation at the levels of induction
to be met under the transmission lines or even inside the switchyard fences.
Exposure guidelines have been issued by governmental and professional
organizations both for the public and occupational exposures. In Table 12.4 there
are all the acknowledged recommended limits of induction [12.29]. A huge
divergence of the values for both public and occupational exposures may be
noticed.
Concerning the public exposure, the values are in the range of 1 1,200 T
for long time exposure, but most of them are of 100 T. In case of occupational
exposure the limits for whole body and normal shift working time are in the range
of 100 1,760 T, but most of them are of 500 T. At these levels no harmful
effects of indirect biological or direct perception may occur.
Table 12.4
Maximum limits of the recommended exposure to magnetic field of industrial frequency
No
0
1
2
3
4
Organization / Year
1
European Committee for
Electrotechnical
Standardization, 1995
International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection, 1998
Council of the European Union,
2001
Energy Government Office,
2001
Country
Occupational
exposure
B
j
mAm-2
3
T
4
General public
exposure
B
j
mAm-2
5
1600
101)
Argentina
500
T
6
660
21)
100
21)
100
25
751
Table 12.4 (continued)
12
1
2
National Health and Medical
Research Council, Canberra
Australia
2001
Austrian Standards Institute and
Austria
Austrian Electrotechnical
Association, 2002
Bulgarian National Standards,
Bulgaria
1999
2001
Costa Rica
Croatian Parliament, Ministry
Croatia
of Health, 1999
Czech
2002
Republic
Ministry of Social Affairs and
Finland
Health, 2003
2002
France
13
14
2002
15
16
2003
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
4
500
50004)
250003)
1002)
10004)
10004)
100
20005)
50004)
500
1200
156)
101)
500
21)
100
101)
500
21)
100
100
10
100
100
2007)
80
100
10004)
100
10004)
Germany
Greece
500
50004)
Hungary
Italy
600
5
203)
120
251
25135)
1760
500
100
500
100
100
1200
10
1200
12001)
27101)
20
752
Taking into account the possible direct biological effects, as they result from
the epidemiological and laboratory studies, despite a border value has not been
established yet; the levels have to be decreased drastically. Therefore since 1996
the Swedish Advisory Bodies suggested that the power distribution should avoid
the exposures above 0.2 T. In 1999, the Swiss Government established for the
new utilities the levels of 1 T for public and 100 T for occupational exposures.
In 2000, three Italian regions: Veneto, Emilia-Romagna and Toscana established
for new utilities to be built the maximum level of 0.2 T [12.40]. In 2002, in
Queensland, Australia, the Planning and Environment Court imposed a magnetic
field exposure limit of 0.4 T on a new substation at Tanah Merah [12.40].
In 2001, the World Health Organization endorsed a policy of prudent
avoidance to elevated levels of magnetic induction. This policy was first adopted in
1991, in Australia and was described by the former Chief Justice of the High Court
of Australia, Sir Harry Gibbs as; doing whatever can be done at modest cost
and without undue inconvenience to avoid the possible risk (to health) [12.41]. In
1993, the California Public Utilities Commission in the U.S.A published an order
to define the modest cost at maximum 4% of the cost of the new electric utility.
In the 2002 Final Report called Static and extremely Low-frequency (ELF)
electric and magnetic fields, the International Agency for Research on Cancer
(IARC) concluded that there is a limited evidence in humans for the
carcinogenity of ELF in relation to childhood leukaemia and inadequate evidence
for other disease increasing risk and they placed the power-frequency magnetic
fields in Class 2B as being possible carcinogenic [12.42]. It has to be
mentioned that the same class contains: automobile exhaust, chloroform, coffee,
gasoline and pickled vegetables [12.20].
753
Conductivity
(Sm-1)
3.77
5.98
6.29
1.03
1.03
1.03
Al
Cu
Ag
Fe
Fe
Fe
Relative permeability
r
1
1
1
500
1000
2000
Shielding efficiency
10.49
11.22
11.28
3.67
2.45
1.49
B [ T]
3.38
3.5
3.6
2.98
2.68
2.5
2.69
2.46
Aluminum
2.19
1.82
1.5
Iron
1.36
0.79
0.5
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
d [m]
Fig. 12.11. Magnetic field induction for two different shielding materials, Fe and Al, as
function of the distance bus-bars to shielding plate. Redrawn with permission from
Salinas, E. Passive and active shielding of power - frequency magnetic fields from
secondary substation components, Proc. of IEEE on Power Delivery, 0-7803-6338-8/002000 2000 IEEE.
754
Table 12.6 [12.46] shows the aluminium screening efficiency for different
screen thicknesses between 1 and 12 mm. It is obvious that from the cost/efficiency
point of view a 3 mm thick shield is the optimum solution.
Table 12.6
Shielding efficiency of aluminium plate as functions of thickness
(mm)
S
1
6.1
2
9.6
3
10.5
5
11.1
8
11.3
10
11.4
12
11.5
755
that all compact, vertical and triangular arrangements lead to about the same
reduced magnitude of the magnetic induction.
For 400 kV single circuit lines, with horizontal phase arrangement, increasing
the phase conductor clearance to ground from 8 to 25 m (Fig. 12.15), the magnetic
induction in the line axis decreases from 25 to 5 T; for the vertical compact
arrangement it decreases from 17.5 to 2.5 T and for the triangular phase
arrangement, from 16 to 4 T [12.47].
5
11.6
18.8
8.5
12.8
E [kV/m]
4
3
2
1
0
-20
-10
10
20
30
40
20
30
40
x [m]
a.
10
A
C
Symmetrical arrangement
B [T]
4
2
0
-20
C
A
A
C
Optimum arrangement
-10
10
50
x [m]
b.
Symmetrical arrangement (before)
Calculations
+ + + + + Measurements
Optimum arrangement (after)
Calculations
x x x x x Measurements
Fig. 12.12. Electric (a) and magnetic (b) field values under a 400 kV line before and after the
optimum arrangement. Redrawn with permission from Tsanakas, D. et al. Compact and
optimum phase conductor arrangement for the reduction of electric and magnetic fields of
overhead lines, CIGRE Report 36-103/2000, Copyright CIGRE 2000. All rights reserved.
756
Emax
Bmax
0.73 Emax
1.0
B [T]
E [kV/m]
1.5
0.5
6
4
0.39 Bmax
2
0.0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10
x [m]
a.
10 20 30 40 50
0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0
10 20 30 40
x [m]
b.
50
Conventional line
Compact line
Fig. 12.13. Electric (a.) and magnetic (b.) field under single circuit 150 kV conventional and
compact lines as functions of the horizontal distance x from the line axis. Redrawn with
permission from Tsanakas, D. et al. Compact and optimum phase conductor arrangement
for the reduction of electric and magnetic fields of overhead lines, CIGRE Report
36-103/2000, Copyright CIGRE 2000. All rights reserved.
2.8
6.2
6.2
2.8
Conventional line
Compact line
20
15
Bmax [T]
E max [kV/m]
3
2
10
5
1
0
5
10
15
[m]
a.
20
25
10
15
[m]
20
25
b.
Conventional line
Compact line
Fig. 12.14. Electric: (a.) and magnetic field (b.) maximum values under single circuit 150 kV
conventional and compact lines as functions of the lower conductor to ground distance h.
Redrawn with permission from Tsanakas, D. et al. Compact and optimum phase conductor
arrangement for the reduction of electric and magnetic fields of overhead lines, CIGRE
Report 36-103/2000, Copyright CIGRE 2000. All rights reserved.
757
7
5.8
8.6
8.6
5.8
Conventional line
Compact
vertical line
5.8
10.0
20
7.5
15
Bmax [T]
E max [kV/m]
5.0
2.5
0.0
10
5
0
10
15
h [m]
20
25
30
10
15
h [m]
a.
20
25
30
b.
Conventional line
Vertical compact line
Triangular compact line
Fig. 12.15. Electric: (a.) and magnetic field (b.) maximum values under single circuit 400
kV conventional and compact lines the same conductor distances as for Fig. 12.13, as
functions of the lower conductor to ground distance h. Redrawn with permission from
Tsanakas, D. et al. Compact and optimum phase conductor arrangement for the reduction
of electric and magnetic fields of overhead lines, CIGRE Report 36-103/2000, Copyright
CIGRE 2000. All rights reserved.
The compactness of the single circuit lines leads to great reductions of the
values of the magnetic induction, but lower reductions of the electric field
intensities.
For the 400 kV double circuit lines it was performed a comparison of four
types of lines, the conventional with hexagon phase disposal and the compact with
vertical disposal of the phases, both with symmetrical and with optimum electric
phase arrangements, for different clearances of the lower phases to ground in the
middle of the span. Significant reductions are got for the clearance to ground
increasing (from 8 to 25 m). There have to be specially mentioned the compact
lines with optimum arrangements for which the magnetic induction comes to 1 T
from 17 T and the conventional lines with optimum arrangement, for which the
magnetic induction comes to 3 from 22 (Fig. 12.16) [12.47]. From this figure there
has to be underlined that the best solution for both the normal and the increased
clearance to ground of 8 m is the compact line with the symmetrical arrangement.
758
11.6
18.8
12.8
8.5
5.8
5.8
Conventional line
Compact line
10.0
20
7.5
15
Bmax [T]
Emax [kV/m]
5.0
2.5
0.0
10
15
h [m]
20
25
30
a.
Symmetrical arrangement
Conventional line
Compact line
10
5
0
10
15
h [m]
20
25
30
b.
Optimum arrangement
Conventional line
- - - - - Compact line
Fig. 12.16. Electric (a.) and magnetic field (b.) maximum values under double circuit 400
kV, barrel type conventional and compact lines with the optimum and the symmetrical
arrangement, as functions of the lower conductor to ground distance h. Redrawn with
permission from Tsanakas, D. et al. Compact and optimum phase conductor arrangement
for the reduction of electric and magnetic fields of overhead lines, CIGRE Report 36103/2000, Copyright CIGRE 2000. All rights reserved.
The use of optimal phase arrangement, compact tower design and higher
phase conductor to ground clearances is highly efficient for the electric overhead
lines with routes close to residential areas. The phase conductor to ground
clearance increasing and the optimal phase arrangement are techniques valid both
for the substation bus-bars, too.
Magnetic
field
mitigation in power
lines with passive
and active loops,
CIGRE Report 36107/2002, Copyright
CIGRE 2002. All
rights reserved.
759
sE
dm
dm
B
h
sB
hB
x
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2
0
10
20
30
40
50
hE
dm
10
50
40
A
30
20
D
C
10
0
-100
E
-50
0
50
Transversal distance x [m]
100
Fig. 12.19. Field reduction with different loops and flat configuration (no compensation).
Redrawn with permission from Cruz, P. et al. Magnetic field mitigation in power lines
with passive and active loops, CIGRE Report 36-107/2002, Copyright CIGRE 2002.
All rights reserved.
760
10
6
4
2
0
10
20
30
40
50
80
761
60
40
20
E
0
-100
-50
50
100
Figure 12.22 shows the reduction diagram of all five loop types, if the
magnetic induction at the right of way border is intended (x0=25m from the line
axis).
Figure 12.23 shows the reduction diagrams of all five alternatives if magnetic
induction reduction at long distances from the line axis is followed (x0=).
A previous paper proposing the active loop use to mitigate the magnetic field
induction of 400 kV single circuit lines in Sweden, using the line shield wires and
an optional auxiliary conductor at ground level or above, was not followed by
practical applications because of the difficulties which could arise for the line
operation, mainly from two points of view: first, the shield wires were used for
telecommunications or insulated from ground and second, a complicated automatic
system was needed to generate the external voltage in the amplitude and phase angle
necessary to fit simultaneously the line load for the best mitigation results [12.51].
C
80
60
40
20
0
-100
-50
0
50
100
Transversal distance x [m]
Fig. 12.22. Magnetic field reduction with active loops in the same positions as for the
passive ones and x0=25 m. Redrawn with permission from Cruz, P. et al. Magnetic field
mitigation in power lines with passive and active loops, CIGRE Report 36-107/2002,
Copyright CIGRE 2002. All rights reserved.
762
80
60
A
C
40
20
0
-20
-40
-100
B
D
-50
0
50
Transversal distance x [m]
100
Fig. 12.23. Magnetic field reduction with active loops in the same position as for the
passive ones and x0 . Redrawn with permission from Cruz, P. et al. Magnetic field
mitigation in power lines with passive and active loops, CIGRE Report 36-107/2002,
Copyright CIGRE 2002. All rights reserved.
To choose the best alternative from the fifteen presented above, not the
efficiency itself in point of the magnetic induction reduction has to be applied only,
but also the installation costs, electric power, if the case, and the visible impact on
the environment. To satisfy at maximum all these criteria is practically impossible,
so a compromise solution has to be considered for. Anyway from the five
geometric alternatives, A and B have to be kept only, the others presenting low
efficiencies. From the point of view of the visual impact on the environment, B
alternative is a rough one, implying the erection of 6 m high poles in spans and
therefore has to be, avoided. So, the three electric sub-alternatives (passive,
compensated passive and active) of the geometric A alternative have to be analysed
for the specific locations and for the specific magnetic induction level request.
763
12.5. Conclusions
All the analysed constructive impacts are of big importance for the
environment. The high voltage electric overhead lines contribute massively to the
impact on the environment, the other utilities not having too much importance in
this field. From the visual point of view, the high voltage electric overhead lines
are strongly impacting the environment and solutions to reduce this impact have
been developed, but unfortunately they are not easy to apply to the old lines.
Concerning the impact on land use, since 1980 there have already been taken
into considerations the solutions to minimize the impact of the high voltage electric
overhead lines, such as the use of the multi-circuit towers and compact towers or
poles. New technologies have been adapted for the erection works of the electric
overhead lines to minimize the impact on environment as much as possible. The
access roads have been limited, and the existing roads, of agricultural or forestry
use should be used. The direct impact on ecological systems is not so important in
the case of the wild animals, other than birds, but it is significant in the case of
birds. Therefore special devices have to be used to mitigate such effects. As to the
vegetation, the mechanical removal in the line right of ways is much appreciated,
even if its price is higher than that of the chemical one.
764
From the possible electric field negative impact analysis it resulted that,
normally, there can not occur dangerous effects from the induced currents in
conductive objects, direct perception, direct biological action and action to
vegetation. Regarding the voltages induced in insulated objects, specific grounding
protection has to be used. The audible noise, AM interference and FM interference
are, normally, within the recommendation ranges. To prevent some disease
enhancement due to the indirect biological effect, as per Henshaws theory,
mitigation methods have to be applied in substations and on the entry sections of
high voltage line to substations.
Analysing the possible negative effects of the magnetic field, it was
concluded that the indirect biological effect, the direct perception and the effects on
vegetation have not to be further dealt with.
The high induced voltages on the long metallic structures may be avoided by
using specific protective measures. It remains the problem of the direct biological
effect, which is considered more and more an increased risk factor for the human
health. Adopting low allowable values for the magnetic induction as 0.2 or 0.4 or
even 1 T, economical implications arise. If in the case of new utilities, there are
possibilities to reduce the magnetic induction with lower costs, for the old utilities,
the price is higher.
Chapter references
[12.1]
[12.2]
[12.3]
[12.4]
[12.5]
[12.6]
[12.7]
[12.8]
[12.9]
[12.10]
[12.11]
765
766
[12.35]
[12.36]
[12.37]
[12.38]
[12.39]
[12.40]
[12.41]
[12.42]
[12.43]
[12.44]
[12.45]
[12.46]
[12.47]
[12.48]
[12.49]
[12.50]
[12.51]
Chapter 13
OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES
TECHNICAL DESIGN
13.1. Introduction
At the beginning of the Third Millennium four main restrictions [13.1] are to
be considered by the network specialists relating to the changes in the Overall
Environment in the Power Supply Sector, and are related to:
Changes of the operational environment;
Environmental changes;
Changes business environment;
New technological possibilities.
768
769
utilized. Consequently, the construction of new networks has partly stagnated and
greater emphasis is given to the maintenance and life extension of components.
The access to grid gives rise to short time horizons for planners as well as
situations whereby lines will be operated at the maximum thermal load soon after
construction.
The consequences of environmental events such as wind and ice storms are
more severe than ever before due to the reduction in the network redundancy.
770
771
13.4.1.2. Maintenance
Overhead transmission lines traverses various relief areas such as highaltitude mountains subjected to severe environmental and meteorological
772
conditions for a long distance. Maintenance offices have to react very promptly
when a fault appears. Taking into account the hard access to OHL and
meteorological conditions maintenance people need to know precisely where the
fault is and how long is does take to repair them. In this case, Maintenance
Monitoring System and Emergency Restoration System become mandatory.
From the meteorological data coming from the four weather stations and sent
via remote units to the Regional Control Centre, and using a meteorological model,
the weather conditions existing along the overhead lines are simulated. The
determination of the maximum capacities of the overhead lines must take into
account the thermal restrictions (for both the conductors and the substation
equipment) and the technical conditions of exploitation.
773
From the simulated weather conditions of all the sections of the overhead
line, the dynamic thermal ratings are obtained for each section. Then the thermal
ratings of the substation equipment are calculated. The most restrictive value of all
the sections and the equipment will give the critical span and the dynamic thermal
rating for that transmission line.
With the monitoring of the ambient conditions in the influence zone, by
means of weather stations, in real time allows a more effective use, regarding to the
real capacity, of the existing transmission lines. Real time monitoring allows the
variations in the ambient conditions to be use for the benefit of the utility. It allows
the power system operators to use the actual line data for deciding on less
conservative line loading as compared to the usual practice of compared the
monitored in line current to the book value.
Due to the fact that the long overhead lines are exposed to, and affected by,
the ambient and terrain conditions, it may be possible to obtain a great increase in
power transfer above the design level.
A system using OPtical GroundWire (OPGW), transfer precise information
on the line for maintenance purposes. This system comprises three major functions:
(i) Meteorological and facility monitoring
Meteorological data on wind, icing and snow accretion are directly observed
from power line towers in altitudes where regular observations are not conducted
by the meteorological agencies. Additionally, the spans between towers are
especially long, and the lines cross difficult terrain. Based on these factors, strain in
tower structure, conductor vibration and other conditions of line elements are
monitored to determine if or when maintenance responses are necessary. These
data are accumulated to obtain basic parameters for analysis of the nature of strong
winds and snow accretion, and how the towers, their foundations and conductors
react to these elements.
(ii) Industrial TV monitoring
This is used to observe sites under abnormal weather or fault conditions. It is
performed by transmitting video signals from locations where lines cross difficult
terrain to maintenance offices in charge, and offers visual information on weather
and other circumstances, such as forest fires. It also provides information on
visibility, which is a consideration of helicopter inspection.
(iii) Fault location
The system is equipped with a function that can locate fault sections
accurately and determine the maintenance office to be responsible as well as the
most convenient access route.
Sensor output data for meteorological/facility monitoring and fault section
location are transmitted separately by fibre-optic data transmitters through the
optical fibres within the OPGW to the central processing station, where statistical
data processing and fault location is conducted.
Sensors include directional anemometers, ambient thermometers, rain gages,
snow-accretion samplers, lightning rods, load cells for conductors and ground
774
wires and insulator-inclinometers. The sensors are mounted on the top and on the
arms of the tower structure [13.3].
The fibre-optic data transmitter receives data coming from upstream, attaches
its own data at the end of the received data and relays them downstream.
The system can generate alarms for specific items to be observed by comparing
data for these with predetermined threshold values.
When electric faults occur on a power line, the ground wire current represents
characteristic distribution patterns along the line depending on where the fault
points are located. Using these features, the fault location subsystem measures
ground wire (OPGW) current distribution, and with this estimates the sections
where the faults occurred.
The OPGW current is measured by current sensors mounted on the OPGW at
various points along the line and the data are transmitted through an optical fibre.
The most serious problem with power transmission lines is electric fault
resulting in the cut-off of power transmission. Of the various kinds of power line
maintenance information, this situation requires the most rapid processing.
This system assures the precise location of fault and on-line monitoring of
weather conditions and allows the maintenance offices to be promptly in their
maintenance actions.
Emergency restoration system
Normally, the repairing of damaged elements of OHL is finished in times
measured in days. A series of interruptions of power transfer of some important
400 kV OHLs due to cascading tower collapse, has decided companies to
introduce emergency restoration systems for temporary repairing.
In the world, emergency restoration systems are use in a few countries (USA,
Germany, Norway, Belgium, Romania) successfully.
A restoration system contains the following components:
emergency towers;
module foundations;
insulators;
conductors and earth wire.
The main requirements of the emergency restoration system are:
easy to be stored;
easy to be transported in any places;
easy to be handled;
easy to be erected.
The solutions for the emergency tower are shown above (Fig. 13.2). The
tower is anchored type, made by steel, high tensile type and is stored in trunks.
Three anchors assure the stability of towers before and after conductors stringing.
The tower was designed to be use both as suspension and as tension. Insulation is
composite type, arranged as insulating cross-arm in case of suspension use of tower
and tension string in case of tension use. Foundations are modular type, steel plate
or grillage, designed for good soil characteristics. Prefabricated concrete type
775
foundations can also be used. For anchors are used plates or bars (steel or wood),
embedded into the earth. Depending to the local characteristics of soil, all variants
can be used.
Angle/suspension
chainette
Angle/suspension
four pole
Angle/suspension
horizontal-vee
Delta
horizontal-vee
Single/double circuit
herringbone
H-frame
Single phase
tension
Running angle
The line conductors used could be new ones, or from the damaged area.
During winter and autumn seasons, earth wires are not installed.
The solution to make an emergency restoration of a damaged line is to install
towers, single circuit type, quite parallel to the damaged line [13.4].
13.4.1.3. Refurbishment
If we go to the definition, refurbishment means to maintain and to repair the
line elements to improve to the line the initial characteristics.
There are some phenomena, like Aeolian vibrations, wake-induced
oscillations, galloping of iced conductors, local meteorological overloads or heavy
corrosion, which necessitates special improvements of the OTLs elements.
Some of these aspects are described as follows:
Aeolian vibrations;
Wake-induced oscillation;
Galloping.
Aeolian vibrations
Wind-induced conductor vibrations are unavoidable. They may cause wire
fracture, mainly in the inner layers of the conductor (Fig. 13.3), which often are not
discovered until after several years of service, which in most cases is too late [13.5].
When fatigue failures of overhead line conductor wires occur, which are due
to aeolian vibration, it is generally observed that they only exist:
at the points of maximum bending of the conductor,
at the point of any transverse force to the conductor,
776
777
range of 7 to 18 m/s. Although they may occur with ice on the conductors or when
there is rain, the motions are most often observed when the conductors are bare and
dry. The four main types of wake-induced motion are shown in Figure 13.4 [13.6].
Vertical galloping
Subspan mode
or breathing
Horizontal
galloping
or snaking
Rolling
or twisting
778
In general, there must be some tilt if the wake forces are to cause oscillation,
but the tilt must not be so great as to place the leeward conductor out of the wake.
The use of more spacers, hence shorter average subspan length, increases the
threshold wind velocity.
Observation of normal static strength requirements, coupled with care in
providing flexibility in suspension systems and in spacers, appears to result in a
line design that is tolerant of large wake-induced motion relative to fatigue.
Several basic approaches to suppressing wake-induced oscillations have been
applied in operating lines. There are:
Use of wide subconductor separations (large a/d);
Tilting of bundles to remove leeward conductors from windward conductor
wakes;
Use of bundles configurations that reduce the proportion or subconductors
lying in wakes;
Use of short subspan lengths;
Use of staggered subspan lengths with spacers or with damping spacers.
The effectiveness of a protection scheme can be rated in several ways, such
as threshold wind velocity, maximum amplitudes of motion that are permitted, or
probability that damage will occur.
Galloping
Galloping of iced conductors has been a design and operating problem since
early in last century. The slow progress in galloping studies has resulted from
several things. Galloping is difficult to study in nature because of its sporadic
occurrence, both in time and location. Quantitative data are difficult and sometime
risky to obtain. The varied character of ice deposits from one occasion to another
makes generalization of a few observations chancy [13.6].
Galloping of iced conductors is associated with their altered aerodynamic
characteristics, relative to those of nominally-cylindrical bare conductors (Fig. 13.5.).
Galloping of iced conductors occurs when the aerodynamic lift on the
conductor can be modulated by the periodic motion of the conductors in such a
way that the variations in lift act to augment or at least sustain that periodic motion.
The frequencies involved in galloping are less than a tenth and usually less
than one hundredth of those for aeolian vibration for the same wind velocity.
Conductor amplitudes in galloping often exceed a meter, whereas they rarely
exceed a few millimetres in aeolian vibration. Iced conductors experience a lift
force that varies with the angle of attack of the iced section with respect to the
wind. The lift arises from the asymmetry of the section about the plane containing
the conductor axis and the wind vector (Fig. 13.6.).
The character of the terrain through which a line passes influences the
likehood of galloping. Smooth-contoured terrain with few large obstacles favours
galloping. Broken terrain or a high density of such obstacles as buildings and
coniferous trees seems to prevent galloping by causing turbulence in the winds
flow. Certain localized areas, often near lakes or rivers, show a much higher
incidence of galloping than do nearby regions.
779
Conductor
Ice
Wind
Drag
Wind
Drag
Lift
Lift
Wind
Drag
780
13.4.1.4. Uprating
The quest for reduction in transmission costs, either due to legal and
economical restriction to obtain land to built new lines, or due to the need to make
the investment economically attractive, lead to the realization of research programs
aiming to maximizing the ratio of transmission power to investment cost and
occupied land. The compact lines technology was already full consolidated and is
useful to attain this purpose.
The surge impedance loading (SIL) of a transmission line, for a given voltage
level, depends on the number and cross-sectional area of the subconductors and on
the field intensities at conductor surfaces. It is possible to proceed to a convenient
optimisation of the conductors arrangement, maximizing the fields at the
conductors surfaces thus increasing the transmitted power with the same
conductor area.
The Table 13.1 shows typical SIL values for both designs (traditional
transmission lines and High Surge Impedance Loading-HSIL) [13.7].
Table 13.1
Voltage (kV)
69
138
Traditional transmission
lines (MW)
9-12
40-50
120-130
950-1000
781
130-440
1000-2000
Expanded bundle concept, developed by Chesf and Cepel, is derived from the
HSIL theory, and is a simpler technique to increase transmission lines SIL, by
means of a new positioning of the conductors, usually obtained by a changement of
the hardware fitting of the line (suspension and spacers). Through an adequate
adaptation of the design it is possible to utilize the original structures, with changes
only in the hardware fittings, modifying the bundle geometry. The increase in the
line SIL is smaller than in the full HSIL solution; however the cost/benefit ratio is
quite attractive, which makes this solution applicable to new lines as well as
upgrading of existing ones.
The natural power is inversely proportional to the positive sequence
impedance being given by SIL = U 2 Z1 . Increasing the distance between phase
conductors reduces the magnetic coupling, causing the self impedance ( Z p ) to
decrease for each phase. Since the positive sequence impedance is given by
Z1 = Z p Z m , the reduction in Z p causes a corresponding reduction in Z1 , thus
increasing the line SIL. Using the technique of transmission line compactation the
increase in SIL is obtained in a rather different way. The conventional bundle
geometry is maintained and, placing the phases closer together their respective
coupling is increased, and consequently the mutual impedance ( Z m ). Thus Z1 is
also reduced, due to the sign of Z m in its calculation.
In the complete HSIL concept, the SIL is further increased through the
actuation in both variables, the positive sequence impedance Z1 having a more
pronounced reduction. HSIL concept proposes modifications in the geometry of
phase and bundle arrangements in a full technical break of old practices and mainly
of old concepts. HSIL transmission line concept provides economically attractive
options to upgrade transmission corridors, being its most striking feature the
optimisation and suitability of transmission lines SIL.
The proper insertion of an HSIL transmission line, or the upgrading of
existing ones, introduces global advantages in the systems that refer not only to the
proposed line, but extend far beyond it. There is an effective interaction with other
components in the system, like production of reactive power and reduction in series
reactance, that improves the flow of active power, gives better voltage profiles and
increases system reability.
13.4.1.5. Upgrading
As alternative to the construction of new lines due to the necessity of the
increasing power transfer or as necessity to increase the OTLs characteristics:
maximizing the ratings,
minimizing the Aeolian vibrations,
minimizing galloping effects,
782
783
not very high. It is clear that this conductor type can transfer more power than the
classical ones.
Heat resistant conductors
The expansion of the economy imposed on the Utilities to maximize the
ratings available from existing routes. In response to this, high temperature
aluminium-zirconium-yttrium always was developed with annealing temperatures
substantially higher than the 100 C or so associated with standard hard drawn, ECgrade aluminium (ECAL). The basic, high temperature alloy is referred to as
TAl, with versions having specific enhanced properties designated by a prefix,
such as UTAl. The characteristics are shown in Table 13.2 and Figure 13.7,
together with those of ECAl (HAl) and standard AAAC alloy for comparison.
Table 13.2
Alloy Characteristics.
UTS
MPa
160
160
160
160
225
160
295
Alloy
TAl
UTAl
ZTAl
XTAl
KTAl
ECAl
AAAC
Conductivity
% IACS*
60.0
57.0
60.0
58.0
55.0
61.0
56.5
Max. Cont.
Temp. C
150
200
210
230
150
90
90
Conductivity
50
ZTAI
60
TAI
60
HAI (1350)
61
200
Op
erat
ing
te m
150
per
atu
re
( oC)
90
100
300
(M
th
200
ng
e
r
St
ile
ns
e
T
)
Oa
These high temperature alloys have been incorporated into two special types
of conductors, which have low values of coefficient of thermal expansion (CTE).
Thermal resistant aluminium alloy conductor
Thermal resistant aluminium alloy conductor - TACSR/AS, can be operated
at temperatures of 150 C without loosing the strength capacities. TACSR/AS can
784
transfer at 150 C a maximum power of more than 70% compared to the classical
ones.
Low sag up-rating conductors
a) Invar core conductor
First type of low sag conductor was developed using a core made from an
iron-nickel alloy, known as Invar. Invar is derived from invariable and is
intended to mean that the length is invariable with respect to changes in
temperature. A high strength Invar is used together with TAl, ZTAl, 60% or 58%
conductivity, or XTAl wires in a standard ACSR-form of construction. ZTAl
conductor, Invar reinforced type, abbreviated ZTACIR can transfer at 230 C the
maximum power of double value compared to the classical ones.
XTAl conductor, Invar reinforced, abbreviated XTACIR can transfer the
maximum power of more than double compared to the classical ones. To reduce
the possible limit of the electric resistance, the aluminium layers are smooth type.
The maximum transfer power is in ranges of that mentioned for ZTACIR type, but
the electric resistance at 20 C is 4% lowest. The abbreviation is ZTACEIR.
b) Gap type conductor
The second of these special conductors is known as gap type and consists of
an extra high strength steel core surrounded by stranded layers of a TAl alloy. The
inner alloy layer is made from trapezoidal wires to form a tube. The inner diameter
of this layer is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the steel core, forming a
radial gap, which is filled with high temperature silicone grease (Fig. 13.8.).
Heat-resistant aluminum alloy or
super-resistant aluminum alloy
Gap-filled
with grease
The conductors low value of CTE relies on the fact that the CTE of steel is
half that of aluminium and its alloys. In order to take advantages of this, the
conductor must be tensioned on the steel core alone, requiring special stringing
techniques. Since the TAl layers expand faster than the steel core, then in
principle at all temperatures above the erection temperature, the alloy carries no
mechanical load and the conductor has a CTE equal to that of steel (11.5 x 10-6/C).
Conversely, at all temperatures below the erection temperature, the TAl contracts
faster than the steel core, resulting in the full conductor carrying mechanical load.
The CTE under these conditions is similar to that of a standard ACSR.
In case of using TAl wires type, the conductor is named Gap heat-resistant
aluminium alloy conductor steel reinforced (GTACSR). At 150 C temperatures,
785
the maximum power transfer of GTACSR is more than 70% compared to the
classical ones.
By using ZTAl wires types, the conductor is named Gap super heat-resistant
aluminium alloy conductor steel reinforced (GZTACSR). The GZTACSR can
reach 210 C temperatures and can transfer a maximum power of more than 90%
compared to the classical ones.
It is apparent from the foregoing that the erection of gap type conductor is
more complex than that of ordinary conductors such as AAAC and ACSR,
requiring special procedures and taking longer.
Sags at temperatures close to stringing temperature of low sag up-rating type
conductors
When Invar reinforced aluminium conductor is used for overhead power
lines, as the temperature of the electric conductor rises, the aluminium alloy wire
undergoes thermal expansion and its apportionment of the tensile stress is zero.
Thus, the Invar alloy wire bears the entire tensile load. The temperature at this time
is called the transition point temperature. When the temperature rises above this
transition point temperature, the increasing in sag is extremely small, and a saginhibiting effect is obtained. However, the value of the transition point
temperature is typically around 90 C. Since the OTLs are originally designed for
ACSR at 50 C 60 C, by the time an Invar reinforced aluminium conductor had
reached its critical temperature, the available clearance would already have been
infringed and no advantage could be taken of its low sag, supercritical
performance. In contrast, the critical temperature for a Gap conductor type occurs
at the erection temperature and in consequence it is recommended to use on
existing OTLs. In Figure 13.9 are shown the diagrams of sag vs. temperature of
Low-sag conductors as compared to the ACSR type. It can be seen the transition
point temperature of Invar reinforced aluminium conductor (ZTACIR) type.
Conductor size 240 mm2
Span: 300 m
R
CS
TA
)
Z
G( ZTACIR
R
S
C
A
Sag (m)
12
10
9
7
0
50
100
150 200
Temperature (oC)
250
300
Fig. 13.9. Sag vs. temperature of low-sag conductors compared to ACSR type
(Sumitomo Electric Industries document, issued for 240 mm2 conductor type).
786
A high strength invar is used together with TAl, ZTAl, 60% or 58%
conductivity, or XTAl wires in a standard ACSR-form of construction and can
therefore be installed using standard methods. It is apparent from the foregoing that
the erection of gap type conductor is more complex than that of ordinary conductors
such as AAAC and ACSR, requiring special procedures and taking longer.
One end of the conductor is secured using a two-part compression dead-end
clamp. The conductor is pulled to sag on the steel core alone, the gap allowing the
steel to slide through the alloy tube as the steel stretches under the erection tension.
The steel core is then marked and cut, and the steel part of the second dead-end
joint compressed onto the core. In order to grip the core and hold it under tension
while carrying out these tasks, the alloy layers must be destranded over a length of
about 2 m. After the steel part of the joint has been compressed, the alloy strands
are trimmed to length and put back into lay over the steel joint. The aluminium
sleeve of the second clamp is then slid back over the restranded alloy and
compressed.
Table 13.3
Comparison of Up-rating conductors (Sumitomo Electric Industries document).
Conductor
type
Max.
Operating
Temp. (oC)
Sag ratio at
Max. operating
temp. *
Uprating
work
ACSR
90
GTACSR
150
1.02
1.6
GZTACSR
210
1.13
2.0
ZTACIR
210
1.02
Installation
work
Conventional
method
Special
tensioning
work required
Conventional
method
Material
cost
1
1.3
1.5
3.5
*) ACSR = 1
787
ZTACIR
300
Temp.(oC)
250
Suspension
clamp
200
150
U-Clevis
100
Link
Insulator
50
0
800
Ambient temp.
1000
900
1100
1200
No modification on
the existing tower
Electrical clearance
can be kept
Reinforcement or
modification of the
existing towers is
necessary
Market price
Enough
Thermal resistant
aluminium alloy
conductor
Moderate price
Not enough
Low Sag Up-rating
conductor type
Special stringing
High price
Normal stringing
Very high price
Special material:
- Invar core conductor
ACSR, SLAC/AS
TACSR
ZTACIR, XTACIR
Special design:
- Gap type conductor
GZTACSR, GTACSR
Figure 13.11. shows the principles of selecting the type of conductors for uprating the existing OTLs. A number of different conductors are also available for
use in up-rating and new line applications.
Minimizing the aeolian vibrations
788
789
4 circuits 220 kV
Twin bundle ACSR 240/40
Pn = 2080 MVA
2 circuits 380 kV
Triple bundle ACSR 340/30
Pn = 3300 MVA
2 circuits 110 kV
Single conductor ACSR 560/50
Pn = 400 MVA
Fig. 13.12. Converting a 220 kV four-circuit line into two 380 kV and two 110 kV circuits.
For the implementation of the modification new tower tops with adjusted
insulation, new conductoring and reinforcement of foundations and tower bodies is
necessary.
790
2 circuits 380 kV
Twin bundle ACSR 560/50
Pn = 2735 MVA
2 circuits 380 kV
Quad bundle ACSR 265/35
Pn = 3550 MVA
2 circuits 110 kV
Single conductor ACSR 560/50
Pn = 400 MVA
2 circuits 110 kV
Single conductor ACSR 560/50
Pn = 400 MVA
Fig. 13.13. Converting a 380 kV/110 kV line in view of modified design criteria.
4 circuits 220 kV
Twin bundle ACSR 240/40
Pn = 2080 MVA
2 circuits 380 kV
Triple bundle ACSR 340/30
Pn = 3120 MVA
2 circuits 110 kV
Single conductor ACSR 265/35
Pn = 1040 MVA
Fig. 13.14. Converting a 220 kV four-circuit line into two circuits 380 kV
and two circuits 220 kV.
791
tower members were necessary when implementing the project. As specified above,
the increase of real capacities of existing OHL, determine new loading assumptions
that require the reinforcement of foundations and tower bodies.
Reinforcing lattice steel towers
The leg members, however, can only be reinforced with limited efforts by
implementing additional redundant members to reduce the buckling lengths if the
load increase is less than 10%. This method is additionally limited by the crosssectional slenderness of the profile (ratio of the profile width to thickness), and by
given tensile strength [13.9]. A significant reinforcement can only be achieved by
additional profiles.
Reinforcing the cross-arms is even more difficult. Individual bracings may be
exchanged and additional redundant members to stabilize the lower chords can also
be arranged in this case. Reinforcing upper and lower chords by additional angles
is not advisable since the transfer of the forces into the tower shaft requires
sophisticated nodes. In case of higher loads a complete exchange of the cross-arm
is recommended as a technically approved and economically acceptable solution.
Reinforcing foundation
Sufficient foundation strength can be determined by examining as-built
dimensions, soil investigations and record of foundation testing.
The reinforcement of existing foundation in view of higher tensile forces was
achieved by arranging flat reinforced concrete strips between the two permanently
uplift-loaded footings. The increase of strength capacity results from the deadweight of the concrete strip and the soil while the uplift capacity of the remaining
concrete blocks can be used as long as it remains unaffected by the reinforcing
measures [13.9].
When upgrading lines for higher meteorological loads reduction of risk of
failure, at least one order of magnitude should be aimed because of the
uncertainties in the basic data.
The conversion of existing lines, multi-circuit lines offering favourable
conditions for conversion to higher transmission voltages and capacities, is
economically interesting if supports and foundations can be reinforced with
acceptable effort.
Introducing diaphragms
Diaphragms play an important role for the overall integrity of a steel support
for both structural integrity and for providing necessary support during
construction.
Considering an existing 400 kV transmission line, designed and constructed
45 years ago, a non-linear analysis was conducted to determine if the capacity of
the towers in this line could be upgraded to carry larger and heavier conductor
loads and to devise appropriate practical upgrading schemes for the towers [13.10].
Tower analysed has a square base of about 9.5 m 9.5 m and a height of about 49 m.
The tower self-weight was calculated to be 127 kN. Seven loading conditions were
specified based on the revised wind and incorporating larger conductor loads. In
the non-linear analysis, the vertical loads were applied first up to 100% of their
792
Properties
as groung-wire
Max. diameter
Max. temperature
Short-circuit current
Compatibility with conventional ground-wire
Reliability
Properties
as optical cable
Installation
Accessories
Equipment and tools
Stringing
Jointing and splicing
OPGW
Operation
The properties of OPGW as optical fibre cable are usually designed taking
into consideration of factors such as the number, type and attenuation of optical
fibres, factors that must be determined in accordance with requirements of the
optical system design, such as transmission capacity, wavelength and system
793
interface. Several types of fibre unit (so called OP unit) construction have been
developed and utilized, three of which are shown in the Table 13.4.
Table 13.4
Tight type
(spacer type)
Type
Cross-sectional view of
optical fiber unit
Aluminum tube
Slide type
Aluminum tube
Aluminum tube
Aluminum
spacer
PFA
Glass tape
Optical fibers
Optical fibers
Foamed silicone
rubber
Optical fibers
FRP
Approx. 5 - 6.5 mm
FRP
Approx. 5 - 6.5 mm
Approx. 5 - 6.5 mm
No. Of
fibres
4 - 27
9 - 30
Features
6 - 12
Replacement of optical fibers
is theoretically possible
30
20
10
0
10
15
OPGW diameter (approx. Mm)
20
25
794
1. OPGW
2. Earthpeak
3. C - shapeed support
4. Armor grip suspension
5. Vibration damper
6. Shunt
Fig. 13.17. Suspension set for OPGW. Reprinted from RIBE Catalogue, Jan. 2004 [13.12].
3
5
6
7
10
1
2
11
1. OPGW
2. Earthpeak
3. Tension support
4. Pair of straps
5. Twisted double eye
6. Thimble
Fig. 13.18. Tension set for OPGW for the towers without joint boxes. Reprinted from RIBE
Catalogue, Jan. 2004 [13.12].
795
1
10
11
12
2
12
1. OPGW
2. Earthpeak
3. Tension support
4. Pair of straps
5. Twisted double eye
6. Thimble
7. Helical dead end
8. Protection rods
9. Vibration damper
10. Parallel groove clamp
11. Shunt
12. Fixing clamp
13. Filler bol
Fig. 13.19. Tension set for OPGW for the towers without joint boxes. Reprinted from RIBE
Catalogue, Jan. 2004 [13.12].
796
END FITTINGS
End fittings are made of forged steel or ductile iron
and are galvanized to resist corrosion.
A silicone sealent is placed around the rod and end
fitting interface to prevent moisture entry.
A variety of end fittings are available to meet every
line application: socket, ball, eye, clevis, tongue and y-clevis.
797
FIBERGLASS ROD
The mechanical load bearing element of all composite insulators is a pultruded fiberglass resin rod. Because
a composite insulator is only as strong as its core rod, only those rod materials and manufacturing processes
that can provide high mechanical strength under dynamic loading conditions and stability under elevated
temperatures are selected. Each core rod must meet stringent quality control standards for dielectric strength,
glass content and moisture absorption, which insure long consistent service life.
CORONA RINGS
Corona rings are recommended for applications at 230 kV and above.
Rings are designed to fit over the arc control lip of the insulator end
fitting.
One of the main advantages of the composite insulator is its low weight,
which facilitates transport and erection and also allows lower weight towers. In
high voltage transmission lines the weight of conventional insulators can amount to
almost 20% of the total vertical load on the tower. Composite insulators make
possible a weight reduction of the insulator string up to 90% as compared with
conventional insulators.
The shock sensitivity of the composite structure with reference to electric
arcs or mechanical shocks (bullets) is considerably lower than that of conventional
insulators. Their slender shape also makes the composite insulator a much more
difficult target to hit when aimed at by vandals, an aspect of considerable
importance in countries outside Europe. This property of the composite insulator
makes the design of completely new types of overhead lines possible. As a result of
the low weight, composite insulators can be used as interphase spacers in long
spans which on the one hand can prevent conductor galloping and clashing and on
the other, can enable extremely compact lines to be built. In this case the distance
between conductors can be reduced to the minimum distance determined by the
insulation value of the air. Hence lines can be built on a narrower right-of-way,
making less of an impact of the environment (Fig. 13.22).
798
799
them are gapped type. The suspension type arrester, on the other hand, is a disc
insulator of new concept in whose shed zinc-oxide elements are embedded and airtightly sealed by using inorganic material. Namely, the suspension type arrester
insulator is the one having the conventional function of electric insulation and
mechanical support with additional function of arrester. In the application of this
type of arrester to the line, there are two methods namely; the direct connection of
these insulator units only and the other is the combination of these and ordinary
suspension type insulator units equipped with arcing horns.
The line arrester works as shown in Figure 13.23. [13.14].
Circuit breaker
operation
Trip-out
Insulator flashover
800
Application philosophy (2) is for protection of the route from any shutdown
due to lightning attack. Limited use of this philosophy is made in case of a line of
heavy lightning area or a line that requires high reability.
Application philosophy (3) was for economical trial use to see the economy
effectiveness of the application.
While the needs for quality of electric power are increasing on one hand, the
cost reduction is required on the other hand. Above all, since the installation of the
line arresters is costly, a study is necessary on the effectiveness of their application
including economical factor, for example, partial installation of them, comparison
of reduced tripout rates of line installed with arresters and those without.
801
electric field strength on the conductor surface. For this reason with the minimum
number of subconductor in a phase it is impossible to decrease significantly phase
spacing, because in this case the minimum field strength on the conductor surface
increases. The most effective means of the field strength decreasing in the case of
decreased phase spacing is an increase of the subconductor number and radius. A
decrease of field strength on the conductor surface can be provided by means of
optimisation of phase disposition and subconductor disposition in each phase. In
this case the distance between the outside phases and the width of the area with
increased electric field decreases significantly. Design of tangent towers permitting
to limit an influence of electric field strength at the ground level and radio noise
from overhead lined are considered (Fig. 13.24, 13.25) [13.16].
802
The problem related to magnetic fields in the vicinity of power lines has to an
ever-increasing extent been discussed during the last years. Because of the debate
over possible health effects from magnetic fields the acquisition of new
transmission right-of-way is very difficult. Therefore, two power companies and
the national grid operator in Sweden joined in a project to develop power lines with
low magnetic field emission for areas where other designs are not accepted.
By compaction the magnetic field from power lines will be reduced. The
most efficient reduction is achieved with the split phase configuration (Fig. 13.26)
[13.17]. The practice of overhead line designing and construction has shown that at
the up-to-date state of technique compact lines of high capacity meeting norms
requirements for limiting electric field strength at the ground level near overhead
lines and requirement of electromagnetic compatibility can be created.
803
Chapter references
[13.1]
[13.2]
[13.3]
[13.4]
[13.5]
CIGRE Regional Meeting on Large Regional Networks within the Black Sea
Region and the European Interconnection in the Third Millennium Black Sea
EL-NET 2001, Section 1: Technical Aspects and Large Networks, Keynote
Address, Suceava, Romania, 2001.
Soto, F., Alvira, D., Lattore, J., Wagensberg, M. Increasing the capacity of
overhead lines in the Spanish transmission network: Real time thermal rating,
CIGRE Rep. 22-211, 1998.
Ooura, K., Kanemaru, K., Matsubara, R., Ibuki, S. Application of a power line
maintenance information system using OPGW to the Nishi-Gunma UHV line,
IEEE Trans. on Power Delivery, Vol.10, No.1, January 1995.
Radu, C., Gheorghita, G., Matea, C., Tencu, C., Lazar, M. Emergency
restoration system for overhead transmission lines, CIGRE Regional Meeting on
Large Regional Networks within the Black Sea Region and the European
Interconnection in the Third Millennium Black Sea EL-NET 2001, Suceava,
Romania, 2001.
CIGRE, SC 22. WG 04. Endurance capability of conductors, ELECTRA, No. 124.
804
Chapter 14
DISTRIBUTED GENERATION
806
amounts of dispersed renewable generation (DRG) and Combined Heat and Power
(CHP). For example, the European Union in the White Book on Renewable Energy
Sources (RES), adopted in 1998 [14.3], has set as target 12% of electricity supplied
by renewable generation by 2010. According to the 2000 Directive of the European
Parliament [14.4], this is translated to an electricity production of 22.1% from
renewable energy sources. In Table 14.1 the potential for exploitation of the
different renewable energy sources is presented within the framework of the
European Commissions Strategy and Action Plan. In particular, the progress in
wind power development in recent years is impressive. In autumn 2002, almost
27260 MW of electricity-generating Wind Turbines are operating in fifty countries.
Of these, about 75% (20280 MW) are installed in the European Union, with
leading countries, Germany, Spain and Denmark, covering more than 89% [14.5,
14.6]. More than 35% of total US industrial electric power demand is met by DG.
For industry with stable demand is usually cheaper to generate on-site to avoid
charges for transmission, distribution or billing. The potential for smaller users,
such as housing developments and office buildings to switch to on-site power is
also high. In addition, considerable developments have been recently made on the
technological front, and potentially most challenging in the above respect, is the
development of micro-turbines and novel energy storage technologies. The
increasing penetration of DG has several technical implications and opens
important questions, as to whether the traditional approaches to operation and
development of power systems are still adequate. This is particularly true at the
distribution level, where the bulk of DG is connected.
Table 14.1
Estimated Contributions in the EU in the 2010 Scenario
Type of Energy
Wind
Hydro
Large
Small
Photovoltaics
Biomass
Geothermal
Electric
Heat (incl. Heat
pumps)
Solar Thermal
Collectors
Passive Solar
Others
Share in the EU in
1995
2.5 GW
92 GW
(82.5 GW)
(9.5 GW)
0.03 GWp
44.8 Mtoe
Projected Share by
2010
40 GW
105 GW
(91 GW)
(14 GW)
3 GWp
135 Mtoe
0.5 GW
1.3 GWth
1 GW
5 GWth
6.5 Million m2
100 Million m2
35 Mtoe
1 GW
Distributed generation
807
networks to reach its consumers, while DG, often located closer to loads, requires
less transporting facilities, may reduce network losses and increase service quality.
This indicates that electricity produced by DG may have a higher value than that
produced by central generation. Figure 14.1 provides an overview of DG
dominated electricity networks [14.7].
The vision..
Yesterday
Photovoltaics
power plant
Transmission Network
Storage
Storage
Flow
Control
Storage
Storage
House
Distribution Network
Local CHP plant
Power
quality
device
Wind
power
plant
Factory
Power
quality
device
Commercial
building
Fig. 14.1. Vision of future power networks with increased penetration of DG.
808
key issues that enable efficient operation and long term development of power
systems with considerable penetration of DG are identified. This review is based
on [14.8, 14.9].
MV network or MV busbars of
HV/MV substation
junction
M
Energy
production
meter
Dedicated MV line to DG
installation (formally part of
the network)
Energy
consumption
meter
Coupling
substation
Typical
DG Installation
Coupling point
y Actual point of coupling
to the network
Generator
switch
G
Generators
Table 14.2 shows some of the rules used. An alternative simple approach is
to require that the three-phase short circuit level (fault level) at the point of
Distributed generation
809
Maximum capacity of DG
50 kVA
200-250 kVA
2-3 MVA
8 MVA
6.5-10 MVA
10-40 MVA
Modern distribution systems were designed to accept bulk power from the
transmission network and to distribute it to customers. Thus the flow of both active
power and reactive power was always from the higher to the lower voltage levels
and, even with interconnected distribution systems, the behaviour of the network is
well understood and the procedures for both design and operation long established.
However, with significant penetration of DG the power flows may become
reversed and the distribution network is no longer a passive circuit supplying loads,
but an active system with power flows and voltages determined by the generation,
as well as the loads. In general, the approach adopted has been to ensure that any
DG does not reduce the quality of supply offered to other customers and to
consider the generators as negative load. No real attempt has been made to
consider how the overall performance of a distribution system with a significant
penetration of dispersed generation may be optimised.
810
In some cases, the voltage rise can be limited by reversing the flow of
reactive power either by using an induction generator or by under-exciting a
synchronous machine and operating at leading power factor. This can be effective
on higher voltage overhead circuits, which tend to have a higher X/R ratio.
However, on LV cable distribution circuits the dominant effect is that of the active
power and the network resistance. Only very small DGs may therefore generally be
connected to LV networks.
Some distribution utilities use more sophisticated control of the on-load tap
changers of the distribution transformers including the use of a current signal
compounding the voltage measurement. One technique is that of line drop
compensation and as this relies on an assumed power factor of the load, the
introduction of dispersed generation and the subsequent change in power factor
may lead to incorrect operation if the DG is large compared to the customer load.
Clearly, this technique is entirely appropriate for circuits feeding loads. For welldesigned distribution circuits there is then little scope for DG, when simple
deterministic rules are used.
A simple and straightforward evaluation procedure for determining the
interconnection of DG, adopted by several utilities [14.10], is the following: The
maximum steady-state voltage change (%) at the PCC is evaluated and compared
to the limit, using the following relation:
(% ) 100
Sn
100
cos( k + ) =
cos( k + ) 3%
Sk
R
where S n is the DG rated apparent power, Sk the network short circuit capacity at
the Point of Common Coupling (PCC), k the phase angle of the network
impedance and the phase angle of the DG output current. R = S k S n is the short
circuit ratio at the PCC. The 3% limit imposed (some European national
regulations impose an even more stringent 2% limit) is strictly for two reasons.
First, the grid voltage levels are determined by the aggregate effect of all connected
consumers and generators and hence no single connection could be allocated the
full variation limit. Second, in order to achieve a 10% variation limit at the LV
level, the MV grid voltage should be more narrowly bounded.
This equation is accurate enough for most practical purposes (its error being
less than 0.5% for R 15). Depending on the grid angle k and the power factor
angle of the installation, short-circuit ratios down to 15 or even lower may be
acceptable, as illustrated in fig. 14.3,a. The effect of the DG power factor on the
voltage variations is also important, as it is evident from fig. 14.3,b, drawn for
k 55 (corresponding to ACSR-95 MV overhead network) and DG power
factor varying from 0.95 inductive to 0.95 capacitive.
The above procedure is generally unsuitable for cases of high DG
penetration, multiple DG installations on the same feeder or when generators are
connected to long feeders serving significant consumer load. In such cases, the
Distributed generation
811
resulting voltage variations are caused by the aggregate effect of all generating
facilities and the existing (or planned) network loads. Therefore, load flow
calculations are required, taking into account the actual network configuration and
loads. Four basic load-generation combinations should be examined:
A. Minimum load-Minimum generation;
B. Minimum load-Maximum generation;
C. Maximum load-Minimum generation;
D. Maximum load-Maximum generation.
10.0
2.5
R=20
R=40
0.0
-180 -135 -90 -45
-2.5
45
-5.0
90 135 180
(%)
(% )
5.0
PF=0.95 cap.
PF=1.0
4
3
2
-7.5
-10.0
R=10
7.5
PF=0.95 ind.
k+ (deg)
a.
10
20
30
40
50
Fig. 14.3. a. Voltage change (%) as a function of angle k+, for three values of the short
circuit ratio R; b. (%) as a function of R, for three power factor values of the DG (unity and
0.95 inductive and 0.95 capacitive).
In typical rural overhead grids, case B yields the maximum and case C the
minimum voltage levels. The maximum and minimum voltages, of each node must
be appropriately bounded. This practice significantly limits the connection of DG.
As these conditions may only apply for a few hours per year it is clearly desirable
to consider stochastic voltage limits, as proposed under European standard EN
50160 [14.11]. The application of probabilistic load flow [14.12, 14.13] and
Monte-Carlo simulation techniques provide probabilities of voltage limit violations
and thus leads to objective decision-making. In Figure 14.4 an example of a
probabilistic load flow analysis is provided [14.9] showing the probability density
functions of the voltage at the connection bus of a Wind Park for various levels of
installed capacity. Assuming that the overvoltage limit would be set to 1.05 pu, it
can be clearly seen that deterministic criteria would limit the maximum wind
power penetration to 10%, while a probabilistic approach shows that 20% or even
30% of installed capacity would provide voltage limit violation with a very low
cumulative probability.
This analysis would also allow DG to decide to be constrained off in certain
circumstances to limit voltage rise. Further, many DGs have the ability to operate
at various power factors and may even be able to act as sources/sinks of reactive
power when not generating.
812
50
Prob. (x 10-2)
40
30
b
20
c
d
10
0
0.98
1.02
e
1.06
1.1
1.14
V ( p.u. )
Fig. 14.4. Probability density function of voltage at connection bus for
a) 0%, b) 10%, c) 20%, d) 30% and e) 40% wind power penetration.
For some overhead distribution circuits (i.e. those with high reactance) then
the DGs could contribute to circuit voltage control provided suitable control and
commercial systems were in place. This is further discussed in Section 14.3.2.1.
Future active networks likely to be characterised by interconnected operation and
significant DG integration, will require both new advanced control systems and
accompanying commercial arrangements [14.8]. The overall benefits of this
integration include:
(1) effective operation and use of distribution circuits to accommodate DG;
(2) enhancement of the value of dispersed sources and hence of their
competitiveness.
This could be achieved by a co-ordinated (but most likely distributed) control
of the system through new Distribution Management System (DMS) applications
that need to be developed to allow this integrated operation to be implemented.
Distributed generation
813
where the existing fault levels approach switchgear ratings, the increase in fault
level can be a serious impediment to the connection of DG. The fault level
contribution of a DG may be reduced by introducing some impedance between the
generator of the network by a transformer or a reactor but at the expense of
increased losses and wider voltage variations on the generator. In some countries,
explosive fuse type fault current limiters are used to limit the fault level
contribution of DG plant. Overall however, the technical solutions, other than
replacing switchgear, are limited and uprating of distribution network switchgear
can be extremely expensive. The situation is clearly different for DG connected
through power electronic interfaces, in which case, fault contribution can be more
easily controlled.
MV
3%
4%
5.5 %
7%
2%
3%
4
%
814
Odd harmonics = 3k
Harmonic
Order
voltage
h
(%)
3
5
9
1.5
15
0.3
21
0.2
>21
0.2
Note: THD at LV = 8 %
Even harmonics
Harmonic
Order
voltage
h
(%)
2
2
4
1
6
0.5
8
0.5
10
0.5
12
0.2
>12
0.2
Distributed generation
815
816
Distributed generation
817
schemes increases and their contribution to network security becomes greater. The
areas that need to be considered include transient (first swing stability), as well as
long term dynamic stability and voltage collapse.
818
Fig. 14.5. Frequency variation and thermal production in a large island system during
disconnection of a 20 MW gas turbine for operation without and with wind power and
different types of spinning reserves.
Distributed generation
819
820
Distributed generation
821
822
DG
CB
Shallow
Connection
Deep
Connection
CB
Contribution from
embedded generation
Contribution from
central generation
Distributed generation
823
use of distribution networks are set so as to recover the cost involved in serving
network users and to facilitate competition in the supply and generation of
electricity. This defines the following primary objectives of setting tariffs for the
use of distribution networks:
Revenue generation tariffs should yield adequate revenue to cover
network operating and capital costs but also should encourage justifiable
network investment and discourages over-investment.
Economic efficiency tariffs should reflect cost streams and should send
appropriate economic messages to users of the network avoiding any
temporal and spatial cross-subsidies.
Although these objectives have been well understood and recognised, the
implementation of such a tariff structure was always far from being
straightforward.
Determining an appropriate tariff structure is a complex procedure mainly
due to the mass of technical detail involved, constraints imposed by available
metering technology and the necessity to take into consideration various conflicting
standards of fairness and efficiency in the choice of a tariff structure. One of the
major challenges in tariff setting is establishing the trade off between the various
objectives of tariff making: the ability to reflect accurately cost streams, efficiency
in responding economically to changing demand and supply conditions,
effectiveness in delivering appropriate revenue requirements, stability and
predictability of the revenue and tariffs themselves, simplicity in terms of their
practical implementability. Clearly, the economic efficiency requirement may lead
to tariff complexity requiring a considerable amount of data handling, since strictly
speaking each node in the network would have its own unique set of tariffs for each
hour of the day. Tariffs also should provide a transparent framework in which
regulatory agencies can exercise their statutory responsibilities in terms of
monitoring the revenue, expenditure and performance of the distribution
businesses. The question whether or not to adopt a particular tariff structure is
settled by assessing the cost and benefits of its implementation.
From DG perspective, the fundamental issue is the economic efficiency of
these tariffs and their ability to reflect cost streams imposed by the users. The
impact of DG on the networks (in terms of costs and benefits) is very site specific.
It varies in time and depends on the availability of the primary sources (important
for some forms of renewable generation), size and operational practice of the plant,
proximity of the load, layout and electric characteristics of the local network. It is
not, therefore, surprising that the relatively simplistic tariff structures, with network
charges being averaged across customer groups and various parts of the network do
not appropriately reflect the economic impact of DG on distribution network costs.
This is because these tariffs have no real ability to capture the temporal and spatial
variations of cost streams.
As indicated in the introduction, the impact of DG on network operating and
capital costs is location specific. It is, therefore, essential to recognise that only
location specific tariff regimes are candidates for adequately recognising the
824
Distributed generation
825
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
DG output (kW)
Figure 14.9 depicts the variation of marginal loss coefficients (MLCs) with
DG output at a certain DG bus for a whole day [14.38]. Notice that the MLC at this
node has a negative value for most of the day, indicating that this DG is
826
Fig. 14.9. Daily variation of Marginal Loss Coefficients (MLCs) related to active
injections and payment factors at a DG bus.
Distributed generation
827
14.4. Conclusions
In this chapter the main technical and economic implications from the
connection of DG to the distribution networks is discussed. In particular, the effects
on steady state voltages, on fault level increase, on power quality, protection and
stability are discussed. The technical criteria and limitations are critically reviewed
and where possible alternative approaches proposed. Commercial issues and tariff
structures are discussed next, focusing on connection costs and charges, network
security and service quality and allocation of losses. It is argued that the adoption
of non-discriminatory tariffs would enable efficient operation and long term
development of power systems with significant presence of DG.
Chapter references
[14.1] CIRED, Working Group WG04 Dispersed generation, June 1999.
[14.2] CIGRE, Working Group WG 37-23, Impact of increasing contribution of
dispersed generation on the power system, 1997.
[14.3] *** Communication from the European Commission: Energy for the future,
Renewable sources of energy. White Paper for a community strategy and action
plan, COM (97) 559.
[14.4] *** Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the Promotion
of Electricity from Renewable Energy Sources in the Internal Electricity Market,
European Commission, 2000.
[14.5] Hatziargyriou, N., Zervos, A. Wind power development in Europe, Proceedings
of the IEEE , Vol. 89, Issue 12, pp. 1765 1782., December 2001.
[14.6] *** Wind Directions, Vol. XXII, No. 1, November 2002.
[14.7] Sanchez, M. Cluster Integration RES+DG as European research activities,
presentation at Beta Session 4b: Integration of RES+DG, CIRED, Barcelona,
May 1215, 2003.
[14.8] Strbac, G. (convener) et al. Economic and technical implications from the
connection of dispersed generation to the distribution network, CIGRE Task Force
38.06.03, August 2002.
[14.9] *** Electricity tariffs and embedded renewable generation, Contract JOR3CT98-0201, Final Report, July 2000.
[14.10] Hatziargyriou, N.D., Papathanassiou, S.A. Technical requirements for the
connection of dispersed generation to the grid, IEEE Power Engineering Society
Summer Meeting 2001, Vol. 2, pp. 749 754, Vancouver, Canada, July 15-19,
2001.
828
Distributed generation
829